invitation to bidders · ib - 1 a. general instructions to bidders (note: these instructions to...

FFFAAAIIISSSAAALLLAAABBBAAADDD IIINNNDDDUUUSSSTTTRRRIIIAAALLL EEESSSTTTAAATTTEEE

DDDEEEVVVEEELLLOOOPPPMMMEEENNNTTT &&& MMMAAANNNAAAGGGEEEMMMEEENNNTTT CCCOOOMMMPPPAAANNNYYY

IIINNNFFFRRRAAASSSTTTRRRUUUCCCTTTUUURRREEE DDDEEEVVVEEELLLOOOPPPMMMEEENNNTTT WWWOOORRRKKKSSS FFFOOORRR MMM333 IIINNNDDDUUUSSSTTTRRRIIIAAALLL CCCIIITTTYYY FFFAAAIIISSSAAALLLAAABBBAAADDD

PPPRRROOOJJJEEECCCTTT:::

IIINNNFFFRRRAAASSSTTTRRRUUUCCCTTTUUURRREEE DDDEEEVVVEEELLLOOOPPPMMMEEENNNTTT WWWOOOKKKSSS OOOFFF PPPHHHAAASSSEEE---IIIIII---AAA (((IIINNNCCCLLLUUUDDDIIINNNGGG CCCOOONNNSSSTTTRRRUUUCCCTTTIIIOOONNN OOOFFF UUUGGG,,, OOOHHH TTTAAANNNKKK,,, WWWSSS AAANNNDDD

SSSEEEWWWEEERRRAAAGGGEEE SSSYYYSSSTTTEEEMMM)))

NNNAAAMMMEEE OOOFFF WWWOOORRRKKK:::

AAATTT MMM---333 IIINNNDDDUUUSSSTTTRRRIIIAAALLL CCCIIITTTYYY,,, NNNEEEAAARRR SSSAAAHHHIIIAAANNNWWWAAALLLAAA IIINNNTTTEEERRRCCCHHHAAANNNGGGEEE MMM---333 MMMOOOTTTOOORRRWWWAAAYYY,,, FFFAAAIIISSSAAALLLAAABBBAAADDD

CCCOOONNNTTTRRRAAACCCTTT NNNOOO... FFFIIICCC---000444111

BBBIIIDDDDDDIIINNNGGG DDDOOOCCCUUUMMMEEENNNTTTSSS (((VVVOOOLLLUUUMMMEEE --- III)))

AAUUGGUUSSTT 22001199

CCOONNSSUULLTTAANNTT

CCoonnssuullttiinngg EEnnggiinneeeerriinngg -- AArrcchhiitteeccttss -- PPllaannnneerrss

OOSSMMAANNII && CCOOMMPPAANNYY ((PPVVTT..)) LLTTDD.. OOssmmaannii HHoouussee,, 224455//22--KK,, BBlloocckk--66,, PPEECCHHSS,, KKaarraacchhii

TTeell:: ((9922--2211)) 3344553366000077--0088,, 3344554466554411--4422,, FFaaxx:: ((9922--2211)) 3344553344669911 EE--mmaaiill:: ooccll--kkhhii@@oossmmaannii..ccoomm WWeebb:: wwwwww..oossmmaannii..ccoomm

Issued to M/s: __________________

Date : _________________________

Issued By : _____________________

Osmani & Co. (Pvt.) Ltd. FIEDMC Consulting Engineers – Architects - Planners

Table of Content

FFFAAAIIISSSAAALLLAAABBBAAADDD IIINNNDDDUUUSSSTTTRRRIIIAAALLL EEESSSTTTAAATTTEEE DDDEEEVVVEEELLLOOOPPPMMMEEENNNTTT &&& MMMAAANNNAAAGGGEEEMMMEEENNNTTT CCCOOOMMMPPPAAANNNYYY

TTTAAABBBLLLEEE OOOFFF CCCOOONNNTTTEEENNNTTT

S.

No. Description

VOLUME - I 1. INVITATION TO BIDDERS

2. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

3. BIDDING DATA 4. LETTER OF TECHNICAL BID/ PRICE BID AND APPENDICES TO BID 5. FORMS

• BID SECURITY

• FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY

• FORM OF CONTRACT AGREEMENT

• FORM OF MOBILIZATION ADVANCE GUARANTEE/ BOND

• INDEMNITY BOND FOR SECURED ADVANCE AGAINST MATERIAL BROUGHT AT SITE

6. PART I - GENERAL CONDITIONS

7. PART II - CONDITIONS OF PARTICULAR APPLICATION 8. SPECIFICATIONS - SPECIAL PROVISIONS

VOLUME - II

1. SPECIFICATIONS - TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

2. BIDDING DRAWINGS

IINNVVIITTAATTIIOONN TTOO BBIIDDDDEERRSS

IINNSSTTRRUUCCTTIIOONNSS TTOO BBIIDDDDEERRSS

TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

A. General IB.1 Scope of Bid IB.2 Source of Funds IB.3 Eligible Bidders IB.4 One Bid Per Bidder IB.5 Cost of Bidding IB.6 Site Visit

B. Bidding Documents IB.7 Contents of Bidding Documents IB.8 Clarification of Bidding Documents IB.9 Amendment of Bidding Documents

C. Preparation of Bids IB.10. Language of Bid IB.11 Documents Comprising the Bid IB.12 Bid Prices IB.13 Currencies of Bid and Payment IB.14 Bid Validity IB.15 Bid Security IB.16 Alternate Proposals by Bidder IB.17 Pre-Bid Meeting IB.18 Format and Signing of Bid D. Submission of Bids for Single Stage Two Envelope Bidding Procedure IB.19 Sealing and Marking of Bids IB.20 Deadline for Submission of Bids IB.21 Late Bids IB.22 Modification, Substitution and Withdrawal of Bids E. Bid Opening and Evaluation for Single Stage Two Envelope Bidding

Procedure IB.23 Bid Opening IB.24 Process to be Confidential IB.25 Clarification of Bids IB.26 Examination of Bids and Determination of Responsiveness IB.27 Correction of Errors IB.28 Evaluation and Comparison of Bids F. Award of Contract IB.29 Award IB.30 Employer’s Right to Accept any Bid and to Reject any or all Bids IB.31 Notification of Award IB.32 Performance Security IB.33 Signing of Contract Agreement IB.34 General Performance of the Bidders IB.35 Integrity Pact IB.36 Instructions Not Part of Contract

IB - 1

A. GENERAL

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (Note: These Instructions to Bidders along with Bidding Data Sheet will not be part of the Contract and will cease to have effect once the contract is signed.)

IB.1 Scope of Bid 1.1 The Employer as defined in the Bidding Data Sheet hereinafter called “the Employer”

wishes to receive bids for the construction and completion of works as described in these Bidding Documents, and summarized in the Bidding Data Sheet hereinafter referred to as the “Works”.

1.2 The successful bidder will be expected to complete the Works within the time specified

in Appendix-A to Bid. IB.2 Source of Funds 2.1 The Employer has applied for/received a loan/credit from the source (s) indicated in the

Bidding Data Sheet in various currencies towards the cost of the project specified in the Bidding Data Sheet and it is intended that part of the proceeds of this loan/credit will be applied to eligible payments under the Contract for which these Bidding Documents are issued.

IB.3 Eligible Bidders 3.1 This Invitation for Bids is open to all bidders meeting the following requirements:

a). Duly licensed by the Pakistan Engineering Council (PEC) in the category relevant to the value of the Works.

IB.4 One Bid per Bidder 4.1 Each bidder shall submit only one bid either by himself, or as a partner in a joint venture.

A bidder who participates in more than one bid (other than alternatives pursuant to Clause IB.16) will be disqualified.

IB.5 Cost of Bidding 5.1 The bidders shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of their

respective bids and the Employer will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process.

IB.6 Site Visit 6.1 The bidders are advised to visit and examine the Site of Works and its surroundings and

obtain for themselves on their own responsibility all information that may be necessary for preparing the bid and entering into a contract for construction of the Works. All cost in this respect shall be at the bidder’s own expense.

6.2 The bidders and any of their personnel or agents will be granted permission by the

Employer to enter upon his premises and lands for the purpose of such inspection, but only upon the express condition that the bidders, their personnel and agents, will release and indemnify the Employer, his personnel and agents from and against all liability in respect thereof and will be responsible for death or personal injury, loss of or damage to property and any other loss, damage, costs and expenses incurred as a result of such inspection.

IB - 2

B. BIDDING DOCUMENTS IB.7 Contents of Bidding Documents 7.1 The Bidding Documents, in addition to invitation for bids, are those stated below and

should be read in conjunction with any Addenda issued in accordance with Clause IB.9.

1. Instructions to Bidders 2. Bidding Data Sheet 3. General Conditions of Contract, Part-I (GCC) 4. Particular Conditions of Contract, Part-II (PCC) 5. Specifications - Special Provisions 6. Specifications - Technical Provisions 7. Form of Bid & Appendices to Bid 8. Bill of Quantities (Appendix-D to Bid) 9. Form of Bid Security 10. Form of Contract Agreement 11. Forms of Performance Security and Mobilization Advance Guarantee/Bond and

Form of Indemnity Bond for Secured Advance 12. Drawings

7.2 The bidders are expected to examine carefully the contents of all the above documents.

Failure to comply with the requirements of bid submission will be at the Bidder’s own risk. Pursuant to Clause IB.26, bids which are not substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Documents will be rejected.

IB.8 Clarification of Bidding Documents 8.1 Any prospective bidder requiring any clarification (s) in respect of the Bidding

Documents may notify the Employer in writing at the Employer’s address indicated in the Invitation for Bids. The Employer will respond to any request for clarification which he receives earlier than 28 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids.

Copies of the Employer’s response will be forwarded to all purchasers of the Bidding Documents, including a description of the enquiry but without identifying its source.

IB.9 Amendment of Bidding Documents 9.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids, the Employer may, for any

reason, whether at his own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by a prospective bidder, modify the Bidding Documents by issuing addendum.

9.2 Any addendum thus issued shall be part of the Bidding Documents pursuant to IB 7.1

hereof and shall be communicated in writing to all purchasers of the Bidding Documents. Prospective bidders shall acknowledge receipt of each addendum in writing to the Employer.

9.3 To afford prospective bidders reasonable time in which to take an addendum into

account in preparing their bids, the Employer may extend the deadline for submission of bids in accordance with Clause IB.20.

C. PREPARATION OF BIDS IB.10 Language of Bid 10.1 The bid and all correspondence and documents related to the bid exchanged by a

bidder and the Employer shall be in the bid language stipulated in the Bidding Data Sheet and Particular Conditions of Contract. Supporting documents and printed literature furnished by the bidders may be in any other language provided the same are

IB - 3

accompanied by an accurate translation of the relevant parts in the bid language, in which case, for purposes of evaluation of the bid, the translation in bid language shall prevail.

IB.11 Documents Comprising the Bid 11.1 The Bid shall comprise two envelopes submitted simultaneously, one called the

Technical Bid and the other the Price Bid, containing the documents listed in Bidding Data Sheet under the heading of IB 11.1 A & B respectively. Both envelopes to be enclosed together in an outer single envelope called the Bid. Each bidder shall furnish all the documents as specified in Bidding Data Sheet 11.1 A & B.

11.2 Bids submitted by a JV shall include a copy of the Joint Venture Agreement entered into

by all partners. Alternatively, a Letter of Intent to execute a Joint Venture Agreement in the event of a successful bid shall be signed by all partners and submitted with the bid, together with a copy of the proposed agreement. The role to be played by each partner to be specified therein. Bids submitted by a joint venture of two (2) or more firms shall comply with the following requirements:

a). In case of a successful bid, the Form of JV Agreement shall be signed so as to be

legally binding on all partners within 7 days of the receipt of letter of acceptance failing which the contract and the letter of acceptance shall stand void and redundant.

b). One of the joint venture partners shall be nominated as being in charge; and this

authorization shall be evidenced by submitting a power of attorney signed by legally authorized signatories of all the joint venture partners;

c). The partner-in-charge shall always be duly authorized to deal with the Employer

regarding all matters related with and/or incidental to the execution of Works as per the terms and Conditions of JV Agreement and in this regard to incur any and all liabilities, receive instructions, give binding undertakings and receive payments on behalf of the joint venture;

d). All partners of the joint venture shall at all times and under all circumstances be

liable jointly and severally for the execution of the Contract in accordance with the Contract terms and a statement to this effect shall be included in the authorization mentioned under Sub-Para (b) above as well as in the Form of Bid and in the Form of JV Agreement (in case of a successful bid); and

e). A copy of JV agreement shall be submitted before signing of the Contract, stating

the conditions under which JV will function, its period of duration, the persons authorized to represent and obligate it and which persons will be directly responsible for due performance of the Contract and can give valid receipts on behalf of the joint venture, the proportionate participation of the several firms forming the joint venture, and any other information necessary to permit a full appraisal of its functioning. The JV Agreement shall be made part of the contract. No amendments / modifications whatsoever in the joint venture agreement shall be agreed to between the joint venture partners without prior written consent of the Employer.

11.3 The Bidder shall furnish, as part of the Technical Bid, a Technical Proposal including a

statement of work methods, equipment, personnel, schedule and any other information as stipulated Bidding Forms, in sufficient detail to demonstrate the adequacy of the Bidders’ proposal to meet the work requirements and the completion time referred to in Sub-Clause 1.2 hereof.

IB - 4

IB.12 Bid Prices 12.1 Unless stated otherwise in the Bidding Documents, the Contract shall be for the whole

of the Works as described in IB 1.1 hereof, based on the unit rates and / or prices submitted by the bidder.

12.2 The bidders shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works described in the Bill of

Quantities. Items against which no rate or price is entered by a bidder will not be paid for by the Employer when executed and shall be deemed covered by rates and prices for other items in the Bill of Quantities.

12.3 All duties, taxes and other levies payable by the Contractor under the Contract, or for

any other cause, as on the date 28 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids shall be included in the rates and prices and the total Bid Price submitted by a bidder.

Additional / reduced duties, taxes and levies due to subsequent additions or changes in legislation shall be reimbursed / deducted as per Sub-Clause 70.2 of the General Conditions of Contract Part-I.

12.4 The rates and prices quoted by the bidders are subject to adjustment during the

performance of the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Clause 70 of the Conditions of Contract. The bidders shall furnish the prescribed information for the price adjustment formulae in Appendix C to Bid and shall submit with the bids such other supporting information as required under the said clause.

IB.13 Currencies of Bid and Payment 13.1 The unit rates and the prices shall be quoted by the bidder entirely in Pak rupees. A

bidder expecting to incur expenditures in other currencies for inputs to the Works supplied from outside the Employer’s country (referred to as the “Foreign Currency Requirements”) shall indicate the same in Appendix-B to Bid. The proportion of the Bid Price (excluding Provisional Sums) needed by him for the payment of such Foreign Currency Requirements either (i) entirely in the currency of the Bidder’s home country or, (ii) at the bidder’s option, entirely in Pak rupees provided always that a bidder expecting to incur expenditures in a currency or currencies other than those stated in (i) and (ii) above for a portion of the foreign currency requirements, and wishing to be paid accordingly, shall indicate the respective portions in his bid.

13.2 The rates of exchange to be used by the bidder for currency conversion shall be the TT

& OD Selling Rates published or authorized by the State Bank of Pakistan prevailing on the date 28 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids. For the purpose of payments, the exchange rates used in bid preparation shall apply for the duration of the Contract.

IB.14 Bid Validity 14.1 Bids shall remain valid for the period stipulated in the Bidding Data Sheet after the Date

of Bid Opening specified in Clause IB.23. 14.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original bid validity period, the

Employer may request that the bidders extend the period of validity for a specified additional period which shall in no case be more than the original bid validity period. The request and the responses thereto shall be made in writing. A bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting his Bid Security. A bidder agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to modify his bid, but will be required to extend the validity of his Bid Security for the period of the extension, and in compliance with Clause IB.15 in all respects.

IB - 5

IB.15 Bid Security 15.1 Each bidder shall furnish, as part of his bid, a Bid Security in the amount stipulated in

the Bidding Data Sheet in Pak Rupees or an equivalent amount in a freely convertible currency.

15.2 The Bid Security shall be, at the option of the bidder, in the form of Deposit at Call or a

Bank Guarantee issued by a Scheduled Bank in Pakistan or from a foreign bank duly counter guaranteed by a Scheduled Bank in Pakistan in favor of the Employer valid for a period 28 days beyond the Bid Validity date.

15.3 Any bid not accompanied by an acceptable Bid Security shall be rejected by the

Employer as non-responsive. 15.4 The bid securities of unsuccessful bidders will be returned as promptly as possible, but

not later than 28 days after the expiration of the period of Bid Validity. 15.5 The Bid Security of the successful bidder will be returned when the bidder has furnished

the required Performance Security and signed the Contract Agreement. 15.6 The Bid Security may be forfeited:

a). If the bidder withdraws his bid except as provided in IB 22.1; b). If the bidder does not accept the correction of his Bid Price pursuant to IB 27.2

hereof; or c). In the case of successful bidder, if he fails within the specified time limit to:

i). Furnish the required Performance Security; ii). Sign the Contract Agreement, or iii). Furnish the required JV agreement within 7 days of the receipt of letter of

acceptance. IB.16 Alternate Proposals by Bidder 16.1 Should any bidder consider that he can offer any advantages to the Employer by a

modification to the designs, specifications or other conditions, he may, in addition to his bid to be submitted in strict compliance with the Bidding Documents, submit any Alternate Proposal(s) containing (a) relevant design calculations; (b) technical specifications; (c) proposed construction methodology; and (d) any other relevant details / conditions, provided always that the total sum entered on the Letter of Price Bid shall be that which represents complete compliance with the Bidding Documents. The technical details and financial implication involved are to be submitted in two separate sealed envelopes as to be followed in main bid proposals.

16.2 Alternate Proposal(s), if any, of the lowest evaluated responsive bidder only may be

considered by the Employer as the basis for the award of Contract to such bidder. IB.17 Pre-Bid Meeting 17.1 The Employer may, on his own motion or at the request of any prospective bidder(s),

hold a pre-bid meeting to clarify issues and to answer any questions on matters related to the Bidding Documents. The date, time and venue of pre-bid meeting, if convened, is as stipulated in the Bidding Data Sheet. All prospective bidders or their authorized representatives shall be invited to attend such a pre-bid meeting.

17.2 The bidders are requested to submit questions, if any, in writing so as to reach the

Employer not later than seven (7) days before the proposed pre-bid meeting. 17.3 Minutes of the pre-bid meeting, including the text of the questions raised and the replies

given, will be transmitted without delay to all purchasers of the Bidding Documents. Any

IB - 6

modification of the Bidding Documents listed in IB 7.1 hereof, which may become necessary as a result of the pre-bid meeting shall be made by the Employer exclusively through the issue of an Addendum pursuant to Clause IB.9 and not through the minutes of the pre-bid meeting.

17.4 Absence at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of a bidder. IB.18 Format and Signing of Bid 18.1 Bidders are particularly directed that the amount entered on the Letter of Price Bid shall

be for performing the Contract strictly in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 18.2 All appendices to Bid are to be properly completed and signed. 18.3 No alteration is to be made in the Letters of Price and Technical Bids nor in the

Appendices thereto except in filling up the blanks as directed. If any such alterations be made or if these instructions be not fully complied with, the bid may be rejected.

18.4 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the Technical Bid and one original of the Price

Bid comprising the Bid as described in Bidding Data Sheet against IB 11 and clearly mark it “ORIGINAL - TECHNICAL BID” and “ORIGINAL - PRICE BID”. In addition, the Bidder shall submit two (2) copies of the Bid and clearly mark each of them “COPY.” In the event of any discrepancy between the original and the copies, the original shall prevail.

18.5 The original and all copies of the Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall

be signed by a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder. This authorization shall consist of a written confirmation as specified in the Bidding Data Sheet and shall be attached to the bid. The name and position held by each person signing the authorization must be typed or printed below the signature. All pages of the Bid, except for unamended printed literature, shall be signed or initialed by the person signing the bid.

18.6 Any amendments such as interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid only if

they are signed or initialed by the person signing the bid. 18.7 Bidders shall indicate in the space provided in the Letter of Technical and Price Bids,

their full and proper addresses at which notices may be legally served on them and to which all correspondence in connection with their bids and the Contract is to be sent.

18.8 Bidders should retain a copy of the Bidding Documents as their file copy. D. SUBMISSION OF BIDS FOR SINGLE STAGE TWO ENVELOPE BIDDING

PROCEDURE IB.19 Sealing and Marking of Bids 19.1 Each bidder shall submit his bid as under:

a). ORIGINAL and each copy of the Bid shall be separately sealed and put in separate

envelopes and marked as such. b). The envelopes containing the ORIGINAL and copies will be put in one sealed

envelope and addressed / identified as given in IB 19.2 hereof. c). The technical bid should comprise of documents listed in IB11.1 (A) & the price bid

should comprise of documents listed in IB 11.1 (B) which shall be placed in separate envelopes in accordance with IB 11.1.

IB - 7

19.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall:

a). Be addressed to the Employer at the address provided in the Bidding Data Sheet;

b). Bear the name and identification number of the contract as defined in the Bidding Data Sheet; and

c). Provide a warning not to open before the time and date for bid opening, as specified in the Bidding Data Sheet.

19.3 In addition to the identification required in IB 19.2 hereof, the inner envelope shall

indicate the name and address of the bidder to enable the bid to be returned unopened in case it is declared “late” pursuant to Clause IB.21.

19.4 If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked as above, the Employer will assume no

responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of the Bid. IB.20 Deadline for Submission of Bids 20.1 a). Bids must be received by the Employer at the address specified no later than the

time and date stipulated in the Bidding Data Sheet.

b). Bids with charges payable will not be accepted, nor will arrangements be undertaken to collect the bids from any delivery point other than that specified above. Bidders shall bear all expenses incurred in the preparation and delivery of bids. No claims will be entertained for refund of such expenses.

c). Where delivery of a bid is by mail and the bidder wishes to receive an acknowledgment of receipt of such bid, he shall make a request for such acknowledgment in a separate letter attached to but not included in the sealed bid package.

d). Upon request, acknowledgment of receipt of bids will be provided to those making

delivery in person or by messenger. 20.2 The Employer may, at his discretion, extend the deadline for submission of Bids by

issuing an amendment in accordance with Clause IB.9, in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer and the bidders previously subject to the original deadline will thereafter be subject to the deadline as extended.

IB.21 Late Bids 21.1 a). Any bid received by the Employer after the deadline for submission of bids

prescribed in Clause IB.20 will be returned unopened to such bidder.

b). Delays in the mail, delays of person in transit, or delivery of a bid to the wrong office shall not be accepted as an excuse for failure to deliver a bid at the proper place and time. It shall be the bidder’s responsibility to determine the manner in which timely delivery of his bid will be accomplished either in person, by messenger or by mail.

IB.22 Modification, Substitution and Withdrawal of Bids 22.1 Any bidder may modify, substitute or withdraw his bid after bid submission provided that

the modification, substitution or written notice of withdrawal is received by the Employer prior to the deadline for submission of bids.

22.2 The modification, substitution, or notice for withdrawal of any bid shall be prepared,

sealed, marked and delivered in accordance with the provisions of Clause IB.19 with the

IB - 8

outer and inner envelopes additionally marked “MODIFICATION”, “SUBSTITUTION” or “WITHDRAWAL” as appropriate.

22.3 No bid may be modified by a bidder after the deadline for submission of bids except in

accordance with IB 22.1 and 27.2. 22.4 Withdrawal of a bid during the interval between the deadline for submission of bids and

the expiration of the period of bid validity specified in the Form of Bid may result in forfeiture of the Bid Security in pursuance to Clause IB.15.

E. BID OPENING AND EVALUATION FOR SINGLE STAGE TWO ENVELOPE BIDDING

PROCEDUR IB. 23 Bid Opening 23.1 The Employer will open the Technical Bids in public at the address, date and time

specified in the Bidding Data Sheet in the presence of Bidders’ designated representatives and anyone who choose to attend. The Price Bids will remain unopened and will be held in custody of the Employer until the specified time of their opening.

23.2 First, envelopes marked “WITHDRAWAL” shall be opened and read out and the

envelope with the corresponding bid shall not be opened, but returned to the Bidder. No bid withdrawal shall be permitted unless the corresponding Withdrawal Notice contains a valid authorization to request the withdrawal and is read out at bid opening.

23.3 Second, outer envelopes marked “SUBSTITUTION” shall be opened. The inner

envelopes containing the Substitution Technical Bid and/or Substitution Price Bid shall be exchanged for the corresponding envelopes being substituted, which are to be returned to the Bidder unopened. Only the Substitution Technical Bid, if any, shall be opened, read out, and recorded. Substitution Price Bid will remain unopened in accordance with IB 23.1. No envelope shall be substituted unless the corresponding

Substitution Notice contains a valid authorization to request the substitution and is read out and recorded at bid opening.

23.4 Next, outer envelopes marked “MODIFICATION” shall be opened. No Technical Bid

and/or Price Bid shall be modified unless the corresponding Modification Notice contains a valid authorization to request the modification and is read out and recorded at the opening of Technical Bids. Only the Technical Bids, both Original as well as Modification, are to be opened, read out, and recorded at the opening. Price Bids, both Original and Modification, will remain unopened in accordance with IB 23.1. The Bidders’ representatives who are present shall be requested to sign the record. The omission of a Bidder’s signature on the record shall not invalidate the contents and effect of the record. A copy of the record shall be distributed to all Bidders.

23.5 Other envelopes holding the Technical Bids shall be opened one at a time, and the

following read out and recorded:

a). the name of the Bidder; b). whether there is a modification or substitution; c). the presence of a Bid Security, if required; and d). Any other details as the Employer may consider appropriate.

No Bid shall be rejected at the opening of Technical Bids except for late bids, in accordance with IB 21.1. Only Technical Bids read out and recorded at bid opening, shall be considered for evaluation.

Preliminary Examination of Technical Bids

IB - 9

23.6 a). The Employer shall first examine qualification and experience Data as per Appendix M and N submitted by the Bidder. The technical proposal examination of those bidders only shall be taken in hand who meet the minimum requirement as mentioned in Appendix M and N. Only substantially responsive qualification shall be considered for further evaluation.

b). The Employer shall examine the Technical Bid to confirm that all the documents

have been provided, and to determine the completeness of each document submitted.

23.7 The Employer shall confirm that all the documents and information have been provided

for evaluation of Technical bid as required under these bidding documents. 23.8 At the end of the evaluation of the Technical Bids, the Employer will invite only those

bidders who have submitted substantially responsive Technical Bids and who have been determined as being qualified for award to attend the opening of the Price Bids.

The date, time, and location of the opening of Price Bids will be advised in writing by the Employer. Bidders shall be given reasonable notice for the opening of Price Bids.

23.9 The Employer will notify Bidders in writing who have been rejected on the grounds of

their Technical Bids being substantially non-responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Document and return their Price Bids unopened before inviting others, who are determined as being qualified, to attend the opening of Price Bids.

23.10 The Employer shall conduct the opening of Price Bids of all Bidders who submitted

substantially responsive Technical Bids, publically in the presence of Bidders’ representatives who choose to attend at the address, date and time specified by the Employer. The Bidder’ representatives who are present shall be requested to sign a register evidencing their attendance.

23.11 All envelopes containing Price Bids shall be opened one at a time and the following read

out and recorded:

a). The name of the Bidder; b). Whether there is a modification or substitution; c). The Bid Prices, including any discounts and alternative offers; and d). Any other details as the Employer may consider appropriate.

Only Price Bids and discounts, read out and recorded during the opening of Price Bids shall be considered for evaluation. No Bid shall be rejected at the opening of Price Bids.

23.12 If this Bidding Document allows Bidders to quote separate prices for different contracts,

and the award to a single Bidder of multiple contracts, the methodology to determine the lowest evaluated price of the contract combinations is that which is most economical to the Employer.

IB.24 Process to be Confidential 24.1 Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of bid

and recommendations for the award of a contract shall not be disclosed to bidders or any other person not officially concerned with such process before the announcement of bid evaluation report which shall be done at least ten 10 days prior to issue of Letter of Acceptance. The announcement to all Bidders will include table(s) comprising read out prices, discounted prices, price adjustments made, final evaluated prices and recommendations against all the bids evaluated. Any effort by a bidder to influence the Employer’s processing of bids or award decisions may result in the rejection of such bidder’s bid. Whereas any bidder feeling aggrieved may lodge a written complaint not later than fifteen (15) days after the announcement of the bid evaluation report.

IB - 10

However mere fact of lodging a complaint shall not warrant suspension of the procurement process.

IB.25 Clarification of Bids 25.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation and comparison of bids, the Employer may, at

his discretion, ask any bidder for clarification of his bid, including breakdowns of unit rates. The request for clarification and the response shall be in writing but no change in the price or substance of the bid shall be sought, offered or permitted except as required to confirm the correction of arithmetic errors discovered by the Employer in the evaluation of the bids in accordance with Clause IB.28.

25.2 If a Bidder does not provide clarifications of its Bid by the date and time set in the

Employer’s request for clarification, its bid may be rejected. IB.26 Examination of Bids and Determination of Responsiveness 26.1 Prior to the detailed evaluation of bids, the Employer will determine whether each bid is

substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Documents. 26.2 A substantially responsive bid is one which (i) meets the eligibility criteria; (ii) has been

properly signed; (iii) is accompanied by the required Bid Security; (iv) Includes signed Integrity Pact where required as per clause IB.35 and (v) conforms to all the terms, conditions and specifications of the Bidding Documents, without material deviation or reservation. A material deviation or reservation is one (i) which affect in any substantial way the scope, quality or performance of the Works; (ii) which limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding Documents, the Employer’s rights or the bidder’s obligations under the Contract; (iii) adoption/rectification whereof would affect unfairly the competitive position of other bidders presenting substantially responsive bids. Only substantially responsive bid shall be considered for further evaluation.

26.3 If a bid is not substantially responsive, it may not subsequently be made responsive by

correction or withdrawal of the non-conforming material deviation or reservation. The Employer may, however, seek confirmation/ clarification in writing which shall be responded in writing.

IB.27 Correction of Errors 27.1 Bids determined to be substantially responsive will be checked by the Employer for any

arithmetic errors. Errors will be corrected by the Employer as follows:

a). Where there is a discrepancy between the amounts in figures and in words, the amount in words will govern; and

b). Where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the line item total resulting

from multiplying the unit rate by the quantity, the unit rate as quoted will govern, unless in the opinion of the Employer there is an obviously gross misplacement of the decimal point in the unit rate, in which case the line item total as quoted will govern and the unit rate will be corrected.

27.2 The amount stated in the Letter of Price Bid will be adjusted by the Employer in

accordance with the above procedure for the correction of errors and with the concurrence of the bidder, shall be considered as binding upon the bidder. If the bidder does not accept the corrected Bid Price, his Bid will be rejected, and the Bid Security shall be forfeited in accordance with IB.15.6 (b) hereof.

IB - 11

IB.28 Evaluation and Comparison of Bids 28.1 The Employer will evaluate and compare only the Bids determined to be substantially

responsive in accordance with Clause IB.26. 28.2 In evaluating the Bids, the Employer will determine for each Bid the evaluated Bid Price

by adjusting the Bid Price as follows:

a). Making any correction for errors pursuant to Clause IB.27;

b). Excluding Provisional Sums and the provision, if any, for contingencies in the Summary Bill of Quantities, but including competitively priced Day work; and

c). Making an appropriate adjustment for any other acceptable variation or deviation. 28.3 The estimated effect of the price adjustment provisions of the Conditions of Contract,

applied over the period of execution of the Contract, shall not be taken into account in Bid evaluation.

28.4 If the Bid of the successful bidder is seriously unbalanced in relation to the Employer’s

estimate of the cost of work to be performed under the Contract, the Employer may require the bidder to produce detailed price analyses for any or all items of the Bill of Quantities to demonstrate the internal consistency of those prices with the construction methods and schedule proposed. After evaluation of the price analyses, the Employer may require that the amount of the Performance Security set forth in Clause IB.32 be increased at the expense of the successful bidder to a level sufficient to protect the Employer against financial loss in the event of default of the successful bidder under the Contract.

F. AWARD OF CONTRACT IB.29 Award 29.1 Subject to Clauses IB.30 and IB.34, the Employer will award the Contract to the bidder

whose bid has been determined to be substantially responsive to the Bidding Documents and who has offered the lowest evaluated Bid Price, provided that such bidder has been determined to be eligible in accordance with the provisions of Clause IB.3 and qualify pursuant to IB 29.2.

29.2 The Employer, at any stage of the bid evaluation, having credible reasons for or prima

facie evidence of any defect in bidder’s capacities, may require the bidders to provide information concerning their professional, technical, financial, legal or managerial competence whether already pre-qualified or not:

Provided that such qualification shall only be laid down after recording reasons in writing. They shall form part of the records of that bid evaluation report.

IB.30 Employer’s Right to Accept any Bid and to Reject any or all Bids 30.1 Notwithstanding Clause IB.29, the Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any

Bid, and to annul the bidding process and reject all bids, at any time prior to award of Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected bidders or any obligation except that the grounds for rejection of all bids shall upon request be communicated to any bidder who submitted a bid, without justification of grounds. Rejection of all bids shall be notified to all bidders promptly.

IB - 12

IB.31 Notification of Award 31.1 Prior to expiration of the period of bid validity prescribed by the Employer, the Employer

will notify the successful bidder in writing (“Letter of Acceptance”) that his Bid has been accepted. This letter shall name the sum which the Employer will pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution and completion of the Works by the Contractor as prescribed by the Contract (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract called the “Contract Price”).

31.2 No Negotiation with the bidder having evaluated as lowest responsive or any other

bidder shall be permitted. 31.3 The notification of award and its acceptance by the bidder will constitute the formation of

the Contract, binding the Employer and the bidder till signing of the formal Contract Agreement.

31.4 Upon furnishing by the successful bidder of a Performance Security, the Employer will

promptly notify the other bidders that their Bids have been unsuccessful and return their bid securities.

IB.32 Performance Security 32.1 The successful bidder shall furnish to the Employer a Performance Security in the form

and the amount stipulated in the Bidding Data Sheet and the Conditions of Contract within a period of 28 days after the receipt of Letter of Acceptance.

32.2 Failure of the successful bidder to comply with the requirements of IB.32.1 or IB.33 or

IB.35 shall constitute sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Bid Security.

IB.33 Signing of Contract Agreement 33.1 Within 14 days from the date of furnishing of acceptable Performance Security under the

Conditions of Contract, the Employer will send the successful bidder the Contract Agreement in the form provided in the Bidding Documents, incorporating all agreements between the parties.

33.2 The formal Agreement between the Employer and the successful bidder shall be

executed within 14 days of the receipt of the Contract Agreement by the successful bidder from the Employer.

IB. 34 General Performance of the Bidders

The Employer reserves the right to obtain information regarding performance of the bidders on their previously awarded contracts/works. The Employer may in case of consistent poor performance of any Bidder as reported by the employers of the previously awarded contracts, interalia, reject his bid and/or refer the case to the Pakistan Engineering Council (PEC). Upon such reference, PEC in accordance with its rules, procedures and relevant laws of the land take such action as may be deemed appropriate under the circumstances of the case including black listing of such Bidder and debarring him from participation in future bidding for similar works.

IB.35 Integrity Pact

The Bidder shall sign and stamp the Integrity Pact provided at Appendix-L to Bid in the Bidding Documents for all Federal Government procurement contracts exceeding Rupees ten million. Failure to provide such Integrity Pact shall make the bidder non-responsive.

IB - 13

IB.36 Instructions not Part of Contract

Bids shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with these Instructions which are provided to assist bidders in preparing their bids, and do not constitute part of the Bid or the Contract Documents.

BBIIDDDDIINNGG DDAATTAA SSHHEEEETT

Osmani & Co. (Pvt.) Ltd. Consulting Engineers - Architects - Planners

BIDDING DATA FIEDMC

Biding Data BDS - 1

BIDDING DATA SHEET

The following specific data for the Works to be bidded shall complement, amend, or supplement the provisions in the Instructions to Bidders. Wherever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the Instructions to Bidders. Instructions to Bidders Clause Reference 1.1. Name of the Project & Summary of the Works

The work in this Bid is for:- INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT WOKS OF PHASE-II-A (INCLUDING CONSTRUCTION OF UG, OH TANK, WS AND SEWERAGE SYSTEM) AT M-3 INDUSTRIAL CITY, NEAR SAHIANWALA INTERCHANGE M-3 MOTORWAY, FAISALABAD - CONTRACT NO. FIC-041

1.1. Name and address of the Employer

Chief Executive Officer Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Company 1st

East Canal Road Floor, FCCI Complex

Canal Park, Faisalabad Tel. # (041) 9230231-4 Fax # (041) 9230235

2.1 Name of the Borrower/Source of Financing/Funding Agency

The Employer has arranged funds from its own sources.

2.1 Amount and type of financing Not used 3.1 Eligible Bidders

Bidders should have licence from Pakistan Engineering Council, Valid for the Year 2019 in Category C-2 and above and having specialization codes of CE-01, CE-09 & CE-10.

8.1 Time limit for clarification

The Employer, will respond to any request for clarification which he receives earlier than 07 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids. Copies of the Employer’s response will be forwarded to all purchasers of the Bid Documents, including a description of the enquiry but without identifying its source.

10.1 Bid language

The same language in which the bid documents are written i.e. English language. 11.1 (A) The Bidder shall submit with its Technical Bid the following documents

a). Letter of Technical Bid b). Bid Security (IB.15)


BIDDING DATA FIEDMC

Biding Data BDS - 2

c). Written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Bid to commit the Bidder (IB.18.5)

d). Pending litigation information e). Special Stipulations (as filled by the Employer) (Appendix - A) f). Proposed Construction Schedule (Appendix - E) g). Method of Performing the Work (Appendix - F) h). Availability of Critical Equipment (Appendix - G) i). Construction Camp and Housing Facilities (Appendix - H) j). List of Sub-contractors (as required) (Appendix - I) k). Organization Chart for Supervisory Staff

(Separately for Construction & O & M Period) (Appendix - K) l). Integrity Pact (Appendix - L) m). Financial Competence and Access to financial Resources (appendix - M) n). Past Performance, Current Commitment, Qualification and

Experience (Appendix - N) o). In separate envelope, the documents in support of

Technical Bid as stipulated in Clause IB28.5 of Bidding Data

11.1 (B) The Bidder shall submit with its Price Bid the following documents

a). Letter of Price Bid b). Price Adjustment under Clause 70 (Appendix - C) c). Bill of Quantities (Appendix - D) d). Proposed Payment Yard Stick (Appendix - J)

13.1 Bidders to quote entirely in Pak. Rupees only 13.2 Deleted 14.1 Period of Bid Validity

Ninety (90) days 15.1 Amount of Bid Security

15.1 Each Bidder shall furnish, as part of his bid, a Bid Security in the amount of not less

than Rs. 12,400,000/- (Rupees Twelve Millions Four Hundred Thousand only) in Pak Rupees or an equivalent amount in a freely convertible currency.

15.2 The Bid Security, in favor of the Employer, shall be, at the option of the Bidder, in

the form of Deposit at Call or Pay-order or Demand Draft or Banker’s Cheque or Bank Guarantee on bid security form provided from a Commercial Bank in Pakistan or from a foreign bank duly counter guaranteed by a Scheduled Bank in Pakistan.

16. Alternate Proposals by Bidders

Not Allowed

17.1 Venue, time, and date of the pre-Bid meeting

A Pre-Bid meeting, if required, may be held for which the date, time and place will be provided if agreed by the Employer.

18.4 Number of copies of the Bid to be completed and returned

One original and one copy


BIDDING DATA FIEDMC

Biding Data BDS - 3

19.2 (a) Employer's address for the purpose of Bid submission

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development &

Management Company 1st

East Canal Road Floor, FCCI Complex

Canal Park Faisalabad. Tel. # (041) 9230231-4 Fax # (041) 9230235

19.2 (b) Name and Number of the Contract

INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT WOKS OF PHASE-II-A (INCLUDING CONSTRUCTION OF UG, OH TANK, WS AND SEWERAGE SYSTEM) AT M-3 INDUSTRIAL CITY, NEAR SAHIANWALA INTERCHANGE M-3 MOTORWAY, FAISALABAD - CONTRACT NO. FIC-041

20.1 (a) Deadline for submission of bids

1400 Hours on 26/08/2019

23.1 Venue, time, and date of Bid opening

Opening of Technical Proposals:

Venue : Office of the Chief Executive Officer Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Company 1st

East Canal Road, Canal Park Floor, FCCI Complex

Faisalabad. Tel. # (041) 9230231-4 Fax # (041) 9230235 Time : 1430 Hours Date : 26/08/2019

Opening of Financial Proposals:

Venue : Office of the Chief Executive Officer Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Company 1st

East Canal Road, Canal Park Floor, FCCI Complex

Faisalabad. Tel. # (041) 9230231-4 Fax # (041) 9230235 Time : To be announced after Evaluation of Technical Bids Date : To be announced after Evaluation of Technical Bids


BIDDING DATA FIEDMC

Biding Data BDS - 4

28.5 Evaluation and Comparison of Bids (a) Technical Evaluation

I. Mandatory Requirements

For consideration of the Technical Proposals submitted by the bidders following are the mandatory requirements:

i) License of the bidder with Pakistan Engineering Council, valid for the year

2019 in Category C-2 and above and having specialization codes of CE-01, CE-09 and CE-10.

ii) Bid Security as mentioned in Instruction to Bidders Clause IB-15. iii) Documentary evidence of the year of establishment of the bidding firm. iv) Affidavit on stamp paper of Rs.100/- (duly notarize) that the applicant firm

is not black listed by any procuring Agency, Govt. or Semi-Govt. Departments, Autonomous bodies, international Organization and any Cantonment Boards in Pakistan.

v) List of any present or past litigation of the Bidding Firm with any

Organization, Govt. Dept. or private concern (If “No” write “Nil” and submit an affidavit on Stamp Paper duly notarized in this regard). Litigation statement shall be provided in the following format:-

No. Name of

person/ Entity

Litigation Nature

Name of

Project

Litigation date

Litigation result/ In progress

concluded

If concluded,

mention result

Further evaluation of only those bidders will be done who have cleared all the Mandatory requirements. Bids of applicants who do not have the required PEC License and / or have not provided the above mandatory documents, will be declared as non-responsive, will not be processed further and their financial bids will be returned un-opened.

II. Qualification Requirements

Following documents shall be evaluated (only for those Bidders who clear all mandatory requirements) on the basis of points as detailed below. Financial proposal of only those bidders shall be opened whose Technical Proposal get 50% points in each of the three categories and 70 overall qualifying points out of 100 maximum points. The following information shall be presented in an orderly manner and no extra/ additional information is required so as to facilitate efficient evaluation:-


BIDDING DATA FIEDMC

Biding Data BDS - 5

1. Specific Experience Max. Point 60

a) Completed Works Documents Requirement

The applicant should submit his previous work experience as follows, to be considered for qualification purpose (Only those projects will be considered whose paper work as identified below are, attached):

A) If the applicant has carried-out the work as Main

Contractor: i) Work-order by Employer in the name of

Contractor identifying the Project and Contract amount.

ii) Completion certificate

B) If the applicant has worked as sub-contractor:

i) Works Award in the name of Main Contractor

identifying the contract work and contract amount.

ii) Sub-Contract between main Contractor and the applicant duly identifying the Scope of the Work and sub-contract amount.

iii) Completion certificate from Employer to the main contractor and

iv) Completion certificate from main contractor to sub-contractor

C) If one or more categories of Roads, Water

Supply, Sewerage or Drainage Works have been done by the applicant but not all four categories, the following formula will apply for each project: i) Only one category - 50% of project points. ii) Two categories - 70% of project points iii) Three categories - 80% of project point iv) All four categories - 100% project points

b) Qualification Criteria for Completed Works

A) Overall Works Completed

i) Overall experience of the firm with details of

works completed in past 10 years (02 point for each project of Rs. 500 million or above upto a maximum of 05 such projects). The projects should be presented strictly in the following format and no additional information should be given:

Max. Point. 10


BIDDING DATA FIEDMC

Biding Data BDS - 6

Sr. No.

Name of Work

Employer/ Client

Amount (Rs.)

Date Documents enclosed (Y/N) Start Compl. W-order Completion

1 2 3 4 5

Note: Pro-rata lesser points shall be given in-case of bidders submission details are lesser than the required criteria.

B) Specific Works Completed

i) Experience of Integrated Infrastructure

Development works (i.e. Roads, Water Supply, Sewerage & Storm Water Drainage) completed (06 points for each project of Rs. 500 million or above, in last 10 years upto a maximum of 05 such projects). The projects should be presented strictly in the following format and no additional information should be given:

Sr. No.

Name of Work

Employer/ Client

Amount (Rs.)

Date Documents enclosed (Y/N) Start Compl. W-order Completion

1 2 3 4 5

Note: i) Pro-rata lesser points shall be given in-case of bidders

submission details are smaller than the required criteria.

Max. Point. 30

c) In-Hand Works Documents Requirement

The applicant should submit his work experience as follows, to be considered for qualification purpose (Only those projects will be considered whose paper work as indentified below are, attached):

A) If the applicant has carried-out the work as Main

Contractor: i) Work-order by Employer in the name of

Contractor identifying the Project and Contract amount.

B) If the applicant has worked as sub-contractor:

i) Works Award in the name of Main Contractor

identifying the contract work and contract amount and

ii) Sub-Contract between main Contractor and

the applicant duly identifying the Scope of the Work and sub-contract amount.


BIDDING DATA FIEDMC

Biding Data BDS - 7

C) If one or more categories of Roads, Water Supply, Sewerage or Drainage Works have been done by the applicant but not all four categories, the following formula will apply for each project: i) Only one category - 50% of project points. ii) Two categories - 70% of project points iii) Three categories - 80% of project points iv) All four categories - 100% project points

d) Qualification Criteria for In-Hand Works

A) Experience of Integrated Infrastructure

Development works (i.e. Roads, Water Supply, Sewerage & Storm Water Drainage) in-hand (04 points for each project of Rs. 500 million or above, upto a maximum of 05 such projects). The projects should be presented strictly in the following format and no additional information should be given:

Sr. No.

Name of Work

Employer/ Client

Amount (Rs.)

Date Documents enclosed

(Y/N) Start Compl. W-order/ AL

1 2 3 4 5

Note: i) Pro-rata lesser points shall be given in-case of bidders

submission details are smaller than the required criteria.

Max. Point. 20

2. Proposed Construction Schedule, Organization

Chart, Method Statement, Personnel Capability and Equipment

Max Marks 20

a) Proposed Detailed Construction Schedule (inter-

relating all the sub-heads of the works) Max. Point. 05

b) Detailed Method Statement (inter-relating all the sub-

heads of the works) Max. Point. 02

c) Proposed Project Manager-Professional Engineer

registered BE (Civil) in PEC with at-least 10 years overall experience (detailed CV alongwith PEC certificate, to be submitted)

Max. Point. 05

d) Graduate Engineers Registered with PEC having 05

years or more relevant experience (detailed CV alongwith PEC certificate & confirmatory certificate, to be submitted) - 01 point for each Engineer.

Max. Point. 04

e) List of machinery and equipment available with the

contractor intended to be used on the project with proof of ownership.

Max. Point. 04


BIDDING DATA FIEDMC

Biding Data BDS - 8

3. Documentary evidence of Financial Soundness Max. Point 20

a) Comprehensive Audited Reports from Chartered Accountant of the firm for last 05 years

Max. Point. 05

b) Average Annual Turnover of last 05 years (to be

ascertained from Audited Reports or Income Tax return dully accepted by FBR)

Max. Point. 15

o Less than Rs. 150 million - 0 Points o Rs. 150 million to Rs. 300 million - 03 Points o Rs. 300 million to Rs. 450 million - 06 Points o Rs. 450 million to Rs. 600 million - 09 Points o Rs. 600 million to Rs. 750 million - 12 Points o More than Rs. 750 million - 15 Points

Total of Max. Point 100 Note: FIEDMC may verify the validity of submitted documents from the respective Employers / Clients / Banks/ Auditors, etc. and if it is found out that any fake / misleading / un-verifiable document and / or information has been provided by the Bidder than the subject Bid would be liable for rejection and proceedings for blacklisting of the bidder may be initiated as per Punjab PPRA rules.

(b) Commercial Evaluation

It will be examined in detail whether the Bids comply with the commercial/ contractual conditions of the Bid Documents. It is expected that no major deviation/ stipulation shall be taken by the Bidders.

(c) Evaluated Bid Price

In evaluating the Bids, the Employer will determine for each Bid in addition to the Bid Price, the following factors (adjustments) in the manner and to the extent indicated below to determine the Evaluated Bid Price: (i) Making any correction for errors pursuant to Sub-Clause 27.2 hereof.

(ii) Excluding Provisional Sums, if any, but including priced Daywork (if applicable) (iii) Making an appropriate adjustment for any other acceptable variation or

deviation. 32.1 Standard form and amount of Performance Security acceptable to the Employer

Amount of Performance Security shall be per Clause 10.1 of Part II-Conditions of Particulars Application.

33.1 Signing of Contract Agreement

Within 14 days from the date of furnishing of acceptable Performance Security under the Conditions of Contract, the Employer will send the successful bidder the Contract Agreement in the form provided in the Bid Documents, incorporating all agreements between the parties. The Contract Agreement shall be made on stamp paper of appropriate value and all the costs (stamp duty, stamp paper etc.) shall be borne by the Contractor which shall be deemed to be included in the Bid Price of the Contractor.

LLEETTTTEERR OOFF TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL BBIIDD// PPRRIICCEE BBIIDD AANNDD

AAPPPPEENNDDIICCEESS TTOO BBIIDD

Osmani & Co. (Pvt.) Ltd. Consulting Engineers – Architects – Planners

Letter of Technical Bid

LTB-1

LETTER OF TECHNICAL BID

Date: _______________

Bid Reference No. FIC-041 Chief Executive Officer Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Company 1st

SSUUBBJJEECCTT:: IINNFFRRAASSTTRRUUCCTTUURREE DDEEVVEELLOOPPMMEENNTT WWOOKKSS OOFF PPHHAASSEE--IIII--AA ((IINNCCLLUUDDIINNGG CCOONNSSTTRRUUCCTTIIOONN OOFF UUGG,, OOHH TTAANNKK,, WWSS AANNDD SSEEWWEERRAAGGEE SSYYSSTTEEMM)) AATT MM--33 IINNDDUUSSTTRRIIAALL CCIITTYY,, NNEEAARR SSAAHHIIAANNWWAALLAA IINNTTEERRCCHHAANNGGEE MM--33 MMOOTTOORRWWAAYY,, FFAAIISSAALLAABBAADD -- CCOONNTTRRAACCTT NNOO.. FFIICC--004411..

Floor, FCCI Complex East Canal Road, Canal Park Faisalabad. Tel. # (041) 9230231-4 Fax # (041) 9230235

We, the undersigned, declare that: (a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including

Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (IB) 9; (b) We offer to execute and complete in conformity with the Bidding Documents the

following Works:

(c) Our Bid consisting of the Technical Bid and the Price Bid shall be valid for a period of 90 days from the date fixed for the bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;

(d) As security for due performance of the under takings and obligations of our bid, we submit here with a Bid security, in the amount specified in Bidding Data Sheet, which is valid for 90 days beyond validity of Bid itself.

(e) We are not participating, as a Bidder or as a subcontractor, in more than one bid in this bidding process, other than alternative offers submitted in accordance with IB16 (as applicable).

(f) We agree to permit Employer or its representative to inspect our accounts and records and other documents relating to the bid submission and to have them audited by auditors. This permission is extended for verification of any information provided in our Technical Bid which comprises all documents enclosed herewith in accordance with IB.11.1 of the Bidding Data Sheet.

Name .................................................................................................................................

In the capacity of ................................................................................................................

Signed ................................................................................................................................

Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of ..........................................................

Date.....................................................................................................................................

Address…………………………………………………………………………………………….


Letter of Priced Bid

LPB-1

LETTER OF PRICED BID

Date: _______________

Bid Reference No. FIC-041 Chief Executive Officer Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Company 1st

SSUUBBJJEECCTT:: IINNFFRRAASSTTRRUUCCTTUURREE DDEEVVEELLOOPPMMEENNTT WWOOKKSS OOFF PPHHAASSEE--IIII--AA ((IINNCCLLUUDDIINNGG CCOONNSSTTRRUUCCTTIIOONN OOFF UUGG,, OOHH TTAANNKK,, WWSS AANNDD SSEEWWEERRAAGGEE SSYYSSTTEEMM)) AATT MM--33 IINNDDUUSSTTRRIIAALL CCIITTYY,, NNEEAARR SSAAHHIIAANNWWAALLAA IINNTTEERRCCHHAANNGGEE MM--33 MMOOTTOORRWWAAYY,, FFAAIISSAALLAABBAADD -- CCOONNTTRRAACCTT NNOO.. FFIICC--004411..

Floor, FCCI Complex East Canal Road, Canal Park Faisalabad. Tel. # (041) 9230231-4 Fax # (041) 9230235

We, the undersigned, declare that: (a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including

Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (IB)9; (b) The total price of our Bid, excluding any discounts offered in item (c) below is:

Rs. _______________ (Rupees _______________________________________ only) (c) The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are:

(d) Our Bid shall be valid for a period of 90 days from the date fixed for the bid submission

deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;

(e) If our Bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a performance security in accordance with the Bidding Documents;

(f) We understand that this bid (including all the bid documents), together with your written acceptance thereof included in your notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal contract is prepared and executed and we do hereby declare that the Bid is made without any collusion, comparison of figures or arrangement with any other bidder for the Works.

(g) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other bid that you may receive.

(h) We agree to permit Employer or its representative to inspect our accounts and records and other documents relating to the bid submission and to have them audited by auditors. This permission is extended for verification of any information provided in our Technical Bid which comprises all documents enclosed herewith in accordance with IB.11.1 of the Bidding Data Sheet.

(i) If awarded the contract, the person named below shall act as Contractor’s Representative.


Letter of Priced Bid

LPB-2

Name .................................................................................................................................

In the capacity of ................................................................................................................

Signed ................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................

Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of ..........................................................

Date.....................................................................................................................................

Address…………………………………………………………………………………………….


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BA-1 APPENDIX - A TO BID

SPECIAL STIPULATIONS

Clause

No.

1. Engineer’s Authority to issue Variation in emergency

2.1 2% of the Contract price stated in the Letter of Acceptance.

2. Law applicable 5.1 (b)

The law to be applied is the Law of Islamic Republic of Pakistan

3. Amount of Performance Security 10.1 10% of the Contract Price stated in the Letter of Acceptance in the form of Bank Guarantee

4. Time for Furnishing Programme 14.1 Within 42 days from the date of receipt of Letter of Acceptance.

5. Minimum amount of Third Party Insurance

23.2 Rupees one million (Rs. 1,000,000) per occurrence with number of occurrences unlimited.

6. Time for Commencement 41.1 Within Fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt of Engineers Letter to commence which shall be issued within Fourteen (14) days after signing of Contract Agreement/ issue of the work award.

7. Time for Completion 43.1 24 Months from the date of receipt of Engineer’s Notice to Commence

8. Amount of Liquidated Damages 47.1 0.1% of contract price for each day of delay in completion of works subject to a maximum of 10% of contract price stated in the Letter of Acceptance

9. Defects Liability Period 49.1 364 days from the effective date of Taking Over Certificate.

10. Percentage of Retention Money 60.2 10% of the amount of Interim Payment Certificate.

11. Limit of Retention Money 60.2 5% of Contract Price stated in the Letter of Acceptance.

12. Minimum amount of Interim Payment Certificates (Running Bills)

60.2 Total Contract Price stated in the Letter of Acceptance / (time for completion in months x 3)

13. Time of Payment from delivery of Engineer’s Interim Payment Certificate to the Employer.

60.10 30 days

14. Mobilization Advance (Interest Free) 60.12 15% of Contract Price stated in the Letter of Acceptance against a Bank Guarantee from any Scheduled Bank in Pakistan or a foreign bank duly counter guaranteed by a Scheduled Bank in Pakistan.

Initials of Signatory of Bid ___________________________________________________________


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BB-1 APPENDIX-B TO BID

FOREIGN CURRENCY REQUIREMENTS 1. The Bidder may indicate here in below his requirements of foreign currency (if any), with

reference to various inputs to the Works.

2. Foreign Currency Requirement as percentage of the Bid Price excluding Provisional Sums

_______%. 3. Table of Exchange Rates

Unit of Currency Equivalent in Pak. Rupees Australian Dollar --------------------------

Euro --------------------------

Japanese Yen --------------------------

U.K. Pound --------------------------

U.S. Dollars --------------------------

--------------------------- --------------------------

--------------------------- --------------------------


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BC-1 Appendix-C To Bid

PRICE ADJUSTMENT UNDER CLAUSE 70

OF CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The source of indices and the weightages or coefficients for use in the adjustment formula under Clause 70 shall be as follows:

Cost Element

Description Weightages Applicable index

1 2 3 4 (i) Fixed Portion 0.69 (ii) Local Labour 0.07 Notification by Finance

Department Government of Punjab for price variation adjustment for Faisalabad.

(iii) Cement 0.07 “ “ “ (iv) Reinforcing Steel 0.07 “ “ “ (vi) High Speed Diesel (HSD) 0.10 “ “ “

Total 1.00 Notes: 1) The base cost indices or prices shall be those applying 28 days prior to the bid

submission date and the Bidder should append necessary documents with his bid. Current indices or prices shall be those applying 28 days prior to the last day of the billing period.

2) Any fluctuation in the indices or prices of materials other than those given above shall

not be subject to adjustment of the Contact Price. 3) In all the cases, whatsoever, the weightages for Cement and Steel given hereinabove

shall be adjusted/ re-calculated at the completion of Works keeping in view the varied/ actual quantities of Cement and Steel (02 items) and the adjusted/ re-calculated factors if come 5% or more than 5% shall be used for price adjustment i.e. price adjustment shall be re-calculated/ adjusted; however, in case of re-calculation/ adjustment weightage less than 5% cost impact of the items of Cement and Steel of the Completed Works shall not be admissible for any price adjustment and its effect shall be taken in the fixed portion.


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BD-1A Appendix-D to Bid

BILL OF QUANTITIES

A. Preamble 1. The Bill of Quantities shall be read in conjunction with the Conditions of Contract,

Specifications and Drawings. 2. The quantities given in the Bill of Quantities are estimated and provisional, and are

given to provide a common basis for bidding. The basis of payment will be the actual quantities of work executed and measured by the Contractor and verified by the Engineer and valued at the rates and prices entered in the priced Bill of Quantities, where applicable, and otherwise at such rates and prices as the Engineer may fix as per the Contract.

3. The rates and prices entered in the priced Bill of Quantities shall, except insofar as it is otherwise provided under the Contract include all costs of Contractor’s plant, labour, supervision, materials, execution, insurance, profit, taxes and duties, together with all general risks, liabilities and obligations set out or implied in the Contract. Furthermore all duties, taxes and other levies payable by the Contractor under the Contract, or for any other cause, as on the date 28 days prior to deadline for submission of Bids, shall be included in the rates and prices and the total Bid Price submitted by the Bidder.

4. A rate or price shall be entered against each item in the priced Bill of Quantities, whether quantities are stated or not. The cost of items against which the Contractor will have failed to enter a rate or price shall be deemed to be covered by other rates and prices entered in the Bill of Quantities.

5. The whole cost of complying with the provisions of the Contract shall be included in the items provided in the priced Bill of Quantities, and where no items are provided, the cost shall be deemed to be distributed among the rates and prices entered for the related items of the Works.

6. General directions and description of work and materials are not necessarily repeated nor summarised in the Bill of Quantities. References to the relevant sections of the Bidding Documents shall be made before entering prices against each item in the priced Bill of Quantities.

7. Provisional sums included and so designated in the Bill of Quantities shall be expended in whole or in part at the direction and discretion of the Engineer in accordance with Sub-Clause 58.2 of Part I, General Conditions of Contract.

8. Any arithmetic errors in computations or summations will be corrected by the Employer

as follows:-

a) Where there is a discrepancy between amount in figures and in words, the amount in words will govern; and

b) Where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the total amount derived

from the multiplication of the unit price and the quantity, the unit rate as quoted will govern.

9. Notwithstanding any item of BOQ, NO LEAD or LIFT for supply of any material would

be given to the Contractor. The Contractor is supposed to investigates the source of all materials and ascertain their cost of cartage (including all incidental costs) which would be considered incorporated in the items rates.


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BD - 1B

Appendix-D to Bid

10. Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract Documents, Employer/ Engineer reserves the right to ask for justification/ rate analysis from the contractor of any rate which in the opinion of the Employer/ Engineer is abnormally high or low. Furthermore, the quoted rates, once accepted will be valid only for the quantities mentioned in the BOQ with a variation of ±15%. For any further variation, the Employer/ Engineer reserves the rights to reduce any abnormally high rate quoted by the contractor as per Clause 52.2 of the contract.

11. The ratios of concrete written in the description of BOQ are indicative only. The strength of concrete would be gauged by cylinder strength and not the cube strength. The Contractor should submit the design mix for obtaining the required strength for approval of the Engineer.

12. For all utilities such as water supply, sewerage, storm water drains, etc. falling under newly formed earthen embankment on natural ground and culverts etc. no separate payment for earthwork whether excavation or backfilling of road will be made. Similarly, the balance amount of suitable earthwork after backfilling of utility trenches will be reused in formation of embankment. The Contractor will be paid for “Formation of Embankment” or “Excavation for road works” only once and subsequent earthworks for laying of utilities are deemed to be included in his rates. Besides he should submit his working methodology and schedule for the works to be executed at the time of submission of bid.

13. Backfilling under roads will be compacted at 95% of maximum dry density as per AASHTO T-180 (D) and at other places will be compacted 90% of modified density as per AASHTO.

14. All structural concrete shall be through batching plant.

BILL OF QUANTITIES

GRAND SUMMARY

BOQ-Summary

Page 1 of

Client/ Owner : Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Co.

Name of Project : Infrastructure Development Works For M-3 Industrial City Faisalabad

Name of Work : Infrastructure Development Works (Phase-II-A) for M-3 Industrial City

Location : Faisalabad

Contract No : FIC-041

Sub Head

Description

Amount (Rs.)

A

B

C

D

E

Road Works

RCC Water Course & Storm Water Drainage System

Water Supply Network

Sewerage Collection & Disposal System

Allied Works for Potable Water Storage & Pumping System

Sub Total (Rs.)

PST @ 5% of Sub-Total Amount

(If applicable)

Add: Provisional Sum

(Not to be included in the bid price for evaluation but may be included in the item of days

works such as diversion/ repair of utility services or any other item required to complete the

work not provided in the item of BOQ.) Rs.

30,000,000

Grand Total (Rs.)

Rupees: )

In Word

CONTRACTOR F.I.E.D.M.

BOQ-Sum RoadPage 2 of 75

Client/ Owner : Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Co.Name of Project : Infrastructure Development Works For M-3 Industrial City FaisalabadName of Work : Infrastructure Development Works (Phase-II-A) for M-3 Industrial CityLocation : FaisalabadContract No : FIC-041

Sub Head Description Amount (Rs.)

Sub Head - A - Road Works

A Road Works

Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________)

________________ ______________________CONTRACTOR F.I.E.D.M.C.

BILL OF QUANTITIES

Summary of Road Works

Total - Sub-Head (A) (Rs.)

In Word

BOQ - Road WorkPage 3 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - A - Road Works

1 Compaction of Natural Ground 1,045,492 Sft

2 Earthwork excavation in open cutting all depth forstorm water channels, drains, sullage drains inopen areas, roads, streets, lanes, including underpinning of walls and shoring to protect existingworks, shuttering and timbering the trenches,dressed to designed level and dimensions,trimming, removal of surface water from trenches,back filling and surplus excavated materialdisposed of and dressed including all lead & lift

15,738 %0Cft.

3 Borrowpit excavation undressed lead upto 100 ft(30 metre).

1,810,304 %0Cft

4 Earthowrk in ordinary soil for embankments leadupto 100 ft. (30 m), including ploughing andmixing with blade grade or disc harrow or othersuitable equipment, and compaction bymechanical means at optimum moisture contentand dressing to designed section, complete in allrespects:-i) 95% to 100% maximum modified AASHO drydensity

1,810,304 %0Cft

5 Sub Grade preparation in earth cut 224,491 Sft

6 Providing and laying sub-base course of stoneproductditto of approved quality and grade, includingplacing, mixing, spreading and compaction of sub-base material to required depth, camber, grade toachieve 100% maximum modified AASHO drydensity, including carriage of all material.Pit run or bed run gravel. (For Improved Sub-Grade)

11,225 Cft

7 Providing and laying sub-base course of stoneproductditto of approved quality and grade, includingplacing, mixing, spreading and compaction of sub-base material to required depth, camber, grade toachieve 100% maximum modified AASHO drydensity, including carriage of all material.Crushed stone aggregate.

484,572 Cft

BILL OF QUANTITIES

Sr. No. Particulars Qty. Unit Amount

(Rs.)Rate


In Figure In WordsSr. No. Particulars Qty. Unit Amount

(Rs.)Rate

8 Providing and laying base course of crushedstone aggregate of approved quality and grade,and supply and spreading of stone screening,including placing, mixing, spreading andcompaction of base course material to requireddepth, camber and grade to achieve 100%maximum modified AASHO dry density, includingcarriage of all materials to site of work exceptgravel and. aggregate

356,645 Cft

9 Providing and laying bituminous priming coat,using 10 lbs. kerosene oil and 10 lbs. binder per100 Sft. or 0.5 Kg kerosene and 0.5 Kg binder persquare metre

387,658 Sft

10 Providing and laying plant premixed bituminouscarpet, ncluding compaction and finishing torequired camber, grade and density 4.5%Bitumen (2" Thick)

387,658 Sft

11 Providing surface treatment to roads, includingsupply of bitumen and bajri/crushed stoneaggregate of approved quality, including cleaningof road surface, heating and spraying bitumen,spreading bajri and rolling with road roller(including its operation cost, fuel and hirecharges, etc.) etc. complete including carriage ofall materials to site of work except bajjri/crushedstone aggregate.Three Coats

193,829 Sft

12 Cement concrete plain Ratio 1:4:8 includingplacing, compacting, finishing and curingcomplete (including screening and washing ofstone aggregate.

53,303 Cft

13 Providing and erection at site of work:-Sign post of M.S. plate 1/8" thick (3 mm)b) Warning/Direction/Informatory.

267 Each

14 Traffic Road Sign category - 3 (a) 89 Each

15 Traffic Road Sign category - 3 (b) 89 Each

16 Painting Traffic Lanes 5" wide (125mm), (1.5 mmthick), with thermoplastic (TP) Paint includingGlass Beads, complete in al respect

27,524 Sft

17 Reflective Aluminium pavement stud (Raisedprofile type single)

1,641 Each

18 Reflective Aluminium pavement stud (Raisedprofile type double)

164 Each



(Rs.)Rate

Pipe Sleeve19 Earthwork excavation in open cutting for storm

water channels, drains, sullage drains in openareas, roads, streets, lanes, including underpinning of walls and shoring to protect existingworks, shuttering and timbering the trenches,dressed to designed level and dimensions,trimming, removal of surface water from trenches,back filling and surplus excavated materialdisposed of and dressed upto any lead:- (InOrdinary Soil)

14,111 Cft

20 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):- Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / stripfoundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiring formwork (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete in allrespects:-(Nominal mix 1:2:4, having minimum compressivestrength cylindrical of 3000 Psi @ 28 days).(For Base Slab of Chamber).

3,022 Cft

21 Granular Back Fill. 1,634 Cft

22 Precast reinforced cement concrete andprestressed reinforced cement concrete incolumns, beams, lintels, stair cases, shelves, etc.(nominal mix 1:2:4, having minimum compressivecylindrical strength of 3000 PSI @ 28 days). (ForRCC Precast top slab of Drain)

49 Cft

23 Precast kerb block in concrete class A-1 of size450 x 300 x 150mm (18"x12"x6") includingconcrete bedding & haunching.

32,305 Rft

24 Precast kerb block in concrete class A-1 of size300 x 300 x 150mm (12"x12"x6") includingconcrete bedding & haunching.

48,457 Rft

25 Supplying high density double wall PE corrugatedpipe and fittings (end cap, elbow, tee etc,.) SN-08 for sleeves with and including the cost oflaying in proper position, jointing andcommissioning complete all as per drawing anddirection of the Engineer.a) 200 mm Dia Pipe 73 Rftb) 250 mm Dia Pipe 1,016 Rft

26 Preparing surface & painting of choloronitedrubber based paint on kerb blocks (as perspecification and approved color).

75,109 Sft.



(Rs.)Rate

27 Providing and fixing interlocking concrete paversof approved colour & shape in approved pattern,over prepared base of required grade &compaction with and including the cost of 2" thicklayer of river/canal bed sand cusion, placing thepavers in position, filling the joints with sand i/ccartage to site of work. (Cost of sand cushion &preparation of base deemed to be included in therates).a) For Foot path size 200mm x 120mm x 60 mm

161,524 Sft

28 Provide, lay, fill & compaction chenab sand inspecified area as filter layer / cushion layer wherewater table is high as designated by the Engineer.Compacted depth will be considered for payment.

1,205,373 Cft.

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


Total Amount of Sub-Head (A) Rs.

In Word

BOQ-Sum W.Crs & DrainPage 7 of 75



Sub Head - B - RCC Water Course & Storm Water Drainage System

B RCC Water Course & Storm Water Drainage System

Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________)


BILL OF QUANTITIES

Summary Of RCC Water Course & Storm Water Drainage System

Total - Sub-Head (B) (Rs.)

In Word

BOQ - Drain & W.CrsPage 8 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - B - RCC Water Course & Storm Water Drainage SystemNote:

(i)Fairface steel formwork is to be used in all the items ofR.C.C / as per the direction of the Engineer.

(ii) SR Cement is to be used in all items of cement concrete incontact with earth.

(iii) Excavation of trenches for foundation of building, laying ofsewer lines, Water supply lines or Storm Water Drains willbe carried out as per the drawings and specification.Payment of trench volume will be paid strictly as per thedrawings and specifications.The work of trench excavation comprises of furnishing allplant, labour, equipment, appliances and performing alloperations in connection with dewatering of sub-soil waterfrom excavation for the purpose of construction offoundations, sewers and other structures strictly inaccordance with this section of the specification and subjectto the terms and conditions of the contract.The water pumped and drained from the work shall bedisposed off in a manner approved by the Engineer. Thecontractor shall build all temporary drains and do ditchingrequired in this connection and shall also take necessarypre-cautions against flooding at no extra cost.

(iv) The excavated trenches will be backfilled in layers notexceeding 6" (compacted) and will be compacted upto 90%of modified AASHTO except the portions under roadcrossings. The compaction of backfilling will be carried outupto 95% modified AASHTO in portions under road/crossings.

(v) The Contractor to ensure no standing water in the trenchesduring operation of the work i.e concreting or laying of pipesetc..

(vi) The contractor to submit the methodology of dewatering forapproval of the Engineer. It may also be noted that approvalof the methodology will not relieve the contractor from anyof his responsibilities/ obligations.

(vii) Contractor is required to submit Concrete Mix Design forEngineer's approval prior to start of works. All Concrete tobe used in this project shall be ready mix from approvedbatching plant.

1 Earthwork excavation in open cutting for stormwater channels, drains, sullage drains in openareas, roads, streets, lanes, including underpinning of walls and shoring to protect existingworks, shuttering and timbering the trenches,dressed to designed level and dimensions,trimming, removal of surface water from trenches,back filling and surplus excavated materialdisposed of and dressed upto any lead:- (InOrdinary Soil)

a). Depth From 0'-00" to 5'-00" 16,938 Cftb). Depth From 5'-00" to 10'-00" 1,993 Cft

2 Earthwork in excavation of drains, irrigationchannels through excavator / drag lines in all kindof soil and conditions (dry, wet slush, daldal andunder water) including its disposal upto any leadand preparation of working pad for operation ofmachinery.

996 Cft

Rate Amount (Rs.)

BILL OF QUANTITIES

Sr. No. Particulars Qty. Unit


In Figure In WordsRate Amount

(Rs.)Sr. No. Particulars Qty. Unit

3 Cement concrete plain Ratio 1:4:8 includingplacing, compacting, finishing and curingcomplete (including screening and washing ofstone aggregate.

2,686 Cft

4 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):-

a). Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / stripfoundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiring formwork (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete in allrespects:-(Nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive strength cylindrical of 3500 Psi @ 28days).(For Base Slab of Drain).

5,371 Cft

b). Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects:-(nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive cylindrical strength of 3500 PSI @28 days).(For Wall & Top Slab of Drain)

9,722 Cft

c). Precast reinforced cement concrete andprestressed reinforced cement concrete incolumns, beams, lintels, stair cases, shelves, etc.(nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive cylindrical strength of 3000 PSI @28 days). (For RCC Precast top slab of Drain)

7 Cft

d). Erecting and fixing in position, precast cementconcrete or stone slab in roofs or lintels, etc. liftunto 20 ft., (6m) including all charges. (For RCCPrecast top slab of Drain)

7 Cft

5 Fabrication of Deformed bars (Grade-60) steelreinforcement for cement concrete, includingcutting, bending, laying in position, making jointsand fastenings, including cost of binding wire andlabour charges for binding of steel reinforcement(also includes removal of rust from bars).

45,300 Kg

6 Two coat of Bitumen coating to plastered orcement concrete surface.

a). First coat with 20 lbs. per 100 Sft. (0.97 Kg perSq.m)

16,808 Sft

b). Second coat with 14 lbs. per 100 Sft. (0.635 Kgper Sq.m)

16,808 Sft


In Figure In WordsRate Amount

(Rs.)Sr. No. Particulars Qty. Unit

7 Providing embedding 10" (250 mm) wide ¼" (6mm) thick rubber water stopper in expansionjoints of R.C.C. roof slab complete in all respects.

1,653 Rft.

8 Pacca brick work with cement, sand mortar Ratio1:6:- Ground Floor

788 Cft

9 Cement plaster 1:4 upto 20' (6.00 m) height:-¾" (20 mm) thick:- Upto 20' height

2,494 Sft

10 Small iron work, such as gusset plates, knees,bends, stirrups, straps, rings, etc. includingcutting, drilling, riveting, handling, assembling andfixing; including erection in position. (For Grating& Frame of Precast Slab)

269 Kg

11 Preparing surface and painting two coats ofapproved paint on guard bars, gates of iron bars,gratings, railing (including standards, braces, etc.)and in similar open work. (For Iron Gratings).

33 Sft

12 Preparing surface and painting two coats ofapproved paint on fillets, framing, skirtings, pipes,gutters, and similar linear work not exceeding 6"(150 mm) girth. (For Iron Frame of Precast Slab)

37 Sft

13 Providing & fixing expansion joint with andincluding the cost of expansion of approvedwaterstop, approved premoulded joint filler, capwith compressible approved filler on debondedside, dowel bars debonded on one side onlycomplete as shown in drawing, specification &direction of the Engineer.

117 Rft.

14 Dismantling and removing road structure &earthen embankment in required width & depth,stacking the excavated materials along withtrench, refilling the same in layers of not morethan 150mm thick (compacted) in the trenches,leveling, watering, compacting to required degree.Laying to proper level & grade granular sub base,crushed aggregate base course, asphaltic basecourse & wearing course as per the section of theexisting road with proper compaction. Cost ofprime coat & disposal of surplus excavatedmaterial in designated area deemed to beincluded in the rates.

107 Sft.

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


Total Amount of Sub-Head (B) Rs.

In Word

BOQ-Sum Wat.Sup.NetPage 11 of 75



Sub Head - C - Water Supply NetworkC (i) Water Supply Network

C (ii) Water Supply Connection Chamber

C (iii) Water Supply RCC Valves Chamber

Rupees : ____________________________________________________________________________________)


BILL OF QUANTITIES

Water Supply Network

Total - Sub-Head (C) (Rs.)

In Word

BOQ - Water Supply NetPage 12 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - C (i) - Water Supply NetworkNote:








1 Excavation of trenches in all kinds of soil, exceptcutting rock, for water supply pipelines upto 5 ft.(1.5 m) depth from ground level, includingtrimming, dressing sides, leveling the beds oftrenches to correct grade and cutting pits forjoints, etc. complete in all respects.

222,210 Cft

2 Back filling, watering and ramming earth withsurplus earth from Excavation, etc.

179,730 Cft

3 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing complete(including screening and washing of stoneaggregate): Ratio 1:2:4.

787 Cft

BILL OF QUANTITIES

Sr. No. Particulars Qty. Unit Rate Amount

(Rs.)

BOQ - Water Supply NetPage 13 of 75

In Figure In WordsSr. No. Particulars Qty. Unit Rate Amount

(Rs.)4 Providing, laying & fixing in trench i/c fitting,

jointing & testing etc complete in all respect thehigh density polyethylene PE pipes (HDPE-100,SDR-17, PN-10 conforming to ISO-4427, DIN-8074/75 & PS. 3580:1997). (conforming toapproved specification).

a). Pipeline 225mm Outer Dia 28,613 Rft

5 Providing and fixing double acting cast ironflanged Air Valve (imported) of the followingdiameter complete with flanged isolating valve ofthe same diameter i/c nuts bolts, gaskets, & Teeetc. complete as per drawing, specification andapproval of the Engineer.

a). 3" (75 mm) dia 1 Nos.

6 Supply Fire Hydrants (imported) of the followingdiameter conforming to AWWA-C-502 and fixingin position in chambers i/c Tee & extention pieceas per drawing and directions of the Engineer.

a). 4" (100 mm) dia 6 Nos.

7 Supply Flanged sluice Valves (imported) of thefollowing diameter conforming to PN-16, AWWAC-500 & BS-5150) and fixing in position inchambers as per drawing and directions of theEngineer. (Sluice Valves).

a). For Pipeline 225mm Outer Dia 4 Nos.

8 Supply & fixing stub ends for fixing of flangedvalves 2nos. on each sluice Valves, as perdrawing and directions of the Engineer.

a). For Pipeline 225mm Outer Dia 4 Nos.

9 Supplying and filling river bed sand under pipesas per specifications with and i/c. the cost oflaying to proper camber and grade, watering andconsolidation etc. complete.

31,475 Cft

10 Providing and fixing in position P.E pipeconforming to I.S.O 4427-DIN 8074/75 and P.S3580-1994) in road crossing i./c encasingexternally with C.C 1:2:4, 4" thick around pipe asper drawings, excavation, back filling anddisposal of surplus earth etc complete.

a). 1" Dia P.E Pipe 165 Rftb). 3/4" Dia P.E Pipe 22 Rft

11 Making connection from existing P.E pipe linewith cost of approved quality clamp, Adaptor,Tee, elbow, Ferrule and other necessary fittingsetc complete in all respect or as per directions ofthe Engineer.

a). From 225mm Dia Pipe 33 No

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (C-i) Rs.

BOQ - Chambers H.CPage 14 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - C (ii) - Water Supply Connection ChamberNote:








CHAMBER WORK1 Excavation in foundation of building, bridges and

other structures, including dagbelling, dressing,refilling around structure with excavated earth,watering and ramming lead upto one chain (30 m)and lift upto 5 ft. (1.5 m) in ordinary soil.

5,626 Cft

2 Cement concrete plain Ratio 1:4:8 includingplacing, compacting, finishing and curingcomplete (including screening and washing ofstone aggregate).

230 Cft

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)



(Rs.)3 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete

(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):- Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / stripfoundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiring formwork (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete in allrespects:-(Nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive strength cylindrical of 3500 Psi @ 28days).(For Base Slab of Chamber).

373 Cft

4 Cement concrete plain Ratio 1:2:4 includingplacing, compacting, finishing and curingcomplete (including screening and washing ofstone aggregate). (Benching & Flooring)

23 Cft

5 Pacca brick work in ground floor with cement,sand mortar Ratio 1:6.

617 Cft

6 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):-Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects:-(nominal mix 1:2:4, having minimum compressivecylindrical strength of 2500 PSI @ 28 days).

167 Cft


562 Kg

8 Cement plaster ½" (13 mm) thick ratio 1:3 upto20' (6.00 m) height.

2,028 Sft



(Rs.)RCC Cover for Chamber

9 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):-Precast reinforced cement concrete andprestressed reinforced cement concrete incolumns, beams, lintels, stair cases, shelves,etc.(nominal mix 1:2:4, having minimumcompressive cylindrical strength of 2500 PSI @28 days).

10 Cft

10 Erecting and fixing in position, precast cementconcrete slab in roofs or lintels, etc. lift unto 20ft(6m) including all charges.

10 Cft


35 Kg

12 Iron work, such as gusset plates, knees, bends,stirrups, straps, rings, MS guard bars, grill, railing,ladders, gratings, brackets, hooks, hold fasts andframes etc. including cutting, welding, punching/drilling holes, riveting, handling, assembling bywelding or fixing with use of bolts, buts, rivetswashers etc., in position; Including erection inposition. (For Precast Cover frame).

156 Kg

13 Preparing surface and painting two coats of paintafter applying priming coat, on fillets, framing,skirting's, pipes, gutters, and similar linear worknot exceeding 6" (150 mm) girth. (For Iron Frameof Precast Slab)

45 Sft

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (C-ii) Rs.

BOQ - Chambers (Valve)Page 17 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - C (iii) - Water Supply RCC Valves ChamberNote:




(iv) The excavated trenches will be backfilled in layers notexceeding 6" (compacted) and will be compacted upto 90%of modified AASHTO except the portions under roadcrossings. The compaction of backfilling will be carried outupto 95% modified AASHTO in portions under road/

(v) The Contractor to ensure no standing water in the trenchesduring operation of the work i.e concreting or laying of pipes



CHAMBER WORK1 Excavation in foundation of building, bridges and

other structures, including dagbelling, dressing,refilling around structure with excavated earth,watering and ramming lead upto one chain (30 m)and lift upto 5 ft. (1.5 m) in ordinary soil.

2,102 Cft

2 Cement concrete plain Ratio 1:4:8 includingplacing, compacting, finishing and curingcomplete (including screening and washing ofstone aggregate).

180 Cft

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)




(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):- Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / stripfoundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiring formwork (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete in allrespects:-(Nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive strength cylindrical of 3500 Psi @ 28days).(For Base Slab of Chamber).

168 Cft

4 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded washed aggregate, inrequired shape and design, including forms,moulds, shuttering, lifting, compacting, curing,rendering and finishing exposed surface,complete (but excluding the cost of steelreinforcement, its fabrication and placing inposition, etc.):-Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects:-(Nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive strength cylindrical of 3500 Psi @ 28days).(For Wall & Top Slab of Chamber).

361 Cft


1,435 Kg

6 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing complete(including screening and washing of stoneaggregate) Ratio 1:2:4. (Compressive strength2250 PSI @ 28days). (For Benching & Flooring)

12 Cft



(Rs.)Pre Cast Man Hole Cover

7 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded washed aggregate, inrequired shape and design, including forms,moulds, shuttering, lifting, compacting, curing,rendering and finishing exposed surface,complete (but excluding the cost of steelreinforcement, its fabrication and placing inposition, etc.):-Precast reinforced cement concrete andprestressed reinforced cement concrete incolumns, beams, lintels, stair cases, shelves, etc.(Nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive strength cylindrical of 3000 Psi @ 28days).

7 Cft

8 Erecting and fixing in position, precast cementconcrete slab in roofs or lintels, etc. lift unto 20ft(6m) including all charges.

7 Cft


26 Kg

10 Iron work, such as gusset plates, knees, bends,stirrups, straps, rings, MS guard bars, grill, railing,ladders, gratings, brackets, hooks, hold fasts andframes etc. including cutting, welding, punching/drilling holes, riveting, handling, assembling bywelding or fixing with use of bolts, buts, rivetswashers etc., in position; Including erection inposition. (For Precast Cover frame)

125 Kg


120 Rft.

12 Preparing surface and painting two coats of paintafter applying priming coat, on fillets, framing,skirting's, pipes, gutters and similar linear worknot exceeding 6" (150 mm) girth. (For Iron Frameof Precast Slab)

36 Sft

13 Dry rammed brick or stone ballast, 1½" to 2" (40mm to 50 mm) gauge.

180 Cft

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (C-iii) Rs.

BOQ-Sum SeweragePage 20 of 75



Sub Head - D - Sewerage Collection & Disposal System

D Sewerage Collection & Disposal System

Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________)


BILL OF QUANTITIES

Summary Of Sewerage Collection & Disposal System

Total - Sub-Head (D) (Rs.)

In Word

BOQ-SeweragePage 21 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - D - Sewerage Collection & Disposal SystemNote:








1 Earthwork excavation in open cutting for sewersand manholes as shown in drawings includingshuttering and timbering, dressing to correctsection and dimensions according to templatesand levels, and removing surface water, in alltypes of soil except shingle, gravel and rock,Back Filling, watering and ramming earth underfloors with surplus earth from foundation, etc.(Rate includes back filling but without shuttering &timbering)

a). 0 ft. to 7.0 ft. (0 to 2.10 m) depth above SSWL 635,970 Cftb). 7-01 ft. to 15.0 ft. (2.15 to 4.5 m) depth above

SSWL.80,571 Cft

c). above 15.0 ft. (4.5 m) depth depth above SSWL. 12,135 Cft

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)



(Rs.)2 Earthwork excavation of trenches in open cutting

for sewers and manhole chambers, etc. belowsub-soil water level to correct section anddimensions according to templates and levels,including shoring, timbering and shuttering ofM.S. sheets on both sides of the trenches, BackFilling, watering and ramming earth under floorswith surplus earth from foundation, etc. (Cost ofdewatering is deemed to be included in this rate)

a). 0 ft. to 4.0 ft. (0 to 1.20 m) depth below SSWL. 47,916 Cftb). 4.01 ft. to 8.0 ft. (1.22 to 2.4 m) depth below

SSWL.204,727 Cft

c). Exceeding 8 ft. (2.4 m) depth below SSWL. 418,562 Cft

3 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing complete(including screening and washing of stoneaggregate):(Ratio 1:4:8, Minimum cylinder strength 1000 PSI@ 28 days).

1,632 Cft

4 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.)

a) Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / stripfoundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiring formwork (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete in allrespects (Nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive strength cylindrical of 3500 Psi @ 28days). (For Manhole Base Slab)

4,613 Cft

b) Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects (Nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive cylindrical strength of 3500 PSI @28 days). (For Manhole Walls & Cone)

15,753 Cft

c) Precast reinforced cement concrete andprestressed reinforced cement concrete incolumns, beams, lintels, stair cases, shelves, etc.(nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive cylindrical strength of 3000 PSI @28 days). (For Precast RCC Cover of Manhole)

546 Cft

d) Erecting and fixing in position, precast cementconcrete or stone slab in roofs or lintels, etc. liftunto 20 ft., (6m) including all charges. (ForPrecast RCC Cover of Manhole)

546 Cft




using coarse sand and screened graded andwashed crushed stone aggregate in requiredshape and design i/c. forms, moulds, shuttering,lifting, compacting, curing, rendering and finishingsurface (inside & out side both), complete (butexcluding the cost of steel reinforcement and itsfabrication and placing in position etc.)Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / stripfoundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiring formwork (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete in allrespects (nominal mix 1:2:4, having minimumcompressive cylindrical strength of 2500 PSI @28 days). (For RCC Encasement Slab underRoad Crossing).

875 Cft

6 Providing and laying cement concrete plain usingcoarse sand and screened graded and washedcrushed stone aggregate in required shape anddesign i/c. forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingsurface (inside & out side both), complete (Ratio1:3:6, Minimum cylinder strength 1500 PSI @ 28days). (Around Pipe Encasement under RoadCrossing).

1,611 Cft

7 Providing and laying cement concrete plain usingcoarse sand and screened graded and washedcrushed stone aggregate in required shape anddesign i/c. forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingsurface (inside & out side both), complete (Ratio1:2:4, Minimum cylinder strength 2500 PSI @ 28days). (For Benching in Manhole)

4,602 Cft


79,081 Kg


3,017 Rft.

10 Bitumen coating to plastered or cement concretesurface, 20 lbs. per 100 Sft. (0.97Kg per Sq.m)for Each Coat.

a). 1st Coat 30,177 Sftb). 2nd Coat 30,177 Sft



(Rs.)11 Iron work, such as gusset plates, knees, bends,

stirrups, straps, rings, MS guard bars, grill, railing,ladders, gratings, brackets, hooks, hold fasts andframes etc. including cutting, welding, punching/drilling holes, riveting, handling, assembling bywelding or fixing with use of bolts, buts, rivetswashers etc., in position; Including erection inposition. (For foot rest & frame of manhole cover)

10,606 Kg

12 Preparing surface and painting two coats of paintafter applying priming coat, on fillets, framing,skirting's, pipes, gutters, and similar linear worknot exceeding 6" (150 mm) girth. (For Iron Frameof Precast Slab)

811 Sft

13 Providing and laying GRP Sewerage Pipeincluding carriage of the pipe to site of work,laying and jointing in trenches to correctalignment and grade, jointing with double bellcoupler, cutting pipes where necessary, testingand commissioning etc., having operatingpressure of 6 bars meeting standards of AWWAM-45, ASTMD-1205, 2143, 2152, D638, D790 &SN5000 including carriage, complete. (SewerLine)GRP Pipe

a). 300mm Dia (12'' dia) 14,056 Rft.b). 350mm Dia (14'' dia) 592 Rft.c). 450mm Dia (18'' dia) 5,527 Rft.d). 600mm Dia (24'' dia) 1,618 Rft.e). 800mm Dia (31'' dia) 1,180 Rft.f). 1000mm Dia (39'' dia) 229 Rft.g). 1200mm Dia (47'' dia) 765 Rft.f). 1400mm Dia (55'' dia) 1,007 Rft.g). 1600mm Dia (63'' dia) 707 Rft.

14 Providing, stacking, spreading graded granularmaterial from approved quarry under bed of pipesi/c. leveling, dressing to proper camber and gradei/c. watering etc. and all lead and lift complete(actual compacted depth to be measured).

260,600 Cft.

15 Providing & fixing M.S pipe made out of M.Ssheet conforming to API 5L grade X-42 helicalseam submerged arc welded carbon steel pipewith externally coated (3-Layer) polyethylene andepoxy coated internally conforming to B.Sspecification including clamps, nuts, bolts,jointing, testing and all other necessaryaccessories required for fixing etc including thecost of making hole in CC/RCC concrete wall ifrequired with repaing work & making good alldamages after fixing, complete in all respect andas per direction of the Engineer.

a). M.S Pipe 300mm Inner Dia (7.9mm WallThickness)

153 Rft.

b). M.S Pipe 600mm Inner Dia (7.9mm WallThickness)

165 Rft.



(Rs.)c). M.S Pipe 1400mm Inner Dia (9.5mm Wall

Thickness)68 Rft.

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (D) Rs.

BOQ-Sum Allied W.S SystemPage 26 of 75



Sub Head - E - Allied Works for Potable Water Storage & Pumping SystemE (i) Construction of 1 MG RCC UG Water Tank

E (ii) Pump Room - For UG Tank

E (iii) Operator Room

E (iv) Installation of Tube Wells alongwith Construction of Pump Rooms

E (v) Over Head Tank (1 Lac Gallons)

E (vi) External Electrical Work

Rupees : ____________________________________________________________________________________)


BILL OF QUANTITIES

Summary OF Allied Works for Potable Water Storage & Pumping System

Total - Sub-Head (E) (Rs.)

In Word

BOQ - 1MG UG Tank CivilPage 27 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (i) - Construction of 1 MG RCC UG Water TankNote:



(iii) Excavation of trenches for foundation of building, laying ofsewer lines, Water supply lines or Storm Water Drains willbe carried out as per the drawings and specification.Payment of trench volume will be paid strictly as per thedrawings and specifications.The work of trench excavation consist of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances and materials etc. The water pumped and drained from trenches shall bedisposed off in a manner approved by the Engineer. Thecontractor shall build all temporary drains and do ditchingrequired in this connection and shall also take necessarypre-cautions against flooding at no extra cost.


(v) The Contractor should ensure that there is no standingwater in the trenches during operation of the work i.econcreting or laying of pipes.

(vi) The contractor should submit the methodology ofdewatering of water from trenches for approval of theEngineer. It may also be noted that approval of themethodology will not relieve the contractor from any of hisresponsibilities/ obligations.

(vii) Contractor is required to submit Concrete Mix Design forEngineer's approval prior to start of works. All Concrete tobe used in this project to be ready mix from approvedbatching plant.

1 Earthwork excavation as shown in drawingsincluding shuttering and timbering, dressing tocorrect section and dimensions according totemplates and levels, and removing surfacewater, in all types of soil except shingle, graveland rock:-

a). 0 ft. to 7.0 ft. (0 to 2.10 m) depth 85,542 Cftb). 7.1 ft. to 15 ft. (2.10 to 4.5 m) depth 38,736 Cft

2 Earthwork excavation below sub-soil water levelto correct section and dimensions according todrawings, templates and levels, including shoring,timbering and shuttering of M.S. sheets on bothsides of the trenches, back filling with wateringand ramming earth under floors with surplus earthfrom foundation, etc. (Cost of dewatering deem tobe included in this rate)

a). 0 ft. to 4.0 ft. (0 to 1.20 m) depth below SSWL. 12,912 Cftb). 4.01 ft. to 8.0 ft. (1.22 to 2.4 m) depth below

SSWL.25,824 Cft

c). Exceeding 8 ft. (2.4 m) depth below SSWL. 79,086 Cft

3 Back filling, watering and ramming earth underfloors with surplus earth from foundation, etc.

89,000 Cft

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

4 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing completeincluding screening and washing of stoneaggregate (Ratio 1:4:8, having minimumcylindrical compressive strength of 1000 Psi @28days).

7,522 Cft

5 Supplying and laying double layer of polythenesheet over D.P.C. under floors and on roofs, etc:-500 gauge (.005" thick)

14,994 Sft

6 Providing and laying 1-½" thick (40 mm) dampproof course of cement concrete 1:2:4 (usingcement, sand and shingle), including 2 coats ofbitumen coating @ 0.9 kg/sqm. in each coat.

14,994 Sft

7 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):- Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / stripfoundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiring formwork (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete in allrespects (Nominal mix 1:1:2, having minimumcompressive cylindrical strength 4000 Psi @ 28days).

22,113 Cft

8 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):-Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects (Nominal mix 1:1:2, having minimumcompressive cylindrical strength 4000 Psi @ 28days).

a). Upto 6m height 24,352 Cft



(Rs.)Rate

9 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):-Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects (Nominal mix 1:2:4, having minimumcylindrical compressive strength of 3000 Psi @ 28days).

a). Upto 6m height 65 Cft


209,098 Kg

11 Providing embedding 10" (250 mm) wide ¼" (6mm) thick rubber water stopper in Constructionjoints complete in all respects.

584 Rft

12 Providing and laying damp proof course with ¾"thick (20 mm) cement sand plaster Ratio 1:4 andbitumen coating with one coat of bitumen and onecoat of polythene sheet 500 gauge. (VerticalDPC)

9,699 Sft

13 Providing and laying 2" (50 mm) thick topping ofcement concrete 1:2:4, including surface finishingand dividing in panels.

26,003 Sft

14 Providing and fixing glass strip 5mm thick and 1-½" (40 mm) wide, for dividing the flooring intopanels.

7,949 Rft

15 Pacca brick work in foundation and plinth in:-cement, sand mortar Ratio 1:4

719 Cft

16 Cement plaster 1:3 upto 20' (6.00 m) height:-¾" (20 mm) thick.

a). Upto 6m height 13,179 Sft

17 Providing and fixing Artificial envi stone claddingof approved design, pattern, size & quality onwalls with 1:4 cement sand mortar base of 3/4"thickness setting the tiles with neat cementmortar, grouting the joints 1/4" with matchinggrout of approved manufacturer / supplier,including mechanism of nails, grouting, insertingin walls, with proper fixing in place with and i/crequired accessories etc, curing, finishing as perthe instructions & approval of the Engineer and as per design and drawings. The cost includescartage, all lead and lift, complete in all respect as directed by the Engineer.

2,723 Sft



(Rs.)Rate

18 Providing and laying soling stones, minimum size230mm, under floor including packing withspawls, chips, consolidating, etc complete.

15,865 Cft

19 Add extra for providing and mixing pudlo or othersimilar approved water proofing material added tocement @ 5% by weight of cement.

26,021 Kg

20 Providing & fixing in position expan bar PVCrearguard 250mm wide and joint sealer completein all respect as per the approval & direction ofthe Engineer.

584 Rft

Mechanical Works21 Supply & installing Direct Cylinder Mounted Gas

Chlorinator (imported): all vacuum operated,capacity 10, 25, 50 & 100 pounds per day, FeedRatio 20:1 with all standard accessories.

1 No.

22 Supply & installing Multistage centrifugalmonoblock chlorinator booster pumping sethaving gunmetal impellers stainless steel shaftstuffing box with electric motor on common shaftwith field testing kit.

1 No.

23 Supply & installing (approved) chlorine gascylinder 68 Kg capacity, bottle type with first fillingof liquid chlorine after hydraulic testing (NOC fromDeptt. of Explosives to be obtained).

1 No.

24 Providing 28" x 28" (internal dimensions) C.Idouble seal manhole cover and frame (wt. 100kg) including fixing in RCC Slab at the time ofcasting, etc. complete as per drawing and asdirected by the Engineer.

3 No.

25 Providing & fixing C.I Goose Neck Vent 6" dia asper drawings design suitable for fixing in the roofof under ground tank weighing 50 Kg each.

8 Nos.

27 Providing & fixing Brass / Bronze pressure gaugecomplete with necessary accessories as perspecification & approval of the Engineer.300mm dia

1 No.

28 Providing & fixing 50mm dia double acting airvalve (imported) with required flanged tee, nut &bolts, etc. complete as per specification &approval of the Engineer.

1 No.

29 Providing & fixing overflow G.I pipe 150mm diafor U/G Tank with necessary fittings along withC.I check valve, etc. complete as per drawing,specification & approval of the Engineer.

1 No.

30 Providing & fixing Water Depth Measuring Gaugewith required fitting as per specifications &approval of the Engineer.

1 No.

31 Providing & fixing C.I Flanged 300mm dia floatvalve (imported) along with all accessoriesrequired & as per specifications & direction of theEngineer.

1 No.



(Rs.)Rate

32 Providing & fixing C.I Flanged sluice valve(imported) flanged end 10" dia with requiredaccessories as per specifications & direction ofthe Engineer.

1 No.

33 Providing & fixing M.S pipe made out of M.Ssheet 7.9 mm thick conforming to API 5L grade X-42 helical seam submerged arc welded carbonsteel pipe with externally coated (3-Layer)polyethylene and epoxy coated internallyconforming to B.S specification including clamps,nuts, bolts, jointing, testing and all othernecessary accessories required for fixing etccomplete in all respect and as per direction of theEngineer.

a). M.S Pipe 300 mm dia. Internal Dia 22 Rftb). M.S Pipe 150 mm dia. Internal Dia 11 Rft

34 Providing & laying M.S fittings made out of M.Ssheet 7.9 mm thick conforming to API 5L grade X-42 helical seam submerged arc welded carbonsteel pipe with internally & externally epoxycoated conforming to B.S specification includingnuts, bolt, packing, jointing, testing etc completein all respect and as per direction of the Engineer.

a). 300mm Dia. Elbow 90o 2 No.b). M.S Flanges 300mm Dia. 2 No.c). M.S Flanges 150mm Dia. 12 No.

35 Providing and fixing manual gear operatedPenstock including frame, Extended operationalstainless steel spindle and other requiredaccessories complete in all respect as perdrawing / design and as per approval of theEngineer. (Leakage rates in accordance with BS7775-1995)Size 3'x3'

2 No.

36 Supplying & fixing in position anodized Aluminum600mm wide ladder for UG Tank complete withall necessary accessories as per the drawingsand specification and as per direction of theEngineer.

2 Job

37 Construction of chamber for valves etc. Thedimensions are as under. The work comprises of9" thick B.B masonry walls set in cement mortar1:3, 6" thick bottom slab of RCC 1:2:4 on 4" C.C1:4:8 bed, top slab of chamber will be 6" thickRCC 1:2:4 with and i/c 18"x18" C.I cover withframe, providing 2 layers of bitumen coating waterproofing membrane on outer surface of walls incontact with earth, including excavation,backfilling, disposal of surplus earth to designatedarea 3/4" thick cement sand plaster (1:3) on innerand outer surfaces of wall cost of steel etc.complete as per drawing & as per direction of theEngineer.

Size 4'x4'x depth (As Per Drawing)a). For Sluice Valve 2 Nos.



(Rs.)Rate

38 Providing and applying acrylic reinforcedcementations flexible water proof coating asapproved by the Engineer.

23,334 Sft

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-i) Rs.

BOQ-Sum Pump Room UGPage 33 of 75



Sub Head - E (ii) - Pump Room - For UG TankE (ii) a Civil Work (Pump Room)

E (ii) b Electrical Works (Pump Room)

E (ii) c Mechanical Works (Pump Room)

Rupees : ____________________________________________________________________________________)


BILL OF QUANTITIES

SUMMARY OF PUMP ROOM - FOR UG TANK

Total - Sub-Head (E-ii) (Rs.)

In Word

BOQ - Pump Room UG-Civil


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (ii) a - Civil Work (Pump Room)Note:



(iii) Excavation of trenches for foundation of building, laying ofsewer lines, Water supply lines or Storm Water Drains willbe carried out as per the drawings and specification.Payment of trench volume will be paid strictly as per thedrawings and specifications.The work of trench excavation consist of furnishing allplant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials etc. The water pumped and drained from trenches shall bedisposed off in a manner approved by the Engineer. Thecontractor shall build all temporary drains and do ditchingrequired in this connection and shall also take necessarypre-cautions against flooding at no extra cost.





1 Excavation in foundation of building, bridges andother structures, including dagbelling, dressing,refilling around structure with excavated earth,watering and ramming lead upto one chain (30m) and lift upto 5 ft. (1.5 m) in ordinary soil.

132 Cft

2 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing completeincluding screening and washing of stoneaggregate:-(Ratio 1:4:8, having minimum cylindricalcompressive strength of 1000 Psi @28 days).

11 Cft

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

3 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):- Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / strip foundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiringform work (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete inall respects:-(nominal mix 1:2:4, having minimumcompressive strength cylindrical of 3000 Psi @28 days).

26 Cft

4 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):-Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects:-(nominal mix 1:2:4, having minimum cylindricalcompressive strength of 3000 Psi @ 28 days).


5 Fabrication of Deformed bars (Grade-60) steelreinforcement for cement concrete, includingcutting, bending, laying in position, making jointsand fastenings, including cost of binding wireand labour charges for binding of steelreinforcement (also includes removal of rust frombars).

1,481 Kg

6 Pacca brick work in ground floor cement, sandmortar Ratio 1:6(1st Class Burned Brick).

a). Ground Floor 607 Cft

7 Cement plaster 1:4 upto 20' (6.00 m) height:-½" (13 mm) thick


8 Cement plaster 1:4 upto 20' (6.00 m) height:-¾" (20 mm) thick

a). Upto 6m height 972 Sft



(Rs.)Rate

9 First class deodar wood wrought joinery in doorsand windows, etc. paneled, or paneled or glazed,or fully glazed, fixed in position, includingchowkat, holdfast, hinges, tower bolts, chocks,rubber stop, cleats/ G.I. clamps, handles andchord with hooks, etc. complete (excludingsliding bolt or lock):-(All as per the drawing &approved of the Engineer) 1½" thick (40 mm)

62 Sft

10 Priming coat of chalk under distemper. 2,201 Sft

11 Distempering new surface two coats:-(Oil bounddistemper)

2201 Sft

12 Preparing surface and painting of doors andwindows any type (including edges):-Withenamel paint of approved manufactures

a). Priming coat 124 Sftb). 1st coat of paint. 124 Sftc). 2nd coat of paint 124 Sft

13 Providing and fixing M.S. flat ½"x1/8" (13mm x3mm) grill including ¾" x 1/8" (20 mmx3 mm)M.S. flat frame, in windows of approved design,including painting three coats, complete in allrespects. (all as per drawings) contractor tosubmit shop drawings to Engineer for approvalbefore application .

35 Sft

14 Providing/fixing stair railing consisting of M.S.Box section size 1-1/2"x3" of 16 SWG weldedwith M.S. flat 1"x1/8" continuously and weldedover M.S. square bars 5/8"x5/8" punched in M.S.flat 2 ¾' high @ 5½" c/c fixed in steps of stair I/Cpainting 3 coats complete. (Contractor to submitshop drawings for the approved of the Engineer)

20 Rft

15 Providing and laying damp proof course ofcement concrete 1:2:4 (using cement, sand andshingle), including bitumen coating with one coatbitumen and one coat polythene sheet500gauge:-2" thick (50 mm)@ the rate of 0.9 kg/sqm. ineach coat.

486 Sft

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-ii)-a Rs.

BOQ - Pump Room U.G-ElectricalPage 37 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (ii) b - Electrical Works (Pump Room)

1

Supply and erection of PVC pipe for wiringrecessed in walls, including inspection boxes, pullboxes, hooks, cutting jharries and repairingsurface, etc. complete with all specials.

a). 20 mm i/d 200 Mtr.b). 25 mm i/d 50 Mtr.

2 Supply and errection PVC pipe for recessedwiring (main and sub-main) purpose, includingbends, specials, etc. in floor, wall or trenches:-


3 Supply and erection of single core PVC insulatedcopper conductor cables, in prelaid PVC pipe /M.S. conduit / G. I pipe / wooden strip batten /wooden casing an capping / G.I wire / trenches(rate for cables only) :- 250/440 volts, PVCinsulated.

a). 3/0.74 mm (3/0.029") 500 Mtr.b). 7/0.74 mm (7/0.029") 150 Mtr.c). 7/0.91 mm (7/0.036") 100 Mtr.d). 7/1.12 mm (7/0.044") 30 Mtr.e). 7/1.63mm (7/0.064") 30 Mtr.

4 Supply and erection of copper conductor cablesfor service connection, in prelaid pipe/ G.I.wire/trenches, etc. (rate for cable only):-PVC insulated, PVC sheathed 4 core, 660/1100volt non- armoured cable:- 19/1.32mm(19/0.052")

150 Mtr.

5 Supply and erection of copper conductor cablesfor service connection, in prelaid pipe/ G.I.wire/trenches, etc. (rate for cable only):-PVC insulated, PVC sheathed 4 core, 660/1100volt grade cable armoured with 16 SWG. cable:-

a). 37/2.36mm (37/0.093") 80 Mtr.b). 37/2.62mm (37/0.103") 50 Mtr.

6 Supply and erection of M.S. sheet box of 16SWG, 10cm (4") deep, with 4.75 mm thick (3/16")bakelite sheet top, for recessed wiring, includingmaking holes for regulators, switches, plugs, etc.

a). 10 x 10 cm (4"x4") 24 Eachb). 17.5 x 10 cm (7"x4") 1 Each

7 Supply and erection of ceiling rose, bakelite. 4 Each

8 Supply and erection of switches 10/15 Amp:-Recessed type

22 Each

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

9 Supply and erection of 3 pin switch and plugcombined, recessed type

a) 5 Amp 10 Eachb) 10/15 Amp 5 Each

10 Supply and erection of 3/8" (10 mm) dia M.S. barfan hook, placed at the time of casting of slab. 2 Each

11 Bonding to earth with wire on surface, includingcost of wire, clamps, thimbles, etc.:- Copper wire

a) 16 SWG 60 Mtr.

12 Supply and erection of 25 mm (1") dia and onemeter long lighting conductor copper rod with 5spikes on ball and base, etc complete.

2 Job

13 Copper Fan electric with fan dimmar, box, blades,canopy and rod including connections, provisionof cables and ceiling rose for fan 140 cm sweepof approved type, supply and fixing.

2 Each

14 Copper Fan electric AC exhaust 60cm 220/230volts SP complete, supply and fixing.

4 Each

LIGHT FITTINGS15 Ceiling mounted 27watts LED light fixture

approved type complete with all installationaccessories supply and fixing.

6 Each

16 Ceiling mounted 17watts LED light fixtureapproved type complete with all installationaccessories supply and fixing.

2 Each

17 Bulk head fittings cost iron, without guard toppedwall mounted 14watts LED IP-65 20mm ETaccording to BSS No. 229 of 1957 supply andfixing.

8 Each

Distribution board18 Providing, installing, connecting, testing and

commissioning distribution board wall/floormounted housed in 16 SWG sheet steel housing,dust proof, hinged door/lock, suitable for. 500volts, 3 phase, 4 wires and earth terminal ACsystem as approved by the Engineer. The panelcomprises of:-DISTRIBUTION BOARD - MAIN (under groundtank)

a). Incoming1-400 A TP Mccb 25KA3-Indication lamps1-Voltmeter scaled-0-500 V1-Volt selector switch1-Ammeter scaled-0-400A1-Amps selector switch3-curent transfer scaled-5-400ATPN+E Busbar



(Rs.)Rate

Outgoing3-100 A TP Mccb 13KA (for DB-P)1-60 A TP Mccb 7.5KA 3-15 A TP Mcb 7.5KA 6-10 A SP Mcb-6 KA9-15A SP Mcb-6KA 1 Job.

DISTRIBUTION BOARD - LT Panelb). Incoming

2-630 A TP Mccb 50KA1-Interloking3-Indication lamps1-Voltmeter scaled-0-500 V1-Volt selector switch1-Ammeter scaled-0-630A1-Amps selector switch3-curent transfer scaled-5-630ATPN+E Busbar

Outgoing1-400 A TP Mccb 25KA 3-125 A TP Mccb 13KA 1-60 A TP Mccb 13KA 2-30 A TP Mccb 13KA 3-15 A TP Mccb 7.5KA 1 Job.

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-ii)-b Rs.

BOQ - Pump Room U.G-MechanicalPage 40 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (ii) c - Mechanical Works (Pump Room)

1 Providing, fixing, testing & commissioning ofvertical turbine pump, as approved by theEngineerCapacity : 500 igpmHead : 80 to 100 Feet complete with all accessories, piping, etc. motorof 20 KW, 1450 Rpm, 4 pole totally enclosed, fancooled tropically insulated 3 phase, 50 Hz, 400V ±5% with non-reverse ratchet & Automatic /manual control panel with all safety protectionaccessories in weather proof steel cabinet, cable,etc. as per specification & as directed by theEngineer.

3 Job.

2 Supplying, hoisting and fixing in position of chainpulley block to monorail for lifting the pump andmotor time to time for erection, service andmaintenance. Chain pulley block of capacity 10Tons including Corbel Beam and Crane assemblycomplete in all respect as per drawing design andas per direction of the Engineer.

1 Job.

3 Providing & laying M.S pipe made out of M.Ssheet 7.9 mm thick conforming to API 5L grade X-42 helical seam submerged arc welded carbonsteel pipe with externally coated of 3-layerpolyethylene and epoxy coated internallyconforming to B.S specification including jointing,testing etc complete in all respect and as perdirection of the Engineer.

a). M.S Pipe 12" Dia 150 Rft

4 Providing & laying M.S fittings made out of M.Ssheet 7.9 mm thick conforming to API 5L grade X-42 helical seam submerged arc welded carbonsteel pipe with externally coated of 3-layerpolyethylene and epoxy coated internallyconforming to B.S specification including nuts,bolt, packing, jointing, testing etc complete in allrespect and as per direction of the Engineer.

a). M.S Flanged Tee 12" x 12" x 6" 3 Nos.b). M.S Flanges Dia. 12" 10 Nos.c). M.S Blind Flanges Dia. 12" 1 Nos.

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

5 Supplying and fixing of (imported) C.I Sluice valvePN-16 rating with flanged ends drilled and havingall cast iron components as per B.S Standards5163 workable for potable water, solid forgedbronze inside screw spindle. Spindle nut valveand seat faces of hard wear resisting,manufactured from gunmetal, painted black allover with asphalt base paint, fitted and fixed etc.complete in all respect and as per approval of theEngineer.

a). C.I Sluice Valve 6" Dia (Flanged) 4 Nos.

6 Supply Double Acting Air Valve (imported) withIsolating valve & Fixing in position, includingcutting jointing with header complete in allrespects, testing & Commissioning as per design,drawing, specification and as per approval of theEngineer

a). C.I Air Valve 4" Dia 4 No.

7 Supplying and fixing 6" Dia non-return / checkvalve (imported) of PN-16 rating having body /door of C.I Gr. 20, trunnion shaft AISI 410 faceand seat ring of gunmetal i.e. metal to metal seatand not rubber to metal, generally conforming toB.S standards, flanges flat face drilled completein all respect and as per approval of the Engineer.

3 Nos.

8 Supply Surge Relief Valve & Fixing in positionincluding jointing with header complete in allrespects testing & Commissioning as per design,drawing, specification and as per approval of theEngineer.

a). Surge Relief Valve 12" Dia 1 No.

9 Providing and fixing CI Goose Neck Vent 6" Dia.with aluminum grating as per drawings designsuitable for fixing in the roof of under ground tankweighing 50 Kg each. Complete in all respect asper drawing design and approval of the Engineer.

2 Nos.

10 Providing and fixing Brass / Bronze PressureGauge complete with necessary accessoriesincluding cutting, jointing with header main as perdrawing design and approval of the Engineer.

1 No.

11 Providing and fixing 12" dia. M.S flanged FlexibleCoupling complete with all accessories, nuts,bolts, packing, etc complete in all respects as perdrawing design and approval of the Engineer.

5 No.

12 Supply & fix, Galvanized M.S Cover & frame750mm x 750mm x 3/8" rectangular with 2" x 2" x1/4" Angle iron frame fixed in (Roof Opening) i/cpainting with anticorrosive paint, a coat of red zinc paint complete as per drawings direction of theEngineer.

105 Kg



(Rs.)Rate

13 Providing, laying & fixing in trench i/c fitting,jointing & testing etc complete in all respect thehigh density polyethylene PE pipes (HDPE-100,SDR-17, PN-10 conforming to ISO-4427, DIN-8074/75 & PS. 3580:1997). (conforming toapproved specification).

a). 315mm (Outer Dia) Pipeline 60 Rft

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-ii)-c Rs.

BOQ-Sum Operator RoomPage 43 of 75



Sub Head - E (iii) - Operator RoomE (iii) a Civil Work (Pump Room)

E (iii) b Electrical Works (Pump Room)

E (iii) c Mechanical Works (Pump Room)

Rupees : ____________________________________________________________________________________)


BILL OF QUANTITIES

SUMMARY OF OPERATOR ROOM

Total - Sub-Head (E-iii) (Rs.)

In Word

BOQ - Op. Room - CivilPage 44 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (iii) a - Civil Work (Operator Room)Note:








1 Excavation in foundation of building, bridges andother structures, including dagbelling, dressing,refilling around structure with excavated earth,watering and ramming lead upto one chain (30 m)and lift upto 5 ft. (1.5 m) in ordinary soil.

2,666 Cft

2 Supplying and filling sand under floor; or pluggingin wells.

2,240 Cft

3 Supplying and laying polythene sheet overD.P.C..floors and on roofs, etc. 500 gauge(0.005" thick)ratio also includes overlaps

4,298 Sft

4 Two coat Bitumen coating to plastered or cementconcrete surface. Ratio for each coat 20 lbs. per100 Sft. (0.97 Kg per Sq.m)

4,298 Sft

5 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing completeincluding screening and washing of stoneaggregate:-(Ratio 1:4:8, having minimum cylindricalcompressive strength of 1000 Psi @ 28 days.)

822 Cft

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

6 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing completeincluding screening and washing of stoneaggregate:-(Ratio 1:3:6, having minimum cylindricalcompressive strength of 1500 Psi @ 28 days).

391 Cft

7 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):- Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / stripfoundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiring formwork (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete in allrespects:-(Nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive strength cylindrical of 3000 Psi @ 28days).

869 Cft

8 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):-Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects:-(nominal mix 1:1½:3, having minimumcompressive cylindrical strength of 3000 PSI @28 days).

a) Upto 6m height 1,304 Cft


6,518 Kg

10 Pacca brick work in ground floor cement, sandmortar Ratio 1:6

a). Ground Floor 1,372 Cft







(Rs.)Rate

13 Providing and laying damp proof course of 2"thick (50 mm) cement concrete 1:2:4 (usingcement, sand and shingle), including two coats ofbitumen coating and one coat polythene sheet500 gauge.

872 Sft

14 Preparing surface and painting with emulsionpaint or as per drawings & Specifications.

a). first coat 1,929 Sftb). Second coat 1,929 Sft

15 Priming coat of chalk under distemper. 937 Sft

16 Distempering new surface two coats. 937 Sft

17 Providing and applying weather shield paint ofapproved quality on external surface of buildingincluding preparation of surface, application ofprimer complete in all respect:( new surface )

a). 1st coat 2,053 Sftb). 2nd coat 2,053 Sft

18 Preparing surface and painting of doors andwindows any type (including edges):-

a). Priming coat. 285 Sft

19 Preparing surface and painting of doors andwindows any type (including edges):-

a). 1st coat of paint. 285 Sftb). 2nd coat of paint. 285 Sft

20 Providing and laying 3" (75 mm) thick topping ofcement concrete 1:2:4, including surface finishingand dividing in panels.

246 Sft

12 Preparing surface and painting of doors andwindows any type (including edges) as perdrawings & Specifications with Synthetic enamelpaint of approved manufactures

a). Priming coat 312 Sftb). 1st coat of paint 312 Sftc). 2nd coat of paint 312 Sft

21 Providing and laying stone soling 6" in layersunder foundation including packing with spawlsand chips & consolidating.

216 Cft

23 Providing & laying patterned coloured, glazed /non skid vitrified Ceramic tile of approved size &quality for flooring and in ramps / slopes, ifrequired, with 1:4 cement sand mortar base ofrequired thickness to achieve a minimum overallfinished floor thickness of 2", setting the tiles withneat cement mortar, grouting the joints 1/4" widewith matching grout of approved manufacturer,including curing, cleaning, finishing etc. completein all respect.

a). Ground Floor 109 Sft



(Rs.)Rate

24 Providing & laying patterned coloured, glazed /non skid vitrified ceramic tile of approved size &quality for Dado/Wall/skirting, with 1/2" thick baseof 1:4 cement sand mortar base, setting the tileswith neat cement mortar, grouting the joints 1/4"wide with matching grout of approvedmanufacturer, including curing, cleaning, finishingetc. complete in all respect.

a). Ground Floor 401 Sft

25 Providing and fixing polished 3/4" thick Granitebest quality Gloss finish of any approved shadeand type, One Piece with 1/4" thick carborendumfill length wise on Tread with 1:4 Cement sandmortar base 1-1/2" thick, washing the tiles withcement slurry of matching color including cutting,chemical polishing etc. in any height at any floor,including the cost of cartage complete in allrespect as per direction of the Engineer.)

34 Sft

26 Providing and fixing 3/8" thick Granite best qualityMatt / Gloss finish on Riser over 1/2" (13mm)thick base of cement sand mortar 1:3 setting oftiles in slurry of grey cement over mortar baseincluding filling the joints and washing the tileswith grout of matching color, curing, finishing,cleaning and chemical polishing etc, in anyheight in any floor, including the cost of cartagecomplete in all respect as per direction andapproval of the Engineer.

44 Sft

27 Providing and fixing Botocina / China Verona(Marble) tiles 12" x 12" of approved shade over3/4 '' Thick 1:4 Cement sand mortar base ofrequired thickness to achieve a minimum over allfinished thickness 2'' , washing the tiles withmatching colour grout including curing, rubbing,chemical polishing , cutting, grinding, sloppingetc, complete in all respect and as per directionof the Engineer.)

250 Sft

28 Providing and applying Non-Slip multilayeredEpoxy Floor Coating System in three Layers of100 micron each (Total 300 micron) includingsurface preparation and application of primer intoabsorbent sub floors.& Wall

137 Sft

Doors

29 Providing and fixing Aluminum Louver Doorswidth 56mm x 2mm in frame of box section100mm x 50mm x 1.6mm of approved color &shade as directed by the Engineer. the section oflouver includes back supports of vertical andhorizontal strips of approved size where required,including all Aluminum fittings with all accessoriescutting holes in columns, beams, slab, masonryetc and making good the damages to wall etc.complete as required in any floor as per thedirection of the Engineer. Contractor to makeshop drawings for approval before start of work.(Complete in All Respect as Per Specification)

126 Sft



(Rs.)Rate

30 Providing & fixing Wooden door shutter ofapproved shape & design including the cost ofwooden door frame, locks, handle, door stopper,door beading, hinges. etc complete as perdrawing, specification & direction of the Engineer.

a). Wooden Frame Single Shutter One Way SwingSolid Flush Door With oak Ply Polish Finish OnBoth Side As Approved, Wooden Lipping AllAround Including Heavy Duty Locks, Minimum 4Hinges in each side

22 Sft

b). Wooden Frame Single Shutter Solid Flush DoorOne Way Swing With oak Ply Polish Finish OnBoth Side As Approved, Wooden Lipping AllAround. And Kick Plat In Side 12" High IncludingHeavy Duty Locks, Minimum 4 Hinges

61 Sft

31 Providing and fixing best quality imported wellseasoned deodar wood frames for door,windows, ventilators, making the required pattamfor shutters, Making Pattam, using 6" long Ironholdfast, erecting into final position, including thecost of glue, S.S nails of required size etc.,complete in all respect as per design and drawingand as per direction of the Engineer. The costincludes cartage, all lead and lift at any height inany floor.

8 Cft

Windows / Ventilators32 Providing & fixing glazed Bronze anodized or

Powder coated Aluminum window / Ventilatorsas per British standard manufactured byapproved manufacturer. (fixing though theirapproved fabricators), of approved model sectiondouble or single glazed (size as per drawing)including the cost of aluminum netting, fitting, withall accessories cutting hole etc. and making gooddamages to walls etc. complete including allstandard hardware imported glass, pvc gasketetc, complete in all respect as per instruction ofthe Engineer. Contractor to make detailed shopdrawings for the approval of consultant beforestart of work.

a). Aluminum Sliding Single glazed window 6mmGlass with fly proof net on inner side

72 Sft

b). Aluminum Single glazed openable Ventilator onTop hang 6mm Glass with fly proof net on innerinside.

4 Sft

33 Providing & fixing heavy duty Aluminum powdercoated windows/ventilators using heavy dutyextruded deluxe powder coated section includingall standard hardware imported glass, pvc gasketetc, complete in all respect as per instructions ofthe Engineer. Contractor to make detailed shopdrawings for the approval of consultant beforestart of work.Aluminum fixed Louver.

88 Sft



(Rs.)Rate

34 Providing and fixing G.I sheet frames /Chowkhats of doors, windows & ventilator using20 gauge G.I sheet including welded hinges andfixing at site with necessary hold fast , filling withcement sand slurry of ratio 1:6 and repairing,cutting on walls/floors & jambs. The cost alsoinclude all carriage, tools and plants used inmaking and fixing.

78 Rft

35 Providing and fixing M.S. sheet hollow pressedframe of doors, windows, C. windows, etc.(chowkat only) of 20 SWG welded with M.S. flat6"x 1¼" x 1/8" (150 mmx30mmx3mm) M.S.holdfast 9"x1"x1/8" (225mmx25mmx3mm)welded/screwed 4" (100 mm) long iron hinges,including filling chowkat with cement sand mortar1:8 and embedding holdfast in cement concrete1:2:4, complete in all respects:a) single/double rebate

46 Rft

36 Providing and fixing 1-1/4 inch (32mm) thick bestquality deodar wood planking in shelves oralmirahs with or without deodar wood battens 1"x 1-1/2" (25mm x 38mm) fixed in walls withscrews and rawal plugs etc., as required.

63 Sft

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-iii)-a Rs.

BOQ - Op. Room - PlumbingPage 50 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (iii) b - Plumbing Works (Operator Room)TOILET FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES

1 Providing, fixing Asian type water closet with lowdown flushing cistern connecting pipe completewith all accessories and fittings waste and traps,CP. flexible pipe, including tee stop cock withcheck nuts, all joints plugging and screwing asnecessary to the structure.

1 No.

2 Providing, fixing wash basin half pedestal with allaccessories such as basin hot/cold mixture, teestop cocks with check nuts, CP. flexible pipe,uPVC waste pipe, CP waste coupling, bracketset, CP bottle trap and silicon sealant, all joint toservice and drain, plugging and screwing asnecessary to the structure etc. Complete in allrespect.

1 No.

4 Providing, fixing, testing & commissioning ofshower set including 1No.Bib cock, shower head,or complete exposed type mixture set complete inall respect all joint to service and drain, pluggingand screwing as necessary to the structure.

1 No.

5 Providing, fixing S.S. Kitchen sink including allaccessories such as hot/cold mixture, wall typewith check nuts, uPVC waste pipe, CP wastecoupling, bracket set, CP. bottle trap and all jointsto service and drains plugging and screwing asnecessary to the structure complete in all respectetc.

a). Single bowl single drain 1 No.

6 Providing and fixing bathroom accessories as perapproved list of manufacturer including fixing withRawal plug of approved quality complete in allrespect.

a). Soap Dish 1 Nos.b). Bib cock 1 Nos.c). Coat Hook 2 Nos.

WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM7 Providing & fixing, jointing, testing of

polypropylene pipe(PN-20) BS 5174 or DIN 8077including specials fittings such as hangingsystem, sockets, tees, elbow, bends, reducers,plugs and union etc. MS.supported walls orburied in walls / floor or suspended from roof slabas per specification & detail drawing includingcolor coding complete in all respect. (For cold &hot water )

a). 1/2" dia (Internal Dia) 15 Rft.b). 3/4" dia (Internal Dia) 50 Rft.c). 1" dia (Internal Dia) 70 Rft.

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

8 Providing & fixing, jointing, testing of G.I. pipesaccordance with BS-21 medium quality pipe forexposed water supply piping system show on thedrawing including specials fittings such ashanging system, sockets, tees, elbow, bends,reducers, plugs and union etc. MS.supportedwalls or buried in walls / floor or suspended fromroof slab as per specification & detail drawingincluding color coding complete in all respect.

a). 3/4" dia 20 Rft.b). 1" dia 30 Rft.c). 1-1/4" dia 15 Rft.

9 Providing, fixing, testing & commissioning of hotwater gas fired geyser including inlet/ outletconnections, pressure relief valve automatic airvent etc. complete in all respects.

a). 30 gal. Capacity 1 No.

10 Providing and fixing of full way gate / ball valvesof bronze trim up to 3"dia. With threaded endsand cast iron body bronze trim flanged ends for 4"dia. and above with all additional materialrequired for a complete installation as describedin the as shown on drawings and as approved bythe Engineer.

a). 1" dia 1 No.b). 1-1/2" dia 1 No.

SOIL, WASTE & VENT SYSTEM12 Providing and fixing in position uPVC pipes push

fit type for soil, waste, water & vent pipe asembedded in floor and wall or suspended fromslab or clamped to wall including plugs, specials(bend, tees, Y-tee etc.) Making requisite numberof holes with pvc sleeve pipe class "B" in wallsand floors where required and making good thesame as necessary to the structure labelingtesting to 6.5 Ft. water height complete.

a). 2" dia 12 Rft.b). 3" dia 10 Rft.c). 4" dia 8 Rft.

13 Providing and fixing uPVC cowl for vent pipe ofthe following dia. including all accessoriescomplete.

a). 3" dia 3 Nos.

14 Providing and fixing uPVC floor drain / Floor Gullyof approved design with S.S. (304) grating withpolish finish including requisite number of holeswith pvc sleeve pipe in wall plinth or floor for pipeconnection and making good the same asnecessary to the structure complete includinggasket and clamp complete.

a). 3" dia 2 Nos.

EXTERNAL SEWER & MANHOLES16 Providing, fixing uPVC class 'B' pipe for sewer

system including excavation preparation ofcompacted make smooth bed & backfilling as perdetail drawing complete in all respect.

a). 6" dia 40 Rft.



(Rs.)Rate

17 Construction of manholes rectangular or circularas described, excavation 24" deep to 48" deepwith materials iron steps (in angles 116" centers)6" thick block masonry walls complete with CC,cover removing and backfilling.

a) 24" x 24" size 3 Nos..

18 Construction & installation of gully trap includingC.I covers, frames, excavation, CC wall internalplaster inlet outlet connection pipe.

a) 10" x 10" size 2 Nos.

RAIN WATER SYSTEM19 Providing and fixing in position uPVC pipes push

fit type for rain water pipe in wall or suspendedfrom slab or clamped to wall including plugs,specials (bend, tees, Y-tee etc.) Making requisitenumber of holes with pvc sleeve pipe class "B" inwalls and floors where required and making goodthe same as necessary to the structure labelingtesting to 6.5 Ft. water height complete.

a). 4" dia 40 Rft.

20 Providing and fixing S.S type rain water grating ofapproved design including requisite number ofholes with pvc sleeve pipe in wall plinth for pipeconnection and making good the same asnecessary to the structure complete includinggasket and clamp complete.

a). 4" dia 3 Nos.

FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM21 Providing and fixing dry chemical powder, fire

extinguisher 6 Kg. Capacity, powder coated in redcolor, complete with pressure gauge & wallbracketed

2 Nos.

22 Providing and fixing water type fire extinguisher 9liters capacity, powder coated in red color,complete with pressure gauge & wall bracket etc.

2 Nos.

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-iii)-b Rs.

BOQ - Op. Room - ElectricalPage 53 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (iii) c - Electrical Work (Operator Room)

1 Supply and erection of PVC pipe for wiringrecessed in walls, including inspection boxes, pullboxes, hooks, cutting jharries and repairingsurface, etc. complete with all specials.

a) 20 mm i/d 200 Mtr.b) 25 mm i/d 30 Mtr.


a) 50 mm i/d 30 Mtr.b) 100 mm i/d 50 Mtr.

3 Supply and erection of single core PVC insulatedcopper conductor cables, in prelaid PVC pipe /M.S. conduit / G.I pipe / wooden strip batten /wooden casing an capping / G.I wire / trenches(rate for cables only) :- 250/440 volts, PVCinsulated.

a) 3/0.74 mm (3/0.029") 540 Mtr.b) 7/0.74 mm (7/0.029") 150 Mtr.c) 7/0.91 mm (7/0.036") 10 Mtr.d) 7/1.12 mm (7/0.044") 40 Mtr.


a) 10 x 10 cm (4"x4") 14 Eachb) 17.5 x 10 cm (7"x4") 1 Each



20 Each

7 Supply and erection of 3 pin switch and plugcombined, recessed type

a) 5 Amp 8 Eachb) 10/15 Amp 1 Each

8 Supply and erection of 3/8" (10 mm) dia M.S. barfan hook, placed at the time of casting of slab. 2 Each

9 Bonding to earth with wire on surface, includingcost of wire, clamps, thimbles, etc. :-Copper wire

a) 16 SWG 30 Mtr.

Copper rod10 Supply and erection of 25 mm (1") dia and one

meter long lighting conductor copper rod with 5spikes on ball and base, etc complete.

1 Job

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate

BOQ - Op. Room - ElectricalPage 54 of 75


(Rs.)Rate

Fans14 Copper Fan electric with fan dimmar, box, blades,

canopy and rod including connections, provisionof cables and ceiling rose for fan 140 cm sweepof approved type, supply and fixing.

2 Each


3 Each



4 Each

17 Ceiling mounted 17watts LED light fixtureapproved type complete with all installationaccessories supply and fixing.

6 Each


5 Each

Enclosure19 Providing, installing, connecting, testing and

commissioning distribution board wall/floormounted housed in 16 SWG sheet steel housing,dust proof, hinged door/ lock, suitable for 500volts, 3 phase, 4 wires and earth terminal ACsystem as approved by the Engineer. The panelcomprises of:-

Enclosurea) Incoming

1-15 A TP Mccb 10KA3-Indication lamps

Outgoing1-10 A TP Mcb 7.5KA6-10A SP Mcb-6KA 1 Job.

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-iii)-c Rs.

BOQ-Sum TubewellPage 55 of 75



Sub Head - E (iv) - Installation of Tube Wells alongwith Construction of Pump RoomsE (iv) a Installation of Tube Wells (3 Nos)

E (iv) b Pump Rooms for Tube Well (3 Nos) -Civil Works

E (iv) c Electrical Work of Pump Room for Tube Wells

Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________)


BILL OF QUANTITIES

SUMMARY OF TUBE WELLS & PUMP ROOMS

Total - Sub-Head (E-iv) (Rs.)

In Word

BOQ - Tubewell-InstallationPage 56 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (iv) a - Installation of Tube Wells (3 Nos)Note:- In case of failure of a tube well due to reasons as listed

below the contractor will be allowed payment of the failedtube well. i) Quantity of discharged water is less than the required orspecified quantity / capacity.ii) Quality of water not meet the standards as specified ordirected.

1 Electric resistively survey for location of suitablesite of tubewells (2 packages for each tubewells). 6 Each

2 Trial bore 12" dia including all kinds of strata suchas shingle gravel clay etc for 1 No. tubewell, each350 ft deep.

1,050 Rft.

3 Direct rotary/ reverse rotary drilling of bore holefor tube well in all kinds of soil (15"-18" dia).

a). From ground level to 350' below ground level 1,050 Rft.

4 Providing strong substantially built box ofdeodar wood 4'x2-1/2'x9" with compartments lockand locking arrangement for preserving samplesof strata from bore hole.

3 Jobs

5 Providing and installing brass strainer in tubewell borehole including sockets specials sockets,studs etc; complete.10" dia, 6mm (1/4") wall thickness.

180 Rft.

6 Providing and installing MS bail plug in tubewellsborehole (10" dia 5 ft long each).

3 Each

7 Providing and installing MS blind pipe socketwelded joint MS reducer (where necessary) intubewells borehole i/c. jointing welding withstrainer etc. 10" dia 1/4" thick.

855 Rft.

8 Shrouding with graded pea gravel 3/8" to 1/8"(10-3 mm) around tube well in bore hole.

906 Cft

9 Development washing of Tubewells upto depthwith air compressor complete at each level ofstrainer aquifer taping i/c bail plug for not lessthan 72 hours or till cleaning of water which levelis more to the entire satisfaction of Engineer.

3 P. Jobs

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

10 Development and Testing of Tubewells @1.5time of designed discharge and measuring safeyield, spring level drawdown etc. at the designeddischarge and safe yield with submersible pumpcontinuously by pumping for 48 hours i/c cost ofhire charges of submersible pump, generator etc.and other related T&P i/c P.O.L charges, labouretc. complete in all respect to the entiresatisfaction of Engineer.

3 P. Jobs

11 Providing fixing in position M.S suspensionclamp (2"x1/2") flat iron with nut & bots in P.C.C(1:2:4) size (4'x4'x3') for 12"dia pipe i/c all cost oflabour and material charges etc; complete.

3 Each

12 Testing of water samples from laboratory &collection from bore of tube well complete with allcharges.

6 Each

13 Provision made for Electric Tubewells Logginggot done from competent/ expert department/engineer and providing water boring andconversion chart safe yield table, draw downdetection in 4 at tamps, One copy of strata chartwith other data shall be framed and hanging inpump house and one copy framed and hanging ateach pumping unit.

3 Each

14 Providing and fixing in position of approvedmanufacturer, deep well turbine for 0.5 cusecdischarge upto 250 ft head coupled complete withcontrol panel, transportation installation with andincluding all accessories to complete the job asper the direction of the Engineer. Cost alsoincludes the electronic level controller atunderground reservoir (1.0 MGD) and connectingthe same to the tubewell for its operations.

3 Nos.

15 Providing, laying & fixing in trench i/c fitting,jointing & testing etc complete in all respect thehigh density polyethylene PE pipes (HDPE-100,SDR-17, PN-10 conforming to ISO-4427, DIN-8074/75 & PS. 3580:1997). (conforming toapproved specification).

a). 160mm (Outer Dia) Pipeline 330 Rftb). 225mm (Outer Dia) Pipeline 70 Rftc). 315mm (Outer Dia) Pipeline 35 Rft

18 Providing and fixing double acting cast ironflanged 50mm dia Air Valve (imported) of thefollowing diameter complete with flanged isolatingvalve of the same diameter i/c nuts bolts,gaskets, & Tee etc. complete as per drawing,specification and approval of the Engineer.

a). 50mm dia 3 Nos.

19 Supply Flanged sluice Valves (imported)conforming to PN-16, AWWA C-500 & BS-5150)and fixing in position in chambers as per drawingand directions of the Engineer. (Sluice Valves).

a). For 315mm Dia Pipe 1 No.b). For 160mm Dia Pipe (for Tube Well) 3 Nos.



(Rs.)Rate

20 Construction of chamber for valves etc. Thedimensions are as under. The work comprises of9" thick B.B masonry walls set in cement mortar1:3, 6" thick bottom slab of RCC 1:2:4 on 4" C.C1:4:8 bed, top slab of chamber will be 6" thickRCC 1:2:4 with and i/c 18"x18" C.I cover withframe, providing 2 layers of bitumen coating waterproofing membrane on outer surface of walls incontact with earth, including excavation,backfilling, disposal of surplus earth to designatedarea 3/4" thick cement sand plaster (1:3) on innerand outer surfaces of wall cost of steel etc.complete as per drawing & as per direction of theEngineer.Size 4'x4'x depth (As Per Drawing)

a). For Sluice Valve 3 Nos.

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-iv)-a Rs.

BOQ - TW-Pump Room-CivilPage 59 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (iv) b - Pump Rooms for Tube Well (3 Nos) - Civil WorksNote:








1 Excavation in foundation of building, bridges andother structures, including dagbelling, dressing,refilling around structure with excavated earth,watering and ramming lead upto one chain (30 m)and lift upto 5 ft. (1.5 m) in ordinary soil.

5823 Cft

2 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing completeincluding screening and washing of stoneaggregate:-(Ratio 1:4:8, Minimum cylinder strength 1000 PSI@ 28 days).

852 Cft

3 Supplying and laying polythene sheet overD.P.C..floors and on roofs, etc. 500 gauge(0.005" thick)ratio also includes overlaps

7188 Sft

4 Two coat Bitumen coating to plastered or cementconcrete surface. Ratio of each coat 20 lbs. per100 Sft. (0.97 Kg per Sq.m).

7188 Sft

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

5 Providing and laying 2" thick (50 mm) damp proofcourse of cement concrete 1:2:4 (using cement,sand and shingle), including bitumen coating withone coat bitumen and one layer of polythenesheet 500gauge.

375 Sft

6 Pacca brick work in foundation and plinth in:-cement, sand mortar Ratio 1:4) 1st class Burntbrick

8205 Cft

7 Supplying and filling sand under floor; or pluggingin wells.

6192 Cft

8 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):-Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects:-(nominal mix 1:2:4, having minimum cylindricalstrength 3000 PSI @ 28 days).



31800 Kg





12 Priming coat of chalk under distemper. 9957 Sft

13 Two Coats of Distempering new surface as perthe drawings, specification & directed by theEngineer Incharge.

9957 Sft

14 Making and fixing steel grated door with 1/16"thick (1.5mm) sheeting, including angle iron frame 2"x2"x3/8" (50x50x10 mm) and ¾" (20 mm)square bars 4" (100 mm) centre to centre, withlocking arrangements all as per drawings.

300 Sft



(Rs.)Rate

15 Providing and fixing steel windows using M.S.sheet (16 SWG) molded tubular pipe 1½"x1½"(40x40mm) for frame and 1¼"x1¼" (30x30mm)for leaves including M.S. square bars ¼"x¼" (6x6mm) welded around each panel of frame, 6 mmthick glass panes fixed with double M.S. squaretubular pipe 3/8"x3/8" (10x10mm) (22 SWG)beading with U' shaped rubber lining, brass fitting,holdfast, including painting three coats completein all respects.a) For openable panels fixed with wire gauze 24SWG, 12x12 mesh and glass panes ¼" (6 mm)thick.

342 Sft

16 Providing and fixing M.S. flat ½"x1/8" (13mm x3mm) grill including ¾" x 1/8" (20 mmx3 mm)M.S. flat frame, in windows of approved design,including painting three coats, complete in allrespects.

342 Sft

17 Preparing surface and painting of doors andwindowsany type (including edges):-

a). Priming coat. 651 Sftb). 1st coat of paint. 651 Sftc). 2nd coat of paint. 651 Sft

18 Providing and laying topping of cement concrete1:2:4, including surface finishing and dividing inpanels:- 1½"(40 mm) thick

513 Sft

19 Providing and fixing marble strip of any shade fordividing the mosaic flooring into panelsSize 1½" x 3/8" (40 x 10 mm)

216 Rft

20 Single layer of tiles 9"x4½"x1½" (225x113x40mm) laid over 4"(100 mm) earth and 1" (25 mm)mud plaster without Bhoosa, grouted with cementsand mortar ratio 1:3 on top of RCC roof slab,provided with 34 lbs. per Sft. or 1.72 Kg/Sq.mbitumen coating sand blinded.

780 Sft

21 Khuras on roof 2'x2'x6" (600 x 600 x 150 mm) 6 Each

22 Bottom Khuras of brick masonry in cement mortar1:6, 4'x2'x4½" (1200x600x113 mm) over 3" (75mm) cement concrete 1:4:8.

6 Each

23 Brick on edge flooring, laid in 1:6 cement mortar,over a bed of ¾" (20 mm) thick cement mortar 1227 Sft

24 Providing and laying stone soling, 150mm thickunder floor including packing with spawls, chips,consolidating etc. complete (in foundation underlean concrete).

648 Cft



(Rs.)Rate

25 Providing and Fixing uPVC Rain Water DownPipe 4' long 100mm dia with shoe Tee BendClamp etc.

84 Rft

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-iv)-b Rs.

BOQ - TW-Pump Room-ElectricalPage 63 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (iv) c - Electrical Work of Pump Room for Tube Wells

1 Supply and erection of PVC pipe for wiringrecessed in walls, including inspection boxes, pullboxes, hooks, cutting jharries and repairingsurface, etc. complete with all specials.




3 Supply and erection of single core PVC insulatedcopper conductor cables, in prelaid PVC pipe /M.S. conduit / G. I pipe / wooden strip batten /wooden casing an capping / G.I wire / trenches(rate for cables only) :- 250/440 volts, PVCinsulated.

a). 3/0.74 mm (3/0.029") 380 Mtr.b). 7/0.74 mm (7/0.029") 150 Mtr.c). 7/0.91 mm (7/0.036") 30 Mtr.

4 Supply and erection of single core PVC insulated,PVC sheathed copper conductor, 660/110 voltsgrade cable, in prelaid G.I. pipe / M.S. conduit /PVC pipe/ G.I. wire/ trenches, etc (rate for cableonly):-

a). 7/1.63 mm (7/0.064") 50 Mtr.

5 Supply and erection of copper conductor cablesfor service connection, in prelaid pipe/ G.I.wire/trenches, etc. (rate for cable only):-PVC insulated, PVC sheathed 4 core, 660/1100volt grade cable armoured with 16 SWG. cable:-

a). 19/1.63 mm (19/0.064") 50 Mtr.b). 19/1.83 mm (19/0.072") 415 Mtr.


a). 10 x 10 cm (4"x4") 18 Eachb). 17.5 x 10 cm (7"x4") 3 Each



18 Each

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate

BOQ - TW-Pump Room-ElectricalPage 64 of 75


(Rs.)Rate

8 Supply and erection of 3 pin switch and plugcombined, recessed type.

a). 5 Amp 6 Eachb). 10/15 Amp 6 Each

9 Bonding to earth with wire on surface, includingcost of wire, clamps, thimbles, etc.: Copper wire

a). 16 SWG 30 Mtr.

10 Supply and erection of 25 mm (1") dia and onemeter long lighting conductor copper rod with 5spikes on ball and base, etc complete.

3 Job


3 Each



6 Each


12 Each

Distribution board14 Providing, installing, connecting, testing and

commissioning distribution board wall/floormounted housed in 16 SWG sheet steel housing,dust proof, hinged door/lock, suitable for. 500volts, 3 phase, 4 wires and earth terminal ACsystem as approved by the Engineer. The panelcomprises of:-

Distribution boarda). Incoming

1-125 A TP Mccb 13KA3-Indication lamps1-Voltmeter scaled-0-500 V1-Volt selector switch1-Ammeter scaled-0-100A1-Amps selector switch3-curent transfer scaled-5-100A

Outgoing1-100 A TP Mccb 10KA (for DB-P)1-100 A DOL Starter (for DB-P)1-15 A TP Mcb 7.5KA 3-10A SP Mcb-6KA 3 Job.

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-iv)-c Rs.

BOQ - OHWTPage 65 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (v) - Over Head Tank (1 Lac Gallons)Note:








1 Confirmatory boring (NX Size) 80 Rft

2 Cast in place piles upto 1.00 M dia in normal soil(Boring Only)

800 Rft

3 Pile load test upto 550 TON 1 Each

4 Earthwork excavation as shown in drawingsincluding shuttering and timbering, dressing tocorrect section and dimensions according totemplates and levels, and removing surfacewater, in all types of soil except shingle, graveland rock:-

a). 0 ft. to 7.0 ft. (0 to 2.10 m) depth 4,599 Cftb). 7.1 ft. to 15 ft. (2.10 to 4.5 m) depth 180 Cft

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

5 Earthwork excavation below sub-soil water levelto correct section and dimensions according todrawings, templates and levels, including shoring,timbering and shuttering of M.S. sheets on bothsides of the trenches, back filling with wateringand ramming earth under floors with surplus earthfrom foundation, etc. (Cost of dewatering deem tobe included in this rate)

a). 0 ft. to 4.0 ft. (0 to 1.20 m) depth below SSWL. 361 Cftb). 4.01 ft. to 8.0 ft. (1.22 to 2.4 m) depth below

SSWL.1,353 Cft

c). Exceeding 8 ft. (2.4 m) depth below SSWL. 721 Cft

6 Back filling, watering and ramming earth underfloors with surplus earth from foundation, etc.

3,607 Cft

7 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing completeincluding screening and washing of stoneaggregate:-(Ratio 1:4:8, Minimum cylinder strength 1000 PSI@ 28 days).

620 Cft

8 Supplying and laying polythene sheet over D.P.C.floors and on roofs, etc. 500 gauge (0.005" thick)ratio also includes overlaps

2,786 Sft

9 Two coat Bitumen coating to plastered or cementconcrete surface:-20 lbs. per 100 Sft. (0.97 Kg per Sq.m)

2,786 Sft

10 Cement concrete plain including placing,compacting, finishing and curing completeincluding screening and washing of stoneaggregate:-(Ratio 1:3:6, having minimum cylindricalcompressive strength of 1500 Psi @ 28 days).

721 Cft

11 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):- Reinforced cement concrete in slab of rafts / stripfoundation, base slab of column and retainingwalls; etc and other structural members otherthan those mentioned in above not requiring formwork (i.e. horizontal shuttering) complete in allrespects:-(nominal mix 1:1:2, Minimum compressivecylindrical strength of 4000 PSI @ 28 days).

9,283 Cft



(Rs.)Rate

12 Providing and laying reinforced cement concrete(including prestressed concrete), using coarsesand and screened graded and washedaggregate, in required shape and design,including forms, moulds, shuttering, lifting,compacting, curing, rendering and finishingexposed surface, complete (but excluding thecost of steel reinforcement, its fabrication andplacing in position, etc.):-Reinforced cement concrete in roof slab, beams,columns lintels, girders and other structuralmembers laid in situ or precast laid in position, orprestressed members cast in situ, complete in allrespects:-(nominal mix 1:1:2, having minimum compressivecylindrical strength of 4000 PSI @ 28 days).

a). Upto 6m height 1,453 Cftb). From 6 m upto 12 m height 1,453 Cftc). From 12 m upto 15 m height 726 Cftd). From 15 m upto 18 m height 748 Cfte). From 18 m upto 21 m height 1,310 Cftf). From 21 m upto 24 m height 3,569 Cftg). From 24 m upto 27 m height 2,208 Cft

13 Fabrication of mild steel reinforcement for cementconcrete, including cutting, bending, laying inposition, making joints and fastenings, includingcost of binding wire and labour charges forbinding of steel reinforcement (also includesremoval of rust from bars):- Deformed bars(Grade-60)

82,999 Kg

14 Providing embedding 10" (250 mm) wide ¼" (6mm) thick rubber water stopper inexpansion/construction joints of R.C.C. roof slabcomplete in all respects.

446 Rft.

15 Providing and fixing all types of glazed aluminumwindows of anodized champagne color partlyfixed and party sliding using deluxe section 2 mmthick of approved manufacturer having Frame ofsize 100mmx30mm using frame at bottom, at topand side leaf leaf frame sections of 60mmx23mmat top & bottom and size 45mmx25mm at centerand size 45mmx25mm at sides, Jali leaf framesize 43mmx13mm i/c fine quality aluminum jali,5mm thick imported tinted glass with rubbergasket using approved standard latches, wheel,stopper, brush channel angle joint and hardwareetc. complete in all respect.

130 Sft.

16 Preparing surface and painting two coats ofemulsion paint or as per drawings &Specifications.

3,188 Sft

17 Providing and applying Three coats of weathershield paint of approved quality on externalsurface of building including preparation ofsurface, application of primer complete in allrespect.

9,120 Sft



(Rs.)Rate

18 Geo Technical Report 1 Job

19 Add extra for providing and mixing pudlo or othersimilar approved water proofing material added tocement @ 5% by weight of cement.

3,968 Kg

20 Supply & fix, Galvanized M.S Cover & frame750mm x 750mm x 3/8" rectangular with 2" x 2" x1/4" Angle iron frame fixed in (Roof Opening) i/cpainting with anticorrosive paint, a coat of red zinc paint complete as per drawings direction of theEngineer.

55 Kg

21 Supply and fix galvanized guard bars, grills,railing, ladders brackets, hooks hold fasts andframes of required section as shown in thedrawings etc, cut to dead length, reduced to size,shape, figure etc., including punching / drillingholes if necessary and fixing, assembling bywelding or with the use of bolts, nuts, rivetswashers et., and erection / fixing in positionincluding making good the disturbed surface.

385 Kgs

22 Providing and fixing stair railing comprisinggalvanized pipe horizontal rail 38mm dia on top,centre, bottom and vertical post at each alternatestep as shown on drawings and directed by theEngineer. (Contractor to submit shop drawing toEngineer for approval before execution.)

299 Rft

23 Providing and fixing best quality golden teakwood built in frame (chowkat) with 1/2 inch(13mm) thick golden teak wood beading asstopper for doors complete all as per drawing anddirection of the Engineer.

2 Cft.

24 Providing & fixing 1-3/4" thick flush / Glazed doorwith teak veneered (Both side) Formica pressedincluding complete oxide iron mongory i/c doorlipping hinges, handles & door stopper, etc. asper drawings and instructions of the Engineer.Contractor to make detailed shop dwgs for theapproval of consultant before start of work. (costof chowket to be paid separately)

a). Wooden single shutter flush door. 19 Sft.

25 Applying French or spirit polishing, two coat ofapproved make on wood work at any height inany floor.

42 Sft.

26 Supplying, hoisting and fixing in position of SteelWire Rope Cable with brass Pulleys as per thesection shown in the drawings includingembossed words aluminum scale level indicator,G.I Pipe, L frames, Stands, shafts, jointing,drillings, nuts, bolts, and copper float assemblycomplete in all respect as per drawing design andas per direction of the Engineer.

1 Job.



(Rs.)Rate

27 Supplying and fixing of C.I Sluice valve (imported)PN-16 rating with flanged ends drilled and havingall cast iron components as per B.S Standards5163, solid forged bronze inside screw spindle.Spindle nut valve and seat faces of hard wearresisting, manufactured from gunmetal, paintedblack all over with asphalt base paint, i/c jointing& fitting etc. complete in all respect and as perdirection of the Engineer.

a). 150 mm Dia 1 No.b). 200 mm Dia 1 No.c). 300 mm Dia 1 No.d). Non return valve 300 mm Dia 1 No.e). Altitude valve 200 mm Dia 1 No.

28 Providing & fixing M.S pipe made out of M.Ssheet 7.9 mm thick conforming to API 5L grade X-42 helical seam submerged arc welded carbonsteel pipe with externally coated of 3-layerpolyethylene and epoxy coated internallyconforming to B.S specification including clamps,nuts, bolts, jointing, testing and all othernecessary accessories required for fixing etccomplete in all respect and as per direction of theEngineer.

a). M.S Pipe 150 mm dia. 34 Rftb). M.S Pipe 200 mm dia. 316 Rftc). M.S Pipe 300 mm dia. 101 Rft

29 Providing & laying M.S fittings made out of M.Ssheet 7.9 mm thick conforming to API 5L grade X-42 helical seam submerged arc welded carbonsteel pipe with internally & externally epoxycoated conforming to B.S specification includingnuts, bolt, packing, jointing, testing etc completein all respect and as per direction of the Engineer.

a). 200mm Dia. Elbow 90o 14 No.b). 300mm Dia. Elbow 90o 3 No.c). 300mm Dia. Equal Tee 1 No.d). 300mm x 300mm x 300mm Dia. Y Tee 1 No.e). Bell mouth 150mm Dia 1 No.f). M.S Flanges 200mm Dia. 91 No.g). M.S Flanges 300mm Dia. 12 No.h). M.S Flanges Reducer 200mm x 150mm Dia. 1 No.

30 Providing and fixing CI Goose Neck Vent 4" Dia.with aluminum grating as per drawings designsuitable for fixing in the roof of over head tankweighing 40 Kg each. Complete in all respect asper drawing design and approval of the Engineer.

2 No.

31 Connection of OH Tank outlet pipe with theinternal water supply network of the campsite.

1 Job.

32 Connection of OH Tank inlet pipe with the watersupply source of the campsite.

1 Job.

33 Providing and fixing C.I Flanged 150mm dia floatvalve (Imported) along with all accessoriesrequired & as per specifications & direction of theEngineer.

1 No.



(Rs.)Rate

34 Construction of chamber. The dimensions are asunder. The work comprises of 9" thick B.Bmasonry walls set in cement mortar 1:3, 6" thickbottom slab of RCC 1:2:4 on 4" C.C 1:4:8 bed,top slab of chamber will be 6" thick RCC 1:2:4with and i/c 18"x18" C.I cover with frame,providing 2 layers of bitumen coating waterproofing membrane on outer surface of walls incontact with earth, including excavation,backfilling, disposal of surplus earth to designatedarea 3/4" thick cement sand plaster (1:3) on innerand outer surfaces of wall cost of steel etc.complete as per drawing & as per direction of theEngineer.

Size 4'x4'x depth (As Per Drawing) 3 Nos.

35 Providing and applying Non-Slip multilayeredEpoxy Floor Coating System in three Layers of100 micron each (Total 300 micron) includingsurface preparation and application of primer intoabsorbent sub floors & Wall.

3,840 Sft

36 Providing and fixing in position uPVC pipes pushfit type for soil, waste, water & vent pipe asembedded in floor and wall or suspended fromslab or clamped to wall including plugs, specials(bend, tees, Y-tee etc.) Making requisite numberof holes with pvc sleeve pipe class "B" in wallsand floors where required and making good thesame as necessary to the structure labelingtesting to 6.5 Ft. water height complete.

6 Rft

37 Supplying & fixing in position anodized Aluminum600mm wide ladder for OHWT internal bowlcomplete with all necessary accessories as perthe drawings and specification and as perdirection of the Engineer.

1 Job

38 Providing and applying acrylic reinforcedcementations flexible water proof coating asapproved by the Engineer.

3,464 Sft

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-v) Rs.

BOQ - External Elect WorksPage 71 of 75


In Figure In WordsSub Head - E (vi) - External Electrical WorkNote: Supplying, installation at any height, testing and

commissioning of the following items of work (unlessspecifically stated otherwise) including all materials, labor,tools, plants, accessories as required for proper completionof each item in all respect lead and lift as per drawings,approved shop drawings, miscellaneous details andinstructions of Engineer. Contractor is required to submittechnical brochures, details, samples of the light fixture,poles, upvc pipe, cable etc. for the approval of the worksconsultant / Client .

Street Light Pole1 Providing and erecting as approved type steel

tubular octagonal/ Conical decorative, CountryOrigin & shipped imported 10meter long hot dipgalvanized electric pole, complete with arm, coverbase plate and as per following specification.

• Wall thickness 5 mm• Diameters 60mm top dia /180 mm bottom dia inner.• Arm -Decorative as approved.• Stiffeners 04 nos.• Base plate 400X400X19mm thick• Inspection window 110/450 mm• Nos. of holes 4 Nos.

a). Single arm Pole 10 Each

TERMINAL BOX2 Providing, fixing and connecting of termination

box IP44 protection fitting with a L/N+E circuitinclude 10Amp SP MCB, TPN+E connectorinsulator as approved (as standard). The box isfitted with a front adjustable hook with lock. Thesupply cable in the bottom of the box are fastenedby means of collar.

10 Each

Pvc Pipe3 uPvc conduit 50 mm dia complete with all bends,

tees, boxes, saddles etc for concealed wiringComplete with excavation and back filling, supplyand fixing.

20 Mtr

4 uPvc conduit 100 mm dia complete with allbends, tees, boxes, saddles etc for concealedwiring, Complete with excavation and back fillingsupply and fixing.

20 Mtr

5 uPvc conduit 150 mm dia complete with allbends, tees, boxes, saddles etc for concealedwiring, Complete with excavation and back fillingsupply and fixing.

30 Mtr

BILL OF QUANTITIES


(Rs.)Rate



(Rs.)Rate

RCC Foundation for road lighting pole6 Construction of RCC foundation for road lights

pole as per following specification or asapproved:-Excavation of soft/ hard soil size 900x 900 x1500mmRCC foundation (Ratio 1:2:4) size 600x 600 x1500mmLength of MS bolt steel 12nos 1/2" dia1/4"dia MS steel @ 300 c/c 6# RingTemplate 400 x 400 x 19mm thick1"x 4nos MS Galvanized anchore bolt 3' long 4-Nos.2 Nos 2" dia u-pvc pipe for incoming and outgoingcable.

10 Each

LED Road light7 Providing, fixing and connecting at electric pole of

LED Light (IP--65) LED equipped with adjust inlight output. Specification must meet or exceedthe following Luminaries Electronic protect degree: 0° - 5° - 10° - 15° Class : II Total protectiondegree : IP 65 Working Temperature -35-65degree C, Humidity: 10 % - 90%. ReferenceStandards: EN 60598-1, EN 60598-2-1, EN60598-2-3, EN 55015, EN 61547, EN 61000-3-2,EN Rated Voltage : - 240V Frequency : 50/60 HzExpected Life - Time : ≥ 50000 hr Fixing System :Post-top or Frame Body: High pressure die-casting aluminum, spirit : Tempered Flat Glass,Optical unit : High Efficiency technology of lightdistribution performance, Cable Clamp : (CountryOrigin & shipped imported approved type)

a). 70 Watts LED Light 10 Each

b). Bollard LED LightProviding, fixing and connecting of electric Bollardwith 23watts LED Light (IP-65) LED equipped.Specification must meet or exceed the followingLuminaries Electronic protect degree : 0° - 5° -10° - 15° Class : II Total protection degree : IP 65Working Temperature -35-65 degree as approvedtype complete with CC pad, cable connector andother installation accessories as required.

5 Each

Cable8 Providing laying and connection and testing of 3-

Core 2.5mmsq PVC insulated 300/500 voltsgrade copper conductor cable from terminal boxmounted on pole to light arm. as directed by theengineer complete with all wiring accessories.

150 Meter



(Rs.)Rate

FEEDER CABLES9 Providing laying, connecting and testing of cable

armored 600 / 1000 volts grade copper conductorburied 30" deep in the ground for external lighting/ DBs, route as shown on the drawing or asdirected by the Engineer complete with u-PVCpipe heavy gauge water tied socket, bend,warning tape cable gland of suitable size on bothends and all other installation accessoriesincluding excavation and back filling etc .

a). 4C -240mm2 cu-Pvc/Pvc/SWA/PVC cable (Fromwade to LT Panel)

25 Meter

b). 4C -185mm2 cu-Pvc/Pvc/SWA/PVC cable (FromGenset to LT Panel)

25 Meter

c). 4C - 10mm2 cu-Pvc/Pvc/SWA/PVC cable+1X6mm2 PVC ECC laid in 50mm dia uPvc pipe withaccessories. (for Road lighting)

400 Meter

d). 4C - 16mm2 cu-Pvc/Pvc/SWA/PVC cable laid in50mm dia uPvc pipe with accessories. (for Roadlighting)

15 Meter

e). 4C - 6mm2 cu-Pvc/Pvc cable + 1x 6mm2 pvcECC laid in 32mm dia uPvc pipe withaccessories. (for Bollard lighting)

100 Meter

DISTRIBUTION BOARD10 Providing, installing, connecting, testing and

commissioning D.B wall/floor mounted IP-55housed in 16 SWG sheet steel housing, dust /weather proof, hinged door/lock, suitable for 500volts, 3 phase, 4 wires and earth terminal ACsystem as approved by the Engineer, includingfloor mounted DB foundation complete with allaccessories. The D.B comprises of:-

a). DISTRIBUTION BOARD - MAINIncoming2-630 A TP Mccb 36KA1-Inter looking system6-Indication lamps1-Voltmeter scaled-0-500 V1-Volt selector switch1-Ammeter scaled-0-630A1-Amps selector switch3-curent transfer scaled-5-630ATPN+E Busbar

Outgoing1-400 A TP Mccb 25KA (for DB-UG-P)3-125 A TP Mccb 13KA (for Tube well)1-100 A TP Mccb 13KA (for F Station)1-100 A TP Mccb 13KA (for Spare)1-60 A TP Mccb 13KA (for Spare)5-30 A TP Mccb 13KA 2-15 A TP Mccb 13KA 2-15 A TP Mccb 13KA 1 Job.



(Rs.)Rate

b). DB-RL-1 (for Road lighting)In coming 1-30 A TP MccB 10-KA3-Indication LampsOutgoing5-15 A TP McB 7.5-KA4-Magnatic contactor TP 15 A ith 4-Togle switch SP 1.0.24-Magnatic contactor TP 15 A ith 4-Photo Electric switch type (EE-8020-821) 1 Job.

EARTHING11 Providing installing connecting and testing of

Earthing sets of 18" x 18" x 1/8" thick copperplate buried at 15 ft. deep in the ground or to thedepth of water level which over is more work toinclude digging of earth pit and refilling with sand,complete with necessary salt and shora 50 Kg.each to make the specified results according toIEE regulation, and latest B.S. standards.Complete with all accessories, like brass nut-boltsand washer etc. as per Engineer approval. Theearth pit should be at 8 feet away from thebuilding foundation.

3 No.

12 Providing , laying and connecting 3/0 SWG harddrawing bare copper leads from Earthing plates to panels (MDB's) as shown on the drg. Or asdirected by the Engineer. The copper leads to belaid in suitable size of G. I. Pipe complete with allG. I. pipe and other accessories.

30 Mtr

DG Set.13 Supply, installation, connecting, testing and

commissioning of 250 KVA, 200 KW prime power1500 RPM at 0.80 PF 415/220 volts, 3 phase 50Hz output stand by Diesel Generator set directlycoupled with Alternator, made by FG Wilson,caterpillar, Yanmar or from any other worldrenowned manufacturer as approved by theEngineer, complete in all exhaust duct, silencersmoke exhaust and all respect as per approvedtechnical specification including as under.

● 12 V battery set● Modular design air cleaner with service indicator.● Radiator for operation up to 50ºC● Exhaust outlet flange● Primary & secondary fuel filters● Fuel pressure gauge● Oil drain line with valve● Base fuel tank (8 HR, capacity)● Charging alternator● Circuit bracker● Tool kitControl panel is equipped with following standarditems

Instruments: Voltmeter, ammeter, teach meter,hours run meter, battery condition voltmeterregulator.



(Rs.)Rate

Controls: Start/stop key switch, voltmeter phase,selector switch 7 pos, ammeter phase selectorswitch 4 pos.

Shutdown Protection devices with indication forhigh coolant temperature and low oil pressure,etc. Approved by the Engineer, complete with allinstallation accessories as per specification.

1 Job

Connection charges14 Providing electrical connection with duly signed

test reports according to requirements andacceptable to electric inspector for above works,including obtaining of NOC from electricalinspector, the contractor shall also fill the FESCOapplication with necessary electrical load, forgetting the electric connection with energy meter(for each transformer) complete with allconnection and government, semi governmentcharges as required ready for use.

1 Job.

(Rupees : _______________________________________________________________________________________________)


In Word

Total Amount of Sub-Head (E-vi) Rs.


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BD-8 Appendix-D to Bid

BILL OF QUANTITIES

C. Daywork Schedule General 1. Reference is made to Sub-Clause 52.4 of the General Conditions of Contract Part-I. Work shall

not be executed on a day work basis except by written order of the Engineer. Bidders shall enter basic rates for Daywork items in the Schedules, which rates shall apply to any quantity of Daywork ordered by the Engineer. Nominal quantities have been indicated against each item of Daywork, and the extended total for Daywork shall be carried forward to the Bid Price.

Daywork Labour 2. In calculating payments due to the Contractor for the execution of Daywork, the actual time of

classes of labour directly doing the Daywork ordered by the Engineer and for which they are competent to perform will be measured excluding meal breaks and rest periods. The time of gangers (charge hands) actually doing work with the gang will also be measured but not the time of foreman or other supervisory personnel.

3. The Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of the total time that labour is employed on

Daywork, calculated at the basic rates entered by him in the Schedule of Daywork Rates for labour together with an additional percentage, payment on basic rates representing the Contractor’s profit, overheads, etc., as described below:

a) the basic rates for labour shall cover all direct costs to the Contractor, including (but not

limited to) the amount of wages paid to such labour, transportation time, overtime, subsistence allowances and any sums paid to or on behalf of such labour for social benefits in accordance with Pakistan law. The basic rates will be payable in local currency only; and

b) the additional percentage payment to be quoted by the Bidder and applied to costs

incurred under (a) above shall be deemed to cover the Contractor’s profit, overheads, superintendence, liabilities and insurances and allowances to labour timekeeping and clerical and office work; the use of consumable stores, water, lighting and power; the use and repair of stagings, scaffolding, workshops and stores, portable power tools, manual plant and tools; supervision by the Contractor’s staff, foremen and other supervisory personnel; and charges incidental to the foregoing.

BD-08 to BD-15 of Standard Form of Bidding Documents for Procurement of Civil Works are deleted being Not Applicable.


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BE-1 Appendix-E to Bid

PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Pursuant to Sub-Clause 43.1 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Works shall be completed on or before the date stated in Appendix-A to Bid. The Bidder shall provide as Appendix-E to Bid, the Construction Schedule in the bar chart (CPM, PERT or any other to be specified herein) showing the sequence of work items and the period of time during which he proposes to complete each work item in such a manner that his proposed programme for completion of the whole of the Works and parts of the Works may meet Employer’s completion targets in days noted below and counted from the date of receipt of Engineer’s Notice to Commence (Attach sheets as required for the specified form of Construction Schedule)

Description Time for Completion a) Whole Works _______________ days b) Part-A _______________days (If applicable) c) Part-B _______________days (If applicable) d) ___________ _______________ days e) ___________ _______________ days


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BF-1 Appendix-F to Bid

METHOD OF PERFORMING THE WORK

The Bidder is required to submit a narrative outlining the method of performing the Work. The narrative should indicate in detail and include but not be limited to: 1. Organization Chart indicating head office and field office personnel involved in

management and supervision, engineering, equipment maintenance and purchasing.

2. Mobilization in Pakistan, the type of facilities including personnel accommodation, office accommodation, provision for maintenance and for storage, communications, security and other services to be used.

3. The method of executing the Works, the procedures for installation of equipment and machinery and transportation of equipment and materials to the site.

4. Quality control / Quality assurance measures to be adopted including procedures to be followed for carrying out all tests required under specifications.


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BG-1 Appendix-G to Bid

LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT - RELATED ITEMS

The Bidder will provide a list of all major equipment and related items, under separate heading for items owned, to be purchased or to be arranged on lease by him to carry out the Works. The information shall include make, type, capacity, and anticipated period of utilization for all equipment which shall be in sufficient detail to demonstrate fully that the equipment will meet all requirements of the Specifications.

LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT

Owned Purchased or Leased

Description of Unit (Make,

Model, Year)

Capacity HP

Rating

Condition Present Location or Source

Date of Delivery at

Site

Period of Work on Project

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a. Owned

b. To be Purchased

c. To be arranged on Lease


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BG-2 Appendix-G to Bid

Equipment: The Bidder must demonstrate that it has the key equipment listed hereafter:

No.

PLANT/ EQUIPMENT

Equipment type and characteristics

Total Nos.

available

Under Utilization on other projects,

if applicable

Nos. waiting to be shifted

to new project(s)

Min. Number Required for this Project


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BH-1 Appendix-H to Bid

CONSTRUCTION CAMP AND HOUSING FACILITIES

The Contractor in accordance with Clause 34 of the Conditions of Contract shall provide description of his construction camp’s facilities and staff housing requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for pumps, electrical power, water and electrical distribution systems, and sewerage system including all fittings, pipes and other items necessary for servicing the Contractor’s construction camp. The Bidder shall list or explain his plans for providing these facilities for the service of the Contract as follows: 1. Site Preparation (clearing, land preparation, etc.). 2. Provision of Services.

a) Power (expected power load, etc.). b) Water (required amount and system proposed). c) Sanitation (sewage disposal system, etc.).

3. Construction of Facilities

a) Contractor’s Office. Workshop and Work Areas (areas required and proposed layout, type of construction of buildings, etc.).

b) Warehouses and Storage Areas (area required, type of construction and layout). c) Housing and Staff Facilities (Plans for housing for proposed staff, layout, type of

construction, etc.). 4. Construction Equipment Assembly and Preparation (detailed plans for carrying out this

activity). 5. Other Items Proposed (Security services, etc.). The Contractor should mention here

what are his proposed environmental measures for the project as per EPA rules like treatment of wastewater and water quality etc. The Contractor shall submit a detailed EMP (Environmental Management Plan) to describe how materials are removed from site and disposed off at a safe location, prevention for the contamination of ground and surface water in neighboring areas etc. including remedial measures for adoption.

6. Detail of testing Lab with testing equipment etc.


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BI-1 Appendix-I to Bid

LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

I/We intend to subcontract the following parts of the Work to subcontractors. In my/our opinion, the subcontractors named hereunder are reliable and competent to perform that part of the work for which each is listed. Enclosed are documentation outlining experience of subcontractors, the curriculum vitae and experience of their key personnel who will be assigned to the Contract, equipment to be supplied by them, size, location and type of contracts carried out in the past.

Part of Works (Give Details)

Subcontractor (With Complete Address)

1 2


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BJ-1 Appendix-J to Bid

ESTIMATED PROGRESS PAYMENTS

Bidder’s estimate of the value of work which would be executed by him during each of the periods stated below, based on his Programme of the Works and the Rates in the Bill of Quantities, expressed in thousands of Pakistani Rupees:

Month Amounts (1,000 Rs.)

1 2

1st Quarter

2nd Quarter

3rd Quarter

4th Quarter

-----------------

-----------------

-----------------

Bid Price


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BK-1 Appendix-K to Bid

ORGANIZATION CHART

FOR THE SUPERVISORY STAFF AND LABOUR


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BL-1 Appendix-L to Bid

(INTEGRITY PACT)

DECLARATION OF FEES, COMMISSION AND BROKERAGE ETC. PAYABLE BY THE SUPPLIERS OF GOODS, SERVICES & WORKS IN

CONTRACTS WORTH RS. 10.00 MILLION OR MORE

Contract No.________________ Dated __________________ Contract Value: ________________ Contract Title: _________________

………………………………… [name of Supplier] hereby declares that it has not obtained or induced the procurement of any contract, right, interest, privilege or other obligation or benefit from Government of Pakistan (GoP) or any administrative subdivision or agency thereof or any other entity owned or controlled by GoP through any corrupt business practice. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, [name of Supplier] represents and warrants that it has fully declared the brokerage, commission, fees etc. paid or payable to anyone and not given or agreed to give and shall not give or agree to give to anyone within or outside Pakistan either directly or indirectly through any natural or juridical person, including its affiliate, agent, associate, broker, consultant, director, promoter, shareholder, sponsor or subsidiary, any commission, gratification, bribe, finder’s fee or kickback, whether described as consultation fee or otherwise, with the object of obtaining or inducing the procurement of a contract, right, interest, privilege or other obligation or benefit in whatsoever form from GoP, except that which has been expressly declared pursuant hereto. [name of Supplier] certifies that it has made and will make full disclosure of all agreements and arrangements with all persons in respect of or related to the transaction with GoP and has not taken any action or will not take any action to circumvent the above declaration, representation or warranty. [name of Supplier] accepts full responsibility and strict liability for making any false declaration, not making full disclosure, misrepresenting facts or taking any action likely to defeat the purpose of this declaration, representation and warranty. It agrees that any contract, right, interest, privilege or other obligation or benefit obtained or procured as aforesaid shall, without prejudice to any other rights and remedies available to GoP under any law, contract or other instrument, be voidable at the option of GoP. Notwithstanding any rights and remedies exercised by GoP in this regard, [name of Supplier] agrees to indemnify GoP for any loss or damage incurred by it on account of its corrupt business practices and further pay compensation to GoP in an amount equivalent to ten time the sum of any commission, gratification, bribe, finder’s fee or kickback given by [name of Supplier] as aforesaid for the purpose of obtaining or inducing the procurement of any contract, right, interest, privilege or other obligation or benefit in whatsoever form from GoP.

Name of Buyer: ……………… Name of Seller/Supplier: ………… Signature: …………………… Signature: …………………………

[Seal] [Seal]


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BM-1 Appendix-M to Bid

FINANCIAL COMPETENCE AND ACCESS TO FINANCIAL RESOURCES

The financial position of the bidder shall be checked as per following details: 1. SOUNDNESS AND ACCESS TO FINANCIAL RESOURCES:

“The Bidder must demonstrate access to, or availability of, financial resources such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets, lines of credits, and other financial means, other than any contractual advance payments, to meet the financial requirements of the contract in the amount of his bid. As a minimum the Bidder must show that his resources, in term of at least his latest years working capital and line of credits, will be adequate to cover an amount equivalent to his bid price and current work commitments i.e.

[5 x working capital + Project specific lines of credit*– 40% of current contract commitments] > Bid price.

Working capital is the difference between current assets and current liabilities and measures the firm’s ability to generate cash in the short term.”

*Any line of credit indicated for this (tendered) project needs to have been certified by the Bank and the said certificate is enclosed with this Appendix.

2. AVERAGE ANNUAL CONSTRUCTION TURNOVER

Criteria Bidders’ to list their certified yearly turnover for last 3 years

Minimum average annual construction turnover of Pak Rs. ___________ calculated as total certified payments received for contracts in progress or completed, within the last 03 years.


APPENDIX

APPENDIX

BN-1 Appendix-N to Bid

PAST PERFORMANCE, CURRENT COMMITMENT, QUALIFICATION AND

EXPERIENCE 1) General Construction Experience

Requirement Bidder to provide details Role Experience under construction contracts in the role of contractor, subcontractor, or management contractor for at least the last 5 years prior to the bid submission deadline

2) Contracts of Similar Size and Nature

Requirement Bidder to provide specific details Role

Participation as contractor, management contractor, or subcontractor, in at least 2 Contracts within the last 5 years, each with a value of at least Rs . . . . . . . . that has been successfully or is substantially completed and that are similar to the proposed works. The similarity shall be based on the physical size, complexity, methods, technology or other characteristics as indicated in these Bidding Documents.


APPENDIX

APPENDIX


3) Personnel

No. Position Total

No. in

the firm

Minimum requirement

for the project

Total work experience

(years)

Nos. already posted

on other projects

Nos. being

allocated for this project

Professional credit point

The Bidder must demonstrate that it has the personnel for the key positions that meet the following requirements:


APPENDIX

APPENDIX


4) Data regarding past performance and present commitment of the Bidders:

Present Commitment Sr. No.

Name of ongoing projects

Name of Employer

Date of Progress Remark regarding delays if

applicable

Satisfactory performance

certificate from

Employer (Minimum

requirement)

Start Completion %Age

as Planned

%Age as

Planned

Number of projects that a bidder can undertake to construct as per PEC works by laws is aggregate Professional Credit Points (PCPs) authorized for a category of licensee divided by the PCP of construction and capital cost of single project under consideration. For example C-3 category contractor should have a minimum of 15 PCPs as per table „A‟ below from the Bye Laws/S.R.O. 568(I)/87 at all times and the PCP of individual project (costing say 100 million rupees) is 5 calculated on the basis of 1 PCP for every 20 million project cost. It means the contractor can have ongoing projects up to 3 (15 ÷ 5) number of this size. Table A:-

Contractor’ Category

Limit of Construction

Cost of Project (Million rupees )

Average annual value of work for last 3 years

(million rupees)

Largest project

value during last 5 years

(Million rupees)

Paid up capital or net/capital

worth (million rupees)

Minimum requirement

of professional credit points (PCP credit)

C-3 Upto 100 10 20 5 15 The evaluation of the personnel shall be carried out as per PEC Engineering Bye Laws 1987 and review his qualification accordingly. PCP/ minimum requirement of staff required for the contractor’s works in hand should be in accordance with the provisions of PEC’s works byelaws. For example, subject to the other conditional points and limits, a single registered Engineer is given 1 PCP for each year of experience in the construction and operation of engineering works (subject to a minimum of 10 PCPs and maximum of 30 PCPs). The contractor setup has to meet the minimum PCP requirements all time during the currency of the contract for engineering staff to be deployed/ already deployed.

FFOORRMMSS •• BBIIDD SSEECCUURRIITTYY •• FFOORRMM OOFF PPEERRFFOORRMMAANNCCEE SSEECCUURRIITTYY •• FFOORRMM OOFF CCOONNTTRRAACCTT AAGGRREEEEMMEENNTT •• FFOORRMM MMOOBBIILLIIZZAATTIIOONN AADDVVAANNCCEE

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEE//BBOONNDD •• IINNDDEEMMNNIITTYY BBOONNDD FFOORR SSEECCUURREEDD

AADDVVAANNCCEE AAGGAAIINNSSTT MMAATTEERRIIAALL BBRROOUUGGHHTT AATT SSIITTEE

BS-1

BID SECURITY

Security Executed on _____________________________________________________________ (Date) Name of Surety (Bank) with Address: ________________________________________________

(Scheduled Bank in Pakistan) Name of Principal (Bidder) with Address ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Penal Sum of Security Rupees ____________________________ (Rs._____________________) Bid Reference No. _______________________________________________________ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that in pursuance of the terms of the Bid and at the request of the said Principal (Bidder) we, the Surety above named, are held and firmly bound unto _____________________________________________ (hereinafter called the 'Employer') in the sum stated above for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Bidder has submitted the accompanying Bid dated ______ for Bid No. _______ for_______(Particulars of Bid) to the said Employer; and WHEREAS, the Employer has required as a condition for considering said Bid that the Bidder furnishes a Bid Security in the above said sum from a Scheduled Bank in Pakistan or from a foreign bank duly counter-guaranteed by a Scheduled Bank in Pakistan, to the Employer, conditioned as under: (1) that the Bid Security shall remain in force up to and including the date 28 days after the

deadline for validity of bids as stated in the Instructions to Bidders or as it may be extended by the Employer, notice of which extension(s) to the Surety is hereby waived;

(2) that the Bid Security of unsuccessful Bidders will be returned by the Employer after expiry

of its validity or upon signing of the Contract Agreement; and (3) that in the event of failure of the successful Bidder to execute the proposed Contract

Agreement for such work and furnish the required Performance Security, the entire said sum be paid immediately to the said Employer pursuant to Clause 15.6 of the Instruction to Bidders for the successful Bidder's failure to perform.

NOW THEREFORE, if the successful Bidder shall, within the period specified therefor, on the prescribed form presented to him for signature enter into a formal Contract with the said Employer in accordance with his Bid as accepted and furnish within twenty eight (28) days of his being requested to do so, a Performance Security with good and sufficient surety, as may be required, upon the form prescribed by the said Employer for the faithful performance and proper fulfilment of the said Contract or in the event of non-withdrawal of the said Bid within the time specified for its validity then this obligation shall be void and of no effect, but otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED THAT the Surety shall forthwith pay the Employer the said sum upon first written demand of the Employer (without cavil or argument) and without requiring the Employer to prove or to show grounds or reasons for such demand, notice of which shall be sent by the Employer by registered post duly addressed to the Surety at its address given above.

BS-2 PROVIDED ALSO THAT the Employer shall be the sole and final judge for deciding whether the Principal (Bidder) has duly performed his obligations to sign the Contract Agreement and to furnish the requisite Performance Security within the time stated above, or has defaulted in fulfilling said requirements and the Surety shall pay without objection the said sum upon demand from the Employer forthwith and without any reference to the Principal (Bidder) or any other person. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounden Surety has executed the instrument under its seal on the date indicated above, the name and seal of the Surety being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative pursuant to authority of its governing body. SURETY

WITNESS: Signature 1. Name Title Corporate Secretary (Seal) Corporate Guarantor (Seal) 2. __________________________

Name, Title & Address

PS-1

FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY

Guarantee No.____________________

Executed on _____________________ Expiry date _____________________

[Letter by the Guarantor to the Employer] Name of Guarantor (Bank) with address:____________________________________________ (Scheduled Bank in Pakistan) Name of Principal (Contractor) with address: __________________________________________ Penal Sum of Security (express in words and figures) ___________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Letter of Acceptance No. __________________________________ Dated __________________ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that in pursuance of the terms of the Bidding Documents and above said Letter of Acceptance (hereinafter called the Documents) and at the request of the said Principal we, the Guarantor above named, are held and firmly bound unto the __________________________________________________ (hereinafter called the Employer) in the penal sum of the amount stated above for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made to the said Employer, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has accepted the Employer's above said Letter of Acceptance for ______________________________________ (Name of Contract) for the __________________________________________ (Name of Project). NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal (Contractor) shall well and truly perform and fulfill all the undertakings, covenants, terms and conditions of the said Documents during the original terms of the said Documents and any extensions thereof that may be granted by the Employer, with or without notice to the Guarantor, which notice is, hereby, waived and shall also well and truly perform and fulfill all the undertakings, covenants terms and conditions of the Contract and of any and all modifications of said Documents that may hereafter be made, notice of which modifications to the Guarantor being hereby waived, then, this obligation to be void; otherwise to remain in full force and virtue till all requirements of Clause 49, Defects Liability, of Conditions of Contract are fulfilled. Our total liability under this Guarantee is limited to the sum stated above and it is a condition of any liability attaching to us under this Guarantee that the claim for payment in writing shall be received by us within the validity period of this Guarantee, failing which we shall be discharged of our liability, if any, under this Guarantee. We, ____________________________________ (the Guarantor), waiving all objections and defences under the Contract, do hereby irrevocably and independently guarantee to pay to the Employer without delay upon the Employer's first written demand without cavil or arguments and without requiring the Employer to prove or to show grounds or reasons for such demand any sum or sums up to the amount stated above, against the Employer's written declaration that the Principal has refused or failed to perform the obligations under the Contract which payment will be effected by the Guarantor to Employer’s designated Bank & Account Number. PROVIDED ALSO THAT the Employer shall be the sole and final judge for deciding whether the Principal (Contractor) has duly performed his obligations under the Contract or has defaulted in fulfilling said obligations and the Guarantor shall pay without objection any sum or sums up to the amount stated above upon first written demand from the Employer forthwith and without any reference to the Principal or any other person.

PS-2 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounden Guarantor has executed this Instrument under its seal on the date indicated above, the name and corporate seal of the Guarantor being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. _______________ Guarantor Witness: 1. _______________________ Signature _______________ _______________________ Name __________________ Corporate Secretary (Seal) Title ___________________ 2. _______________________ _______________________ _______________________ Name, Title & Address Corporate Guarantor (Seal)

CA-1

FORM OF CONTRACT AGREEMENT THIS CONTRACT AGREEMENT (hereinafter called the “Agreement”) made on the ________ day of_________(month) 2019 between ______________________________________________ (hereafter called the “Employer”) of the one part and ____________________________________ (hereafter called the “Contractor”) of the other part. WHEREAS the Employer is desirous that certain Works, viz _______________ should be executed by the Contractor and has accepted a Bid by the Contractor for the execution and completion of such Works and the remedying of any defects therein. NOW this Agreement witnesseth as follows: 1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are

respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to. 2. The following documents after incorporating addenda / Clarification as agreed or otherwise,

if any, except those parts relating to Instructions to Bidders shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Contract, viz:: a). The Contract Agreement; b). The Letter of Acceptance; c). The completed Form of Bid; d). Specification - Special Provision e). Special Stipulations (Appendix-A to Bid); f). The Particular Conditions of Contract - Part II; g). The General Conditions - Part I; h). Tender Drawings; i). Specifications - Technical Provisions j). The completed Appendices to Bid (B, C, E to O); k). The priced Bill of Quantities (Appendix-D to Bid); l). ____________ (any other)

3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute and complete the Works and remedy defects therein in conformity and in all respects with the provisions of the Contract.

4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor, in consideration of the execution

and completion of the Works as per provisions of the Contract, the Contract Price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.

CA-2 IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed on the day __________, month __________ and year __________ first before written in accordance with their respective laws. For and on behalf of EMPLOYER For and on behalf of CONTRACTOR Signature ___________________ Signature ___________________ Name: Name: Designation: Designation: ______________________ _____________________ (Seal) (Seal) Signed, Sealed and Delivered in the presence of: WITNESS: WITNESS: Name: Name: Designation: Designation: CNIC No.__________________ CNIC No. __________________ Signature ___________________ Signature ___________________ Authorized Signatory of remaining part of Documents (For Client) (For Contractor) Name: Name: Designation: Designation:

MG-1

MOBILIZATION ADVANCE GUARANTEE/ BOND Guarantee No._________________________ Date ______________________________ WHEREAS ______________(hereinafter called the 'Employer') has entered into a Contract for _____________________________________________________ (Particulars of Contract) with _________________ (hereinafter called the ‘Contractor'). AND WHEREAS, the Employer has agreed to advance to the Contractor, at the Contractor's request, an amount of Rupees _________________________ (Rs _____________) which amount shall be advanced to the Contractor as per provisions of the Contract. AND WHEREAS, the Employer has asked the Contractor to furnish Guarantee to secure the mobilization advance for the performance of his obligations under the said Contract. AND WHEREAS, _______________________________ (Scheduled Bank in Pakistan) (hereinafter called the “Guarantor”) at the request of the Contractor and in consideration of the Employer agreeing to make the above advance to the Contractor, has agreed to furnish the said Guarantee. NOW, THEREFORE, the Guarantor hereby guarantees that the Contractor shall use the advance for the purpose of above mentioned Contract and if he fails and commits default in fulfillment of any of his obligations for which the advance payment is made, the Guarantor shall be liable to the Employer for payment not exceeding the aforementioned amount. Notice in writing of any default, of which the Employer shall be the sole and final judge, on the part of the Contractor, shall be given by the Employer to the Guarantor, and on such first written demand, payment shall be made by the Guarantor of all sums then due under this Guarantee without any reference to the Contractor and without any objection. This Guarantee shall remain in force until the advance is fully adjusted against payments from the Interim Payment Certificates of the Contractor or until _____________ (Date) whichever is earlier. The Guarantor's liability under this Guarantee shall not in any case exceed the sum of Rupees _______________________________________(Rs _______________________). This Guarantee shall remain valid up to the aforesaid date and shall be null and void after the aforesaid date or earlier if the advance made to the Contractor is fully adjusted against payments from Interim Payment Certificates of the Contractor provided that the Guarantor agrees that the aforesaid period of validity shall be deemed to be extended if on the above mentioned date the advance payment is not fully adjusted. GUARANTOR 1. Signature _________________ 2. Name _________________

3. Title _________________ WITNESS 1. ______________________

______________________ Corporate Secretary (Seal)

2. _______________________ __________________________ (Name Title & Address) Corporate Guarantor (Seal)

IB-1

INDEMINITY BOND FOR SECURED ADVANCE

AGAINST MATERIALS BROUGHT AT SITE (ON RS.40 NONJUDICIAL STAMP PAPER)

This Deed of Indemnity is issued by M/s. _________________________ (Name of the Contractor) in favour of M/s._____________________________________ (Name of the Employer) Whereas ________________________________________ (hereinafter called the Employer) has paid the Secured Advance against the cost of material through any Bank or like agency by any other method by virtue of the terms of the contract existing between the parties. The details of the material and their price for which secured advance is being sought for the period __________________________ till consumption of the material is as under: 1. ___________________ at Rs.__________________ per _________ = Rs. 2. ___________________ at Rs.__________________ per _________ = Rs. 3. ___________________ at Rs.__________________ per _________ = Rs. 4. ___________________ at Rs.__________________ per _________ = Rs. THEREFORE THIS DEED OF INDEMNITY WITHNESSETH AS FOLLOWS: I/We ____________________________ of M/s. _______________________________________ do hereby indemnify M/s ______________________ for all losses due to thefts, arson, pilferage, loss due to flood and inundation, shortage, deterioration and depreciation etc. through any act of Man or God or slump in the Market of any or all the materials financed or paid by the Employer on our request for financing payment against material. I/We_________________________ shall indemnify ________________________ against any or all claims, action damages arising out of or resulting to the said material. I/We ____________________________ further declare that we will faithfully abide by the above declaration and solemnly affirm that we will not remove, sell, pilferage any of the materials against which M/s ____________________ has paid us such a secured advance and will not pledge the same with any Bank, Finance Corporation, Firm, Company, Individual or the like agency or create any change whereon in any from what so ever. I/We________________________________ do hereby also declare that in the event of my/our infringement of the declaration made above _______________ will be entitled to forfeit all such material and also proceed against me/us according to the relevant clause pertaining to breach of contract and further invoke the power or seek any remedies secured of _________________ under the contract Agreement signed with us or otherwise available under law. Place__________________ Dated _____________________________ Contractor _________________________

PPAARRTT II –– GGEENNEERRAALL CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS OOFF CCOONNTTRRAACCTT

(i)

FEDERATION INTERNATIONAL DES INGENIEURS-CONSEILS

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

FOR WORKS OF CIVIL

ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION PART I GENERAL CONDITIONS WITH FORMS OF TENDER AND AGREEMENT

FOURTH EDITION 1987 Reprinted 1988 with editorial amendments Reprinted in 1992 with further amendments

(ii)

CONTENTS

PART I: GENERAL CONDITIONS Definitions and Interpretation

1.1 Definitions 1.2 Headings and Marginal Notes 1.3 Interpretation 1.4 Singular and Plural 1.5 Notices, Consents, Approvals, Certificates and Determinations

Engineer and Engineer’s Representative

2.1 Engineer’s Duties and Authority 2.2 Engineer’s Representative 2.3 Engineer’s Authority to Delegate 2.4 Appointment of Assistants 2.5 Instructions in Writing 2.6 Engineer to Act Impartially

Assignment and Subcontracting

3.1 Assignment of Contract 4.1 Subcontracting 4.2 Assignment of Subcontractors’ Obligations

Contract Documents

5.1 Language/s and Law 5.2 Priority of Contract Documents 6.1 Custody and Supply of Drawings and Documents 6.2 One Copy of Drawings to be Kept on Site 6.3 Disruption of Progress 6.4 Delays and Cost of Delay of Drawings 6.5 Failure by Contractor to Submit Drawings 7.1 Supplementary Drawings and Instructions 7.2 Permanent Works Designed by Contractor 7.3 Responsibility Unaffected by Approval

General Obligations

8.1 Contractor’s General Responsibilities 8.2 Site Operations and Methods of Construction 9.1 Contract Agreement 10.1 Performance Security 10.2 Period of Validity of Performance Security 10.3 Claims under Performance Security 11.1 Inspection of Site 12.1 Sufficiency of Tender 12.2 Not Foreseeable Physical Obstructions or Conditions

(iii)

13.1 Work to be in Accordance with Contract 14.1 Programme to be Submitted 14.2 Revised Programme 14.3 Cash Flow Estimate to be Submitted 14.4 Contractor not Relieved of Duties or Responsibilities 15.1 Contractor’s Superintendence 16.1 Contractor’s Employees 16.2 Engineer at Liberty to Object 17.1 Setting-out 18.1 Boreholes and Exploratory Excavation 19.1 Safety, Security and Protection of the Environment 19.2 Employer’s Responsibilities 20.1 Care of Works 20.2 Responsibility to Rectify Loss or Damage 20.3 Loss or Damage Due to Employer’s Risks 20.4 Employer’s Risks 21.1 Insurance of Works and Contractor’s Equipment 21.2 Scope of Cover 21.3 Responsibility for Amounts not Recovered 21.4 Exclusions 22.1 Damage to Persons and Property 22.2 Exceptions 22.3 Indemnity by Employer 23.1 Third Party Insurance (including Employer’s Property) 23.2 Minimum Amount of Insurance 23.3 Cross Liabilities 24.1 Accident or Injury to Workmen 24.2 Insurance Against Accident to Workmen 25.1 Evidence and Terms of Insurances 25.2 Adequacy of Insurances 25.3 Remedy on Contractor’s Failure to Insure 25.4 Compliance with Policy Conditions 26.1 Compliance with Statutes, Regulations 27.1 Fossils 28.1 Patent Rights 28.2 Royalties 29.1 Interference With Traffic and Adjoining Properties 30.1 Avoidance of Damage to Roads 30.2 Transport of Contractor’s Equipment or Temporary Works 30.3 Transport of Materials or Plant 30.4 Waterborne Traffic 31.1 Opportunities for Other Contractors 31.2 Facilities for Other Contractors 32.1 Contractor to Keep Site Clear 33.1 Clearance of Site on Completion

Labour

34.1 Engagement of Staff and Labour 35.1 Returns of Labour and Contractor’s Equipment

(iv)

Materials, Plant and Workmanship

36.1 Quality of Materials, Plant and Workmanship 36.2 Cost of Samples 36.3 Cost of Tests 36.4 Cost of Tests not Provided for 36.5 Engineer’s Determination where Tests not Provided for 37.1 Inspection of Operations 37.2 Inspection and Testing 37.3 Dates for Inspection and Testing 37.4 Rejection 37.5 Independent Inspection 38.1 Examination of Work before Covering up 38.2 Uncovering and Making Openings 39.1 Removal of Improper Work, Materials or Plant 39.2 Default of Contractor in Compliance

Suspension

40.1 Suspension of Work 40.2 Engineer’s Determination following Suspension 40.3 Suspension lasting more than 84 Days

Commencement and Delays

41.1 Commencement of Works 42.1 Possession of Site and Access Thereto 42.2 Failure to Give Possession 42.3 Rights of Way and Facilities 43.1 Time for Completion 44.1 Extension of Time for Completion 44.2 Contractor to Provide Notification and Detailed Particulars 44.3 Interim Determination of Extension 45.1 Restriction on Working Hours 46.1 Rate of Progress 47.1 Liquidated Damages for Delay 47.2 Reduction of Liquidated Damages 48.1 Taking-Over Certificate 48.2 Taking-Over of Sections or Parts 48.3 Substantial Completion of Parts 48.4 Surfaces Requiring Reinstatement

Defects Liability

49.1 Defects Liability Period 49.2 Completion of Outstanding Work and Remedying Defects 49.3 Cost of Remedying Defects 49.4 Contractor’s Failure to Carry Out Instructions 50.1 Contractor to Search

(v)

Alterations, Additions and Omissions

51.1 Variations 51.2 Instructions for Variations 52.1 Valuation of Variations 52.2 Power of Engineer to Fix Rates 52.3 Variations Exceeding 15 percent 52.4 Daywork

Procedure for Claims

53.1 Notice of Claims 53.2 Contemporary Records 53.3 Substantiation of Claims 53.4 Failure to Comply 53.5 Payment of Claims

Contractor’s Equipment, Temporary Works and Materials

54.1 Contractor’s Equipment, Temporary Works and Materials; Exclusive Use for the Works.

54.2 Employer not Liable for Damage 54.3 Customs Clearance 54.4 Re-export of Contractor’s Equipment 54.5 Conditions of Hire of Contractor’s Equipment 54.6 Costs for the Purpose of Clause 63 54.7 Incorporation of Clause in Subcontracts 54.8 Approval of Materials not Implied

Measurement

55.1 Quantities 56.1 Works to be Measured 57.1 Method of Measurement 57.2 Breakdown of Lump Sum Items

Provisional Sums

58.1 Definition of “Provisional Sum” 58.2 Use of Provisional Sums 58.3 Production of Vouchers

Nominated Subcontractors

59.1 Definition of “Nominated Subcontractors” 59.2 Nominated Subcontractors; Objection to Nomination 59.3 Design Requirements to be Expressly Stated 59.4 Payments to Nominated Subcontractors 59.5 Certification of Payments to Nominated Subcontractors

(vi)

Certificates and Payment

60.1 Monthly Statements 60.2 Monthly Payments 60.3 Payment of Retention Money 60.4 Correction of Certificates 60.5 Statement at Completion 60.6 Final Statement 60.7 Discharge 60.8 Final Payment Certificate 60.9 Cessation of Employer’s Liability 60.10 Time for Payment 61.1 Approval only by Defects Liability Certificate 62.1 Defects Liability Certificate 62.2 Unfulfilled Obligations

Remedies

63.1 Default of Contractor 63.2 Valuation at Date of Termination 63.3 Payment after Termination 63.4 Assignment of Benefit of Agreement 64.1 Urgent Remedial Work

Special Risks

65.1 No Liability for Special Risks 65.2 Special Risks 65.3 Damage to Works by Special Risks 65.4 Projectile, Missile 65.5 Increased Costs arising from Special Risks 65.6 Outbreak of War 65.7 Removal of Contractor’s Equipment on Termination 65.8 Payment if Contract Terminated

Release from Performance

66.1 Payment in Event of Release from Performance Settlement of Disputes

67.1 Engineer’s Decision 67.2 Amicable Settlement 67.3 Arbitration 67.4 Failure to Comply with Engineer’s Decision

Notices

68.1 Notice to Contractor 68.2 Notice to Employer and Engineer 68.3 Change of Address

(vii)

Default of Employer

69.1 Default of Employer 69.2 Removal of Contractor’s Equipment 69.3 Payment on Termination 69.4 Contractor’s Entitlement to Suspend Work 69.5 Resumption of Work

Changes in Cost and Legislation

70.1 Increase or Decrease of Cost 70.2 Subsequent Legislation

Currency and Rates of exchange

71.1 Currency Restrictions 72.1 Rates of Exchange 72.2 Currency Proportions 72.3 Currencies of Payment for Provisional Sums

REFERENCE TO PART II

INDEX TENDER (NOT USED) AGREEMENT (NOT USED)

1

PART I - GENERAL CONDITIONS

Definitions and Interpretation 1.1 Definitions In the Contract (as hereinafter defined) the following words and expressions shall have

the meanings hereby assigned to them, except where the context otherwise requires: (a) (i) "Employer" means the person named as such in Part II of these Conditions and

the legal successors in title to such person, but not (except with the consent of the Contractor) any assignee of such person.

(ii) "Contractor" means the person whose tender has been accepted by the

Employer and the legal successors in title to such person, but not (except with the consent of the Employer) any assignee of such person.

(iii) "Subcontractor" means any person named in the Contract as a Subcontractor for

a part of the Works or any person to whom a part of the Works has been subcontracted with the consent of the Engineer and the legal successors in title to such person, but not any assignee of any such person.

(iv) "Engineer" means the person appointed by the Employer to act as Engineer for

the purposes of the Contract and named as such in Part II of these Conditions. (v) "Engineer's Representative" means a person appointed from time to time by the

Engineer under Sub-Clause 2.2. (b) (i) "Contract" means these Conditions (Parts I and II), the Specification, the

Drawings, the Bill of Quantities, the Tender, the Letter of Acceptance, the Contract Agreement (if completed) and such further documents as may be expressly incorporated in the Letter of Acceptance or Contract Agreement (if completed).

(ii) "Specification" means the specification of the Works included in the Contract

and any modification thereof or addition thereto made under Clause 51 or submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

(iii) "Drawings" means all drawings, calculations and technical information of a like

nature provided by the Engineer to the Contractor under the Contract and all drawings, calculations, samples, patterns, models, operation and maintenance manuals and other technical information of a like nature submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

(iv) "Bill of Quantities" means the priced and completed bill of quantities forming

part of the Tender. (v) "Tender" means the Contractor's priced offer to the Employer for the execution

and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, as accepted by the Letter of Acceptance.

2

(vi) "Letter of Acceptance" means the formal acceptance by the Employer of the Tender.

(vii) "Contract Agreement" means the contract agreement (if any) referred to in Sub-

Clause 9.1. (viii) "Appendix to Tender" means the appendix comprised in the form of Tender

annexed to these Conditions. (c) (i) "Commencement Date" means the date upon which the Contractor receives the

notice to commence issued by the Engineer pursuant to Clause 41. (ii) "Time for Completion" means the time for completing the execution of and

passing the Tests on Completion of the Works or any Section or part thereof as stated in the Contract (or as extended under Clause 44) calculated from the Commencement Date.

(d) (i) "Tests on Completion" means the tests specified in the Contract or otherwise

agreed by the Engineer and the Contractor which are to be made by the Contractor before the Works of any Section or part thereof are taken over by the Employer.

(ii) "Taking-Over Certificate" means a certificate issued pursuant to Clause 48.

(e) (i) "Contract Price" means the sum stated in the Letter of Acceptance as payable to the Contractor for the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.

(ii) "Retention Money" means the aggregate of all monies retained by the Employer

pursuant to Sub-Clause 60.2(a). (iii) “Interim Payment Certificate” means any certificate of payment issued by the

Engineer other than the Final Payment Certificate. (iv) “Final Payment Certificate” means the certificate of payment issued by the

Engineer pursuant to Sub-Clause 60.8. (f) (i) "Works" means the Permanent Works and the Temporary Works or either of

them as appropriate. (ii) "Permanent Works" means the permanent works to be executed (including

Plant) in accordance with the Contract. (iii) "Temporary Works" means all temporary works of every kind (other than

Contractor's Equipment) required in or about the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein.

(iv) "Plant" means machinery, apparatus and the like intended to form or forming

part of the Permanent Works. (v) "Contractor's Equipment" means all appliances and things of whatsoever nature

3

(other than Temporary Works) required for the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein, but does not include Plant, materials or other things intended to form or forming part of the Permanent Works.

(vi) "Section" means a part of the Works specifically identified in the Contract as a

Section. (vii) "Site" means the places provided by the Employer where the Works are to be

executed and any other places as may be specifically designated in the Contract as forming part of the Site.

(g) (i) "cost" means all expenditure properly incurred or to be incurred, whether, on or

off the Site, including overhead and other charges properly allocable thereto but does not include any allowance for profit.

(ii) "day" means calendar day. (iii) "foreign currency" means a currency of a country other than that in which the

Works are to be located. (iv) "writing" means any hand-written, type-written, or printed communication,

including telex, cable and facsimile transmission. 1.2 Headings and Marginal Notes The headings and marginal notes in these Conditions shall not be deemed part thereof or

be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.

1.3 Interpretation Words importing persons or parties shall include firms and corporations and any

organization having legal capacity. 1.4 Singular and Plural Words importing the singular only also include the plural and vice versa where the

context requires. 1.5 Notices, Consents, Approvals, Certificates and Determinations Wherever in the Contract provision is made for the giving or issue of any notice, consent,

approval, certificate or determination by any person, unless otherwise specified such notice, consent, approval, certificate or determination shall be in writing and the words "notify", "certify or "determine" shall be construed accordingly. Any such consent, approval, certificate or determination shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

4

Engineer and Engineer's Representative 2.1 Engineer's Duties and Authority (a) The Engineer shall carry out the duties specified in the Contract.

(b) The Engineer may exercise the authority specified in or necessarily to be implied from the Contract, provided, however, that if the Engineer is required, under the terms of his appointment by the Employer, to obtain the specific approval of the Employer before exercising any such authority, particulars of such requirements shall be set out in Part II of these Conditions. Provided further that any requisite approval shall be deemed to have been given by the Employer for any such authority exercised by the Engineer.

(c) Except as expressly stated in the Contract, the Engineer shall have no authority to

relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract. 2.2 Engineer's Representative The Engineer's Representative shall be appointed by and be responsible to the Engineer

and shall carry out such duties and exercise such authority as may be delegated to him by the Engineer under Sub-Clause 2.3.

2.3 Engineer's Authority to Delegate The Engineer may from time to time delegate to the Engineer's Representative any of the

duties and authorities vested in the Engineer and he may at any time revoke such delegation. Any such delegation or revocation shall be in writing and shall not take effect until a copy thereof has been delivered to the Employer and the Contractor.

Any communication given by the Engineer's Representative to the Contractor in

accordance with such delegation shall have the same effect as though it had been given by the Engineer. Provided that:

(a) any failure of the Engineer's Representative to disapprove any work, materials or

Plant shall not prejudice the authority of the Engineer to disapprove such work, materials or Plant and to give instructions for the rectification thereof; and

(b) if the Contractor questions any communication of the Engineer's Representative he

may refer the matter to the Engineer who shall confirm, reverse or vary the contents of such communication.

2.4 Appointment of Assistants The Engineer or the Engineer's Representative may appoint any number of persons to

assist the Engineer's Representative in the carrying out of his duties under Sub-Clause 2.2. He shall notify to the Contractor the names, duties and scope of authority of such persons. Such assistants shall have no authority to issue any instructions to the Contractor save in so far as such instructions may be necessary to enable them to carry out their duties and to secure their acceptance of materials, Plant or workmanship as being in accordance with the Contract, and any instructions given by any of them for those purposes shall be deemed to have been given by the Engineer's Representative.

5

2.5 Instructions in Writing Instructions given by the Engineer shall be in writing, provided that if for any reason the

Engineer considers it necessary to give any such instruction orally, the Contractor shall comply with such instruction. Confirmation in writing of such oral instruction given by the Engineer, whether before or after the carrying out of the instruction, shall be deemed to be an instruction within the meaning of this Sub-Clause. Provided further that if the Contractor, within 7 days, confirms in writing to the Engineer any oral instruction of the Engineer and such confirmation is not contradicted in writing within 7 days by the Engineer, it shall be deemed to be an instructions of the Engineer.

The provisions of this Sub-Clause shall equally apply to instructions given by the

Engineer's Representative and any assistants of the Engineer or the Engineer's Representative appointed pursuant to Sub-Clause 2.4.

2.6 Engineer to Act Impartially

Wherever, under the Contract, the Engineer is required to exercise his discretion by: (a) giving his decision, opinion or consent, (b) expressing his satisfaction or approval, (c) determining value, or (d) otherwise taking action which may affect the rights and obligations of the

Employer or the Contractor he shall exercise such discretion impartially within the terms of the Contract and having

regard to all the circumstances. Any such decision, opinion, consent expression of satisfaction, or approval, determination of value or action may be opened up, reviewed or revised as provided in Clause 67.

Assignment and Subcontracting

3.1 Assignment of Contract The Contractor shall not, without the prior consent of the Employer (which consent,

notwithstanding the provisions of Sub-Clause 1.5, shall be at the sole discretion of the Employer), assign the Contract or any part thereof, or any benefit or interest therein or thereunder, otherwise than by:

(a) a charge in favour of the Contractor's bankers of any monies due or to become due

under the Contract, or (b) assignment to the Contractor's insurers (in cases where the insurers have discharged

the Contractor's loss or liability) of the Contractor's right to obtain relief against any other party liable.

4.1 Subcontracting

The Contractor shall not subcontract the whole of the Works. Except where otherwise provided by the Contract, the Contractor shall not subcontract any part of the Works

6

without the prior consent of the Engineer. Any such consent shall not relieve the Contractor from any liability or obligation under the Contract and he shall be responsible for the acts, defaults and neglects of any Subcontractor, his agents, servants or workmen as fully as if they were the acts, defaults or neglects of the Contractor, his agents servants or workmen.

Provided that the Contractor shall not be required to obtain such consent for:

(a) the provision of labour, (b) the purchase of materials which are in accordance with the standards specified in the

Contract, (c) the subcontracting of any part of the Works for which the Subcontractor is named in

the Contract. 4.2 Assignment of Subcontractors' Obligations In the event of a Subcontractor having undertaken towards the Contractor in respect of

the work executed, or the goods, materials, Plant or services supplied by such Subcontractor, any continuing obligation extending for a period exceeding that of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract, the Contractor shall at any time, after the expiration of such Period, assign to the Employer, at the Employer's request and cost, the benefit of such obligation for the unexpired duration thereof.

Contract Documents

5.1 Language/s and Law There is stated in Part II of these Conditions:

(a) the language or languages in which the Contract documents shall be drawn up, and (b) the country or state the law of which shall apply to the Contract and according to

which the Contract shall be construed. If the said documents are written in more than one language, the language according

to which the Contract shall be construed and interpreted is also stated in Part II of these Conditions, being therein designated the "Ruling Language".

5.2 Priority of Contract Documents The several documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of

one another, but in case of ambiguities or discrepancies the same shall be explained and adjusted by the Engineer who shall thereupon issue to the Contractor instructions thereon and in such event, unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the priority of the documents forming the Contract shall be as follows: (1) The Contract Agreement (if completed); (2) The Letter of Acceptance; (3) The Tender; (4) Part II of these Conditions; (5) Part I of these Conditions; and

7

(6) Any other document forming part of the Contract. 6.1 Custody and Supply of Drawings and Documents The Drawings shall remain in the sole custody of the Engineer, but two copies thereof

shall be provided to the Contractor free of charge. The Contractor shall make at his own cost any further copies required by him. Unless it is strictly necessary for the purposes of the Contract, the Drawings, Specification and other documents provided by the Employer or the Engineer shall not, without the consent of the Engineer, be used or communicated to a third party by the Contractor. Upon issue of the Defects Liability Certificate, the Contractor shall return to the Engineer all Drawings, Specification and other documents provided under the Contract.

The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer four copies of all Drawings, specification

and other documents submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer in accordance with Clause 7, together with a reproducible copy of any material which cannot be reproduced to an equal standard by photocopying. In addition the Contractor shall supply such further copies of such Drawings, Specification and other documents as the Engineer may request in writing for the use of the Employer, who shall pay the cost thereof.

6.2 One Copy of Drawings to be Kept on Site One copy of the Drawings, provided to or supplied by the Contractor as aforesaid, shall

be kept by the Contractor on the Site and the same shall at all reasonable times be available for inspection and use by the Engineer and by any other person authorised by the Engineer in writing.

6.3 Disruption of Progress The Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer, with a copy to the Employer, whenever

planning or execution of the Works is likely to be delayed or disrupted unless any further drawing or instruction is issued by the Engineer within a reasonable time. The notice shall include details of the drawing or instruction required and of why and by when it is required and of any delay or disruption likely to be suffered if it is late.

6.4 Delay and Cost of Delay of Drawings If, by reason of any failure or inability of the Engineer to issue, within a time reasonable

in all the circumstances, any drawing or instruction for which notice has been given by the Contractor in accordance with Sub-Clause 6.3, the Contractor suffers delay and/or incurs costs then the Engineer shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine:

(a) any extension of time to which the Contractor is entitled under Clause 44, and (b) the amount of such costs, which shall be added to the Contract Price, and shall notify

the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. 6.5 Failure by Contractor to Submit Drawings If the failure or inability of the Engineer to issue any drawings or instructions is caused in

8

whole or in part by the failure of the Contractor to submit Drawings, Specification or other documents which he is required to submit under the Contract, the Engineer shall take such failure by the Contractor into account when making his determination pursuant to Sub-Clause 6.4.

7.1 Supplementary Drawings and Instructions The Engineer shall have authority to issue to the Contractor, from time to time, such

supplementary Drawings and instructions as shall be necessary for the purpose of the proper and adequate execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein. The Contractor shall carry out and be bound by the same.

7.2 Permanent Works Designed by Contractor Where the Contract expressly provides that part of the Permanent Works shall be

designed by the Contractor, he shall submit to the Engineer, for approval:

(a) such drawings, specifications, calculations and other information as shall be necessary to satisfy the Engineer as to the suitability and adequacy of that design, and

(b) operation and maintenance manuals together with drawings of the Permanent Works

as completed, in sufficient detail to enable the Employer to operate, maintain, dismantle, reassemble and adjust the Permanent Works incorporating that design. The Works shall not be considered to be completed for the purposes of taking over in accordance with Clause 48 until such operation and maintenance manuals together with drawings on completion have been submitted to and approved by the Engineer.

7.3 Responsibility Unaffected by Approval Approval by the Engineer, in accordance with Sub-Clause 7.2, shall not relieve the

Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract.

General Obligations

8.1 Contractor's General Responsibilities The Contractor shall, with due care and diligence, design (to the extent provided for by

the Contract), execute and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein in accordance with the provisions of the Contract. The Contractor shall provide all superintendance, labour, material, Plant, Contractor's Equipment and all other things, whether of a temporary or permanent nature, required in and for such design, execution, completion and remedying of any defects, so far as the necessity for providing the same is specified in or is reasonably to be inferred from the Contract.

8.2 Site Operations and Methods of Construction The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the adequacy, stability and safety of all

Site operations and methods of construction. Provided that the Contractor shall not be responsible (except as stated hereunder or as may be otherwise agreed) for the design or specification of Permanent Works, or for the design or specification of any Temporary Works not prepared by the Contractor. Where the Contract expressly provides that part of the Permanent Works shall be designed by the Contractor, he shall be fully responsible

9

for that part of such Works, notwithstanding any approval by the Engineer. 9.1 Contract Agreement The Contractor shall, if called upon so to do, enter into and execute the Contract

Agreement, to be prepared and completed at the cost of the Employer, in the form annexed to these Conditions with such modification as may be necessary.

10.1 Performance Security If the Contract requires the Contractor to obtain security for his proper performance of

the Contract, he shall obtain and provide to the Employer, such security within 28 days after the receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, in the sum stated in the Appendix to Tender. When providing such security to the Employer, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of so doing. Such security shall be in the form annexed to these Conditions or in such other form as may be agreed between the Employer and the Contractor. The institution providing such security shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. The cost of complying with the requirements of this Clause shall be borne by the Contractor, unless the Contract otherwise provides.

10.2 Period of Validity of Performance Security The performance security shall be valid until the Contractor has executed and completed

the Works and remedied any defects therein in accordance with the Contract. No claim shall be made against such security after the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate in accordance with Sub-Clause 62.1 and such security shall be returned to the Contractor within 14 days of the issue of the said Defects Liability Certificate.

10.3 Claims under Performance Security Prior to making a claim under the performance security the Employer shall, in every case,

notify the Contractor stating the nature of the default in respect of which the claim is to be made.

11.1 Inspection of Site The Employer shall have made available to the Contractor, before the submission by the

Contractor of the Tender, such data on hydrological and sub-surface conditions as have been obtained by or on behalf of the Employer from investigations undertaken relevant to the Works but the Contractor shall be responsible for his own interpretation thereof.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site and its

surroundings and information available in connection therewith and to have satisfied himself (so far as is practicable, having regard to considerations of cost and time) before submitting his Tender, as to:

(a) the form and nature thereof, including the sub-surface conditions, (b) the hydrological and climatic conditions, (c) the extent and nature of work and materials necessary for the execution and

completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein, and

10

(d) the means of access to the Site and the accommodation he may require, and, in general, shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information, subject as above mentioned, as to risks, contingencies and all other circumstances which may influence or affect his Tender. The Contractor shall be deemed to have based his Tender on the data made available by the Employer and on his own inspection and examination, all as aforementioned.

12.1 Sufficiency of Tender The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the correctness and

sufficiency of the Tender and of the rates and prices stated in the Bill of Quantities, all of which shall, except insofar as it is otherwise provided in the Contract, cover all his obligations under the Contract (including those in respect of the supply of goods, materials, Plant or services or of contingencies for which there is a Provisional Sum) and all matters and things necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein.

12.2 Not Foreseeable Physical Obstructions or Conditions If, however, during the execution of the Works the Contractor encounters physical

obstructions or physical conditions, other than climatic conditions on the Site, which obstructions or conditions were, in his opinion, not foreseeable by an experienced contractor, the Contractor shall forthwith give notice thereof to the Engineer, with a copy to the Employer. On receipt of such notice, the Engineer shall if in his opinion such obstructions or conditions could not have been reasonably foreseen by an experienced contractor, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine:

(a) any extension of time to which the Contractor is entitled under Clause 44, and (b) the amount of any costs which may have been incurred by the Contractor by reason of

such obstructions or conditions having been encountered, which shall be added to the Contract Price,

and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. Such

determination shall take account of any instruction which the Engineer may issue to the Contractor in connection therewith, and any proper and reasonable measures acceptable to the Engineer which the Contractor may take in the absence of specific instructions from the Engineer.

13.1 Work to be in Accordance with Contract Unless it is legally or physically impossible, the Contractor shall execute and complete

the Works and remedy any defects therein in strict accordance with the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall comply with and adhere strictly to the Engineer's instructions on any matter, whether mentioned in the Contract or not, touching or concerning the Works. The Contractor shall take instructions only from the Engineer (or his delegate).

11

14.1 Programme to be Submitted The Contractor shall, within the time stated in Part II of these Conditions after the date of

the Letter of Acceptance, submit to the Engineer for his consent a programme, in such form and detail as the Engineer shall reasonably prescribe, for the execution of the Works. The Contractor shall, whenever required by the Engineer, also provide in writing for his information a general description of the arrangements and methods which the Contractor proposes to adopt for the execution of the Works.

14.2 Revised Programme If at any time it should appear to the Engineer that the actual progress of the Works does

not conform to the programme to which consent has been given under Sub-Clause 14.1, the Contractor shall produce, at the request of the Engineer, a revised programme showing the modifications to such programme necessary to ensure completion of the Works within the Time for Completion.

14.3 Cash Flow Estimate to be Submitted The Contractor shall, within the time stated in Part II of these Conditions after the date of

the Letter of Acceptance, provide to the Engineer for his information a detailed cash flow estimate, in quarterly periods, of all payments to which the Contractor will be entitled under the Contract and the Contractor shall subsequently supply revised cash flow estimates at quarterly intervals, if required to do so by the Engineer.

14.4 Contractor not Relieved of Duties or Responsibilities The submission to and consent by the Engineer of such programmes or the provision of

such general descriptions or cash flow estimates shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.

15.1 Contractor's Superintendence The Contractor shall provide all necessary superintendence during the execution of the

Works and as long thereafter as the Engineer may consider necessary for the proper fulfilling of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. The Contractor, or a competent and authorised representative approved of by the Engineer, which approval may at any time be withdrawn, shall give his whole time to the superintendence of the Works. Such authorised representative shall receive, on behalf of the Contractor, instructions from the Engineer.

If approval of the representative is withdrawn by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, as

soon as is practicable, having regard to the requirement of replacing him as hereinafter mentioned, after receiving notice of such withdrawal, remove the representative from the Works and shall not thereafter employ him again on the Works in any capacity and shall replace him by another representative approved by the Engineer.

16.1 Contractor's Employees The Contractor shall provide on the Site in connection with the execution and completion

of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein:

12

(a) only such technical assistants as are skilled and experienced in their respective callings and such foremen and leading hands as are competent to give proper superintendence of the Works, and

(b) such skilled, semi skilled and unskilled labour as is necessary for the proper and

timely fulfilling of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. 16.2 Engineer at Liberty to Object The Engineer shall be at liberty to object to and require the Contractor to remove

forthwith from the Works any person provided by the Contractor who, in the opinion of the Engineer, misconducts himself, or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his duties, or whose presence on Site is otherwise considered by the Engineer to be undesirable, and such person shall not be again allowed upon the Works without the consent of the Engineer. Any person so removed from the Works shall be replaced as soon as possible.

17.1 Setting-out The Contractor shall be responsible for:

(a) the accurate setting-out of the Works in relation to original points, lines and levels of reference given by the Engineer in writing,

(b) the correctness, subject as above mentioned of the position, levels dimensions and

alignment of all parts of the Works, and (c) the provision of all necessary instruments, appliances and labour in connection with

the foregoing responsibilities. If, at any time during the execution of the Works, any error appears in the position,

levels, dimensions or alignment of any part of the Works, the Contractor, on being required so to do by the Engineer, shall, at his own cost, rectify such error to the satisfaction of the Engineer, unless such error is based on incorrect data supplied in writing by the Engineer, in which case the Engineer shall determine an addition to the Contract Price in accordance with Clause 52 and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

The checking of any setting-out or of any line or level by the Engineer shall not in any

way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the accuracy thereof and the Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all bench-marks, sight-rails, pegs and other things used in setting-out the Works.

18.1 Boreholes and Exploratory Excavation If, at any time during the execution of the Works, the Engineer requires the Contractor to

make boreholes or to carry out exploratory excavation, such requirement shall be the subject of an instruction in accordance with Clause 51, unless an item or a Provisional Sum in respect of such work is included in the Bill of Quantities.

13

19.1 Safety, Security and Protection of the Environment The Contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the

remedying of any defects therein:

(a) have full regard for the safety of all persons entitled to be upon the Site and keep the Site (so far as the same is under his control) and the Works (so far as the same are not completed or occupied by the Employer) in an orderly state appropriate to the avoidance of danger to such persons,

(b) provide and maintain at his own cost all lights, guards, fencing, warning signs and

watching, when and where necessary or required by the Engineer or by any duly constituted authority, for the protection of the Works or for the safety and convenience of the public or others, and

(c) take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and off the Site and to avoid

damage or nuisance to persons or to property of the public or others resulting from pollution, noise or other causes arising as a consequence of his methods of operation.

19.2 Employer's Responsibilities If under Clause 31 the Employer shall carry out work on the Site with his own workmen

he shall, in respect of such work:

(a) have full regard to the safety of all persons entitled to be upon the Site, and (b) keep the Site in an orderly state appropriate to the avoidance of danger to such

persons. If under Clause 31 the Employer shall employ other contractors on the Site he shall

require them to have the same regard for safety and avoidance of danger. 20.1 Care of Works The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care of the Works and materials and

Plant for incorporation therein from the Commencement Date until the date of issue of the Taking-Over Certificate for the whole of the Works, when the responsibility for the said care shall pass to the Employer. Provided that:

(a) if the Engineer issues a Taking-Over Certificate for any Section or part of the

Permanent Works the Contractor shall cease to be liable for the care of that Section or part from the date of issue of the Taking-Over Certificate, when the responsibility for the care of that Section or part shall pass to the Employer, and

(b) the Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care of any outstanding Works and

materials and Plant for incorporation therein which he undertakes to finish during the Defects Liability Period until such outstanding Works have been completed pursuant to Clause 49.

20.2 Responsibility to Rectify Loss or Damage If any loss or damage happens to the Works, or any part thereof, or materials or Plant for

14

incorporation therein, during the period for which the Contractor is responsible for the care thereof, from any cause whatsoever, other than the risks defined in Sub-Clause 20.4, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, rectify such loss or damage so that the Permanent Works conform in every respect with the provisions of the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall also be liable for any loss or damage to the Works occasioned by him in the course of any operations carried out by him for the purpose of complying with his obligations under Clauses 49 and 50.

20.3 Loss or Damage Due to Employer's Risks In the event of any such loss or damage happening from any of the risks defined in Sub-

Clause 20.4, or in combination with other risks, the Contractor shall, if and to the extent required by the Engineer, rectify the loss or damage and the Engineer shall determine an addition to the Contract Price in accordance with Clause 52 and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. In the case of a combination or risks causing loss or damage any such determination shall take into account the proportional responsibility of the Contractor and the Employer.

20.4 Employer's Risks The Employer's risks are:

(a) war, hostilities (whether war be declared or not), invasion, act of foreign enemies, (b) rebellion, revolution, insurrection, or military or usurped power, or civil war, (c) ionising radiations, or contamination by radio-activity from any nuclear fuel, or from

any nuclear waste from the combustion of nuclear fuel, radio-active toxic explosive, or other hazardous properties of any explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component thereof,

(d) pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or

supersonic speeds, (e) riot, commotion or disorder, unless solely restricted to employees of the Contractor or

of his Subcontractor and arising from the conduct of the Works, (f) loss or damage due to the use or occupation by the Employer of any Section or part of

the Permanent Works, except as may be provided for in the Contract, (g) loss or damage to the extent that it is due to the design of the Works, other than any

part of the design provided by the Contractor or for which the Contractor is responsible, and

(h) any operation of the forces of nature against which an experienced contractor could

not reasonably have been expected to take precautions. 21.1 Insurance of Works and Contractor's Equipment The Contractor shall, without limiting his or the Employer's obligations and

responsibilities under Clause 20, insure:

15

(a) the Works, together with materials and Plant for incorporation therein, to the full replacement cost (the term “cost” in this context shall include profit),

(b) an additional sum of 15 per cent of such replacement cost, or as may be specified in

Part II of these Conditions, to cover any additional costs of and incidental to the rectification of loss or damage including professional fees and the cost of demolishing and removing any part of the Works and of removing debris of whatsoever nature, and

(c) the Contractor's Equipment and other things brought onto the Site by the Contractor,

for a sum sufficient to provide for their replacement at the Site. 21.2 Scope of Cover The insurance in paragraphs (a) and (b) of Sub-Clause 21.1 shall be in the joint names of

the Contractor and the Employer and shall cover:

(a) the Employer and the Contractor against all loss or damage from whatsoever cause arising, other than as provided in Sub-Clause 21.4, form the start of work at the Site until the date of issue of the relevant Taking-Over Certificate in respect of the Works or any Section or part thereof as the case may be, and

(b) the Contractor for his liability:

(i) during the Defects Liability Period for loss or damage arising from a cause

occurring prior to the commencement of the Defects Liability Periods, and (ii) for loss or damage occasioned by the Contractor in the course of any operations

carried out by him for the purpose of complying with his obligations under Clauses 49 and 50.

21.3 Responsibility for Amounts not Recovered Any amounts not insured or not recovered from the insurers shall be borne by the

Employer or the Contractor in accordance with their responsibilities under Clause 20. 21.4 Exclusions There shall be no obligation for the insurances in Sub-Clause 21.1 to include loss or

damage caused by:

(a) war, hostilities (where war be declared or not), invasion, act of foreign enemies, (b) rebellion, revolution, insurrection, or military or usurped power, or civil war, (c) ionising, radiations, or contamination by radio-activity from any nuclear fuel, or from

any nuclear waste from the combustion of nuclear fuel, radio-active toxic explosive or other hazardous properties of any explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component thereof, or

(d) pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or

supersonic speeds.

16

22.1 Damage to Persons and Property The Contractor shall, except if and so far as the Contract provides otherwise, indemnify

the Employer against all losses and claims in respect of:

(a) death of or injury to any person, or (b) loss of or damage to any property (other than the Works),

which may arise out of or in consequence of the execution and completion of the Works

and the remedying of any defects therein, and against all claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto, subject to the exceptions defined in Sub-Clause 22.2.

22.2 Exceptions The "exceptions" referred to in Sub-Clause 22.1 are:

(a) the permanent use or occupation of land by the Works, or any part thereof, (b) the right of the Employer to execute the Works, or any part thereof, on, over, under,

is or through any land, (c) damage to property which is the unavoidable result of the execution and completion

of the Works, or the remedying of any defects therein, in accordance with the Contract, and

(d) death of or injury to persons or loss of or damage to property resulting from any act

or neglect of the Employer, his agents servants or other contractors, not being employed by the Contractor, or in respect of any claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses in respect thereof or in relation thereto or, where the injury or damage was contributed to by the Contractor, his servants or agents, such part of the said injury or damage as may be just and equitable having regard to the extent of the responsibility of the Employer, his servants or agents or other contractors for the injury or damage.

22.3 Indemnity by Employer The Employer shall indemnify the Contractor against all claims, proceedings, damages,

costs, charges and expenses in respect of the matters referred to in the exceptions defined in Sub-Clause 22.2

23.1 Third Party Insurance (including Employer's Property) The Contractor shall, without limiting his or the Employer's obligation and

responsibilities under Clause 22, insure, in the joint names of the Contractor and the Employer, against liabilities for death of or injury to any person (other than as provided in Clause 24) or loss of or damage to any property (other than the Works) arising out of the performance of the Contract, other than the exceptions defined in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of Sub-Clause 22.2.

17

23.2 Minimum Amount of Insurance Such insurance shall be for at least the amount stated in the Appendix to Tender. 23.3 Cross Liabilities The insurance policy shall include a cross liability clause such that the insurance shall

apply to the Contractor and to the Employer as separate insured. 24.1 Accident or Injury to Workmen The Employer shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or compensation

payable to any workman or other person in the employment of the Contractor or any Subcontractor, other than death or injury resulting from any act or default of the Employer, his agents or servants. The Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Employer against all such damages and compensation, other than those for which the Employer is liable as aforesaid, and against all claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges, and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto.

24.2 Insurance Against Accident to Workmen The Contractor shall insure against such liability and shall continue such insurance

during the whole of the time that any persons are employed by him on the Works. Provided that, in respect of any persons employed by any Subcontractor, the Contractor's obligations to insure as aforesaid under the Sub-Clause shall be satisfied if the Subcontractor shall have insured against the liability in respect of such persons in such manner that the Employer is indemnified under the policy, but the Contractor shall require such Subcontractor to produce to the Employer, when required, such policy of insurance and the receipt for the payment of the current premium.

25.1 Evidence and Terms of Insurances The Contractor shall provide evidence to the Employer prior to the start of work at the

Site that the insurances required under the Contract have been effected and shall, within 84 days of the Commencement Date, provide the insurance policies to the Employer. When providing such evidence and such policies to the Employer, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of so doing. Such insurance policies shall be consistent with the general terms agreed prior to the issue of the Letter of Acceptance. The Contractor shall effect all insurances for which he is responsible with insurers and in terms approved by the Employer.

25.2 Adequacy of Insurances The Contractor shall notify the insurers of changes in the nature, extent or programme for

the execution of the Works and ensure the adequacy of the insurances at all times in accordance with the terms of the Contract and shall, when required, produce to the Employer the insurance policies in force and the receipts for payment of the current premiums.

25.3 Remedy on Contractor's Failure to Insure If the Contractor fails to effect and keep in force any of the insurances required under the

18

Contract, or fails to provide the policies to the Employer within the period required by Sub-Clause 25.1, then and in any such case the Employer may effect and keep in force any such insurances and pay any premium as may be necessary for that purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so paid from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor, or recover the same as a debt due from the Contractor.

25.4 Compliance with Policy Conditions In the event that the Contractor or the Employer fails to comply with conditions imposed

by the insurance policies effected pursuant to the Contract, each shall indemnify the other against all losses and claims arising from such failure.

26.1 Compliance with Statutes, Regulations The Contractor shall conform in all respects, including by the giving of all notices and

the paying of all fees, with the provisions of:

(a) any National or State Statute, Ordinance, or other Law, or any regulation, or bye-law of any local or other duly constituted authority in relation to the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein, and

(b) the rules and regulations of all public bodies and companies whose property or rights

are affected or may be affected in any way by the Works, and the Contractor shall keep the Employer indemnified against all penalties and liability

of every kind for breach of any such provisions. Provided always that the Employer shall be responsible for obtaining any planning, zoning or other similar permission required for the Works to proceed and shall indemnify the Contractor in accordance with Sub-Clause 22.3.

27.1 Fossil All fossils, coins, articles of value or antiquity and structures and other remains or things

of geological or archaeological interest discovered on the Site shall, as between the Employer and the Contractor, be deemed to be the absolute property of the Employer. The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent his workmen or any other persons from removing or damaging any such article or thing and shall, immediately upon discovery thereof and before removal, acquaint the Engineer of such discovery and carry out the Engineer's instructions for dealing with the same. If, by reason of such instructions, the Contractor suffers delay and/or incurs costs then the Engineer shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine:


the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. 28.1 Patent Rights The Contractor shall save harmless and indemnify the Employer from and against all

claims and proceedings for or on account of infringement of any patent rights, design trademark or name or other protected rights in respect of any Contractor's Equipment, materials or Plant used for or in connection with or for incorporation in the Works and

19

from and against all damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto, except where such infringement results from compliance with the design or Specification provided by the Engineer.

28.2 Royalties Except where otherwise stated, the Contractor shall pay all tonnage and other royalties,

rent and other payments or compensation, if any, for getting stone, sand, gravel, clay or other materials required for the Works.

29.1 Interference with Traffic and Adjoining Properties All operations necessary for the execution and completion of the Works and the

remedying of any defects therein shall, so far as compliance with the requirements of the Contract permits, be carried on so as not to interfere unnecessarily or improperly with:

(a) the convenience of the public, or (b) the access to, use and occupation of public or private roads and footpaths to or of

properties whether in the possession of the Employer or of any other person. The Contractor shall save harmless and indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims,

proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of, or in relation to, any such matters insofar as the Contractor is responsible therefor.

30.1 Avoidance of Damage to Roads The Contractor shall use every reasonable means to prevent any of the roads or bridges

communicating with or on the routes to the Site from being damaged or injured by any traffic of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors and, in particular, shall select routes, choose and use vehicles and restrict and distribute loads so that any such extraordinary traffic as will inevitably arise from the moving of materials, Plant, Contractor's Equipment or Temporary Works from and to the Site shall be limited, as far as reasonably possible, and so that no unnecessary damage or injury may be occasioned to such roads and bridges.

30.2 Transport of Contractor's Equipment or Temporary Works Save insofar as the Contract otherwise provides, the Contractor shall be responsible for

and shall pay the cost of strengthening any bridges or altering or improving any road communicating with or on the routes to the Site to facilitate the movement of Contractor's Equipment or Temporary Works and the Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Employer against all claims for damage to any such road or bridge caused by such movement, including such claims as may be made directly against the Employer, and shall negotiate and pay all claims arising solely out of such damage.

30.3 Transport of Materials or Plant If, notwithstanding Sub-Clause 30.1, any damage occurs to any bridge or road

communicating with or on the routes to the Site arising from the transport of materials or Plant, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer with a copy to the Employer, as soon as he becomes aware of such damage or as soon as he receives any claim from the authority

20

entitled to make such claim. Where under any law or regulation the haulier of such materials or Plant is required to indemnify the road authority against damage the Employer shall not be liable for any costs, charges or expenses in respect thereof or in relation thereto. In other cases the Employer shall negotiate the settlement of and pay all sums due in respect of such claim and shall indemnify the Contractor in respect thereof and in respect of all claims, proceedings damages, costs, charges and expenses in relation thereto. Provided that if and so far as any such claim or part thereof is, in the opinion of the Engineer, due to any failure on the part of the Contractor to observe and perform his obligations under Sub-Clause 30.1, then the amount determined by the Engineer, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, to be due to such failure shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer and may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor and the Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. Provided also that the Employer shall notify the Contractor whenever a settlement is to be negotiated and, where any amount may be due from the Contractor, the Employer shall consult with the Contractor before such settlement is agreed.

30.4 Waterborne Traffic Where the nature of the Works is such as to require the use by the Contractor of

waterborne transport the foregoing provisions of this Clause shall be construed as though "road" included a lock, dock, sea wall or other structure related to a waterway and "vehicle" included craft, and shall have effect accordingly.

31.1 Opportunities for Other Contractors The Contractor shall, in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer, afford all

reasonable opportunities for carrying out their work to:

(a) any other contractors employed by the Employer and their workmen, (b) the workmen of the Employer, and (c) the workmen of any duly constituted authorities who may be employed in the

execution on or near the Site of any work not included in the Contract or of any contract which the Employer may enter into in connection with or ancillary to the Works.

31.2 Facilities for Other Contractors If, however, pursuant to Sub-Clause 31.1 the Contractor shall, on the written request of

the Engineer:

(a) make available to any other contractor, or to the Employer or any such authority, any roads or ways for the maintenance of which the Contractor is responsible,

(b) permit the use, by any such, of Temporary Works or Contractor's Equipment on the

Site, or (c) provide any other service of whatsoever nature for any such, the Engineer shall

determine an addition to the Contract Price in accordance with Clause 52 and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

21

32.1 Contractor to Keep Site Clear During the execution of the Works the Contractor shall keep the Site reasonably free

from all unnecessary obstruction and shall store or dispose of any Contractor's Equipment and surplus materials and clear away and remove from the Site any wreckage, rubbish or Temporary Works no longer required.

33.1 Clearance of Site on Completion Upon the issue of any Taking-Over Certificate the Contractor shall clear away and

remove from that part of the Site to which such Taking-Over Certificate relates all Contractor's Equipment, surplus materials, rubbish and Temporary Works of every kind, and leave such part of the Site and Works clean and in a workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Provided that the Contractor shall be entitled to retain on Site, until the end of the Defects Liability Period, such materials, Contractor's Equipment and Temporary Works as are required by him for the purpose of fulfilling his obligations during the Defects Liability Period.

Labour 34.1 Engagement of Staffs and Labour The Contractor shall, unless otherwise provided in the Contract, make his own

arrangements for the engagement of all staff and labour, local or other, and for their payment, housing, feeding and transport.

35.1 Returns of Labour and Contractor's Equipment The Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer, deliver to the Engineer a return in

detail, in such form and at such intervals as the Engineer may prescribe, showing the staff and the numbers of the several classes of labour from time to time employed by the Contractor on the Site and such information respecting Contractor's Equipment as the Engineer may require.

Materials, Plant and Workmanship 36.1 Quality of Materials, Plant and Workmanship All materials, Plant and workmanship shall be:

(a) of the respective kinds described in the Contract and in accordance with the Engineer's instructions, and

(b) subjected from time to time to such tests as the Engineer may require at the place of

manufacture, fabrication or preparation, or on the Site or at such other place or places as may be specified in the Contract, or at all or any of such places.

The Contractor shall provide such assistance, labour, electricity, fuels, stores, apparatus

and instruments as are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any materials or Plant and shall supply samples of materials, before incorporation in the Works, for testing as may be selected and required by the Engineer.

22

36.2 Cost of Samples All samples shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost if the supply thereof is

clearly intended by or provided for in the Contract. 36.3 Cost of Tests The cost of making any test shall be borne by the Contractor if such test is:

(a) clearly intended by or provided for in the Contract, or (b) particularised in the Contract (in cases only for a test under load or of a test to

ascertain whether the design of any finished or partially finished work is appropriate for the purposes which it was intended to fulfil) in sufficient detail to enable the Contractor to price or allow for the same in his Tender.

36.4 Cost of Tests not Provided for If any test required by the Engineer which is:

(a) not intended by or provided for, (b) (in the cases above mentioned) not so particularised, or (c) (through so intended or provided for) required by the Engineer to be carried out at

any place other than the Site or the place of manufacture, fabrication or preparation of the materials or Plant tested,

shows the materials, Plant or workmanship not to be in accordance with the provisions of

the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer, then the cost of such test shall be borne by the Contractor, but in any other case Sub-Clause 36.5 shall apply.

36.5 Engineer's Determination where Tests not Provided for Where, pursuant to Sub-Clause 36.4, this Sub-Clause applies the Engineer shall, after

due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine:

(a) any extension of time of which the Contractor is entitled under Clause 44, and (b) the amount of such costs, which shall be added to the Contract Price, and shall notify

the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. 37.1 Inspection of Operations The Engineer, and any person authorised by him, shall at all reasonable times have access

to the Site and to all workshops and places where materials or Plant are being manufactured, fabricated or prepared for the Works and the Contractor shall afford every facility for and every assistance in obtaining the right to such access.

23

37.2 Inspection and Testing The Engineer shall be entitled, during manufacture, fabrication or preparation to inspect

and test the materials and Plant to be supplied under the Contract. If materials or Plant are being manufactured, fabricated or prepared in workshops or places other than those of the Contractor, the Contractor shall obtain permission for the Engineer to carry out such inspection and testing in those workshops or places. Such inspection or testing shall not release the Contractor from any obligation under the Contract.

37.3 Dates for Inspection and Testing The Contractor shall agree with the Engineer on the time and place for the inspection or

testing of any materials or Plant as provided in the Contract. The Engineer shall give the Contractor not less than 24 hours notice of his intention to carry out the inspection or to attend the tests. If the Engineer, or his duly authorised representative, does not attend on the date agreed, the Contractor may, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall forthwith forward to the Engineer duly certified copies of the tests readings. If the Engineer has not attended the tests, he shall accept the said readings as accurate.

37.4 Rejection If, at the time and place agreed in accordance with Sub-Clause 37.3, the materials or

Plant are not ready for inspection or testing or if, as a result of the inspection or testing referred to in this Clause, the Engineer determines that the materials or Plant are defective or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract, he may reject the materials or Plant and shall notify the Contractor thereof immediately. The notice shall state the Engineer's objections with reasons. The Contractor shall then promptly make good the defect or ensure that rejected materials or Plant comply with the Contract. If the Engineer so requests, the tests of rejected materials or Plant shall be made or repeated under the same terms and conditions. All costs incurred by the Employer by the repetition of the test shall after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, be determined by the Engineer and shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer and may be deducted from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor and the Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

37.5 Independent Inspection The Engineer may delegate inspection and testing of materials or Plant to an independent

inspector. Any such delegation shall be effected in accordance with Sub-Clause 2.4 and for this purpose such independent inspector shall be considered as an assistant of the Engineer. Notice of such appointment (not being less than 14 days) shall be given by the Engineer to the Contractor.

38.1 Examination of Work before Covering up No part of the works shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of the

Engineer and the Contractor shall afford full opportunity for the Engineer to examine and measure any such part of the Works which is about to be covered up or put out of view and to examine foundations before any part of the Works is placed thereon. The Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer whenever any such part of the Works or

24

foundations is or are ready or about to be ready for examination and the Engineer shall, without unreasonable delay, unless he considers it unnecessary and advises the Contractor accordingly, attend for the purpose of examining and measuring such part of the Works or of examining such foundations.

38.2 Uncovering and Making Openings The Contractor shall uncover any part of the Works or make openings in or through the

same as the Engineer may from time to time instruct and shall reinstate and make good such part. If any such part has been covered up or put out of view after compliance with the requirement of Sub-Clause 38.1 and is found to be executed in accordance with the Contract, the Engineer shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine the amount the Contractor's costs in respect of such of uncovering, making openings in or through, reinstating and making good the same, which shall be added to the Contract Price, and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. In any other case all costs shall be borne by the Contractor.

39.1 Removal of Improper Work, Materials or Plant The Engineer shall have authority to issue instructions from time to time, for:

(a) the removal from the Site, within such time or times as may be specified in the instruction, of any materials or Plant which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are not in accordance with the Contract,

(b) the substitution of proper and suitable materials or Plant, and (c) the removal and proper re-execution, notwithstanding any previous test thereof or

interim payment therefor, of any work which, in respect of

(i) materials, Plant or workmenship, or (ii) design by the Contractor or for which he is responsible, is not, in the opinion of

the Engineer, in accordance with the Contract. 39.2 Default of Contractor in Compliance In case of default on the part of Contractor in carrying out such instruction within the

time specified therein or, if none, within a reasonable time, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and pay other persons to carry out the same and all costs consequent thereon or incidental thereto shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, be determined by the Engineer and shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer, and may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor and the Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

Suspension 40.1 Suspension of Work The Contractor shall, on the instructions of the Engineer, suspend the progress of the

Works or any part thereof for such time and in such manner as the Engineer may consider

25

necessary and shall, during such suspension, properly protect and secure the Works or such part thereof so far as is necessary in the opinion of the Engineer. Unless such suspension is:

(a) otherwise provided for in the Contract, (b) necessary by reason of some default of or breach of contract by the Contractor or for

which he is responsible, (c) necessary by reason of climatic conditions of the Site, or (d) necessary for the proper execution of the Works or for the safety of the Works or any

part thereof (save to the extent that such necessity arises from any act or default by the Engineer or the Employer or from any of the risks defined in Sub-Clause 20.4),

Sub-Clause 40.2 shall apply. 40.2 Engineer's Determination following Suspension Where, pursuant to Sub-Clause 40.1, this Sub-Clause applies the Engineer shall, after

due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine:

(a) any extension of time to which the Contractor is entitled under Clause 44, and (b) the amount, which shall be added to the Contract Price, in respect of the cost incurred

by the Contractor by reason of such suspension, and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

40.3 Suspension lasting more than 84 Days If the progress of the Works or any part thereof is suspended on the written instructions

of the Engineer and if permission to resume work is not given by the Engineer within a period for 84 days from the date of suspension then, unless such suspension is within paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d) of Sub-Clause 40.1, the Contractor may give notice to the Engineer requiring permission, within 28 days from the receipt thereof, to proceed with the Works or that part thereof in regard to which progress is suspended. If, within the said time, such permission is not granted, the Contractor may, but is not bound to, elect to treat the suspension, where it affects part only of the Works, as an omission of such part under Clause 51 by giving a further notice to the Engineer to that effect, or, where it affects the whole of the Works, treat the suspension as an event of default by the Employer and terminates his employment under the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Sub-Clause 69.1, whereupon the provisions of Sub-Clause 69.2 and 69.3 shall apply.

Commencement and Delays 41.1 Commencement of Works The Contractor shall commence the Works as soon as is reasonably possible after the

receipt by him of notice to this effect from the Engineer, which notice shall be issued within the time stated in the Appendix to Tender after the date of the Letter of Acceptance. Thereafter, the Contractor shall proceeded with the Works with due expedition and without delay.

26

42.1 Possession of Site and Access Thereto Save insofar as the Contract may prescribe:

(a) the extent of portions of the Site of which the Contractor is to be given possession from time to time,

(b) the order in which such portions shall be made available to the Contractor, and,

subject to any requirement in the Contract as to the order in which the Works shall be executed, the Employer will, with the Engineer's notice to commence the Works, give to the Contractor possession of

(c) so much of the Site, and (d) such access as, in accordance with the Contract, is to be provided by the Employer as

may be required to enable the Contractor to commence and proceed with the execution of the Works in accordance with the programme referred to in Clause 14, if any, and otherwise in accordance with such reasonable proposals as the Contractor shall, by notice to the Engineer with a copy to the Employer, make. The Employer will, from time to time as the Works proceed, give to the Contractor possession of such further portions of the Site as may be required to enable the Contractor to proceed with the execution of the Works with due dispatch in accordance with such programme or proposals, as the case may be.

42.2 Failure to Give Possession If the Contractor suffers delay and/or incurs costs from failure on the part of the

Employer to give possession in accordance with the terms of Sub-Clause 42.1, the Engineer shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine:


the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. 42.3 Rights of Way and Facilities The Contractor shall bear all costs and charges for special or temporary wayleaves

required by him in connection with access to the Site. The Contractor shall also provide at his own cost any additional facilities outside the Site required by him for the purposes of the Works.

43.1 Time for Completion The whole of the Works and, if applicable, any Section required to be completed within a

particular time as stated in the Appendix to Tender, shall be completed, in accordance with the provisions of Clause 48, within the time stated in the Appendix to Tender for the whole of the Works or the Section (as the case may be), calculated from the Commencement Date, or such extended time as may be allowed under Clause 44.

27

44.1 Extension of Time for Completion In the event of:

(a) the amount or nature of extra or additional work, (b) any cause of delay referred to in these Conditions, (c) exceptionally adverse climatic conditions, (d) any delay, impediment or prevention by the Employer, or (e) other special circumstances which may occur, other than through a default of or

breach of contract by the Contractor or for which he is responsible, being such as fairly to entitle the Contractor to an extension of the Time for Completion of the Works, or any Section or part thereof, the Engineer shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine the amount of such extension and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

44.2 Contractor to Provide Notification and Detailed Particulars Provided that the Engineer is not bound to make any determination unless the Contractor

has

(a) within 28 days after such event has first arisen notified the Engineer with a copy to the Employer, and

(b) within 28 days or such other reasonable time as may be agreed by the Engineer, after

such notification submitted to the Engineer detailed particulars of any extension of time to which he may consider himself entitled in order that such submission may be investigated at the time.

44.3 Interim Determination of Extension Provided also that where an event has a continuing effect such that it is not practicable

for the Contractor to submit detailed particulars within the period of 28 days referred to in Sub-Clause 44.2(b), he shall nevertheless be entitled to an extension of time provided that he has submitted to the Engineer interim particulars at intervals of not more than 28 days and final particulars within 28 days of the end of the effects resulting from the event. On receipt of such interim particulars, the Engineer shall, without undue delay, make an interim determination of extension of time and, on receipt of the final particulars, the Engineer shall review all the circumstances and shall determine an overall extension of time in regard to the event. In both such cases the Engineer shall make his determination after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor and shall notify the Contractor of the determination, with a copy to the Employer. No final review shall result in a decrease of any extension of time already determined by the Engineer.

45.1 Restriction on Working Hours Subject to any provision to the contrary contained in the Contract, none of the Works

shall, save as hereinafter provided, be carried on during the night or on locally recognised days of rest without the consent of the Engineer, except when work is unavoidable or

28

absolutely necessary for the saving of life or property or for the safety of the Works, in which case the Contractor shall immediately advise the Engineer. Provided that the provisions of this Clause shall not be applicable in the case of any work which it is customary to carry out by multiple shifts.

46.1 Rate of Progress If for any reason, which does not entitle the Contractor to an extension of time, the rate of

progress of the Works or any Section is at any time, in the opinion of the Engineer, too slow to comply with the Time for Completion, the Engineer shall so notify the Contractor who shall thereupon take such steps as are necessary, subject to the consent of the Engineer, to expedite progress so as to comply with the Time for Completion. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for taking such steps. If, as a result of any notice given by the Engineer under this Clause, the Contractor considers that it is necessary to do any work at night or on locally recognised days of rest, he shall be entitled to seek the consent of the Engineer so to do. Provided that if any steps, taken by the Contractor in meeting his obligations under this Clause, involve the Employer in additional supervision costs, such cost shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, be determined by the Engineer and shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer, and may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor and the Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

47.1 Liquidated Damages for Delay If the Contractor fails to comply with the Time for Completion in accordance with

Clause 48, for the whole of the Works or, if applicable, any Section within the relevant time prescribed by Clause 43, then the Contractor shall pay to the Employer the relevant sum stated in the Appendix to Tender as liquidated damages for such default and not as a penalty (which sum shall be the only monies due from the Contractor for such default) for every day or part of a day which shall elapse between the relevant Time for Completion and the date stated in a Taking-Over Certificate of the whole of the Works or the relevant Section, subject to the applicable limit stated in the Appendix to Tender. The Employer may, without prejudice to any other method of recovery, deduct the amount of such damages from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor. The payment or deduction of such damages shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligation to complete the Works, or from any other of his obligations and liabilities under the Contract.

47.2 Reduction of Liquidated Damages If, before the Time for Completion of the whole of the Works or, if applicable, any

Section, a Taking-Over Certificate has been issued for any part of the Works or of a Section, the liquidated damages for delay in completion of the remainder of the Works or of that Section shall, for any period of delay after the date stated in such Taking-Over Certificate, and in the absence of Alternative provisions in the Contract, be reduced in the proportion which the value of the part so certified bears to the value of the whole of the Works or Section, as applicable. The provisions of this Sub-Clause shall only apply to the rate of liquidated damages and shall not affect the limit thereof.

29

48.1 Taking-Over Certificate When the whole of the Works have been substantially completed and have satisfactorily

passed any Tests on Completion prescribed by the Contract, the Contractor may give a notice to that effect to the Engineer with a copy to the Employer, accompanied by a written undertaking to finish with due expedition any outstanding work during the Defects Liability Period. Such notice and undertaking shall be deemed to be a request by the Contractor for the Engineer to issue a Taking-Over Certificate in respect of the Works. The Engineer shall within 21 days of the date of delivery of such notice, either issue to the Contractor, with a copy to the Employer, a Taking-Over Certificate, stating the date on which, in his opinion, the Works were substantially completed in accordance with the Contract, or give instructions in writing to the Contractor specifying all the work which, in the Engineer's opinion, is required to be done by the Contractor before the issue of such Certificate. The Engineer shall also notify the Contractor of any defects in the Works affecting substantial completion that may appear after such instructions and before completion of the Woks specified therein. The Contractor shall be entitled to receive such Taking-Over Certificate within 21 days of completion, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, of the Works so specified and remedying any defects so notified.

48.2 Taking Over of Sections or Parts Similarly, in accordance with the procedure set out in Sub-Clause 48.1, the Contractor

may request and the Engineer shall issue a Taking-Over Certificate in respect of:

(a) any Section in respect of which a separate Time for Completion is provided in the Appendix to Tender,

(b) any substantial part of the Permanent Works which has been both completed to the

satisfaction of the Engineer and, otherwise than as provided for in the Contract, occupied or used by the Employer, or

(c) any part of the Permanent Works which the Employer has elected to occupy or use

prior to completion (where such prior occupation or use is not provided for in the Contract or has not been agreed by the Contractor as a temporary measure).

48.3 Substantial Completion of Parts If any part of the Permanent Works has been substantially completed and has

satisfactorily passed any Tests on Completion prescribed by the Contractor, the Engineer may issue a Taking-Over Certificate in respect of that part of the Permanent Works before completion of the whole of the Works and, upon the issue of such Certificate, the Contractor shall be deemed to have undertaken to complete with due expedition any outstanding work in that part of the Permanent Works during the Defects Liability Period.

48.4 Surfaces Requiring Reinstatement Provided that a Taking-Over Certificate given in respect of any Section or part of the

Permanent Works before completion of the whole of the Works shall not be deemed to certify completion of any ground or surfaces requiring reinstatement, unless such Taking-Over Certificate shall expressly so state.

30

Defects Liability 49.1 Defects Liability Period In these Conditions the expression "Defects Liability Period" shall mean the defects

liability period named in the Appendix to Tender, calculated from:

(a) the date of completion of the Works certified by the Engineer in accordance with Clause 48, or

(b) in the event of more than one certificate having issued by the Engineer under Clause

48, the respective dates so certified, and in relation to the Defects Liability Period the expression "the Works" shall be

construed accordingly. 49.2 Completion of Outstanding Work and Remedying Defects To the intent that the Works shall, at or as soon as practicable after the expiration of the

Defects Liability Period, be delivered to the Employer in the condition required by the Contract, fair wear and tear excepted, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall:

(a) complete the work, if any, outstanding on the date stated in the Taking-Over

Certificate as soon as practicable after such date, and (b) execute all such work of amendment, reconstruction, and remedying defects,

shrinkages or other faults as the Engineer may, during the Defects Liability Period or within 14 days after its expiration, as a result of an inspection made by or on behalf of the Engineer prior to its expiration, instruct the Contractor to execute.

49.3 Cost of Remedying Defects All work referred to in Sub-Clause 49.2(b) shall be executed by the Contractor at his own

cost if the necessity thereof is, in the opinion of the Engineer, due to:

(a) the use of materials, Plant or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract, (b) where the Contractor is responsible for the design of part of the Permanent Works,

any fault i n such design, or (c) the neglect or failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with any obligation,

expressed or implied, on the Contractor's part under the Contract. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, such necessity is due to any other cause, he shall

determine an addition to the Contract Price in accordance with Clause 52 and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

49.4 Contractor's Failure to Carry Out Instructions In case of default on the part of the Contractor in carrying out such instruction within a

reasonable time, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and pay other persons to carry

31

out the same and if such work is work which, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor was liable to do at his own cost under the Contract, then all cost consequent thereon or incidental thereto shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, be determined by the Engineer and shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer, and may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor and the Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

50.1 Contractor to Search If any defect, shrinkage or other fault in the Works appears at any time prior to the end of

the Defects Liability Period, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor, with a copy to the Employer, to search under the directions of the Engineer for the cause thereof. Unless such defect, shrinkage or other fault is one for which the Contractor is liable under the Contract, the Engineer shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine the amount in respect of the costs of such search incurred by the Contractor, which shall be added to the Contract Price and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. If such defect, shrinkage or other fault is one for which the Contractor is liable, the cost of the work carried out in searching as aforesaid shall be borne by the Contractor and he shall in such case remedy such defect, shrinkage or other fault at his own cost in accordance with the provisions of Clause 49.

Alterations, Additions and Omissions 51.1 Variations The Engineer shall make any variation of the form, qualify or quantity of the Works or

any part thereof that may, in his opinion, be necessary and for that purpose, or if for any other reason it shall, in his opinion, be appropriate, he shall have the authority to instruct the Contractor to do and the Contractor shall do any of the following:

(a) increase or decrease the quantity of any work included in the Contract, (b) omit any such work (but not if the omitted work is to be carried out by the Employer

or by another contractor), (c) change the character or quality or kind of any such work, (d) change the levels, lines, position and dimensions of any part of the Works, (e) execute additional work of any kind necessary for the completion of the Works, or (f) change any specified sequence or timing of construction of any part of the Works.

No such variation shall in any way vitiate or invalidate the Contract, but the effect, if any,

of all such variations shall be valued in accordance with Clause 52. Provided that where the issue of an instruction to vary the Works is necessitated by some default of or breach of contract by the Contractor or for which he is responsible, any additional cost attributable to such default shall be borne by the Contractor.

51.2 Instructions for Variations The Contractor shall not make any such variation without an instruction of the Engineer.

Provided that no instruction shall be required for increase or decrease in the quantity of any work where such increase or decrease is not the result of an instruction given under this Clause, but is the result of the quantities exceeding or being less than those stated in the Bill of Quantities.

32

52.1 Valuation of Variations All variations referred to in Clause 51 and any additions to the Contract Price which are

required to be determined in accordance with Clause 52 (for the purposes of this Clause referred to as "varied work"), shall be valued at the rates and prices set out in the Contract if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the same shall be applicable. If the Contract does not contain any rates or prices applicable to the varied work, the rates and prices in the Contract shall be used as the basis for valuation so far as may be reasonable, failing which, after due consultation by the Engineer with the Employer and the Contractor, suitable rates or prices shall be agreed upon between the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement the Engineer shall fix such rates or prices as are, in his opinion, appropriate and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. Until such time as rates or prices are agreed or fixed, the Engineer shall determine provisional rates or prices to enable on-account payments to be included in certificates issued in accordance with Clause 60.

52.2 Power of Engineer to Fix Rates Provided that if the nature or amount of any varied work relative to the nature or amount

of the whole of the Works or to any part thereof, is such that, in the opinion of the Engineer, the rate or price contained in the Contract for any item of the Works is, by reason of such varied work, rendered inappropriate or inapplicable, then, after due consultation by the Engineer with the Employer and the Contractor, a suitable rate or price shall be agreed upon between the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement the Engineer shall fix such other rate or price as is, in his opinion, appropriate and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. Until such time as rates or prices are agreed or fixed, the Engineer shall determine provisional rates or prices to enable on-account payments to be included in certificates issued in accordance with Clause 60.

Provided also that no varied work instructed to be done by the Engineer pursuant to

Clause 51 shall be valued under Sub-Clause 52.1 or under this Sub-Clause unless, within 14 days of the date of such instruction and, other than in the case of omitted work, before the commencement of the varied work, notice shall have been given either:

(a) by the Contractor to the Engineer of his intention to claim extra payment or a varied

rate or price, or (b) by the Engineer to the Contractor of his intention to vary a rate or price.

52.3 Variations Exceeding 15 per cent If, on the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate for the whole of the Works, it is found that

as a result of:

(a) all varied work valued under Sub-Clauses 52.1 and 52.2, and (b) all adjustments upon measurement of the estimated quantities set out in the Bill of

Quantities, excluding Provisional Sums, dayworks and adjustment of price made under Clause 70.

but not from any other cause, there have been additions to or deductions from the

33

Contract Price which taken together are in excess of 15 per cent of the "Effective Contract Price" (which for the purposes of this Sub-Clause shall mean the Contract Price, excluding Provisional Sums and allowance for dayworks, if any) then and in such event (subject to any action already taken under any other Sub-Clause of this Clause), after due consultation by the Engineer with the Employer and the Contractor, there shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Price such further sums as may be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer or, failing agreement, determined by the Engineer having regard to the Contractor's Site and general overhead costs of the Contract. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor of any determination made under this Sub-Clause, with a copy to the Employer. Such sum shall be based only on the amount by which such additions or deductions shall be in excess of 15 per cent of the Effective Contract Price.

52.4 Daywork The Engineer may, if in his opinion it is necessary or desirable, issue an instruction that

any varied work shall be executed on a daywork basis. The Contractor shall then be paid for such varied work under the terms set out in the daywork schedule included in the Contract and at the rates and prices affixed thereto by him in the Tender.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer such receipts or other vouchers as may be

necessary to provide the amounts paid and, before ordering material, shall submit to the Engineer quotations for the same for his approval.

In respect of such of the Works executed on a daywork basis , the Contractor shall during

the continuance of such work, deliver each day to the Engineer an exact list in duplicate of the names, occupation and time of all workmen employed on such work and a statement, also in duplicate, showing the description and quantity of all materials and Contractor's Equipment used thereon or therefor other than Contractor's Equipment which is included in the percentage addition in accordance with such daywork schedule. One copy of each list and statement will, if correct, or when agreed, be signed by the Engineer and returned to the Contractor.

At the end of each month the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a priced statement

of the labour, materials and Contractor's Equipment, except as aforesaid, used and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment unless such lists and statements have been fully and punctually rendered. Provided always that if the Engineer considers that for any reason the sending of such lists or statements by the Contractor, in accordance with the foregoing provision, was impracticable he shall nevertheless be entitled to authorise payment for such work, either as daywork, on being satisfied as to the time employed and the labour, materials and Contractor’s Equipment used on such work, or at such value therefor as shall, in his opinion, be fair and reasonable.

Procedure for Claims 53.1 Notice of Claims Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract, if the Contractor intends to claim

any additional payment pursuant to any Clause of these Conditions or otherwise, he shall give notice of his intention to the Engineer with a copy to the Employer, within 28 days after the event giving rise to the claim has first arisen.

34

53.2 Contemporary Records Upon the happening of the event referred to in Sub-Clause 53.1, the Contractor shall

keep such contemporary records as may reasonably be necessary to support any claim he may subsequently wish to make. Without necessarily admitting the Employer's liability, the Engineer shall, on receipt of a notice under Sub-Clause 53.1, inspect such contemporary records and may instruct the Contractor to keep any further contemporary records as are reasonable and may be material to the claim of which notice has been given. The Contractor shall permit the Engineer to inspect all records kept pursuant to this Sub-Clause and shall supply him with copies thereof as and when the Engineer so instructs.

53.3 Substantiation of Claims Within 28 days, or such other reasonable time as may be agreed by the Engineer, of

giving notice under Sub-Clause 53.1, the Contractor shall send to the Engineer an account giving detailed particulars of the amount claimed and the grounds upon which the claim is based. Where the event giving rise to the claim has a continuing effect, such account shall be considered to be an interim account and the Contractor shall, at such intervals as the Engineer may reasonably require, send further interim accounts giving the accumulated amount of the claim and any further grounds upon which it is based. In cases where interim accounts are sent to the Engineer, the Contractor shall send a final account within 28 days of the end of the effects resulting from the event. The Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer so to do, copy to the Employer all accounts sent to the Engineer pursuant to this Sub-Clause.

53.4 Failure to Comply If the Contractor fails to comply with any of the provisions of this Clause in respect of

any claim which he seeks to make, his entitlement to payment in respect thereof shall not exceed such amount as the Engineer or any arbitrator or arbitrators appointed pursuant to Sub-Clause 67.3 assessing the claim considers to be verified by contemporary records (whether or not such records were brought to the Engineer's notice as required under Sub-Clause 53.2 and 53.3).

53.5 Payment of Claims The Contractor shall be entitled to have included in any interim payment certified by the

Engineer pursuant to Clause 60 such amount in respect of any claim as the Engineer, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, may consider due to the Contractor provided that the Contractor has supplied sufficient particulars to enable the Engineer to determine the amount due. If such particulars are insufficient to substantiate the whole of the claim, the Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of such part of the claim as such particulars may substantiate to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor of any determination made under this Sub-Clause, with a copy to the Employer.

35

Contractor's Equipment, Temporary Works and Materials 54.1 Contractor's Equipment, Temporary Works and Materials; Exclusive Use for the

Works All Contractor's Equipment, Temporary Works and materials provided by the Contractor

shall, when brought on to the Site, be deemed to be exclusively intended for the execution of the Works and the Contractor shall not remove the same or any part thereof, except for the purpose of moving it from one part of the Site to another, without the consent of the Engineer. Provided that consent shall not be required for vehicles engaged in transporting any staff, labour, Contractor's Equipment, Temporary Works, Plant or materials to or from the Site.

54.2 Employer not Liable for Damage The Employer shall not at any time be liable, save as mentioned in Clauses 20 and 65, for

the loss of or damage to any of the said Contractor's Equipment, Temporary Works or materials.

54.3 Customs Clearance The Employer will use his best endeavours in assisting the Contractor, where required, in

obtaining clearance through the Customs of Contractor's Equipment, materials and other things required for the Works.

54.4 Re-export of Contractor's Equipment In respect of any Contractor's Equipment which the Contractor has imported for the

purposes of the Works, the Employer will use his best endeavours to assist the Contractor, where required, in procuring any necessary Government consent to the re-export of such Contractor's Equipment by the Contractor upon the removal thereof pursuant to the terms of Contract.

54.5 Conditions of Hire of Contractor's Equipment With a view to securing, in the event of termination under Clause 63, the continued

availability, for the purpose of executing the Works, of any hired Contractor's Equipment, the Contractor shall not bring on to the Site any hired Contractor's Equipment unless there is an agreement for hire thereof (which agreement shall be deemed not to include an agreement for hire purchase) which contains a provision that the owner thereof will, on request in writing made by the Employer within 7 days after the date on which any termination has become effective, and on the Employer undertaking to pay all hire charges in respect thereof from such date, hire such Contractor's Equipment to the Employer on the same terms in all respect as the same was hired to the Contractor save that the Employer shall be entitled to permit the use thereof by any other contractor employed by him for the purpose of execution and completing the Works and remedying any defects therein, under the terms of the said Clause 63.

54.6 Costs for the Purpose of Clause 63 In the event of the Employer entering into any agreement for the hire of Contractor's

Equipment pursuant to Sub-Clause 54.5, all sums properly paid by the Employer under

36

the provision of any such agreement and all costs incurred by him (including stamp duties) in entering into such agreement shall be deemed, for the purpose of Clause 63, to be part of the cost of executing and completing the Works and the remedying of any defects therein.

54.7 Incorporation of Clause in Subcontracts The Contractor shall, where entering into any subcontract for the execution of any part of

the Works, incorporate in such subcontract (by reference or otherwise) the provisions of this Clause in relation to Contractor's Equipment, Temporary Works or materials brought on to the Site by the Subcontractor.

54.8 Approval of Materials not Implied The operation of this Clause shall not be deemed to imply any approval by the Engineer

of the materials or other matters referred to therein nor shall it prevent the rejection of any such materials at any time by the Engineer.

Measurement 55.1 Quantities The quantities set out in the Bill of Quantities are the estimated quantities for the Works,

and they are not to be taken as the actual and correct quantities of the Works to be executed by the Contractor in fulfillment of his obligations under the Contract.

56.1 Works to be Measured The Engineer shall, except as otherwise stated, ascertain and determine by measurement

the value of the Works in accordance with the Contract and the Contractor shall be paid that value in accordance with Clause 60. The Engineer shall, when he requires any part of the Works to be measured, give reasonable notice to the Contractor's authorised agent, who shall:

(a) forthwith attend or send a qualified representative to assist the Engineer in making

such measurement, and (b) supply all particulars required by the Engineer.

Should the Contractor not attend, or neglect or omit to send such representative, then the

measurement made by the Engineer or approved by him shall be taken to be the correct measurement of such part of the Works. For the purpose of measuring such Permanent Works as are to be measured by records and drawings, the Engineer shall prepare records and drawings as the work proceeds and the Contractor, as and when called upon to do so in writing, shall, within 14 days, attend to examine and agree such records and drawings with the Engineer and shall sign the same when so agreed. If the Contractor does not attend to examine and agree such records and drawings, they shall be taken to be correct. If, after examination of such records and drawings, the Contractor does not agree the same or does not sign the same as agreed, they shall nevertheless be taken to be correct, unless the Contractor, within 14 days of such examination, lodges with the Engineer notice of the respects in which such records and drawings are claimed by him to be incorrect. On receipt of such notice, the Engineer shall review the records and drawings

37

and either confirm or vary them. 57.1 Method of Measurement The Works shall be measured net, notwithstanding any general or local custom, except

where otherwise provided for in the Contract. 57.2 Breakdown of Lump Sum Items For the purposes of statements submitted in accordance with Sub-Clause 60.1, the

Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, within 28 days after the receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, a breakdown for each of the lump sum items contained in the Tender. Such breakdowns shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Provisional Sums 58.1 Definition of "Provisional Sum" "Provisional Sum" means a sum included in the Contract and so designated in the Bill of

Quantities for the execution of any part of the Works or for the supply of goods, materials, Plant or services, or for contingencies, which sum may be used, in whole or in part, or not at all, on the instructions of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be entitled to only such amounts in respect of the work, supply or contingencies to which such Provisional Sums relate as the Engineer shall determine in accordance with this Clause. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor of any determination made under this Sub-Clause, with a copy to the Employer.

58.2 Use of Provisional Sums In respect of every Provisional Sum the Engineer shall have authority to issue

instructions for the execution of work or for the supply of goods, material, Plant or services by:

(a) the Contractor, in which case the Contractor shall be entitled to an amount equal to

the value thereof determined in accordance with Clause 52, and (b) a nominated Subcontractor, as hereinafter defined, in which case the sum to be paid

to the Contractor therefor shall be determined and paid in accordance with Sub-Clause 59.4.

58.3 Production of Vouchers The Contractor shall produce to the Engineer all quotations, invoices, vouchers and

accounts or receipts in connection with expenditure in respect of Provisional Sums, except where work is valued in accordance with rates or prices set out in the Tender.

Nominated Subcontractors 59.1 Definition of "Nominated Subcontractors" All specialists, merchants, tradesmen and others executing any work or supplying any

goods, materials, Plant or services for which Provisional Sums are included in the

38

Contract, who may have been or be nominated or selected or approved by the Employer or the Engineer, and all persons to whom by virtue of the provisions of the Contract the Contractor is required to subcontract shall, in the execution of such work or the supply of such goods, materials, Plant or services, be deemed to be subcontractors to the Contractor and are referred to in this Contract as "nominated Subcontractors".

59.2 Nominated Subcontractors; Objection to Nomination The Contractor shall not be required by the Employer or the Engineer, or be deemed to

be under any obligation, to employ any nominated Subcontractor against whom the Contractor may raise reasonable objection, or who declines to enter into subcontract with the Contractor containing provisions:

(a) that in respect of the work, goods, materials, Plant or services the subject of the

subcontract, the nominated Subcontractor will undertake towards the Contractor such obligations and liabilities as will enable the Contractor to discharge his own obligations and liabilities towards the Employer under the terms of the Contract and will save harmless and indemnify the Contractor from and against the same and from all claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of or in connection therewith, or arising out of or in connection with any failure to perform such obligations or to fulfill such liabilities, and

(b) that the nominated Subcontractor will save harmless and indemnity the Contractor

from and against any negligence by the nominated Subcontractor, his agents, workmen and servants and from and against any misuse by him or them of any Temporary Works provided by the Contractor for the purposes of the Contract and from all claims as aforesaid.

59.3 Design Requirements to be Expressly Stated If in connection with any Provisional Sum the services to be provided include any matter

of design or specification of any part of the Permanent Works or of any Plant to be incorporated therein, such requirement shall be expressly stated in the Contract and shall be included in any nominated Subcontract. The nominated Subcontract shall specify that the nominated Subcontractor providing such services will save harmless and indemnify the Contractor from and against the same and from all claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of or in connection with any failure to perform such obligations or to fulfill such liabilities.

59.4 Payments to Nominated Subcontractors For all work executed or goods, materials, Plant or services supplied by any nominated

Subcontractor, the Contractor shall be entitled to:

(a) the actual price paid or due to be paid by the Contractor, on the instructions of the Engineer, and in accordance with the subcontract;

(b) in respect of labour supplied by the Contractor, the sum, if any, entered in the Bill of

Quantities or, if instructed by the Engineer pursuant to paragraph (a) of Sub-Clause 58.2, as may be determined in accordance with Clause 52; and

(c) in respect of all other charges and profit, a sum being a percentage rate of the actual

39

price paid or due to be paid calculated, where provision has been made in the Bill of Quantities for a rate to be set against the relevant Provisional Sum, at the rate inserted by the Contractor against that item or, where no such provision has been made, at the rate inserted by the Contractor in the Appendix to Tender and repeated where provision for such is made in a special item provided in the Bill of Quantities for such purpose.

59.5 Certification of Payments to Nominated Subcontractors Before issuing, under Clause 60 any certificate, which includes any payment in respect of

work done or goods, materials, Plant or services supplied by any nominated Subcontractor, the Engineer shall be entitled to demand from the Contractor reasonable proof that all payments, less retentions, included in previous certificates in respect of the work or goods, materials, Plant or services of such nominated Subcontractor have been paid or discharged by the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to supply such proof then, unless the Contractor:

(a) satisfies the Engineer in writing that he has reasonable cause for withholding or

refusing to make such payment, and (b) produces to the Engineer reasonable proof that he has so informed such nominated

Subcontractor in writing, the Employer shall be entitled to pay to such nominated Subcontractor direct, upon the

certificate of the Engineer, all payments, less retention, provided for in the nominated Subcontract, which the Contractor has failed to make to such nominated Subcontractor and to deduct by way of set-off the amount so paid by the Employer from any sums due or to become due from the Employer to the Contractor.

Provided that, where the Engineer has certified and the Employer has paid direct as

aforesaid, the Engineer shall in issuing any further certificate in favour of the Contractor, deduct from the amount thereof the amount so paid, direct as aforesaid, but shall not withhold or delay the issue of the certificate itself when due to be issued under the terms of the Contract.

Certificates and Payment 60.1 Monthly Statements The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer after the end of each month six copies, each

signed by the Contractor's representative approved by the Engineer in accordance with the Sub-Clause 15.1, of a statement, in such form as the Engineer may from time to time prescribe, showing the amounts to which the Contractor considers himself to be entitled up to the end of the month in respect of:

(a) the value of the Permanent Works executed, (b) any other items in the Bill of Quantities including those for Contractor’s Equipment,

Temporary Works, dayworks and the like, (c) the percentage of the invoice value of listed materials, all as stated in the Appendix to

Tender, and Plant delivered by the Contractor on the Site for incorporation in the

40

Permanent Works but not incorporated in such Works, (d) adjustments under Clause 70, and (e) any other sum to which the Contractor may be entitled under the Contract or

otherwise. 60.2 Monthly Payments The Engineer shall, within 28 days of receiving such statement, certify to the Employer

the amount of payment to the Contractor which he considers due and payable in respect thereof, subject:

(a) firstly, to the retention of the account calculated by applying the Percentage of

Retention stated in the Appendix to Tender, to the amount to which the Contractor is entitled under paragraph (a), (b), (c) and (e) of Sub-Clause 60.1 until the amount so retained reaches the Limit of Retention Money stated in the Appendix to Tender, and

(b) secondly, to the deduction, other than pursuant to Clause 47, of any sums which may

have become due and payable by the Contractor to the Employer. Provided that the Engineer shall not be bound to certify any payment under this Sub-

Clause if the net amount thereof, after all retentions and deductions, would be less than the Minimum Amount of Interim Payment Certificates stated in the Appendix to Tender.

Notwithstanding the terms of this Clause or any other Clause of the Contract no amount

will be certified by the Engineer for payment until the performance security, if required under the Contract, has been provided by the Contractor and approved by the Employer.

60.3 Payment of Retention Money

(a) Upon the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate with respect to the whole of the Works, one half of the Retention Money, or upon the issue of a Taking-Over Certificate with respect to a Section or part of the Permanent

Works only such proportion thereof as the Engineer determines having regard to the

relative value of such Section or part of the Permanent Works, shall be certified by the Engineer for payment to the Contractor.

(b) Upon the expiration of the Defects Liability Period for the Works the other half of the

Retention Money shall be certified by the Engineer for payment to the Contractor. Provided that, in the event of different Defects Liability Periods having become applicable to different Sections or part of the Permanent Works pursuant to Clause 48, the expression "expiration of the Defects Liability Period" shall, for the purposes of this Sub-Clause, be deemed to mean the expiration of the latest of such periods. Provided also that if at such time, there shall remain to be executed by the Contractor any work instructed, pursuant to Clause 49 and 50, in respect of the Works, the Engineer shall be entitled to withhold certification until completion of such work of so much of the balance of the Retention Money as shall, in the opinion of the Engineer, represent the cost of the work remaining to be executed.

41

60.4 Correction of Certificates The Engineer may by any Interim Payment Certificate make any correction or

modification in any previous certificate which shall have been issued by him and shall have authority, if any work is not being carried out to his satisfaction, to omit or reduce the value of such work in any Interim Payment Certificate.

60.5 Statement at Completion Not later than 84 days after the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate in respect of the

whole of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Statement at Completion with supporting documents showing in detail, in the form approved by the Engineer:

(a) the final value of all work done in accordance with the Contract up to the date stated

in such Taking-Over Certificate, (b) any further sums which the Contractor considers to be due, and (c) an estimate of amounts which the Contractor considers will become due to him under

the Contract. The estimated amounts shall be shown separately in such Statement at Completion. The

Engineer shall verify payment in accordance with Sub-Clause 60.2. 60.6 Final Statement Not later than 56 days after the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate pursuant to Sub-

Clause 62.1, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for consideration a draft final statement with supporting documents showing in detail, in the form approved by the Engineer:

(a) the value of all work done in accordance with the Contract, and (b) any further sums which the Contractor considers to be due to him under the Contract. If the Engineer disagrees with or cannot verify any part of the draft final statement, the

Contractor shall submit such further information as the Engineer may reasonably require and shall make such changes in the draft as may be agreed between them. The Contractor shall then prepare and submit to the Engineer the final statement as agreed (for the purposes of these Conditions referred to as the "Final Statement").

If, following discussions between the Engineer and the Contractor and any changes to the

draft final statement which may be agreed between them, it becomes evident that a dispute exists, the Engineer shall deliver to the Employer an Interim Payment Certificate for those parts of the draft final statement, if any, which are not in dispute. The dispute may then be settled in accordance with Clause 67.

60.7 Discharge Upon submission of the Final Statement, the Contractor shall give to the Employer, with

a copy to the Engineer, a written discharge confirming that the total of the Final Statement represents full and final settlement of all monies due to the Contractor arising out of or in respect of the Contract. Provided that such discharge shall become effective only after payment due under the Final Payment Certificate issued pursuant to Sub-

42

Clause 60.8 has been made and the performance security referred to in Sub-Clause 10.1, if any, has been returned to the Contractor.

60.8 Final Payment Certificate Within 28 days after receipt of the Final Statement, and the written discharge, the

Engineer shall issue to the Employer (with a copy to the Contractor) a Final Payment Certificate stating:

(a) the amount which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is finally due under the Contract or

otherwise, and (b) after giving credit to the Employer for all amounts previously paid by the Employer

and for all sums to which the Employer is entitled other than under Clause 47, the balance, if any, due from the Employer to the Contractor or from the Contractor to the Employer as the case may be.

60.9 Cessation of Employer's Liability The Employer shall not be liable to the Contractor for any matter or thing arising out of

or in connection with the Contract or execution of the Works, unless the Contractor shall have included a claim in respect thereof in his Final Statement and (except in respect of matters or things arising after the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate in respect of the whole of the Works) in the Statement at Completion referred to in Sub-Clause 60.5.

60.10 Time for Payment The amount due to the Contractor under any Interim Payment Certificate issued by the

Engineer pursuant to this Clause, or to any other term of the Contract, shall, subject to Clause 47, be paid by the Employer to the Contractor within 28 days after such Interim Payment Certificate has been delivered to the Employer, or, in the case of the Final Payment Certificate referred to in Sub-Clause 60.8, within 56 days, after such Final Payment Certificate has been delivered to the Employer. In the event of the failure of the Employer to make payment within the times stated, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor interest at the rate stated in the Appendix to Tender upon all sums unpaid from the date by which the same should have been paid. The provisions of this Sub-Clause are without prejudice to the Contractor's entitlement under Clause 69 or otherwise.

61.1 Approval only by Defects Liability Certificate Only the Defects Liability Certificate, referred to in Clause 62, shall be deemed to

constitute approval of the Works. 62.1 Defects Liability Certificate The Contract shall not be considered as completed until a Defects Liability Certificate

shall have been signed by the Engineer and delivered to the Employer, with a copy to the Contractor, stating the date on which the Contractor shall have completed his obligations to execute and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein to the Engineer's satisfaction. The Defects Liability Certificate shall be given by the Engineer within 28 days after the expiration of the Defects Liability Period, or, if different defects liability periods shall become applicable to different Sections or parts of the Permanent Works,

43

the expiration of the latest such period, or as soon thereafter as any works instructed, pursuant to Clause 49 and 50, have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Provided that the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate shall not be a condition precedent to payment to the Contractor of the second portion of the Retention Money in accordance with the conditions set out in Sub-Clause 60.3.

62.2 Unfulfilled Obligations Notwithstanding the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate the Contractor and the

Employer shall remain liable for the fulfillment of any obligation incurred under the provisions of the Contract prior to the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate which remains unperformed at the time of such Defects Liability Certificate is issued and, for the purposes of determining the nature and extent of any such obligation, the Contract shall be deemed to remain in force between the parties to the Contract.

Remedies 63.1 Default of Contractor If the Contractor is deemed by law unable to pay his debts as they fall due, or enters into

voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy, liquidation or dissolution (other than a voluntary liquidation for the purposes of amalgamation or reconstruction), or becomes insolvent, or makes an arrangement with, or assignment in favour of, his creditors, or agrees to carry out the Contract under a committee of inspection of his creditors, or if a receiver, administrator, trustee or liquidator is appointed over any substantial part of his assets, or if, under any law or regulation relating to reorganization, arrangement or readjustment of debts, proceedings are commenced against the Contractor or resolutions passed in connection with dissolution or liquidation or if any steps are taken to enforce any security interest over a substantial part of the assets of the Contractor, or if any act is done or event occurs with respect to the Contractor or his assets which, under any applicable law has a substantially similar effect to any of the foregoing acts or events, or if the Contractor has contravened Sub-Clause 3.1, or has an execution levied on his goods, or Contract, if the Engineer certifies to the Employer, with a copy to the Contractor, that, in his opinion, the Contractor:

(a) has repudiated the Contract, or (b) without reasonable excuse has failed

(i) to commence the Works in accordance with Sub-Clause 41.1, (ii) to proceed with the Works, or any Section thereof, within 28 days after receiving

notice pursuant to Sub-Clause 46.1,

(c) has failed to comply with a notice issued pursuant to Sub-Clause 37.4 or an instruction issued pursuant to Sub-Clause 39.1 within 28 days after having received it

(d) despite previous warning from the Engineer, in writing, is otherwise persistently or

flagrantly neglecting to comply with any of his obligations under the Contract, or (e) has contravened Sub-Clause 4.1, then the Employer may, after giving 14 days' notice to the Contractor, enter upon the

44

Site and the Works and terminate the employment of the Contractor without thereby releasing the Contractor from any of his obligations or liabilities under the Contract, or affecting the rights and authorities conferred on the Employer or the Engineer by the Contract, and may himself complete the Works or may employ any other contractor to complete the Works. The Employer or such other contractor may use for such completion so much of the Contractor's Equipment, Temporary Works and materials as he or they may think proper.

63.2 Valuation at Date of Termination The Engineer shall, as soon as may be practicable after any such entry and termination by

the Employer, fix and determine ex parte, or by or after reference to the parties or after such investigation or enquiries as he may think fit to make or institute, and shall certify:

(a) what amount (if any) had, at the time of such entry and termination, been reasonably

earned by or would reasonably accrue to the Contractor in respect of work then actually done by him under the Contract, and

(b) the value of any of the said unused or partially used materials, any Contractor's

Equipment and any Temporary Works. 63.3 Payment after Termination If the Employer terminates the Contractor's employment under this Clause, he shall not

be liable to pay to the Contractor any further amount (including damages) in respect of the Contract until the expiration of the Defects Liability Period and thereafter until the costs of execution, completion and remedying of any defects, damages for delay in completion (if any) and all other expenses incurred by the Employer have been ascertained and the amount thereof certified by the Engineer. The Contractor shall then be entitled to receive only such sum (if any) as the Engineer may certify would have been payable to him upon due completion by him after deducting the said amount. If such amount exceeds the sum which would have been payable to the Contractor on due completion by him, then the Contractor shall, upon demand, pay to the Employer the amount of such excess and it shall be deemed a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer and shall be recoverable accordingly.

63.4 Assignment of Benefit of Agreement Unless prohibited by law, the Contractor shall, if so instructed by the Engineer within 14

days of such entry and termination referred to in Sub-Clause 63.1, assign to the Employer the benefit of any agreement for the supply of any goods or materials or services and/or for the execution of any work for the purposes of the Contract, which the Contractor may have entered into.

64.1 Urgent Remedial Work If, by reason of any accident, or failure, or other event occurring to, in, or in connection

with the Works, or any part thereof, either during the execution of the Works, or during the Defects Liability Period, any remedial or other work is, in the opinion of the Engineer, urgently necessary for the safety of the Works and the Contractor is unable or unwilling at once to do such work, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and pay other persons to carry out such work as the Engineer may consider necessary. If the work

45

or repair so done by the Employer is work which, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor was liable to do at his own cost under the Contract, then all costs consequent thereon or incidental thereto shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, be determined by the Engineer and shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer, and may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor and the Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. Provided that the Engineer shall, as soon after the occurrence of any such emergency as may be reasonably practicable, notify the Contractor thereof.

Special Risks 65.1 No Liability for Special Risks The Contractor shall be under no liability whatsoever in consequence of any of the

special risks referred to in Sub-Clause 65.2, whether by way of indemnity or otherwise, for or in respect of:

(a) destruction of or damage to the Works, save to work condemned under the provisions

of Clause 39 prior to the occurrence of any of the said special risks, (b) destruction of or damage to property, whether of the Employer or third parties, or (c) injury or loss of life.

65.2 Special Risks The Special Risks are:

(a) the risks defined under paragraphs (a), (c), (d) and (e) of Sub-Clause 20.4, and (b) the risks defined under paragraph (b) of Sub-Clause 20.4 insofar as these relate to the

country in which the Works are to be executed. 65.3 Damage to Works by Special Risks If the Works or any materials or Plant on or near or in transit to the Site, or any of the

Contractor's Equipment, sustain destruction or damage by reason of any of the said special risks, the Contractor shall be entitled to payment in accordance with the Contract for any Permanent Works duly executed and for any materials or Plant so destroyed or damaged and, so far as may be required by the Engineer or as may be necessary for the completion of the Works, to payment for:

(a) rectifying any such destruction or damage to the Works, and (b) replacing or rectifying such materials or Contractor's Equipment,

and the Engineer shall determine an addition to the Contract Price in accordance with

Clause 52 (which shall in the case of the cost of replacement of Contractor's Equipment include the fair market value thereof as determined by the Engineer) and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

46

65.4 Projectile, Missile Destruction, damage, injury or loss of life caused by the explosion or impact, whenever

and wherever occurring, of any mine, bomb, shell, grenade, or other projectile, missile, munition, or explosive of war, shall be deemed to be a consequence of the said special risks.

65.5 Increased Costs arising from Special Risks Save to the extent that the Contractor is entitled to payment under any other provision of

the Contract, the Employer shall repay to the Contractor any costs of the execution of the Work (other than such as may be attributable to the cost of reconstructing work condemned under the provisions of Clause 39 prior to the occurrence of any special risk) which are howsoever attributable to or consequent on or the result of or in any way whatsoever connected with the said special risks, subject however to the provisions in this Clause hereinafter contained in regard to outbreak of war, but the Contractor shall, as soon as any such cost comes to his knowledge, forthwith notify the Engineer thereof. The Engineer shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine the amount of the Contractor's costs in respect thereof which shall be added to the Contract Price and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

65.6 Outbreak of War If, during the currency of the Contract, there is an outbreak of war, whether war is

declared or not, in any part of the world which, whether financially or otherwise, materially affects the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall, unless and untill the Contract is terminated under the provisions of this Clause, continue to use his best endeavour to complete the execution of the Works. Provided that the Employer shall be entitled, at any time after such outbreak of war, to terminate the Contract by giving notice to the Contractor and, upon such notice being given, the Contract shall, except as to the rights of the parties under this clause and Clause 67, terminate, but without prejudice to the rights of either party in respect of any antecedent breach thereof.

65.7 Removal of Contractor's Equipment on Termination If the Contract is terminated under the provisions of Sub-Clause 65.6, the Contractor

shall, with all reasonable dispatch, remove from the Site all Contractor's Equipment and shall give similar facilities to his Subcontractors to do so.

65.8 Payment if Contract Terminated If the Contract is terminated as aforesaid, the Contractor shall be paid by the Employer,

insofar as such amounts or items have not already been covered by payments on account made to the Contractor, for all work executed prior to the date of termination at the rates and prices provided in the Contract and in addition:

(a) the amounts payable in respect of any preliminary items referred to in the Bill of

Quantities, so far as the work or service comprised therein has been carried out or performed, and a proper portion of any such items which have been partially carried out or performed;

47

(b) the cost of materials, Plant or goods reasonably ordered for the Works which have been delivered to the Contractor or of which the Contractor is legally liable to accept delivery, such materials, Plant or goods becoming the property of the Employer upon such payments being made by him;

(c) a sum being the amount of any expenditure reasonably incurred by the Contractor in

the expectation of completing the whole of the Works insofar as such expenditure has not been covered by any other payments referred to in this Sub-Clause;

(d) any additional sum payable under the provisions of Sub-Clauses 65.3 and 65.5; (e) such proportion of the cost as may be reasonable, taking into account payments made

or to be made for work executed, of removal of Contractor's Equipment under Sub-Clause 65.7 and, if required by the Contractor, return thereof to the Contractor's main plant yard in his country of registration or to other destination, at no greater cost; and

(f) the reasonable cost of repatriation of all the Contractor’s staff and workmen

employed on or in connection with the Works at the time of such termination. Provided that against any payment due from the Employer under this Sub-Clause, the

Employer shall be entitled to be credited with any outstanding balances due from the Contractor for advances in respect of Contractor's Equipment, materials and Plant and any other sums which, at the date of termination, were recoverable by the Employer from the Contractor under the terms of Contract. Any sums payable under this Sub-Clause shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, be determined by the Engineer who shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

Release from Performance 66.1 Payment in Event of Release from Performance If any circumstance outside the control of both parties arises after the issue of the Letter

of Acceptance which renders it impossible or unlawful for either party to fulfill his or their contractual obligations, or under the law governing the Contract the parties are released from further performance, then the parties shall be discharged from the Contract, except as to their rights under this Clause and Clause 67 and without prejudice to the rights of either party in respect of any antecedent breach of the Contract, and the sum payable by the Employer to the Contractor in respect of the work executed shall be the same as that which would have been payable under Clause 65 if the Contract had been terminated under the provisions of Clause 65.

Settlement of Disputes 67.1 Engineer's Decision If a dispute of any kind whatsoever arises between the Employer and the Contractor in

connection with, or arising out of, the Contract or the execution of the Works, whether during the execution of the Works or after their completion and whether before or after repudiation or other termination of the Contract, including any dispute as to any opinion, instruction, determination, certificate or valuation of the Engineer, the matter in dispute shall, in the first place, be referred in writing to the Engineer, with a copy to the other

48

party. Such reference shall state that it is made pursuant to this Clause. No later than the eighty-fourth day after the day on which he received such reference the Engineer shall give notice of his decision to the Employer and the Contractor. Such decision shall state that it is made pursuant to this Clause.

Unless the Contract has already been repudiated or terminated, the Contractor shall, in

every case, continue to proceed with the Works with all due diligence and the Contractor and the Employer shall give effect forthwith to every such decision of the Engineer unless and until the same shall be revised, as hereinafter provided, in an amicable settlement or an arbitral award.

If either the Employer or the Contractor be dissatisfied with any decision of the Engineer,

or if the Engineer fails to give notice of his decision on or before the eighty-fourth day on which he received the reference, then either the Employer or the Contractor may, on or before the seventieth day after the day on which he received notice of such decision, or on or before the seventieth day after the day on which the said period of 84 days expired, as the case may be, give notice to the other party, with a copy for information to the Engineer, of his intention to commence arbitration, as hereinafter provided, as to the matter in dispute. Such notice shall establish the entitlement of the party giving the same to commence arbitration, as hereinafter provided, as to such dispute and, subject to Sub-Clause 67.4, no arbitration in respect thereof may be commenced unless such notice is given.

If the Engineer has given notice of his decision as to a matter in dispute to the Employer

and the Contractor and no notice of intention to commence arbitration as to such dispute has been given by either the Employer or the Contractor on or before the seventieth day after the day on which the parties received notice as to such decision from the Engineer, the said decision shall become final and binding upon the Employer and the Contractor.

67.2 Amicable Settlement Where notice of intention to commence arbitration as to a dispute has been given in

accordance with Sub-Clause 67.1, the parties shall attempt to settle such dispute amicably before the commencement of arbitration. Provided that, unless the parties otherwise agree, arbitration may be commenced on or after the fifty-sixth day after the day on which notice of intention to commence arbitration of such dispute was given, even if no attempt at amicable settlement thereof has been made.

67.3 Arbitration Any dispute in respect of which:

(a) the decision, if any, of the Engineer has not become final and binding pursuant to Sub-Clause 67.1, and

(b) amicable settlement has not been reached within the period stated in Sub-Clause 67.2,

shall be finally settled, unless otherwise specified in the Contract, under the Rules of Conciliation and Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce by one or more arbitrators appointed under such Rules. The said arbitrator/s shall have full power to open up, review and revise any decision, opinion, instruction, determination, certificate or valuation of the Engineer related to the dispute.

49

Neither party shall be limited in the proceedings before such arbitrator/s to the evidence or arguments put before the Engineer for the purpose of obtaining his said decision pursuant to Sub-Clause 67.1. No such decision shall disqualify the Engineer from being called as a witness and giving evidence before the arbitrator/s on any matter whatsoever relevant to the dispute.

Arbitration may be commenced prior to or after completion of the Works, provided that

the obligations of the Employer, the Engineer and the Contractor shall not be altered by reason of the arbitration being conducted during the progress of the Works.

67.4 Failure to Comply with Engineer's Decision Where neither the Employer nor the Contractor has given notice of intention to

commence arbitration of a dispute within the period stated in Sub-Clause 67.1 and the related decision has become final and binding, either party may, if the other party fails to comply with such decision, and without prejudice to any other rights it may have, refer the failure to arbitration in accordance with Sub-Clause 67.3. The provisions of Sub-Clause 67.1 and 67.2 shall not apply to any such reference.

Notices 68.1 Notice to Contractor All certificates, notices or instructions to be given to the Contractor by the Employer or

the Engineer under the terms of the Contract shall be sent by post, cable, telex or facsimile transmission to or left at the Contractor's principal place of business or such other address as the Contractor shall nominate for that purpose.

68.2 Notice to Employer and Engineer Any notice to be given to the Employer or to the Engineer under the terms of the

Contract shall be sent by post, cable, telex or facsimile transmission to or left at the respective addresses nominated for that purpose in Part II of these Conditions.

68.3 Change of Address Either party may change a nominated address to another address in the country where the

Works are being executed by prior notice to the other party, with a copy to the Engineer, and the Engineer may do so by prior notice to both parties.

Default of Employer 69.1 Default of Employer In the event of the Employer:

(a) failing to pay to the Contractor the amount due under any certificate of the Engineer within 28 days after the expiry of the time stated in Sub-Clause 60.10 within which payment is to be made, subject to any deduction that the Employer is entitled to make under the Contract,

(b) interfering with or obstructing or refusing any required approval to the issue of any

50

such certificate, (c) becoming bankrupt or, being a company, going into liquidation, other than for the

purpose of a scheme of reconstruction or amalgamation, or (d) giving notice to the Contractor that for economic reasons it is impossible for him to

continue to meet his contractual obligations, the Contractor shall be entitled to terminate his employment under the Contract by giving

notice to the Employer, with a copy to the Engineer. Such termination shall take effect 14 days after the giving of the notice.

69.2 Removal of Contractor's Equipment Upon the expiry of the 14 days' notice referred to in Sub-Clause 69.1, the Contractor

shall, notwithstanding the provisions of Sub-Clause 54.1, with all reasonable despatch, remove from the Site all Contractor's Equipment brought by him thereon.

69.3 Payment on Termination In the event of such termination the Employer shall be under the same obligations to the

Contractor in regard to payment as if the Contract had been terminated under the provisions of Clause 65, but, in addition to the payments specified in Sub-Clause 65.8, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor the amount of any loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of or in connection with or by consequence of such termination.

69.4 Contractor's Entitlement to Suspend Work Without prejudice to the Contractor's entitlement to interest under Sub-Clause 60.10 and

to terminate under Sub-Clause 69.1, the Contractor may, if the Employer fails to pay the Contractor the amount due under any certificate of the Engineer within 28 days after the expiry of the time stated in Sub-Clause 60.10 within which payment is to be made, subject to any deduction that the Employer is entitled to make under the Contract, after giving 28 days' prior notice to the Employer, with a copy to the Engineer, suspend work or reduce the rate of work.

If the Contractor suspends work or reduces the rate of work in accordance with the

provisions of this Sub-Clause and thereby suffers delay or incurs costs the Engineer shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine:

(a) any extension of time to which the Contractor is entitled under Clause 44, and (b) the amount of such costs, which shall be added to the Contract Price,

and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer. 69.5 Resumption of Work Where the Contractor suspends work or reduces the rate of work, having given notice in

accordance with Sub-Clause 69.4, and the Employer subsequently pays the amount due, including interest pursuant to Sub-Clause 60.10, the Contractor’s entitlement under Sub-Clause 69.1 shall, if notice of termination has not been given, lapse and the Contractor shall resume normal working as soon as is reasonably possible.

51

Changes in Cost and Legislation 70.1 Increase or Decrease of Cost There shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Price such sums in respect of rise

or fall in the cost of labour and/or materials or any other matters affecting the cost of the execution of the Works as may be determined in accordance with part II of these Conditions.

70.2 Subsequent Legislation If, after the date 28 days prior to the latest date for submission of tenders for the Contract

there occur in the country in which the Works are being or are to be executed changes to any National or State Statute, Ordinance, Decree or other Law or any regulation or bye-law of any local or other duly constituted authority, or the introduction of any such State Statute, Ordinance, Decree, Law, regulation or bye-law which causes additional or reduced cost to the Contractor, other than under Sub-Clause 70.1, in the execution of the Contract, such additional or reduced cost shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, be determined by the Engineer and shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Price and the Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

Currency and Rates of Exchange 71.1 Currency Restrictions If, after the date 28 days prior to the latest date for submission of tenders for the Contract,

the Government or authorized agency of the Government of the country in which the Works are being or are to be executed imposes currency restrictions and/or transfer of currency restrictions in relation to the currency or currencies in which the Contract Price is to be paid, the Employer shall reimburse any loss or damage to the Contractor arising therefrom, without prejudice to the right of the Contractor to exercise any other rights or remedies to which he is entitled in such event.

72.1 Rates of Exchange Where the Contract provides for payment in whole or in part to be made to the

Contractor in foreign currency or currencies, such payment shall not be subject to variations in the rate or rates of exchange between such specified foreign currency or currencies and the currency of the country in which the Works are to be executed.

72.2 Currency Proportions Where the Employer has required the Tender to be expressed in a single currency but

with payment to be made in more than one currency and the Contractor has stated the proportions or amounts of other currency or currencies in which he requires payment to be made, the rate or rates of exchange applicable for calculating the payment of such proportions or amounts shall, unless otherwise stated in Part II of these Conditions, be those prevailing, as determined by the Central Bank of the country in which the Works are to be executed, on the date 28 days prior to the latest date for the submission of tenders for the Contract, as has been notified to the Contractor by the Employer prior to

52

the submission of tenders or as provided for in the Tender. 72.3 Currencies of Payment for Provisional Sums Where the Contract provides for payment in more than one currency, the proportions or

amounts to be paid in foreign currencies in respect of Provisional Sums shall be determined in accordance with the principles set forth in Sub-Clauses 72.1 and 72.2 as and when these sums are utilised in whole or in part in accordance with the provisions of Clauses 58 and 59.

REFERENCE TO PART II

53

INDEX

PART I GENERAL CONDITIONS

INDEX Clause Access to Site 42.1 Access to Works, Engineer 37.1 Access, Contractor to Satisfy Himself 11.1 Accident or Injury to Workmen - Insurance Against 24.2 Accident or Injury to Workmen - Liability for 24.1 Address, Change of 68.3 Adequacy of Insurance 25.2 Adjustment of Contract Price if Variations Exceed 15 percent of Tender Sum 52.3 Agreement 9.1 Alterations, Additions and Omissions 51&52 Ambiguities in Contract Documents 5.2 Amicable Settlement of Disputes 67.2 Appointment of Assistants to Engineer 2.4 Approval by the Engineer 7.3 Approval of Materials not Implied 54.8 Approval Only by Defects Liability Certificate 61.1 Arbitration 67.3 Assignment of Contract 3.1 Avoidance of Damage to Roads 30.1 Bills of Quantities – Estimated Only 55.1 Boreholes and Exploratory Excavation 18.1 Breakdown of Lump Sum items 57.2 Care of works 20.1 Cash Flow Estimate to be Submitted 14.3 Certificate, Final 60.8 Certificate and Payment, Monthly Statements 60.1 Certificates, Correction of 60.4 Certificate, Taking-Over 48.1 Certification of Completion of Works 48.1 Certification of Completion of Sections or Parts 48.2 Cessation of Employer’s Liability 60.9 Change of Address, Notice of 68.3 Claims, Contemporary Records 53.2 Claims, Notice of 53.1 Claims, Payment of 53.5 Claims, Substantiation of 53.3 Claims Under Performance Security 10.3 Clearance of Site on Completion 33.1 Commencement of Works 41.1 Completion of Works, Time for 43.1 Completion of Works, Time for, Extension of 44.1 Completion, Statement at 60.5 Compliance with Insurance Policy Conditions 25.4 Compliance with Statues and Regulations 26.1 Contemporary Records for Claims 53.2 Contract Agreement 9.1 Contract Not Relieved of Duties or Responsibilities 14.4

54

INDEX Clause Contractor’s Employees 16.1 Contractor’s Employees, Engineer at Liberty to Object 16.2 Contractor’s Entitlement to Suspend Work for Employer’s Default 69.4 Contractor’s Equipment, Conditions of Hire 54.5 Contractor’s Equipment, Employer not Liable for Damage 54.2 Contractor’s Equipment, Insurance of 21.1 Contractor’s Equipment, Reference in Subcontracts 54.7 Contractor’s Equipment, Temporary Works and Material; Exclusive Use for the Works 54.1 Contractor’s Equipment, Transport of 30.2 Contractor’s Failure to Carry Out Instructions 49.4 Contractor’s Failure to Insure, Remedy 25.3 Contractor’s General Responsibilities 8.1 Contractor’s Superintendence 15.1 Contractor to Keep Site Clear 32.1 Contractor to Search 50.1 Correction of Certificates 60.4 Cost of Remedying Defects 49.3 Cost of Samples 36.2 Cost of Tests 35.3 Cost of Tests not Provided for 36.4 Covering up Work, Examination Before 38.1 Cross Liabilities 23.3 Currencies of Payment for Provisional Sums 72.3 Currencies, Rates of Exchange 72.1 Currency Restrictions 71.1 Custody and Supply of Drawings and Documents 6.1 Customs Clearance 54.3 Damage to Persons and Property 22.1 Damage to Roads, Avoidance of 30.1 Damage to Works, Special Risks 65.3 Damages, Liquidated 47.1 Dates for Inspection and Testing 37.3 Daywork 52.4 Decrease or Increase of Costs 70.1 Default of Contractor in Compliance with Instructions on Improper Work 39.2 Default of Contractor, Remedies for 63.1 Default of Employer 69.1 Defective Materials and Work 39.1 Defects, Contractor to Search for, if Required 50.1 Defects, Cost of Remedying 49.3 Defects Liability Certificate 62.1 Defects Liability Period 49.1 Defects, Remedying of 49.2 Definitions 1.1 Delay, Liquidated Damages for 47.1 Delays and Cost of Delay of Drawings 6.4 Design by Nominated Subcontractors 59.3 Discharge 60.7 Discrepancies in Documents 5.2 Dismissal of Contractor’s Employees 16.2 Disorderly Conduct, etc. 34.1

55

INDEX Clause Dispute, Engineer’s Decision 67.1 Disruption of Progress 6.3 Documents Mutually Explanatory 5.2 Drawings 6&7 Drawings and Documents - Custody and Supply of 6.1 Drawings and Instructions – Supplementary 7.1 Drawing, Copy to be Kept on Site 6.2 Drawings, Delays and Cost of Delay of Drawings 6.4 Drawings, Failure by Contractor to submit 6.5 Employer not liable for Damage to Contractor’s Equipment etc. 54.2 Employer’s Liability, Cession of 60.9 Employer’s Responsibilities 19.2 Employer’ Risks 20.4 Engagement of Staff and Labour 34.1 Engineer’s Authority to Delegate 2.3 Engineer’s Determination Where Tests not Provided for 36.5 Engineer’s Duties and Authority 2.1 Engineer to Act Impartially 2.6 Environment – Protection of 19.1 Errors in Setting Out 17.1 Evidence and Terms of Insurance 25.1 Examination of Work before Covering Up 38.1 Exceptions 22.2 Exchange, Rates of 72.1 Exclusions 21.4 Extension of Time, due to Engineer’s Failure to give Possession of Site 42.2 Extension of Time for Completion 44.1 Extension of Time for Completion, Contractor’s Claims 44.2 Extension of Time for Completion, Engineer’s Determination 44.3 Extraordinary Traffic 30. Facilities for Other Contractors 31.2 Facilities - Rights of Way and 42.3 Failure by Contractor to Submit Drawings 6.5 Failure to Comply with Claims Procedure 53.4 Failure to Comply with Engineer’s Decision 67.4 Failure to give Possession of Site 42.2 Faulty Work, Removal of 39.1 Fees and Notices 26.1 Fencing, Watching, Lighting, etc. 19.1 Final Payment Certificate 60.8 Final Statement 60.6 Foreign Currencies, Payment in 72. Fossils 27.1 Foundations, Examination of 38.1 General Responsibilities of Contractor 8.1 Giving of Notices – Payment of Fees 26.1 Headings and Marginal Notes 1.2 Imporper Work and Materials, Removal of 39.1 Increase or Decrease of Costs 70.1 Indemnity by Contractor 22.1 & 24.1 Indemnity by Employer 22.3

56

INDEX Clause Independent Inspection 37.5 Injury to Persons – Damage to Property 22.1 Injury to Workmen 24.1 Inspection and Testing 37.2 Inspection of Testing , Dates for 37.3 Inspection of Foundations, etc. 38.1 Inspection of Operations 37.1 Inspection of Site by Contractor 11.1 Instructions for Variations 51.2 Instructions in Writing 2.5 Instructions, Supplementary 7.1 Insurance, Adequacy of 25.2 Insurance, Evidence and Terms of 25.1 Insurance, Minimum Amount of 23.2 Insurance of Works and Contractor’s Equipment 21.1 Insurance,. Remedy on Failure to Insurance 25.3 Insurance, responsibility for Amounts not Recovered 21.3 Insurance, Scope of Cover 21.2 Insurance, Third Party 23.1 Insurance, Workmen 24.2 Interference with Traffic and Adjoining Properties 29.1 Interim Determination of Extension 44.3 Interpretations 1.3 Labour, Engagements of 34.1 Language/s and Law 5.1 Law to which Contract Subject 5.1 Legislation, Subsequent 70.2 Lighting, Fencing, Watching, etc. 19.1 Liquidated Damages for Delay 47.1 Liquidated Damages, Reduction of 47.2 Loss or Damage due to Employer’s Risks 20.3 Loss or Damage – Responsibility to Rectify 20.2 Lump-Sum Items – Breakdown of 57.2 Materials and Plant, Transport of 30.3 Materials - Approval of, etc, not Implied 54.8 Materials, Improper – Removal of 39.1 Materials, Quality of 36.1 Materials, Supply of 8.1 Measurement by Engineer 56.1 Measurement, Method of 57.1 Measurement, Quantities Estimated Only 55.1 Methods of Construction 8.2 Minimum Amount of Insurance 23.2 Monthly Payments 60.2 Nominated Subcontractors, Certification of Payments to 59.5 Nominated Subcontractors, Definition 59.1 Nominated Subcontractors, Design by 59.3 Nominated Subcontractors, Objection to Nomination 59.2 Nominated Subcontractors, Payment of 59.4 Not Foreseeable Physical Obstructions or Conditions 12.2 Notice of Claims 53.1

57

INDEX Clause Notices and Fees, Payment of 26.1 Notices, Consents and Approvals 1.5 Notice to Contractor 68.1 Notice to Employer and Engineer 68.2 Objections to Contractor’s Employees 16.2 Obstructions or Conditions - Not Foreseeable Physical 12.2 Omissions, Alterations and Additions 59.0 Openings, Uncovering and Making 38.2 Operations, Inspection of 37.1 Order of Work, Contractor to Furnish Programme 14.1 Other Contractors, Opportunities for 31.1 Patent Rights 28.1 Payment if Contract Terminated for Contractor’s Default 63.3 Payment if Contract Terminated for Employer’s Default 69.3 Payment of Claims 53.5 Payment, Time for 60.10 Performance Security 10.1 Performance Security – Claims Under 10.3 Performance Security – Period of Validity 10.2 Period of Defects Liability 49.1 Permanent Works Designed by Contractor 7.2 Physical Obstruction or Conditions – Not Foreseeable 12.2 Physical Obstruction or Conditions – Engineer’s Determination 12.3 Plant and Materials, Transport of 30.3 Plant, Conditions of Hire 54.5 Plant, Customs Clearance 54.3 Plant, Employer not Liable for Damage to 54.2 Plant, etc. – Exclusive Use for the Works 54.1 Plant, Quality of 36.1 Plant, Re-export of 54.4 Plant, Removal of 39.1 Policy of Insurance – Compliance with Conditions 25.4 Possession of Site 42.1 Possession of Site, Failure to Give 42.2 Power of Engineer to Fix rates 52.2 Priority of Contract Documents 5.2 Programme to be Submitted 14.1 Progress – Disruption of 6.3 Progress-Rate of 46.1 Protection of Environment 19.1 Provision to Indemnify Contractor 22.3 Provision to Indemnify Employer 22.2 Provisional Sums, Currencies of Payment 72.3 Provisional Sums, Definition 58.1 Provisional Sums, Production of Vouchers 58.3 Provisional Sums, Use of 58.2 Quality of Materials and Workmanship 36.1 Quantities 55.1 Rate of Progress 46.1 Rates of Exchange 72.1 Rates, Power of Engineer to Fix 52.2

58

INDEX Clause Rectification of Loss or Damage 20.2 Reduction of Liquidated Damages 47.2 Re-export of Plant 54.4 Regulations, Status etc. Compliance with 26.1 Rejection 37,4 Release from Performance 66.1 Remedies for Default of Contractor 63.1 Remedying of Defects, 49.2 Remedying of Defects, Cost of 49.3 Remedy on Contractor’s Failure 25.3 Removal of Contractor’s Employees 16.2 Removal of Contractor’s Equipment 69.2 Removal of Improper Work, Materials or Plant 39.1 Removal of Plant, etc. 65.7 Responsibility to Rectify Loss or Damage 20.2 Responsibility Un-affected by Approval 7.3 Restriction on Working Hours 45.1 Resumption of Work 69.5 Retention Money, Payment of 50.3 Returns of Labour and Contractor’s Equipment 35.1 Revised Programme 14.2 Rights of Way and Facilities 42.3 Risks, Employer’s 20.4 Risks, Special 65.0 Roads, etc, - Damage by Extraordinary Traffic 30.1 Roads, Interference with Access to 29.1 Royalties 28.2 Safety, Security and Protection of the Environment 19.1 Samples, Cost of 36.2 Security, Safety and Protection of the Environment 19.1 Setting-Out 17.1 Singular and Plural 1.4 Site, Clearance on Completion 33.1 Site, Contractor to Keep Clear 32.1 Site Inspection by Contractor 11.1 Site Operations and Methods of Construction 8.2 Site, Possession of 42.1 Special Risks 65.0 Staff, Engagement of 34.1 Statement at Completion 60.5 Statement, Final 60.6 Statutes, Regulations, etc. – Compliance with 26.1 Subcontracting 4.1 Subcontractors, Nominated 59.0 Subcontractors, Responsibility of the Contractor for Acts and Default of 4.1 Subsequent Legislation 70.2 Substantial Completion of Sections or Parts 48.3 Sufficiency of Tender 12.1 Supply of Plant, Materials and Labour 8.1 Surfaces Requiring Reinstatement 48.4 Supervision, Engineer’s Determination 40.2

59

INDEX Clause Suspension lasting more than 84 days 40.3 Suspension of Work 40.1 Taking Over Certificate 48.1 Taking Over of Sections or Parts 48.2 Tender Documents 11.1 Tender, Sufficiency of 12.1 Termination of Contract by Employer 63.1 Termination of Contract by Employer, Assignment of Benefit 63.4 Terms of Insurance 25.1 Tests, Cost of 36.3 Test not Provide for – Cost of 36.4 Third Part Insurance 23.1 Time for Completion 43.1 Time for Completion, Extension of 44.1 Time for Payment 60.10 Traffic, Extraordinary 30.1 Traffic Interference with 29.1 Traffic Waterborne 30.4 Transport of Contractor’s Equipment and Temporary Works 30.2 Transport of Materials and Plant 30.3 Uncovering Work and Making Openings 38.2 Unfulfilled Obligations 62.2 Urgent Remedial Work 64.1 Valuation at Date of Termination by the Employer 63.2 Variations 51.1 Variations, Daywork Basis 52.4 Variations, Exceeding 15 percent 52.3 Variations, Instructions for 51.2 Variations, Power of the Engineer to Fix Rates 52.2 Variations, Valuation of 51.3 Vouchers Production of 58.3 War, Outbreak of 20.4 Watching and Lighting, etc. 19.1 Waterborne Traffic 30.4 Work, Examination of Before Covering Up 38.1 Work, Improper, Removal of 39.1 Working Hours, Restriction of 45.1 Workmanship, Quality of 36.1 Workmen, Accident or Injury to 24.1 Works, Care of 20.1 Works, Completion of (Defects Liability Certificate) 62.1 Works Commencement of 41.1 Works Insurance of 21.1 Works Remedying of Defects 49.2 Works, Time for Completion of 43.1 Works to be Measured 56.1 Works, Suspension of 40.1 Work to be in Accordance with the Contract 13.1

PPAARRTT IIII CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS OOFF PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARR

AAPPPPLLIICCAATTIIOONN

Osmani & Company (Pvt.) Ltd. Consulting Engineers – Architects – Planners

Part – II Particular Conditions of Contract FIEDMC

TOC Page i

Clause

PART II - PARTICULAR CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Title 1.1 Definitions 2.1 Engineer's Duties and Authority 2.2 Engineer’s Representative 2.5 (a) Employer’s Instructions 2.7 Engineer not Liable 2.8 Replacement of the Engineer 5.1 Language(s) and Law 5.2 Priority of Contract Documents 6.1 Custody and Supply of Drawings and Documents 6.6 Shop Drawings 6.7 As-Built Drawings 8.1 Contractor’s General Responsibilities 9.1 Contract Agreement 10.1 Performance Security 10.4 Performance Security Binding on Variations and Changes 14.1 Programme to be submitted 14.3 Cash Flow Estimate to be submitted 14.5 Detailed Programme and Monthly Progress Report 15.1 Contractor’s Superintendence 15.2 Language Ability of Contractor's Representative 15.3 Contractor’s Representative 16.3 Language Ability of Superintending Staff of Contractor 16.4 Employment of Local Personnel 19.1 Safety, Security and Protection of Environment 19.1.1 Safety of Engineers and Works 19.1.2 Watching and Lighting 19.3 Safety Precautions 19.4 Lighting Works at Night 20.1 Care of Works 20.4 Employer's Risks 21.4 Exclusions 25.1 Evidence and Terms of Insurance 25.5 Insurance Company 26.1 Compliance with Statutes Regulations, etc. 29.2 Notices to Adjoining Property Owners 29.3 Giving of Notices and Payment of Fees 31.3 Co-operation with other Contractors 33.1 Clearance of Site on Completion 34.2 Rates of Wages and Conditions of Labour 34.3 Employment of Persons in the Service of Others 34.4 Housing for Labour 34.5 Health and Safety 34.6 Epidemics 34.7 Supply of Water 34.8 Alcoholic Liquor or Drugs 34.9 Arms and Ammunition 34.10 Festivals and Religious Customs 34.11 Disorderly Conduct 34.12 Compliance by Subcontractors


Part – II Particular Conditions of Contract FIEDMC

TOC Page ii

34.13 Day and Night Work and Work on Sundays or Holidays 35.2 Records of Safety and Health 35.3 Reporting of Accidents 36.6 Use of Pakistani Materials and Services 37.4 Rejection 41.1 Commencement of Works 46.1 Rate of Progress 48.2 Taking over of Sections or Parts 51.2 Instructions for Variations 52.1 Valuation of Variations 52.4 Day work 53.4 Failure to Comply 54.3. Custom Clearance 54.4. Re Export Contractors Equipments 54.5 Condition of Hire of Contractor's Equipment 55.1 Quantities 56.1 Works to be Measured 57.1 Method of Measurement 59.2 Nominated Subcontractors Objection to Nomination 59.4 Payments to Nominated Sub-Contractors 59.5 Certification of Payments & Nominated Subcontractors 60.1 Monthly Statement 60.2 Monthly Payments 60.10 Time for Payment 60.11 Secured Advance on Materials 60.12 Financial Assistance to Contractor 63.1 Default of Contractor 65.1 No Liability for Special Risks 65.2 Special Risks 65.3 Damage to Work by Special Risks 65.8. Payment if Contract Terminated 67.3 Arbitration 68.1 Notice to Contractor 68.2 Notice to Employer and Engineer 69.3 Payment on Termination 70.1 Increase or Decrease of Cost 71.1 Currency Restrictions 72.1 Rates of Exchange 72.2 Currency Proportions 72.3 Currencies of Payment for Provisional Sums 73.1 Payment of Income Tax 73.2 Custom Duty & Taxes 73.4 Adherence to Labour Laws 74.1 Integrity Pact 75.1 Termination of Contract for Employer’s Convenience 76.1 Liability of Contractor 77.1 Joint and Several Liabilities 78.1 Details to be Confidential 79.1 New Clause 79.1 added (Punjab Procurement Rules Supersedes Other Rules) SPECIFICATIONS - SPECIAL PROVISIONS SPECIFICATIONS - TECHNICAL PROVISIONS DRAWINGS

Osmani & Company (Pvt.) Ltd. Consulting Engineers - Architects - Planners

Part-II Particular Conditions of Contract FIEDMC

Condition of Contract Page - COC 1 of 22

PPAARRTT IIII -- PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS OOFF CCOONNTTRRAACCTT 1.1 Definitions

(a)(i) The Employer is CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER, Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Company (FIEDMC), 1st

(i) When the terms acceptable, satisfactory, proper or other such general qualifying terms are used in the Contract it shall be understood that reference is made to the sole ruling and the sole judgment of the Employer representative or

Floor, FCCI Complex, East Canal Road, Canal Park, Faisalabad. Tel. No. (041) 9230231-4, Fax No. (041) 9230235 and deems to mean and include its nominee, assignee, successor administrator and executor.

(iv) The Engineer is M/s OSMANI & COMPANY (PVT.) LTD.

Consulting Engineers, Osmani House, 245/2K, Block- 6, PECHS, Karachi Phones: 021-34536007 / 008, 34546541 / 42, Fax: 021-34534691 Email: [email protected] Web: www.osmani.com or any other competent person appointed by the Employer and notified to the Contractor, to act in replacement of the Engineer. Provided always that except in cases of professional misconduct, the out going Engineer is to formulate his certifications / recommendations in relation to all outstanding matters, disputes and claims relating to the execution of the works during his tenure.

(a)(vi) Employer’s Representative

Any person appointed by the Employer from time to time shall be deemed the Employer’s Representative, who shall have the authority to enter in to work site, inspect the work for insuring the quality.

(vii) Labourers/ Workmen mean such labourers/ workmen and staff as may be employed by the Contractor for the purpose of carrying out the works specified in the Contract.

(a)(viii) “Bidder or Tenderer” means any person or persons, company, corporation, firm

or joint venture submitting a Bid or Tender. (b)(v) Add the following at the end of the paragraph:

The word “Tender” is synonymous with “Bid” and the word “Tender Documents” with “Bidding Document”.

(b)(ix) “Programme” means the programme to be submitted by the Contractor in

accordance with Sub-Clause 14.1 and any approved revisions thereto. (b)(x) FIDIC means FEDERATION INTERNATIONAL DES INGENIEURS CONSEILS

(International Federation of Consulting Engineers) (e)(i) Delete the text and substitutes:

“Contract Price” means the sum stated in the Letter of Acceptance as payable to the Contractor for the execution and completion of the Works subject to such additions thereto or deductions therefrom as may be made and remedying of any defects therein in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.

(h) Approved/ Approval means approved/ approval in writing by Engineer / Employer or their representative specified in “Conditions of Contract”.




his Engineer.

(j) The Word Equivalent or Equal where used in these documents in the general sense shall not mean similar but shall mean “Conforming to, of Like Kind Quality and Function Proprietary Items” and “Trade Name” are used for the purposes of establishing a standard of “Kind Quality and Function” and “Equivalent” items, articles, things or materials will be approved if held to be “Equivalent” by the Engineer.

2.1 Engineer's Duties and Authority With reference to Sub-Clause 2.1(b), the following provisions shall also apply; The Engineer shall obtain the specific approval of the Employer before carrying out his

duties in accordance with the following Clauses:

(i) Consenting to the sub-letting of any part of the Works under Sub-Clause 4.1 “Subcontracting”.

(ii) Certifying additional cost determined under Sub-Clause 12.2 “Not Foreseeable

Physical Obstructions or Conditions”. (iii) Any action under Clause 10 “Performance Security” and Clauses 21, 23, 24 & 25

“Insurance” of sorts. (iv) Any action under Clause 40 “Suspension”. (v) Any action under Clause 44 “Extension of Time for Completion”. (vi) Any action under Clause 47 “Liquidated Damages for Delay” or Payment of Bonus

for Early Completion of Works (PCC Sub-Clause 47.3). (vii) Issuance of “Taking Over Certificate” under Clause 48. (viii) Issuing a Variation Order under Clause 51,except:

a) in an emergency* situation, as stated here-below, or b) if such variation would increase the Contract Price by less than the amount

stated in the Appendix-A to Bid. (ix) Fixing rates or prices under Clause 52. (x) Extra payment as a result of Contractor’s claims under Clause 53. (xi) Release of Retention Money to the Contractor under Sub-Clause 60.3 “Payment of

Retention Money”. (xii) Issuance of “Final Payment Certificate” under Sub-Clause 60.8. (xiii) Issuance of “Defect Liability Certificate” under Sub-Clause 62.1. (xiv) Any change in the ratios of Contract currency proportions and payments thereof

under Clause 72 “Currency and Rate of Exchange”.

* (If in the opinion of the Engineer an emergency occurs affecting the safety of life or of the Works or of adjoining property, the Engineer may, without relieving the Contractor of any of his duties and responsibilities under the Contract, instruct the Contractor to




execute all such work or to do all such things as may, in the opinion of the Engineer, be necessary to abate or reduce the risk. The Contractor shall forthwith comply with any such instruction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine an addition to the Contract Price, in respect of such instruction, in accordance with Clause 52 and shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.)

2.2 Engineer’s Representative

Line one after word “by” add “Engineer with the consent of Employer”. Last line after word clause 2.3 add “the Employer shall ensure that Engineer’s representative is a professional Engineer” as defined in the Pakistan Engineering Counsel act 1975 (v of 1976).

2.5 (a) Employer’s Instructions

The Employer/ Engineer through its representative may in absolute discretion and from time to time issue written instructions, details, directions and explanations which are hereafter collectively referred to as “Employer’s Instructions”. The Employer/Engineer shall have the right to reject any materials, workmanship or equipment, which does not conform to the Contract and to suspend any work that is being improperly done. The Engineer’s decision as to the construction and meaning of the drawings and specifications shall be final. Precedent or opinion as to what is useful or standard practice shall not be held to affect the status of the Engineer decision in any way or to relieve the Contractor from full responsibility and compliance with all requirements of the specification and plans.

(b) The Employer/ Engineer shall have the right to inspect and supervise the work. The

inspection and supervision of the work by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his full responsibility and liability of careful and faultless execution of the work.

2.7 Engineer not Liable

Approval, reviews and inspection by the Engineer of any part of the Works does not relieve the Contractor from his sole responsibility and liability for the supply of materials, plant and equipment for construction of the Works and their parts in accordance with the Contract and neither the Engineer's authority to act nor any decision made by him in good faith as provided for under the Contract whether to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Engineer to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any of their representatives or employees or any other person performing any portion of the Works.

2.8 Replacement of the Engineer “If the Employer intends to replace the Engineer, the Employer shall, not less than 14

days before the intended date of replacement, give notice to the Contractor, of the name, address and relevant experience of the intended replacement Engineer. The Employer shall not replace the Engineer with a person against whom the Contractor raises reasonable objection by notice to the Employer, with supporting particulars.”

5.1 Language(s) and Law (a) The Contract Documents, shall be drawn up in the English language (b) The Contract shall be subject to the Laws of Islamic Republic of Pakistan

5.2 Priority of Contract Documents Delete the documents listed at (1) to (6) of the Sub-Clause and substitute




(1) The Contract Agreement; (2) The Letter of Acceptance; (3) The completed Form of Bid; (4) Specification - Special Provision (5) Special Stipulations (Appendix-A to Bid); (6) The Particular Conditions of Contract - Part II; (7) The General Conditions - Part I; (8) Tender Drawings; (9) Specifications - Technical Provisions (10) The completed Appendices to Bid (B, C, E to N); (11) The priced Bill of Quantities (Appendix-D to Bid); (12) ____________ (any other) In case of discrepancies between drawings, those of larger scale shall govern unless they are superseded by a drawing of later date regardless of scale. All Drawings and Specifications shall be interpreted in conformity with the Contract and these Conditions. Addendum, if any, shall be deemed to have been incorporated at the appropriate places in the documents forming the Contract.

6.1 Custody and Supply of Drawings and Documents

In line six after word (Certificate) add “or earlier completion / cancellation of contract”. 6.6 Shop Drawings

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review 3 copies of all shop and erection drawings applicable to this Contract as per provision of relevant Sub-Clause of the Contract. Review and approval by the Engineer shall not be construed as a complete check but will indicate only that the general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory and that the Engineer's review or approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract.

6.7 As-Built Drawings

At the completion of the Works under the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer 6 copies and one reproducible of all drawings amended to conform with the Works as built. The price of such Drawings shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price.

8.1 Contractor’s General Responsibilities

In line three after word” works” add “mentioned in the contract and all other work if offered by him complimentary after award of tender and formed part of contract agreement however design of such work before execution shall be vetted by the Engineer.

9.1 Contract Agreement

In the second line, modify the words ‘at the cost of the Employer’ to read “at the cost of the Contractor and add the following sub paragraphs at the end:

The Contract Agreement would be made on stamp paper of an appropriate value liveable under the law. Cost of stamp duty would be borne by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall at his own cost submit to the Employer photocopies of Four (4)

sets and to the Engineer two (2) sets of the Contract Documents in bound form, duly initialled and stamped by the Employer, and the Contractor for the use of the Employer




and the Engineer. Such submission shall be made within seven (7) days of signing of the Contract Agreement by the Employer and Contractor.

10.1 Performance Security

The text is deleted and substituted with the following: The Contractor shall provide Performance Security to the Employer in the prescribed form. The said Security shall be furnished or caused to be furnished by the Contractor within 28 days after the receipt of the Letter of Acceptance. The Performance Security shall be of an amount equal to 10% of the Contract Price stated in the Letter of Acceptance. Such Security shall, at the option of the bidder, be in the form of either (a) bank guarantee from any Scheduled Bank in Pakistan or (b) bank guarantee from a bank located outside Pakistan duly counter-guaranteed by a Scheduled Bank in Pakistan. The cost of complying with requirements of this Sub-Clause shall be borne by the Contractor. The following Sub-Clause10.4 is added:

10.4 Performance Security Binding on Variations and Changes

The Performance Security shall be binding irrespective of changes in the quantities or variations in the Works or extensions in time for completion of the Works which are granted or agreed upon under the provisions of the Contract.

14.1 Programme to be submitted

The programme shall be submitted within 42 days from the date of receipt of Letter of Acceptance, which shall be in either any one of the form of: i) a Bar Chart identifying the critical activities ii) a CPM identifying the critical path/activities.

(As instructed by the Employer/ Engineer) 14.3 Cash Flow Estimate to be submitted

The detailed Cash Flow Estimate shall be submitted within 21 days from the date of receipt of Letter of Acceptance. Add the following Sub-Clause:

14.5 Detailed Programme and Monthly Progress Report

a). For purposes of Sub-Clause 14.1, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed programme for the following: i). Execution of Works; ii). Labour Employment; iii). Local Material Procurement; iv). Material Imports, if any; and v). Other details as required by the Engineer.

b). During the period of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer not later than the 8th

day of the following month, 10 copies each of Monthly Progress Reports covering:

i). A Construction Schedule indicating the monthly progress in percentage;




ii). Description of all work carried out since the last report; iii). Description of the work planned for the next 56 days sufficiently detailed to

enable the Engineer to determine his programme of inspection and testing; iv). Monthly summary of daily job record; v). Photographs to illustrate progress; and vi). Information about problems and difficulties encountered, if any, and proposals to

overcome the same. c). During the period of the Contract, the Contractor shall keep a daily record of the

work progress, which shall be made available to the Engineer as and when requested. The daily record shall include particulars of weather conditions, number of men working, deliveries of materials, quantity, location and assignment of Contractor’s equipment.

15.1 Contractor’s Superintendence

Replace clause 15.1 of General Conditions of Contract Part-I by following The Contractor shall be responsible to give or provide all necessary superintendence and efficient supervision during the execution of the work using his best skill and attention and as long thereafter as the Engineer may consider necessary for the proper fulfilling of the Contractor’s obligations under the Contractor. A competent Agent, registered with Pakistan Engineering Council as Professional Engineer and duly authorized through a power of attorney (whose qualification and appointment shall be approved in writing by the Employer which approval may at any time be withdrawn) is to be constantly posted on the works and shall give his whole time to superintendence of the same. If such approval shall be withdrawn by the Engineer/Employer the Contractor shall as soon as is practicable (having regard to the requirement of replacing him as hereinafter mentioned) after receiving written notice of such withdrawal, remove the Agent from the site and shall not thereafter employ him again on the site in any capacity and shall promptly replace him by another agent approved by the Engineer with consent of Employer. The Agent shall receive on behalf of the Contractor, directions or instructions from the Engineer or (subject to the limitations of Clause 2 hereof) the representative of the Engineer. The approval by the Engineer of the qualifications and appointment of Contractor, his agent or representatives for superintendence of the Work shall not relive the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract. The Engineer shall have the right to remove from the site any of the Contractor’s or his sub-contractor’s personnel because of misconduct and/ or incompetence of which the Engineer shall be the sole judge.

15.2 Language Ability of Contractor's Representative

The Contractor's authorised representative shall be fluent in the English language.

15.3 Contractor’s Representative

The Contractor's authorised representative and his other professional engineers working at site shall register themselves with the Pakistan Engineering Council. The Contractor's authorised representative at site shall be authorised to exercise adequate administrative and financial powers on behalf of the Contractor so as to achieve completion of the Works as per the Contract. Add the following Sub-Clauses:

16.3 Language Ability of Superintending Staff of Contractor

A reasonable proportion of the Contractor's superintending staff shall have a working




knowledge of the English language.

Replace Clause 16.4 with following:-

16.4 Employment of Local Personnel The Contractor is encouraged, to the extent practicable and reasonable, to employ staff and labour from sources within Pakistan and preferably form the local area.

19.1 Safety, Security and Protection of Environment

Add in Sub Clause (c) of Clause 19.1 General Conditions of Contract Part-I, after word “Operation” The contractor shall stand liable for any loss to property or life and shall indemnify the Employer against such claim, charges and proceedings if any. Add Sub Clause (d):- In order to minimize the negative impacts during construction stage proper planning to mitigate adverse impacts is, therefore, imperative. The Contractor shall carry out the mitigation measures according to the guidelines and satisfaction of the client. Mitigation measures to be taken to minimize negative impacts due to vehicular emissions, noise, vibrations, dust and exhaust gases. Mitigation measures against damage to utilities and traffic arrangement during construction are the contractor’s responsibility. Contractor should combat the problem of inadequate backfilling of trenches/ excavations. Environmental monitoring is to be performed as per environmental Monitoring Plan.

The works carried out as above shall not be measured for payment under this section directly and the cost of such works will be considered to be included in other items of work given in the Bill of Quantities.

19.1.1 Safety of Engineers and Works

The Contractor shall throughout the execution and completion be responsible to take all necessary precautions for the safety of Employees on the work, and shall comply with all applicable safety laws and building codes to prevent accident or injury to persons on, about or adjacent to the places where the work is being performed. The Contractor shall provide at works site before commencement of work, sufficient and in good working condition life saving equipments, first aid kit etc.

19.1.2 Watching and Lighting

The Contractor shall in connection with the works provide and maintain at his own cost all lights, guards fencing and watching when and where necessary as required by the Engineer or the Representative of the Engineer or by any duly constituted authority for the protection of the works or for the safety and convenience of the public or others.

19.3 Safety Precautions

In order to provide for the safety, health and welfare of persons, and for prevention of damage of any kind, all operations for the purposes of or in connection with the Contract shall be carried out in compliance with the Safety Requirements of the Government of Pakistan with such modifications thereto as the Engineer may authorize or direct and the Contractor shall take or cause to be taken such further measures and comply with such further requirements as the Engineer may determine to be reasonably necessary for such purpose. The Contractor shall make, maintain and submit reports to the Engineer concerning safety, health and welfare of persons and damage to property, as the Engineer may




from time to time prescribe. 19.4 Lighting Works at Night

In the event of work being carried out at night, the Contractor shall at his own cost, provide and maintain such good and sufficient light as will enable the work to proceed satisfactorily and without danger. The approaches to the Site and the Works where the night-work is being carried out shall be sufficiently lighted. All arrangement adopted for such lighting shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.

20.1 Care of Works Add Sub Para (c) & (d) at the end

c). The Contractor shall in addition to the requirement indicated herein protect any utility

and work of any kind against damage or interruption of services except as specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. In case of any damages the same shall be repaired and or restored promptly by or at the expense of the Contractor without cost to the Employer.

d). The Employer/ Engineer shall have the right to retain an adequate amount of money

due to the contractor if the contractor fails to perform his obligations in terms and conditions of this clause.

20.4 Employer's Risks

The Employer's Risks are: Delete the text and substitute: a). insofar as they directly affect the execution of the Works in Pakistan:

i). War and hostilities (whether war be declared or not), invasion, act of foreign

enemies ii). Rebellion, revolution, insurrection, or military or usurped power, or civil war;

iii). Ionizing radiations, or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear r fuel, or

from any nuclear waste from the combustion of nuclear fuel, radioactive toxic explosive or other hazardous properties of any explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component thereof

iv). pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or supersonic speeds,

v). riot, commotion or disorder, unless solely restricted to the employees of the Contractor or of his Subcontractors and arising from the conduct of the Works;

b). loss or damage due to the use or occupation by the Employer of any Section or part

of the permanent works, except as may be provided for in the Contract. c). loss or damage to the extent that it is due to the design of the Works, other than any

part of the design provided by the Contractor or for which the Contractor is responsible; and

d). any operation of the forces of nature (insofar as it occurs on the Site) which an experienced contractor:- i). could not have reasonably foreseen, or ii). could reasonably have foreseen, but against which he could not reasonably have




taken at least one of the following measures:- • prevent loss or damage to physical property from occurring by taking

appropriate measures, or

• insure against.

21.4 Exclusions

The text is deleted and substituted with the following: There shall be no obligation for the insurances in Sub-Clause 21.1 to include loss or damage caused by the risks listed under Sub-Clause 20.4 paras (a) (i) to (iv). Add the following after 22.1(b) (c) The Contractor shall conduct his operations, make necessary arrangements, take

suitable precautions and perform all required work incident to the protection of and avoidance of interference with power transmission, telegraph, telephone and natural gas lines, oil lines water and sewerage mains and other utilities within the areas of his operations in connection with this Contract and the cost thereof shall be borne by the Contractor and the Contractor shall save harmless and indemnity the Employer in respect of all claims, demands, proceedings, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of or in relation to any such interference.

(d) The Contractor shall make good, at his own cost, all damages to telephone,

telegraph and electric cables or wires, sewer, water or other pipes except where the Authority, Employer or Private Party owing or responsible for the same elects to make good the damage.

All injury to the surface of the land, to the beds of water courses, Protecting Banks, riverbeds, etc. Where disturbed by the works (other than where specifically ordered by the Employer), shall be repaired by the Contractor or the Authorities concerned, at the Contractor’s expense. All such making good shall be to the satisfaction of the Employer.

25.1 Evidence and Terms of Insurance In 3rd

a). Adamjee Insurance Company Limited

line Clause 25.1 of General Conditions of Contract Part-I substitute “84 days” by “28 days”. The following Sub-Clause 25.5 is added:

25.5 Insurance Company

The Contractor shall be obliged to place all insurance relating to the Contract (including, but not limited to, the insurances referred to in Clauses 21, 23 and 24) with any of approved insurance companies as follows:

b). Eastern Federal Union (EFU) General Insurance c). Premier Insurance Company Pakistan Limited d). Commercial Union Assurance Company plc. e). New Jubilee Insurance Company f). National Insurance Corporation (NIC) of Pakistan g). PICIC Insurance Company h). International General Insurance Company The cost of complying with requirements of this Clause shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be liable for deductible losses not covered by insurance. The




Insurance Policy shall state:- a). The Employer shall receive at least 30 calendar days written notice of Intended

Cancellation or change effect in coverage. b). The Contractor is fully responsible to provide full indemnity to Employer in respect of

liability against loss or damage.

26.1 Compliance with Statutes Regulations, etc. Add Sub Paras (c) and (d) at the end of 26.1 of General Conditions of Contract Part-I

(c) The Employer presupposes that the Contractor has cognizance of all laws of Pakistan pertaining to the execution of the work. The Contractor shall confirm in all respects with the provisions of any such statute, ordinance or law as aforesaid and the regulations or by-laws of any local or other duly constituted authority which may be applicable to the works or public bodies and companies as aforesaid and shall keep the Employer indemnified against all penalties and liability of every kind for breach of any such statute, ordinance, law regulation or by-law. If the Contractor observes that the drawings and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Employer/ Engineer in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and without such notice to the Employer, he shall bear all costs arising there from.

(d) The Contractor and his sub-contractors shall convey, store and make use of all

explosives, dangerous petroleum acetylene, carbide of calcium and other similar material provided by them for use in or on the works in strict accordance with the provision of all laws, orders and regulations that are in force at the Site or may be issued from time to time by the Government.

29.2 Notices to Adjoining Property Owners

The Contractor shall send or cause to be sent written notices to Owners of property adjacent to the Site or which may be affected in any way by the performance of the work contemplate notifying them as to the extent of the work included in so far as it affect surrounding property and complying with local ordinance and laws.

29.3 Giving of Notices and Payment of Fees

The Contractor shall give all notices and pay all fees and charges required to be given or paid be any national or state statute, ordinance or other law or any regulation or by-law of any local or other duly constituted authority in relation to the execution of the work or of any temporary works and by the rule and regulations of all public bodies and companies whose property of rights are affected or may be affected in any way by the works or any temporary works.

31.3 Co-operation with other Contractors

During the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall co-operate fully with other Contractors working for the Employer at and in the vicinity of the Site and also shall provide adequate precautionary facilities not to make himself a nuisance to local residents and other Contractors.

33.1 Clearance of Site on Completion At the end of Clause 33.1 of General Conditions of Contract Part-I add following:-




The Employer/ Engineer shall have the right to retain an adequate amount of money due to the Contractor until the site is cleaned up and all damages made good.

34.2 Rates of Wages and Conditions of Labour

The contractor shall pay rates of wages and observe conditions of labour not less favorable than those established for the trade or industry where the work is carried out. In the absence of any rates of wages or conditions of labour so established, the Contractor shall pay rates of wages and observe conditions of labour which are not less favourable than the general level of wages and conditions observed by other employers whose general circumstances in the trade or in industry in which the Contractor is engaged are similar.

34.3 Employment of Persons in the Service of Others

The Contractor shall not recruit his staff and labour from amongst the persons in the services of the Employer or the Engineer, except with the prior written consent of the Employer or the Engineer, as the case may be.

34.4 Housing for Labour

Save insofar as the Contract otherwise provides, the Contractor shall provide and maintain such housing accommodation and amenities as he may consider necessary for all his supervisory staff and labour, employed for the purposes of or in connection with the Contract including all fencing, electricity supply, sanitation, cookhouses, fire prevention, water supply and other requirements in connection with such housing accommodation or amenities. On completion of the Contract, unless otherwise agreed with the Employer, the temporary camps or housing provided by the Contractor shall be removed and the Site reinstated, to its original condition, all to the approval of the Engineer.

34.5 Health and Safety

Due precautions shall be taken by the Contractor, and at his own cost, to ensure the safety of his staff and labour at all times throughout the period of the Contract. The Contractor shall further ensure that suitable arrangements are made for the prevention of epidemics and for all necessary welfare and hygiene requirements.

34.6 Epidemics

In the event of any outbreak of illness of an epidemic nature, the Contractor shall comply with and carry out such regulations, orders and requirements as may be made by the Government, or the local medical or sanitary authorities, for purpose of dealing with and overcoming the same.

34.7 Supply of Water

The Contractor shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, having regard to local conditions, provide on the Site, to the satisfaction of the Engineer or his representative, adequate supply of drinking and other water for the use of his staff and labour.

34.8 Alcoholic Liquor or Drugs

The Contractor shall not, otherwise than in accordance with the Statutes, Ordinances and Government Regulations or Orders for the time being in force, import, sell, give, barter or otherwise dispose of any alcoholic liquor or drugs, or permit or suffer any such importation, sale, gift, barter or disposal by his Subcontractors, agents, staff or labour.




34.9 Arms and Ammunition

The Contractor shall not give, or otherwise dispose of to any person or persons, any arms or ammunition of any kind or permit or suffer the same as aforesaid.

34.10 Festivals and Religious Customs

The Contractor shall in all dealings with his staff and labour have due regard to all recognized festivals, days of rest, religious, and other customs.

34.11 Disorderly Conduct

The Contractor shall at all times take all reasonable precautions to prevent any unlawful riotous or disorderly conduct by or amongst staff and labour and for the preservation of peace and protection of persons and property in the neighborhood of the Works against the same.

34.12 Compliance by Subcontractors

The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by his Subcontractors of the provisions of this Clause. Add the following Sub-Clauses:

34.13 Day and Night Work and Work on Sundays or Holidays Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Works shall be executed in the day only

within normal working hours. No work shall be carried out on Site on Sundays (locally recognised as day of rest) and on gazetted holidays, without the consent in writing of the Engineer except if the work is unavoidable or absolutely necessary for the saving of life or property or for the safety of the works in which case the Contractor shall immediately advise the Engineer. The Engineer shall not unreasonably withhold any such consent save in exceptional circumstances, nor do so if work on rest days or on gazetted holidays is considered by the Contractor to be necessary to meet the Time for Completion.

In case the contractor needs to work after normal working hours or on Sunday or

holidays, he shall get specific approval before hand from the Engineer giving at least 2 days advance written notice. In such case, the contractor undertakes his liability to pay the Engineer for such extra working hours (beyond normal working hours) calculated on the basis of actual extra hours at the rate of Rs. 2,000/- per hour payable to the Engineer through the Employer by the 15th day of next month.

35.2 Records of Safety and Health

The Contractor shall maintain such records and make such reports concerning safety, health and welfare of persons and damage to property as the Engineer may from time to time prescribe.

35.3 Reporting of Accidents

The Contractor shall report to the Engineer details of any accident as soon as possible after its occurrence. In the case of any fatality or serious accident, the Contractor shall, in addition notify the Engineer immediately by the quickest available means. Add the following Sub-Clause:




36.6 Use of Pakistani Materials and Services

The Contractor shall, so far as may be consistent with the Contract make the maximum use of materials, supplies, plant and equipment indigenous to or produced or fabricated in Pakistan and services, available in Pakistan provided such materials, supplies, plant, equipment and services shall be of required standard.

37.4 Rejection

In line five after word in bracket “immediately” add “with copy to Employer”

41.1 Commencement of Works

The text is deleted and substituted with the following: The Contractor shall commence the Works on Site within the period named in Appendix-A to Bid from the date of receipt by him from the Engineer of a written Notice to Commence. Thereafter, the Contractor shall proceed with the Works with due expedition and without delay.

46.1 Rate of Progress

Add following at the end In case of Contractor’s failure to take necessary steps within the notified period to expedite the work progress, the Employer/ Engineer may carry out the work by purchasing material, deploying manpower, engaging equipment and by taking other necessary measures. Cost of all such work including indirect costs (Employer overheads, handling charges etc., @ 15% of the cost of such work) would be borne by the Contractor either directly or the Employer/ Engineer shall deduct such costs from any payment due to the Contractor. Add the following sub-clause: -

48.2 Taking over of Sections or Parts. At the end add Taking over of sections or parts may be considered at the sole discretion of Employer /

Engineer. 51.2 Instructions for Variations

At the end of the first sentence, after the word "Engineer", add the words "in writing".

52.1 Valuation of Variations

After the words “Engineer shall” the following is added: fix within a period not exceeding one-eight of the completion time subject to a minimum of 56 days from the date of disagreement whichever is later.

52.4 Day work

Line one after word “Engineer” add with “consent of Employer”

53.4 Failure to Comply




Delete this Sub-Clause in its entirety and substituted with the following: If the Contractor considers himself to be entitled to any extension of the Time for Completion and/ or any additional payment, under any clause of these Conditions or otherwise in connection with the Contract, the Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer, describing the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim. The notice shall be given as soon as practicable and not later than 28 days after the Contractor became aware or should have become aware of the event or circumstance. If the Contractor fails to give notice of a claim within such period of 28 days, the Time for Completion shall not be extended, the Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment, and the Employer shall be discharged from all liability in connection with the claim. Otherwise, the following provisions of this sub-clause shall apply. The Contractor shall also submit any other notices which are required by the Contract, any supporting particulars for the claim, all as relevant to such event or circumstances. The Contractor shall keep such contemporary records as may be necessary to substantiate any claim, either on the Site or at another location acceptable to the Engineer. Without admitting the Employer’s liability, the Engineer may, after receiving any notice under this sub-clause, monitor the record-keeping and/ or instruct the Contractor to keep further contemporary records. The Contractor shall permit the Engineer to inspect all these records, and shall (if instructed) submit copies to the Engineer. Within 42 days after the Contractor became aware (or should have become aware) of the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim, or within such other period as may be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall send to the Engineer a fully detailed claim which included full supporting particulars of the basis of the claim and of the extension of time and/ or additional payment claimed. If the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim has a continuing effect: a). This fully detailed claim shall be considered as interim.

b). The Contractor shall send further interim claims at monthly intervals, giving the

accumulated delay and/ or amount claimed, and such further particulars as the Engineer may reasonable required, and

c). The Contractor shall send a final claim within 28 days after the end of the effects

resulting from the event or circumstances, or within such other period as may be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

Within 42 days after receiving a claim or any further particular supporting a previous claim, or within such other period as may be proposed by the Engineer and approved by the Contractor, the Engineer shall respond with approval and detailed comments. He may also request any necessary further particulars, but shall nevertheless give his response on the principles of the claim within such time. Each payment certificate shall include such amounts for any claim as have been reasonably substantiated as due under the relevant provisions of the Contract. Unless and until the particulars supplied are sufficient to substantiate the whole of the claim, the Contractor shall only be entitled to payment for such part of the claim as he has been able to substantiate. The Engineer shall proceed in accordance with sub-clause 2.6 to agree or determine (i) the extension (if any) of the Time for Completion (before or after its expiry) in accordance with Sub-Clause 44.1 [Extension of Time for Completion], and/ or (ii) the additional payment (if any) to which the Contractor is entitled under the Contract.




54.3. Custom Clearance The Clause is deleted in entirety.

54.4. Re Export Contractors Equipments The Clause is deleted in entirety.

54.5 Condition of Hire of Contractor's Equipment

Add the following paragraph:

The Contractor shall, upon request by the Engineer at any time in relation to any item of hired Contractor's Equipment, forthwith notify the Engineer in writing the name and address of the Owner of the equipment and shall certify that the agreement for the hire thereof contains a provision in accordance with the requirements set forth above.

55.1 Quantities

Replace this Clause with the following: - The quantities set out in the Bill of Quantities are estimated quantities of the works and they are not to be taken as actual and correct quantities of the works to be executed by the Contractor in fulfillment of his obligation under the Contract. However, no claim shall be entertained on account of quantities of work executed being more or less than those entered in the tender estimate. Payment shall be made for the quantities actually executed at the agreed unit prices in the Contract.

56.1 Works to be Measured In 1st line after word “the” add word “Employer/Engineer” in line 2nd

57.1 Method of Measurement

after word “works” add “deviations / amendments”.

Clause is replaced with following:- The works shall be measured according to the standard method prescribed for such works.

59.2 Nominated Subcontractors Objection to Nomination Replace this clause with the following:-

a). The Employer may invite offer for performance by sub-contractor of any works in satisfaction of prime cost sums included in the tender documents. In the exercise of his options, offer will be made in writing to the accepting authority (Employer) who shall select the firm to do the work and inform the contractor who will be required to conclude the contract with the nominated sub-contractor for the execution of the work as specified by the Accepting Authority (Employer) to the Sub- Contractor. The Employer shall not nominate any sub-contractor. Against whom the Contractor shall make reasonable objection.

b). The Contractor shall be reasonable for any sub-contractor or contractor who may

carryout any work or supply any material in connection with the contract, whether such person be selected by the Employer or by Contractor. The Contractor shall make good any loss or damage suffered by Employer by reason of default neglect or failure on the part of such person in relation to such work or material.




c). Nothing herein contained shall relief the Contractor of his liability and obligation under the contract or in any way affect the contractor’s direct responsibilities to Employer nor shall it render Employer in any way responsible to such sub-contractor (s).

59.4 Payments to Nominated Sub-Contractors

The Contractor shall pay to the nominated Subcontractor the amounts which the Engineer certifies to be due in accordance with the subcontract. These amounts plus other charges shall be included in the Contract Price in accordance with Clause 58 [Provisional Sums], except as stated in Sub-Clause 59.5 [Certification of Payments].

59.5 Certification of Payments & Nominated Subcontractors Before issuing a Payment Certificate which includes an amount payable to a nominated

Subcontractor, the Engineer may request the Contractor to supply reasonable evidence that the nominated Subcontractor has received all amounts due in accordance with previous Payment Certificates, less applicable deductions for retention or otherwise. Unless the Contractor:

a). submits reasonable evidence to the Engineer, or b). i). satisfies the Engineer in writing that the Contractor is reasonably entitled to

withhold or refuse to pay these amounts, and ii). submits to the Engineer reasonable evidence that the nominated Subcontractor

has been notified of the Contractor’s entitlement,

then the Employer may (at his sole discretion) pay direct to the nominated Subcontractor, part or all of such amounts previously certified (less applicable deductions) as are due to the nominated Subcontractor and for which the Contractor has failed to submit the evidence described in sub-paragraphs (a) or (b) above. The Contractor shall then repay, to the Employer, the amount which the nominated Subcontractor was directly paid by the Employer.

60.1 Monthly Statement In the first line after the word “shall”, the following is added: “on the basis of the joint measurement of work done under Clause 56.1,” In Para (c) the words “the Appendix to Bid” are deleted and substituted with the words “Sub-Cause 60.11 (a)(6) hereof”. (in case Clause 60.11 is applicable)

60.2 Monthly Payments

In the first line, substitute "28" by "14". Following paragraph is added at the end of the Clause.

“The Engineer shall not be bound to issue an Interim Payment Certificate if the Contractor has not submitted the progress reports in accordance with paragraph (b) of Clause 14.5 and such information as shall be mutually agreed in writing between the Employer and the Contractor”.

60.10 Time for Payment

The text is deleted and substituted with the following:




The amount due to the Contractor under any Interim Payment Certificate issued by the Engineer pursuant to this Clause, or to any other terms of the Contract, shall, subject to Clause 47, be paid by the Employer to the Contractor within 30 days after such Interim Payment Certificate has been jointly verified by Employer and Contractor, or, in the case of the Final Certificate referred to in Sub Clause 60.8, within 60 days after such Final Payment Certificate has been jointly verified by Employer and Contractor; Provided that the Interim Payment shall be caused in 42 days and Final Payment in 60 days in case of foreign funded project. In the event of the failure of the Employer to make payment within the times stated, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor compensation at the 28 days rate of KIBOR+2% per annum for local currency and LIBOR+1% for foreign currency, upon all sums unpaid from the date by which the same should have been paid. The provisions of this Sub-Clause are without prejudice to the Contractor’s entitlement under Clause 69.

60.11 Secured Advance on Materials

Not included in this contract.

60.12 Financial Assistance to Contractor

Financial assistance shall be made available to the Contractor by the Employer as following: (a) An interest-free Mobilization Advance of 15% of the Contract Price stated in the

Letter of Acceptance shall be paid by the Employer to the Contractor in two equal parts upon submission by the Contractor of a Mobilization Advance Guarantee for the full amount of the Advance in the specified form from a Scheduled/ Commercial Bank in Pakistan acceptable to the Employer:

(1) First part within 14 days after signing of the Contract Agreement or date of

receipt of Engineer’s Notice to Commence, whichever is earlier; and

(2) Second part within 42 days from the date of payment of the first part, subject to the satisfaction of the Engineer as to the state of mobilization of the Contractor.

(b) This Advance shall be recovered in equal installments; first installment at the

expiry of third month after the date of payment of first part of Advance and the last installment two months before the date of completion of the Works as per Clause 43 hereof.

On full recovery of the Mobilization Advance, the Employer will return the said Guarantee to the Contractor duly discharge. However, the Employer will be at liberty to encash the Bank Guarantee of the Contractor, if the Contractor fails to extend the said guarantee 15 days before the expiry date of the guarantee.

63.1 Default of Contractor

The following para is added at the end of the Sub-Clause: Provided further that in addition to the action taken by the Employer against the Contractor under this Clause, the Employer may also refer the case of default of the Contractor to Pakistan Engineering Council for punitive action under the Construction and Operation of Engineering Works Bye-Laws 1987, as amended from time to time.

65.1 No Liability for Special Risks In line one replace the word “Contractor” with “neither party”




65.2 Special Risks

The text is deleted and substituted with the following: The Special Risks are the risks defined under Sub-Clause20.4 sub paragraphs (a) (i) to (a) (v).

65.3 Damage to Work by Special Risks

First line after word “on” delete the words “or near or in transit” and in line five add word “on site” after word “plant” and delete all after word “damaged”.

65.8. Payment if Contract Terminated

Sub Para (b) of clause 65.8 is replaced with following:- The cost of materials, plant or goods of the Contractor which has been delivered at site for execution of work, such material, plant or goods becoming property of the Employer upon such payment being made by him.

67.3 Arbitration

In the sixth to eighth lines, delete the words “shall be finally settled” …..…to……… “appointed under such Rules” and substitute the following: “shall be finally settled under the provisions of the Arbitration Act, 1940 as amended or any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof for the time being in force”. Add the following paragraph: The place of arbitration shall be Faisalabad.

68.1 Notice to Contractor

Add the following paragraph: For the purposes of this Sub-Clause, the Contractor shall, immediately after receipt of Letter of Acceptance, intimate in writing to the Employer and the Engineer by registered post, the address of his principal place of business or any change in such address during the period of the Contract.

68.2 Notice to Employer and Engineer

For the purpose of this Sub-Clause, the respective addresses are: a). The Employer is CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER, Faisalabad Industrial Estate

Development & Management Company (FIEDMC), 1st

Tel. # (041) 9230231-4 Fax # (041) 9230235

Floor, FCCI Complex, East Canal Road, Canal Park, Faisalabad.

b). The Engineer is M/S OSMANI & COMPANY (PVT.) LTD. Consulting Engineers, Osmani House, 245/2K, Block- 6, PECHS, Karachi Phones: 021-34536007 / 008, 34546541 / 42, Fax: 021-34534691 Email: ocl- [email protected] Web: www.osmani.com

69.3 Payment on Termination

Line one after word “termination” add “except for clause 65 or no fault of contractor”.




Line fifth word “any loss” is replaced “work completed”.

70.1 Increase or Decrease of Cost Sub-Clause 70.1 is deleted in its entirety, and substituted with the following: The amounts payable to the Contractor, pursuant to Sub-Clause 60.1, shall be adjusted

in respect of the rise or fall in the cost of labor, materials, and other inputs to the Works, by applying to such amount the formula prescribed in this Sub-Clause.

(a) Other Changes in Cost

To the extent that full compensation for any rise or fall in costs to the Contractor is

not covered by the provisions of this or other Clauses in the Contract, the unit rates and prices included in the Contract shall be deemed to include amounts to cover the contingency of such other rise or fall of costs.

(b) Adjustment Formula

The adjustment to the monthly statements in respect of changes in cost shall be

determined from the following formula:-

++++=EoEnd

MoMnc

LoLnbAPn ……………….

Where: Pn is a price adjustment factor to be applied to the amount for the payment of the

work carried out in the subject month, determined in accordance with Paragraph 60.1 (a), and with Paragraphs 60.1 (b) and (e), where any variations and daywork are not otherwise subject to adjustment;

A is a constant, specified in Appendix-C to Bid, representing the nonadjustable

portion in contractual payments; b, c, d, etc., are weightages or coefficients representing the estimated proportion of

each cost element (labour, cement and reinforcing steel etc.) in the Works or Sections thereof, net of Provisional Sums and Prime Cost; the sum of A, b, c, d, etc., shall be one;

Ln, Mn, En, etc., are the current cost indices or reference prices of the cost elements

for month “n”, determined pursuant to Sub-Clause 70.1(d), applicable to each cost element; and

Lo, Mo, Eo, etc., are the base cost indices or reference prices corresponding to the

above cost elements at the date specified in Sub-Clause 70.1(d).

(c) Sources of Indices and Weightages The sources of indices shall be those listed in Appendix-C to Bid, as approved by the

Engineer. As the proposed basis for price adjustment, the Contractor shall have submitted with his bid the tabulation of Weightages and Source of Indices if different than those given in Appendix-C to Bid, which shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

(d) Base, Current, and Provisional Indices

The base cost indices or prices shall be those prevailing on the day 28 days prior to

the latest date for submission of bids. Current indices or prices shall be those




prevailing on the day 28 days prior to the last day of the period to which a particular monthly statement is related. If at any time the current indices are not available, provisional indices as determined by the Engineer will be used, subject to subsequent correction of the amounts paid to the Contractor when the current indices become available.

(e) Adjustment after Completion

If the Contractor fails to complete the Works within the Time for Completion prescribed under Clause 43, adjustment of prices thereafter until the date of completion of the Works shall be made using either the indices or prices relating to the prescribed time for completion, or the current indices or prices, whichever is more favorable to the Employer, provided that if an extension of time is granted pursuant to Clause 44, the above provision shall apply only to adjustments made after the expiry of such extension of time.

(f) Weightages

The weightages for each of the factors of cost given in Appendix-C to Bid shall be adjusted if, in the opinion of the Engineer, they have been rendered unreasonable, unbalanced, or inapplicable as a result of varied or additional work executed or instructed under Clause 51. Such adjustment(s) shall have to be agreed in the variation order.

71.1 Currency Restrictions

Delete this Sub-Clause in its entirety.

72.1 Rates of Exchange Sub-Clause 72.1 is deleted in its entirety. 72.2 Currency Proportions Sub-Clause 72.2 is deleted in its entirety and following is substituted therefore: All payments shall be in Pak Rupees. 72.3 Currencies of Payment for Provisional Sums Sub-Clause 72.3 is deleted its entirety and following is substituted therefore: All payments shall be in Pak Rupees. 73.1 Payment of Income Tax

The Contractor, Subcontractors and their employees shall be responsible for payment of all their income tax, super tax and other taxes on income arising out of the Contract and the rates and prices stated in the Contract shall be deemed to cover all such taxes. Add the following Sub-Clause:

73.2 Custom Duty & Taxes

The Contractor, sub-contractor and their employees shall be responsible for payment of all custom duty & taxes and the rates and prices stated in this contract shall be deemed to cover such taxes.




73.4 Adherence to Labour Laws

The contractor shall be responsible to adhere to all labour laws whether central or provincial and get themselves registered with the relevant department including but not limited to department of Punjab Employees Social Security Institution Lahore (P.E.S.S.I.) and EOBI department and shall be responsible to pay all dues in this regard to the concerned department. The employer reserves the right to ask the contractor to provide evidence of registration and payments if and when required. Further more the contractor shall indemnify the employer and the engineer for any claim/payments etc. in this regard.

74.1 Integrity Pact

If the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors, agents or servants is found to have violated or involved in violation of the Integrity Pact signed by the Contractor as Appendix-L to his Bid, then the Employer shall be entitled to:

a). recover from the Contractor an amount equivalent to ten times the sum of any

commission, gratification, bribe, finder’s fee or kickback given by the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors, agents or servants;

b). terminate the Contract; and c). recover from the Contractor any loss or damage to the Employer as a result of such

termination or of any other corrupt business practices of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors, agents or servants.

The termination under Sub-Para (b) of this Sub-Clause shall proceed in the manner prescribed under Sub-Clauses 63.1 to 63.4 and the payment under Sub-Clause 63.3 shall be made after having deducted the amounts due to the Employer under Sub-Para (a) and (c) of this Sub-Clause.

75.1 Termination of Contract for Employer’s Convenience

The Employer shall be entitled to terminate the Contract at any time for the Employer’s convenience after giving 56 days prior notice to the Contractor, with a copy to the Engineer. In the event of such termination, the Contractor. a). Shall proceed as provided in Sub-Clause 65.7 hereof; and b). Shall be paid by the Employer as provided in Sub-Clause 65.8 hereof Add the following Sub-Clause:

76.1 Liability of Contractor

The Contractor or his Subcontractors or assigns shall follow strictly, all relevant labour laws including the Workmen’s Compensation Act and the Employer shall be fully indemnified for all claims, damages etc. arising out of any dispute between the Contractor, his Subcontractors or assigns and the labour employed by them. Add the following Sub-Clause:

77.1 Joint and Several Liabilities If the Contractor is a joint venture of two or more persons, all such persons shall be jointly and severally bound to the Employer for the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract and shall designate one of such persons to act as leader with authority to bind the joint venture. The composition or the constitution of the joint venture shall not be altered




without the prior consent of the Employer. Add the following Sub-Clause:

78.1 Details to be Confidential

The Contractor shall treat the details of the Contract as private and confidential, save in so far as may be necessary for the purposes thereof, and shall not publish or disclose the same or any particulars thereof in any trade or technical paper or elsewhere without the prior consent in writing of the Employer or the Engineer. If any dispute arises as to the necessity of any publication or disclosure for the purpose of the Contract, the same shall be referred to the decision of the Engineer whose award shall be final.

79.1 New Clause 79.1 added

(Punjab Procurement Rules Supersedes Other Rules)

Notwithstanding anything contained in the Bid documents, the Punjab Procurement Rules 2014 (PPR-2014), as prepared by the Government of Punjab, Services & General Administration Department (Punjab Procurement Regulatory Authority) vide notification No. MD.PPRA/10-2/2013 dated January 13, 2014, shall be applicable and shall supersede any clause contained in the Bid documents contrary to PPRA-2014.

SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN –– SSPPEECCIIAALL PPRROOVVIISSIIOONN


Specifications - Special Provisions FIEDMC

TOC Page i

SPECIFICATIONS - SPECIAL PROVISIONS

TABLE OF CONTENT 1. DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT

1.1. General 2. THE SITE

2.1. Site of Works 3. WORK UNDER THE CONTRACT

3.1. General Description 4. GENERAL RULES OF SPECIFICATIONS 5. DRAWINGS

5.1. Bidding Drawings 5.2. Construction Drawings, Supplementary Drawings 5.3. Definition of Term Drawings 5.4. Checking of Drawings 5.5. Copies of Drawings 5.6. Drawings to be Furnished by the Contractor / As-Built Drawings

6. SETTING OUT OF WORK AND SURVEY

6.1. Reference Points, Lines 6.2. Verification 6.3. Survey Instruments 6.4. No work without Joint Survey

7. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND PLANT

7.1. Quality of Materials 7.2. Submission of Samples and Data 7.3. Testing 7.4. Testing Laboratory Certificates 7.5. Inspection 7.6. Approved Sample at Site 7.7. Survey Teams And Instruments 7.8. Establishment of Field Laboratory

8. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

8.1. Submittal Date 8.2. Requirements 8.3. Monthly Reports

9. NOT USED

10. SITE OFFICE AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE

CONTRACTOR



TOC Page ii

10.1. Contractor’s Office, Facilities etc. 10.2. Sign Board 10.3 Engineer’s Office

11. OTHER FACILITIES FOR ENGINEER’S PERSONNEL PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR

11.1. Furnishing and Maintaining Transportation Facilities

12. SAFETY

12.1 Accident Prevention, Protective Equipment 28. ATTENDANCE AT MEETINGS 29. DOCUMENTS NOT TO BE ALTERED OR MUTILATED

30. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS OR ENGINEER

31. ACCESS AND EXISTING ROADS 32. FIRST AID FACILITIES 33. FINAL HAND-OVER

34. EMPLOYER AND ENGINEER NOT PERSONALLY LIABLE

35. PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

36. SITE ORDER BOOK

37. BAR BENDING SCHEDULES 38. PROGRESS REPORT



SP - Special Provisions Page - SP 1 of 12

1. DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT

SPECIFICATIONS - SPECIAL PROVISIONS

1.1. General

Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Company (FIEDMC) is developing M3 Industrial City, Faisalabad.

2. THE SITE 2.1. Site of Works

The Site of the Works is the area for construction lying within the right-of-way lines, boundaries and limits shown on the Drawing and any such additional areas adjacent thereto as may be designated by the Engineer from time to time for the construction to be performed under the Contract and all such areas and additional areas shall be comprised in the Site as defined in Clause 1 of the Conditions of Contract.

3. WORK UNDER THE CONTRACT 3.1. General Description

The work i.e. asphaltic wearing course of 2” to be provided on the existing Main Arterial Road, in this contract comprises the execution and completion of the Works, remedying of any defects therein, maintenance of utility services and the provisions of all labour, materials, equipment, plant and everything whether of a temporary or permanent nature required in and for such execution, completion, remedying and maintenance so far as the necessity for providing the same is specified or can reasonably be inferred from the Contract documents.

The following description of the Works to be performed under this Contract is general in nature and is not intended to describe all of the facilities to be provided under this Contract.

THE WORKS UNDER THIS CONTRACT ARE AS DEFINED IN BIDDING DATA

4. GENERAL RULES OF SPECIFICATIONS

a) “Specification” or “as specified" refers to the specifications outlined in these Documents and where no specifications are available for any work or where the same are found not applicable then the relevant applicable AASHTO, ASTM or BSS specifications or equivalent standards shall apply in the same order. Any item for which no specifications are outlined but which are identified on drawings, shall be completed according to the standards as per AASHTO / ASTM / BSS, these include items that may be added in the future. The Employer / Employer’s Representative may supplement such specifications during the progress of work. All materials and processes used for these items shall be subjected to standard testing and, if found below the pertinent AASHTO / ASTM / BSS standards, shall be removed from the site immediately at Contractor's expense.

Specification or as Specified

b)

Standards and Codes

Wherever reference is made in the specifications to the respective standards and codes in accordance to which goods and materials are to be furnished, and work is




to be performed or tested, the provisions of the latest current edition or revision of the relevant standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly set forth in the Contract.

c)

All goods and materials to be incorporated in the Works shall be new, unused, of the most recent or current models and incorporate all recent improvements in design and materials unless provided otherwise in the Contract.

Materials and Processes

d) Where specific materials, processes, etc. are specified and the same are not available other alternative materials and processes which ensure an equal or higher quality than those specified will be accepted subject to the Employer / Employer’s Representative's prior review and written approval. Differences between the those specified and the proposed alternatives must be fully described in writing by the Contractor and submitted to the Employer / Employer’s Representative at least 30 days prior to the date when the Contractor desires the Employer / Employer’s Representative's approval who may give such approval after determining that the alternative proposed ensures equal or higher quality.

Equivalent Materials, Processes, etc.

e) Approved, directed, instructed means the approval, etc. of the Employer / Employer’s Representative unless otherwise stated.

Approved, Directed, Instructed

f) Where alternative materials, processes etc., are specified the selection will depend on local conditions and discretion rests with the Employer / Employer’s Representative whose decision shall be final and binding.

Alternatives

g) Wherever the manufacturer's/ supplier's instructions, manuals, guarantees and ASTM/BSS Standards are referred to in the specifications and details of Bills of Quantities; all such literature shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Employer / Employer’s Representative for due checking, approval and record.

Catalogues / Standards / Manufacturer's Instructions, etc.

h) Unless stated or specified else-where to the contrary these General Rules shall apply to all sections of work irrespective of their sequence, location and description.

Applicability

5. DRAWINGS

5.1. Bidding Drawings

Tender Drawings issued with the Tender Documents, called the Tender Drawings, show scope of the work to be performed by the Contractor. The Drawings are generally in sufficient detail so as to be used as a basis for construction, fabrication and for placing orders for materials subject to corrections based on the future issue of supplementary Drawings as provided under Sub-Clause 5.2 hereof.




5.2. Construction Drawings, Supplementary Drawings

After award of Contract, the Contractor shall carry out “Joint Survey” at Site of Works in pursuance to Sub-Clause 6.4, Specifications - Special Provisions. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer “Joint Survey”, duly signed, dated and stamped by the representatives of the Employer, Consultant and Contractor. Simultaneously, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed “Work Programme” in terms of Sub-Clause 14.1 Conditions of Contract. After receipt of “Joint Survey” and “Work Programme” from the Contractor, the Engineer will start issuing Construction Drawings to the Contractor. The Engineer shall have authority to issue to the Contractor, from time to time, such Supplementary Drawings and instructions as shall be necessary for the purpose of the proper and adequate execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein. The Contractor shall follow these Drawings. The Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer regarding the part of the Drawings which in his opinion contain discrepancies or are not clear. The Engineer shall issue necessary clarifications or Supplementary Drawings in greater details as required to execute the Works. These Supplementary Drawings showing changes from the Bid Drawings, in the opinion of the Contractor, shall be reviewed by the Engineer for his determination of adjustment of the Contract Price under Clause 51 and 52 of the Conditions of Contract.

5.3. Definition of Term Drawings

The term Drawings as used in the Specifications means the Drawings referred in Clauses 5.1 and 5.2 hereof.

5.4. Checking of Drawings

The Contractor shall check all Drawings carefully as soon as practicable after receipt thereof, and shall promptly notify the Engineer of any errors discovered.

5.5. Copies of Drawings

Drawings will be issued to the Contractor as described below.

a). Bidding Drawings

One (1) set of the Tender Drawings will be issued to the Contractor alongwith Tender Documents. Additional sets will be provided at cost of reproduction upon written request of the Contractor.

b). Construction Drawings / Supplementary Drawings

One (1) print of each Construction Drawings / Supplementary Drawing will be issued to the Contractor free of charge. Additional sets will be provided at cost of reproduction upon written request of the Contractor.

5.6. Drawings to be Furnished by the Contractor / As-Built Drawings

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review of such drawings as required under the Contract, sufficiently in advance of the work intended to be executed.

The Contractor shall, at all times, keep on Site a separate set of prints on which all significant changes between the work shown on the Drawings and that which is actually




constructed, shall be noted neatly, accurately and promptly as the work progresses. The Subcontractor(s) for plumbing, mechanical and electrical shall, at all times, keep on Site, a separate set of prints of the drawings (showing their parts of the Works) on which all significant changes between the work shown on the Drawings and that which is actually constructed, shall be noted neatly, accurately and promptly as the work progresses. Such drawings shall show the exact physical location and configuration of the works as actually installed. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) days of issuance Taking-Over Certificate for whole of the Works, furnish to the Engineer for his approval two (2) copies of such marked up drawings. One (1) copy of each of the marked up drawings approved by the Engineer shall be returned to the Contractor by the Engineer and these shall be used for the preparation of the As - Built Drawings. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer six (6) complete sets of all As -Built Drawings as well as AutoCAD soft copy within thirty (30) days of receipt of drawings stated above, from the Engineer.

6. SETTING OUT OF WORK AND SURVEY 6.1. Reference Points, Lines

The Contractor shall establish bench marks and / or reference line at the Site in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer. The Contractor shall set out its work from these bench marks and / or lines.

6.2. Verification

The Engineer may make checks as the work progress to verify lines and grades established by the Contractor and to determine the conformance of the work as it progresses with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Such checking by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform all work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications and the lines and grades given therein.

6.3. Survey Instruments

The Contractor shall maintain at the Site the requisite surveying instruments in perfect working conditions for the use of the Engineer’s Representative to check levels and lines of the work at all times. These instruments shall include (but not limited to) One Total Station, Adequate nos. of Levels, theodolites, Tapes, etc.

6.4. No work without Joint Survey

The Contractor shall not start the excavation and / or embankment works until the Joint Survey has been done to establish the existing ground levels.

7. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND PLANT 7.1. Quality of Materials

All materials, fixtures, fittings, supplies and plant furnished under the Contract shall be new and unused, standard first grade quality and of the best workmanship and design. No inferior or low-grade materials, supplies or articles will be either approved or accepted, and all work of assembly and construction shall be done in a first-class and workmanlike manner. In asking for prices for materials intended for delivery to the Site and incorporation in the Works under any portion of these Specifications, the Contractor shall provide the manufacturer or supplier with complete information as may be




necessary to secure compliance to this Clause and, in every case, he shall quote this Clause in full to each such manufacturer or supplier. The Contractor shall have to submit work/ procurement orders, manufacturing location and shipment details to establish the same. All other machinery / equipment shall of renowned manufacturers and subject to approval the Employer and The Engineer. The Contractor shall submit at least three names of separate independent laboratories of international repute for testing of the equipments in nearest national/ international location for the approval of Employer/ Engineer. All the equipments ordered by the Contractor shall be shipped only after the testing by the manufacturer and the independent third party inspection agency. The Contractor shall arrange at-least Two (2) pre-shipment visit(s) of manufacturing plant/ factory by at-least but not limited to Four (04) officers of Employer and Engineer per trip. These visits shall be scheduled as per the work schedule of the Contractor and the Contractor shall identify the timing of these visits in advance. The pre-shipment visits shall be made after the independent inspection by the approved third party inspection agency is completed in a satisfactory manner. It will be considered that the nominal duration for the visits shall be 25 international man days and 25 domestic man days. The Contractor shall arrange for the visit of Laboratory selected by the Representatives of Employer and Engineer prior to its approval.

The Contract price shall be deemed to include all the expenses of the above arrangements with and including for arranging the relevant visas for designated officers of the Employer and the Engineer, their visa fees, Air Tickets (Business Class), boarding in a minimum of five star hotel, lodging, local transport costs in independent vehicles aboard etc, in addition a TA/DA will be paid to the visiting officials at the rate of Rs 5,000/- per head per day for local visits and US$ 200 per head per day on foreign visits, as well as cost of testing and third party inspection.

7.2. Submission of Samples and Data

As soon as practicable after award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer drawings, catalogues, diagrams and other descriptive data for all mechanical, electrical, architectural and such other materials and plant designated by the Engineer, which the Contractor proposes for use under this Contract. For certain materials and plant, data may be required to be submitted in accordance with a detail form furnished by the Engineer. Samples of materials (2 sets) shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer at Contractor’s cost for approval sufficiently in advance of the materials intended to be incorporated in the Works.

7.3. Testing

Testing, except as otherwise specified herein, shall be performed by a testing agency as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, at no extra cost to the Employer. The Engineer may require all testing to be carried out under his supervision only.

The quality control testing shall be performed by the Contractor’s competent personnel in accordance with a site testing as approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall keep a complete record of all quality tests programme performed on Site.




7.4. Testing Laboratory Certificates

The Engineer may accept a certificate from a commercial testing laboratory, satisfactory to him, certifying that the product has been tested within a period acceptable to the Engineer and that it conforms to the requirements of these Specifications.

7.5. Inspection

All material and Plant furnished and all work performed under this Contract will be subject to inspection by the Engineer at all times and in all states of completion both off-Site and on-Site. The Contractor shall furnish promptly without additional charge, all facilities, labour and materials reasonably needed for performing such inspection and testing as may be required by the Engineer.

7.6. Approved Sample at Site

The Contractor shall, at all times, keep on the Site approved samples. All such samples shall be made available to the Engineer as and when required.

7.7. Survey Teams And Instruments

The contractor shall provide necessary surveying staff and surveying equipment to the Engineer for conducting necessary survey work in connection with checking or establishing line, level, control and quantification of different items of work.

The Contractor shall maintain survey equipment for the use of the Engineer. All survey equipment shall be maintained throughout the Contract period.

a) Expendable Material

The Contractor shall provide adequate supplies of expendable materials, i.e. pencils, rubbers and inks, drawing papers, level books, field books, pegs, brushes and paints as required by the Engineer.

7.8. Establishment of Field Laboratory

The Contractor shall establish a Site laboratory for the purpose of necessary testing. The laboratory equipment shall remain the Contractor’s property at all times. The operation of the lab shall be under the control of Resident Engineer / Material Engineer of the Consultant.

8. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 8.1. Submittal Date

The programme to be submitted by the Contractor in accordance with Clause 14.1 of the Conditions of Contract shall be submitted in the form of a detailed schedule based on a computerized network analysis covering all construction activities indicating critical activities with critical path, resource scheduling for Contractor’s Equipment, material and labour, within the period stated in the Appendix A to Bid. All the milestone shall be clearly identified.

8.2. Requirements

The detailed submittal shall consist of schedules, network analysis tabulations and narrative descriptions of the proposed construction programme.




Each summary or detailed schedule shall consist of a bar chart and a time-scaled network. The scheduled start and finish times for all activities on the bar chart shall agree with those on the network. All inter-relationships and inter-dependencies between structures shall be clearly indicated on the schedules.

The network shall show the order and interdependence of activities planned by the Contractor and shall be time-scaled according to calendar dates.

8.3. Monthly Reports

Each month, the Contractor shall submit a report consisting of:

- Copies of the bar charts for the current phase with both actual progress and scheduled progress shown.

- Network analysis tabulations as in Sub-Clause 8.2 above, reflecting actual start and

finish dates where applicable. - A narrative report discussing any significant deviations from the schedule and, if

necessary, explaining the steps proposed to be taken to maintain the approved schedule.

9. NOT USED

10. SITE OFFICE AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE

CONTRACTOR 10.1. Contractor’s Office, Facilities etc.

The Contractor shall establish and maintain a Site office. The Contractor shall provide all facilities in connection with the execution, completion, of the Works, remedying defects therein and maintenance of the utilities services. The facilities shall, not be limited to, the Contractor’s Site Office, labour camps, workyard and storage areas, temporary water supply, waste water disposal, temporary electricity, medical unit, temporary roads, fire protection and firefighting equipment etc. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for arranging the facilities. The Contractor shall arrange his labour camp, work yard, storage area, site office within the area available at the Site.

10.2. Sign Board

The Contractor shall erect and maintain at the Site in a location to be approved by the Engineer, 3 Sign Boards 4.45M height and 2 M wide for writing the name of Work, name of Employer, name of Consultants, name of Contractor and Project Cost. The notice board shall comprise of the following; • Frame of 3” dia GI Pipe properly painted as per the direction of the Consultants/

Engineer and as per drawing.

• 2 Nos. Posts of 3” dia GI Pipe 4.45M above ground and 1M below ground embedded in 1:2:4 CC 2’x2’x4’ with proper arrangements of anchorage and brasses. Pipes painted with anti-rust as directed by the Engineer.

• 4 Nos. Steel Sheets 0.6M high and 2M wide fixed on both sides with 50mm gap between each. The background of plates is of white color whereas the writing would be black or red color (as approved by the Engineer)




• White imported 3M sheet used as background. The color of monogram would be, green, red or black etc. (as approved by the Engineer)

• Alphabets of appropriate size as approved by the Engineer in 3M reflective sheet in

blue/ black color. The Contractor shall maintain the display of the notice boards at his own cost throughout the length of the project.

10.3 Engineer’s Office

The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain the following facilities within one week of Engineer’s issue of commencement letter and shall continue un-interrupted till the completion of works:- a) Contractor shall rehabilitate & maintain the existing office accommodation for

Engineer, till the completion of the project, including all costs of Electricity, telephone, water supply, sewerage and janitorial services of the Engineer’s office. Cost of all the above works are deemed to be included in the contract price and no additional payment shall be made by the Employer to the Contractor under any circumstances.

b) The Contractor shall provide an average cost of Rupees Ten thousand only (Rs. 10,000/-) per month pertaining to mobile telephone use in shape of Prepaid Mobile Cards.

c) Provision of stationery i/c. paper, pen, pencils etc. per month, as per the requirement

of the Engineer. In case of non-provision of above facilities, the Employer / Engineer shall deduct from any money due / becoming due to the Contractor by the Employer appropriate amount till these facilities are provided satisfactorily to the Engineer. Costs of all above facilities are deemed to be included in the Contract Price and no additional payment shall be made by the Employer to the Contractor under any circumstances. The Bidder shall furnish separate Cost Impact (detail of Amounts/ Costs) included in the Bid Price/ Contract Price against 10.3 Engineer’s Office.

11. OTHER FACILITIES FOR ENGINEER’S PERSONNEL PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR

11.1. Furnishing and Maintaining Transportation Facilities

The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain the following transpiration facility within one week of Engineer’s issue of commencement letter and shall continue un-interrupted till the completion of works:

a). The Contractor shall furnish, operate and maintain following vehicles:

i) 02 Nos. Suzuki Jimny JLDX M/T Jeep (Air-Conditioned) ii) 01 No. Suzuki Swift Automatic with Navigation Car (Air-Conditioned) The above vehicles shall be brand new, latest model with Driver, install tracker facility, registered and insured to the name of the Employer. The above vehicles are for the exclusive use of the Engineer / Engineer’s supervision team to meet their transportation needs. The use of such transportation facility shall be exclusively




under the control of the Engineer and the contractor shall be wholly responsible for furnishing at all times above said facilities. The above vehicles shall be in use of the Employer/ Engineer and shall become property of the Employer on completion of the project.

b). The Contractor shall furnish, supply and provide, without specific direction of the Engineer all lubricants, tyres, other supplies, regular service and maintenance at all times for the above vehicle till the issue of the Completion Certificate of the contract.

c). The Contractor shall provide an amount equivalent to 700 Litres (200 for Suzuki

Swift and 250 for each Suzuki Jimny) of Hi-Super Petrol per month to the Engineer by 5th

In case of non-provision of above facilities, the Employer / Engineer shall deduct from any money due / becoming due to the Contractor by the Employer appropriate amount till these facilities are provided satisfactorily to the Engineer. Costs of all above facilities are deemed to be included in the Contract Price and no additional payment shall be made by the Employer to the Contractor under any circumstances. The Bidder shall furnish separate Cost Impact (detail of Amounts/ Costs) included in the Bid Price/ Contract Price against 11. Other Facilities for Engineer’s Personnel provided by the Contractor.

of each month in advance for complete duration of work including any extended period.

12. SAFETY

12.1 Accident Prevention, Protective Equipment

The Contractor shall comply and enforce compliance by all his Subcontractors with the highest standards of safety and accident prevention in compliance with all applicable laws, ordinance and statutory provisions. Where overhead work is being carried out, warning signs shall be installed at ground level clearly warning of the overhead work.

All warning signs shall be in two languages, English and Urdu, and shall at all times be maintained in a clean and legible condition, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Trash shall be removed at frequent intervals to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

13. The Tendered Rates shall be inclusive of all lead and lift.

14. The Contractor's rates shall include all incidental charges in connection with the work

such as the cost of removing trees, shrubs, grass, etc., which interfere with the execution of the work as well as the cost of Natural Ground Compaction (NGC) which will be carried out by the Contractor upto the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to the earthwork.

15. No alterations or additions shall be made by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities and rates must be filled in ink or typed out both in figures and words clearly and legibly in the columns provided in the schedule of quantities. All corrections must be initialed by the contractors. Any Tender which does not comply with this condition will be liable to be summarily rejected and not taken into account when preparing comparative statement.

16. Materials obtained from excavations will be the property of the Employer. Serviceable materials are to be stacked in places pointed out by Engineer. The Contractor undertakes to have the site clean and free from rubbish to the satisfaction of the




Engineer. All surplus materials, rubbish, etc., will be removed to places to be fixed by the Engineer and nothing extra will be paid for this.

17. On completion of the work or earlier as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove all temporary structure (Godowns, site offices, etc.), erected by him at the site of work. He shall fill tanks dug out by him at site, remove all debris and other materials like surplus sand, stone ballast, rubbish, etc.; and in short, shall leave the site in a neat and tidy condition.

18. The contractors in the course of their works should understand that all material (e.g. ,

stone and other materials) obtained in the work or dismantling, excavation, etc., will be considered as Employer’s property and issued to the contractors (if they require the same for their own use) at rates approved by the Engineer. If the materials are not required by them they will be disposed off in the interest of Employer.

19. The contractor shall inspect the site of works and acquaint himself with the nature and

requirements of the work, facilities of access for materials, removal of rubbish, cost of carriage, nature of strata, etc., before submitting his Bid.

20. The contractor shall have to make temporary approach roads, etc., at his own cost to facilitate movement of materials, such approach roads shall be aligned in a manner approved by the Engineer.

21. The contractor shall have to make proper arrangements for road crossing barriers during working hours in the day time as well as in the night when danger lights will have to be provided on either ends at his own cost and no extra cost will be paid. Sufficient barricades and red lights will be provided by the Contractor where required to avoid the chances of accidents. In case an accident occurs for failure on the part of the contractor, he shall be entirely responsible for the consequences.

22. The Contractor shall have to make arrangements for diversions for traffic wherever necessary and shall have to provide diversion and caution boards as per directions of the Engineer at his own cost for which no extra cost will be paid. The diversion shall be watered and consolidated as per directions of the Engineer.

23. No material shall be removed from the site without the written permission of the Engineer.

24. Dewatering including shoring wherever so required for any foundation area, pumping, bailing out water, drainage of water within plot areas if any shall be deemed to have been included in the rates quoted by the tenderers and no extra payment will be made.

25. The rates shall be deemed inclusive of such incidental charges.

26. The Contractors shall execute all works at their own cost for diversion of water away from the plot as per site requirements to have full satisfaction of Engineer and no additional payment will be made on this account.

27. The Engineer reserves the right to select all materials and the type, grade, heating capacity and quantity of proportion of any or all materials as required for a particular work. The decision of Engineer in this respect shall be final and binding on the Contractor. The rejects on materials must be carted at his own cost. If the rejected materials are not removed within one month of its rejection the materials will become the property of the Employer or will be removed at Contractors cost.




28. ATTENDANCE AT MEETINGS

The Contractor shall attend and shall cause his Sub-Contractors to attend any or all meetings when called by the Employer or the Engineer or his Representative to discuss progress of the work and other matters related to the work and the Contract, without any compensation from the Employer. a). The Contractor shall bear all expenses of the Employer and his agents and

representatives and the Engineer, his agents and representatives if requested by the Contractor for any meetings, instructions and approvals away from the Site.

b). The proceedings of the meetings shall be recorded by the Engineer which shall be

circulated to all the participants including those of the Contractor. All decisions taken in the meetings shall be binding on the Contractor and shall form part of the Contract.

29. DOCUMENTS NOT TO BE ALTERED OR MUTILATED

No alteration or mutilation (other than filling in all the blanks intended to be filled in) shall be made in the form of Bid or in any of the documents attached to it. Any comments which it is desired to make shall not be placed on any of the documents attached hereto, but shall take the form of a separate statement which shall be as brief as possible and referenced to items, clauses and pages of the annexed documents.

Such statements shall not qualify the acceptance of the Bid based upon a proposed change or changes in the annexed documents, nor shall be binding upon the Employer in any way in making the award. Alterations of already written prices must be signed in the place of alteration by the Bidder or his legally authorised representative.

30. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS OR ENGINEER

In carrying out any of the provisions of these specifications or in exercising any power of authority granted to them by or within the scope of the Contract, there shall be no liability upon the Employer or his authorized representatives or the Engineer or his authorized representatives their personally or in their official capacity, it being understood that in all matters they act solely as agents and representatives of the Employer.

31. ACCESS AND EXISTING ROADS

If the Contractor finds it necessary or elects to use existing roads, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and obtain all permits from the relevant departments for travel over and use of such roads. The Contractor shall observe all rules regulations of the concerned department regarding the use of said roads. The cost of maintaining all necessary safety measures and temporary structures and making any necessary repairs, replacements or similar operations and all or any other costs required by reason of his use of such roads shall be borne by the Contractor and the Contractor shall save harmless and indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims, demands proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of or in relation to any such operation or interference.

32. FIRST AID FACILITIES

The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate First Aid Facilities at all times, convenient to the Site to the approval of the Employer.




33. FINAL HAND-OVER

At the end of the Period of Maintenance stipulated in the contract, the Employer on application of the Contractor, shall decide the members of the final hand over committee and announce the same to the Contractor. The committee, after inspection of Work, if satisfied that there are no deficiencies or defects due to work of the Contractor shall certify the final hand-over, and the Employer will then issue a final Certificate of Completion of Work within thirty (30) calendar days thereafter.

34. EMPLOYER AND ENGINEER NOT PERSONALLY LIABLE

No member or officer of the Government or the Employer or the Employer's Representative or the Engineer or his representatives or any one of their respective staffs or their employees shall be in anyway personally bound or liable for the acts or obligations of the contractor under the contract or answerable for any default or omission in the observance or performance of any of the acts, matters or things which are herein, contained.

35. PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

The contractor shall furnish to the Employer and to the Engineer every two weeks at least six photographs to clearly show the progress of construction. The photographs shall be submitted in glossy prints 20 cm x 20 cm. Each print shall be marked on the back with the date and serial number. There shall be no writing, lettering or marking on the face of the photographs. The set of photographs of the Engineer should accompany respective negatives.

36. SITE ORDER BOOK

The Contractor shall maintain site order book {of triplicate leaves} at the Site, for taking down instructions of the Engineer and/ or the Employers, without any obligation and charges to the Employer / Engineer.

37. BAR BENDING SCHEDULES

The contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of all bar bending schedules at his own cost which shall be based on structural drawings supplied by the Engineer and shall get them approved before the actual execution of work.

38. PROGRESS REPORT

The Contractor shall, during the execution of the work, submit to the Employer (3 copies) and ENGINEER (2 copies) so as to reach them in the first week of every calendar month, a report on the actual progress of the works attained by him during the preceding month fully supported with colour photographs of (5”x7”) size, at least 15, depicting the complete stages of the works. Each photograph should be properly pasted on an A-4 size paper, indicating the location and other relevant information of the area photographed. The report will be submitted on the standard format to be supplied later on. In case the Supervision Engineer is different from the Design Engineer, one copy each of photographs should be sent to both the Engineer.

The set of photographs for the Design Engineer should be submitted with respective negatives.

FFFAAAIIISSSAAALLLAAABBBAAADDD IIINNNDDDUUUSSSTTTRRRIIIAAALLL EEESSSTTTAAATTTEEE

DDDEEEVVVEEELLLOOOPPPMMMEEENNNTTT &&& MMMAAANNNAAAGGGEEEMMMEEENNNTTT CCCOOOMMMPPPAAANNNYYY

IIINNNFFFRRRAAASSSTTTRRRUUUCCCTTTUUURRREEE DDDEEEVVVEEELLLOOOPPPMMMEEENNNTTT WWWOOORRRKKKSSS FFFOOORRR MMM333 IIINNNDDDUUUSSSTTTRRRIIIAAALLL CCCIIITTTYYY FFFAAAIIISSSAAALLLAAABBBAAADDD

PPPRRROOOJJJEEECCCTTT:::

IIINNNFFFRRRAAASSSTTTRRRUUUCCCTTTUUURRREEE DDDEEEVVVEEELLLOOOPPPMMMEEENNNTTT WWWOOOKKKSSS OOOFFF PPPHHHAAASSSEEE---IIIIII---AAA (((IIINNNCCCLLLUUUDDDIIINNNGGG CCCOOONNNSSSTTTRRRUUUCCCTTTIIIOOONNN OOOFFF UUUGGG,,, OOOHHH TTTAAANNNKKK,,, WWWSSS AAANNNDDD

SSSEEEWWWEEERRRAAAGGGEEE SSSYYYSSSTTTEEEMMM)))

NNNAAAMMMEEE OOOFFF WWWOOORRRKKK:::

AAATTT MMM---333 IIINNNDDDUUUSSSTTTRRRIIIAAALLL CCCIIITTTYYY,,, NNNEEEAAARRR SSSAAAHHHIIIAAANNNWWWAAALLLAAA IIINNNTTTEEERRRCCCHHHAAANNNGGGEEE MMM---333 MMMOOOTTTOOORRRWWWAAAYYY,,, FFFAAAIIISSSAAALLLAAABBBAAADDD

CCCOOONNNTTTRRRAAACCCTTT NNNOOO... FFFIIICCC---000444111

BBBIIIDDDDDDIIINNNGGG DDDOOOCCCUUUMMMEEENNNTTTSSS (((VVVOOOLLLUUUMMMEEE --- IIIIII)))

SS PP EECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS -- TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PP RROOVVIISS IIOONNSS &&

BBIIDDDDIINNGG DDRRAAWWIINNGGSS

AAUUGGUUSSTT 22001199

CCOONNSSUULLTTAANNTT

CCoonnssuullttiinngg EEnnggiinneeeerriinngg -- AArrcchhiitteeccttss -- PPllaannnneerrss OOSSMMAANNII && CCOOMMPPAANNYY ((PPVVTT..)) LLTTDD..

OOssmmaannii HHoouussee,, 224455//22--KK,, BBlloocckk--66,, PPEECCHHSS,, KKaarraacchhii TTeell:: ((9922--2211)) 3344553366000077--0088,, 3344554466554411--4422,, FFaaxx:: ((9922--2211)) 3344553344669911

EE--mmaaiill:: ooccll--kkhhii@@oossmmaannii..ccoomm WWeebb:: wwwwww..oossmmaannii..ccoomm

Issued to M/s: __________________

Date : _________________________

Issued By : _____________________

Osmani & Co. (Pvt.) Ltd. FIEDMC Consulting Engineers – Architects - Planners

Table of Content

FFFAAAIIISSSAAALLLAAABBBAAADDD IIINNNDDDUUUSSSTTTRRRIIIAAALLL EEESSSTTTAAATTTEEE DDDEEEVVVEEELLLOOOPPPMMMEEENNNTTT &&& MMMAAANNNAAAGGGEEEMMMEEENNNTTT CCCOOOMMMPPPAAANNNYYY

TTTAAABBBLLLEEE OOOFFF CCCOOONNNTTTEEENNNTTT

S.

No. Description

VOLUME - I 1. INVITATION TO BIDDERS

2. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

3. BIDDING DATA 4. LETTER OF TECHNICAL BID/ PRICE BID AND APPENDICES TO BID 5. FORMS

• BID SECURITY

• FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY

• FORM OF CONTRACT AGREEMENT

• FORM OF MOBILIZATION ADVANCE GUARANTEE/ BOND

• INDEMNITY BOND FOR SECURED ADVANCE AGAINST MATERIAL BROUGHT AT SITE

6. PART I - GENERAL CONDITIONS

7. PART II - CONDITIONS OF PARTICULAR APPLICATION 8. SPECIFICATIONS - SPECIAL PROVISIONS

VOLUME - II

1. SPECIFICATIONS - TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

2. BIDDING DRAWINGS

SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN –– TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPRROOVVIISSIIOONN


Specifications - Technical Provisions Faisalabad Industrial Estate Development & Management Co.

TP Page Page i

SPECIFICATIONS - TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

All items to conform with Government of Punjab C & W Department latest specifications and their sub-sequent amendments, except where additional specifications are provided in the section, which will supersede the Government of Punjab C & W Specifications, with the following additional stipulation and NHA latest specifications for item not covered in Punjab PWD Specifications: - i) No payment for extra lead and lift will be made.

ii) The rates being quoted by the Contractor shall include dewatering if required. iii) Notwithstanding any item of BOQ, NO LEAD or LIFT for supply of any material/ disposal

of any item/ execution of any work would be given to the Contractor. The Contractor is supposed to investigates the source of all materials and ascertain their cost of cartage (including all incidental costs) which would be considered incorporated in the items rates.

iv) RCC pipes in items to conform to ASTM Specifications C-76. v) Any item (i) described in the Bill of Quantities or relevant Specifications but not shown

on the Drawings, or (ii) shown on the Drawings but not described in the Bill of Quantities or relevant Specifications, shall be of like effect as it has been shown and mentioned in both. Similarly, if any item which is neither shown on the drawing not mentioned in the Bill of Quantities or Specification but is a pre-condition to carryout any item of the contract, it shall be considered to be included in the contract price, distributed among the rates and prices entered for the related items of works. The decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding on the Contractor, unless before the deadline for submission of Bids, such discrepancies are clarified by the Design Consultant as a result of an inquiry from bidders or on the initiative of the Design Consultant/ Employer. The clarification in either case would be sent to all bidders as an Addendum. However it shall be clearly understood that no extra cost whatsoever shall be paid in case such discrepancies if any, exist in the Bid documents.

vi) All diameters of pipes and fittings (MS, uPVC, RCC, FC etc.) as mentioned in BOQs shall be minimum clear inner diameters.

vii) In case of PE Pipe the diameter given in the BOQ shall refer to outer diameter.

viii) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract Documents, Employer/ Engineer reserves the right to ask for justification/ rate analysis from the contractor of any rate which in the opinion of the Employer/ Engineer is abnormally high or low. Furthermore, the quoted rates, once accepted will be valid only for the quantities mentioned in the BOQ with a variation of ±15%. For any further variation in quantities (due to any reasons whatsoever and including but not limited to variation of work, additional work etc.), the Employer/ Engineer reserves the rights to reduce any abnormally high rate quoted by the contractor as per Clause 52.2 of the contract.


FIEDMC Technical Specifications

TOC

TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS

TTAABBLLEE OOFF CCOONNTTEENNTT

S. No. Description

General Items for Roads, WS, Sewerage Works, Tubewell & UG Tank

1. EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 2. EARTHWORK EXCAVATION

3. CONCRETE

4. STEEL REINFORCEMENT

5. BRICK MASONRY

6. CEMENT PLASTER

7. PAINTING

8. BITUMEN COATING

9. EXPANSION JOINTS FOR DRAIN

ROAD WORKS

1. CLEARING AND GRUBBING

2. COMPACTION OF NATURAL GROUND

3. EXCAVATION OF UNSUITABLE OR SURPLUS MATERIAL

4. FORMATION OF EMBANKMENT

5. SUBGRADE PREPARATION

6. IMPROVED SUBGRADE

7. GRANULAR SUBBASE

8. AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

9. SURFACE TREATMENT

10. PRIME COAT

11. ASPHALT CONCRETE WEARING COURSE - PLANT MIX



TOC

12. TRAFFIC ROAD SIGNS

13. PAVEMENT MARKING

14. PAVEMENT STUDS

15. PRECASE CEMENT CONCRETE ROAD KERB BLOCK

16. INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVING BLOCK

SEWERAGE SYSTEM

1. GRP PIPES, PIPE LAYING AND APPURTENANCES

WATER SUPPLY NETWORK

1. POLYETHYLENE PIPE, PIPE LAYING AND APPURTENANCES

2. VALVES

3. MANHOLES AND MANHOLE COVER & FRAME ELECTRICAL WORKS

GGEENNEERRAALL IITTEEMMSS FFOORR

RROOAADD,, WWSS,, SSEEWWEERRAAGGEE,, TTUUBBEEWWEELLLL && UUGG TTAANNKK WWOORRKKSS



TP - General Items Page 1 of 64

1. SCOPE

EEXXCCAAVVAATTIIOONN,, TTRREENNCCHHIINNGG AANNDD BBAACCKKFFIILLLLIINNGG

The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with excavation, trenching and back-filling for sewer and water supply lines and all other structures including all incidental works necessary for excavation to the required depth and dimensions in accordance with the applicable drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. The work shall be carried out in complete conformity with the specifications, set-forth hereunder.

2. SETTING OUT

Lines and levels will be set out by the Contractor who shall be responsible for maintaining all stakes and witness points set-up by the Engineer for the execution of work in strict accordance with them.

3. CLEARING AND GRUBBING

The sites of all excavations shall be cleared of all shrubs, plants, bushes, large roots, rubbish and other objectionable materials. All such materials shall be removed from site of work or otherwise disposed off at no extra cost in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. All trees and shrubbery that are designated by the Engineer to remain shall be adequately protected and preserved in an approved manner.

4. EXCAVATION 4.1 General

The contractor shall remove the whole of the vegetation, top soil, concrete, flagging, paving, curbing, road metalling and other materials from the site of any excavation and shall keep separately and preserve the same for re-use where applicable. The ground shall be excavated for the permanent and temporary works to the required depths, width and levels so that the dimensions of the permanent work shall not be less than as shown on the Drawings, or as may be directed. All rubbish, filth and matter of an offensive nature taken out of any excavation shall be disposed off at once and not left on the surface within the site. All excavation of whatever substance encountered shall be performed to the depths indicated or as otherwise specified. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner at a sufficient distance from the banks of the excavation to avoid overloading and to prevent sides from caving. All excavated material unsuitable or not required for backfill shall be removed and wasted at a location approved by the Engineer. Grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations, and any water accumulated therein shall be removed by pumping or by other approved methods. Unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer, excavation shall be open cut.

4.2 Earth Excavation for Sewers

Unless otherwise directed or permitted by the Engineer not more than 500 ft of any trench in advance of the end of the pipeline already laid shall be opened at any time. Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and depths shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer or in such a position or to such dimensions and depths as shall allow for the proper construction of the relevant structure or construction or proper excavation of the relevant operation. For excavation the width of trench allowable for payment shall be the external diameter of pipes plus 12 inches on both sides, for pipes up to 15 inches diameter. For diameters exceeding 15 inches, the width of trenches shall be external diameter plus 18 inches on both sides. For depth exceeding 5 feet slope allowance of 1.5 inch per foot (in depth for each side of the trenches) shall be made in addition to the width specified to the full depth of trenches. The Contractor shall make allowance for the additional excavation required for making joints and, where necessary, for concrete bedding or surround in the price tendered for trench excavation. These shall not be separately measured or paid.




The banks of the pipe trench shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be dug after the trench bottom has been prepared. The pipe, except for joints, shall rest on the prepared bottom for its full length. Bell holes and depressions shall be only of such length, depth, and width as required for properly making the particular type of joints stones shall be removed to avoid point bearing. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable material that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe as determined by the Engineer is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be removed to the depth required and the trench backfilled to the proper grade with coarse sand, or other suitable approved granular material. Such replacement of unsuitable material will be paid for at the contract unit price for that item of work as shall be agreed upon, before execution of this work, with the Owner. Where the Contractor has excavated to depths in excess of the requirements, from his neglect or from causes within his control, he shall refill and compact the excess excavation with suitable material approved by the Engineer, up to corrected level, at his own expense. Excavation for appurtenances shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches but not more than 24 inches between the outer surface and the embankment or timber that may be used to hold and protect the banks. Any over-depth excavation below such appurtenances that has' not been directed by the Engineer, will be considered un-authorized and shall be refilled with compacted sand, gravel or concrete, as directed by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Employer.

4.3 Earth Excavation for Water Supply Lines

For excavation the width of trench allowable for payment shall be the external diameter of pipes plus 18” for pipes up to 12” diameter. For depth exceeding 5 feet slope allowance of 1.5 inch per foot (in depth for each side of the trenches) shall be made in addition to the width specified to the full depth of trenches. The Contractor shall make allowance for the additional excavation required for making joints and, where necessary, for concrete bedding or surround in the price tendered for trench excavation. These shall not be separately measured or paid.

4.4 Excavations For Trenches / Drains

Unless otherwise directed or permitted by the Engineer any trench/ drain in advance of the end of the pipeline already laid shall be opened at any time. Trenches/ Drains shall be excavated to the dimensions and depths shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer or in such a position or to such dimensions and depths as shall allow for the relevant operation. Excavation shall be carried out to give ample space for making joints and, where necessary, for concrete bedding or surround. For trench width, the dimension (12 inches + 1.5 dia of pile (inch) will be followed, but in no case shall be less than 18”. The banks of the pipe trench shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be dug after the trench bottom has been prepared. The pipe, except for joints, shall rest on the prepared bottom for its full length. Bell holes and depressions shall be only of such length, depth, and width as required for properly making the particular type of joints. Stones shall be removed to avoid point bearing. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable material that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe as determined by the Engineer is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be removed to the depth required and the trench backfilled to the proper grade with coarse sand, or other suitable approved granular material. Such replacement of unsuitable material will be paid for at the contract unit price for that item of work as shall be agreed upon, before execution of this work, with the Owner. Where the Contractor has excavated to depths in excess of the requirements, from his neglect or from causes within his control, he shall refill and compact the excess excavation with suitable material approved by the Engineer, upto corrected level, at his own expense. Excavation for appurtenances shall be sufficient to leave atleast 12 inches but not more than 24 inches between the outer surface and the embankment or timber that may be used to hold and protect the banks. Any over-depth excavation below such appurtenances that has not been directed by the Engineer will be considered un-authorised and shall be refilled with compacted sand, gravel or concrete, as directed by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Employer.




4.5 Excavations for Reservoirs / Tanks and Foundations

The Contractor shall excavate tanks/ reservoirs and foundations to the lines and levels shown in the Drawings. As for as is practicable excavation shall be carried out in uniform layers over the full areas. The excavation shall be kept clear of water at all times. Bulk excavation may be carried out by machine or other approved methods to within 6 inches of the final surface. The final 6 inches of excavation shall be carefully carried out by hand. Embankment slopes shall be trimmed to the side slopes shown in the Drawings. For depth exceeding 5 feet slope allowance of 1.5 inch per foot (in depth for each side of the trenches) shall be made in addition to the width specified to the full depth of trenches.

4.6 For Pipelines

a) The excavation shall be carried out to the required alignment, levels, slopes or gradients as per drawings or described in the specifications and bill of quantities taking into account bedding required below pipes or to such other dimensions and slopes as the Engineer may direct in writing to facilitate laying of pipes for sewerage network (both shallow and deep). The Contractor shall provide masonry pillars of suitable size and fix temporary benchmarks at intervals to be determined by the Engineer or his representative(s). No trench excavations shall be commenced without prior approval of the Engineer. Excavation shall proceed at the same rate as laying, jointing, testing and backfilling.

b) The quantity of excavation shall be the volume of materials removed from below the original

surface of the ground to the limits of excavation specified or shown on the drawings. For soft and unstable soils, the Contractor shall provide all necessary site supports including timbering or sheet piling to support the sides of trenches. The cost of supply of all material, plant and labour that may be necessary for site clearance, excavation, over break, timbering, sheet piling, shoring, strutting, refilling, watering and ramming, etc., shall be included in the Contract Rates for excavation. In all cases, the quantity of excavation measured shall be the in- site volume of the undisturbed material with in allowable limits mentioned in the specification. In case sides or ends of any excavation collapse under self-weight or due to any other reason, the contractor shall at his own cost remove all disturbed material. Should sides or ends of any excavation give way, the contractor shall at his own cost remove all disturbed material. No additional payment due to side slopes of pipe trenches if carried out by Contractor shall be allowable.

c) Where the Contractor has excavated to depths in excess of the requirements, he shall refill and

compact the excess excavation with 1:4:8 cement concrete upto the correct level at his own expense. Any excavation done in excess of specified width due to any reason, what so ever shall not be payable.

d) For excavation above ground water table, the width of the trench shall be equal to the external

diameter of the pipe plus 18’’dia. not exceeding 12’’ dia. For sewers of internal diameter exceeding 12’’ dia. The width of trench payable shall be equal to external diameter of pipe plus 30’’ dia. The depth shall be as per longitudinal section of sewers and shall include for sewer bedding, to give minimum 30’’of the earth cushion over the pipe or to the depth of existing pipe where required to be connected.

e) For excavation below ground water table up to a depth of 10ft, the width of trench allowable for

payment shall be the external diameter of pipes plus 24’’ for pipes up to 12’’ diameter. For diameters exceeding 12’’, the width of trenches shall be external diameter plus 3ft.

f) For excavation below ground water table and depths exceeding 10ft, the width of trench

allowable for payment shall be the external diameter of pipe plus 3’-6’’. g) Additional excavation will be necessary at all manholes, valve chambers and pipe joints to

facilitate the making of joint. Additional excavation for construction of manholes, valve chambers and joint holes shall be of such dimensions, so as to give clear working space. The Contractor shall make allowance for the additional excavation required for the manholes and valve chambers in the price tendered for trench excavation. These shall not be separately measured or paid.

h) The length of the trench shall be measured along the centre line of the trench and the depth shall be measured vertically from original ground levels to the average bed level.




i) The maximum length of trench to be left open shall be the length between manholes or not more than 160ft of jointed pipe line, whichever is the lesser, and shall remain visible for the purpose of inspection and testing. In exceptional circumstances where the nature of the ground or locality renders it necessary to reduce this distance, the contractor shall inform the Engineer, immediately. In the case of pressure pipelines, partial backfilling shall be carried out before testing.

j) Where pipes are laid through rock or extra hard strata, the trench shall be excavated to depths below the barrel of the pipes specified in "Schedule for pipe bedding & surrounds". The space below the pipe barrel shall be refilled with specified granular bedding material.

4.7 Earth Excavation for Foundation, Footing etc.

The foundations, footings, etc. shall be taken out to the exact width and depth shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The bottom of the trench shall be at one uniform level throughout unless the site is on a slopping ground or if there is dip in the hard sub-soil on which the foundation is to rest, bottom be stepped for economy. The top surface of every stepped length shall also be horizontal. The sides of the trench shall be left plumb, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The foundation after being excavated shall be inspected and passed by the Engineer before any building work is commenced on it. If suitable stratum is not found at the depth specified, the contractor will obtain sanction in writing from Engineer before proceeding further with the excavation.

4.8 Earth Excavation for Structures

All excavation under this contract, which is not included under the classification of excavation in Trenches shall be classified and paid for as excavation for structures.

The Contractor shall provide adequate timbering or shoring for excavations. Should the sides and ends of any excavations give way the contractor shall, at no extra cost, removal all disturbed ground. Any excavation carried outside the limits shown on drawings and specified herein as the payment limits, shall not be treated as excavated and shall not be paid for. When foundation level is reached, the Engineer’s Representative will inspect the exposed ground and give directions as to what further excavation if any, he considers necessary. The excavation should be done in such a manner, as to ensure that the work rests on a solid and perfectly clean foundation. If the Contractor allows any portion of such foundations the deteriorate due to exposure, he shall make good the foundations to the satisfaction of the Engineer without extra cost.

4.9 Trial / Test Pits

The Contractor may be required to excavate trial pits and trial trenches upto about 10% of the total quantity of excavation specified in the contract at appropriate locations to determine the actual level of the existing water table, and position of existing conduits, water mains, gas mains, cable ducts and sewers etc. This excavation work shall be done carefully with due precaution, so as not to damage any existing services. The Contractor may be precluded from carrying out any permanent work until this information is obtained and may have to adopt his programme in accordance with the information so obtained by the Contractor. Trial test pits will be required to be dug before or during the execution of work at locations directed by the Engineer for determining the condition of soil, checking the location of utility services water levels etc. The size of individual trial pits may be kept 5ft x 5ft up to the required depth. The dimensions may be varied depending upon the site condition and as per instruction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain prior permission from Engineer in writing before start of work on trial pits. No separate payment shall be made for trail pits required to be dug by the Contractor. The cost incurred by the Contractor on the trial / test pits shall be deemed to be included by the Contractor in his rates for excavation.

4.10 Classification of Soils

Excavation shall include the removal of all materials in all kinds of soils or stratas of every name and nature. The sub- soil in the project area mostly comprises of clay with fine sand and silt and high




sub-soil water level. A considerable amount of dewatering and supports for the sides of excavation will be essential including bore holes, well point system and side supports comprising of shuttering, bracing, strutting and sheet piling. However the Contractor shall make his own assessment after detailed study of the area and digging the required trial / test pits as required in this regard. No claim shall be allowed on account of any omission or error in such data trial / test pits. If rock is encountered it shall be removed carefully and without excessive noise and vibration. Blasting shall not be allowable. The quantities of earthwork for each category of excavation i.e. soil, and rocks are provisional. The Engineer shall do the classification of soil during actual excavation. In case the Contractor meets rock during the excavation, the contractor shall request the Engineer in writing for a joint inspection for classification of soil. The Engineer shall visit the site during excavation and give his opinion in writing about classification of soil for the particular site or alignment. The excavation payable shall be limited to the dimensions and elevations as indicated on the drawings. Foundations on made up ground shall be taken down to nascent soil as per direction and approval of the Engineer. Excavation shall extend to a sufficient distance away from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal of forms, installation of services and for inspection. No payment shall be made for this extra excavation. The Contractor's rate for excavation shall be deemed to include for such extra excavation. In the event of any excavation being carried out deeper than specified, the same shall be filled in by the Contractor at his own cost to the required level with lean concrete if beneath footing or with proper compacted local river sand if beneath slab.

4.11 Mechanical Diggers and Other Appliances

The Contractor shall not use mechanical excavation in gardens or plantation areas unless approval in writing has been obtained from owners and tenants. In addition to the above, if the Engineer shall reasonable consider it unsuitable that any excavator, mechanical digger or other machine or appliances employed, or proposed to be employed by the contractor should not be used or that any such machine or appliance as aforesaid is unsuitable for use on the works or on any part of the works, the Engineer may order the Contractor not to use and / or to immediately remove from the works such machine or appliance.

5. PRECAUTIONARY AND REMEDIAL MEASURES

5.1 Protection of Existing Facilities and Structures The Contractor shall take every necessary precaution not to endanger the safety, occupation or operation of any property, structures, installations or services in the vicinity of his operations and shall observe any restrictions imposed by authority concerned / Engineer to this end. Should any such property, structures, installations or services be endangered or damaged as a result of the Contractor's operations, he shall immediately report any such danger or damage to the Engineer's Representative and any authority concerned and shall forthwith undertake remedial measures to the satisfaction of the Engineer or the appropriate authority.

5.2 Planking and Strutting

The Contractor shall provide, if required, at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer all times support effectively the sides of the pipe trenches and other excavation by suitable timbering, sheet piling, sheeting, bracing, strutting etc. Where required the contractor shall use close timbering in all loose or sandy or unstable stratas both above or below ground level, if found necessary by the Engineer and accord approval. It is intend that all timbering and side supports for sewer trenches shall be removed as the work proceeds. The Contractor shall ensure that the removal of timbering and side supports is done gradually and carefully to avoid any damage to existing or new structures, roads, pavements or any other private or public property. All timbering, sheeting and their supports shall be of adequate strength and dimension and fully braced and strutted so that no collapse, subsidence or any damage to public or private property shall take place. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the sufficiency of all timbering, sheet piling and their supports to be used and all damages to persons or property resulting from the improper quality, strength, placing, maintaining or removal of the same shall be payable by him under all circumstances.




In removing timbering, shoring and strutting and all other supports from excavation and trenches etc., special care shall be taken to avoid bringing pressure to beat on any concrete or other work until it has hardened sufficiently to resist such pressure.

5.3 Removal of Water

The Contractor shall build all drains and do ditching, pumping and all other work necessary to keep the excavation clear of sewage, storm water and water from any source during the progress of the work and until the finished work is safe from injury. All water pumped or drained from the work shall be disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and necessary precautions against flooding shall be taken. The contractor should submit the Methodology of dewatering for approval. It may also be noted that any approval of the methodology will not relieve the contractor from any of his responsibilities / obligations. The Contractor shall be required to arrange well point equipment and / or adequate number of tube wells or both and pumping machinery for dewatering and lowering the existing water table for construction purposes in the areas where sub- soil water or any sewage and water from any other sources are encountered. The system shall be capable of working non-stop 24 hours a day for the entire duration of the work without break during excavation, and for laying of sewer, pipes and bedding, construction of manhole, construction of structures, testing of sewers/ pipes and backfilling. The system of dewatering proposed to be adopted shall be submitted by the contractor with sufficient details along with the tender for approval of the Engineer. The Contractor is required to visit the site before submitting his tender and investigate the available mean of disposal of pumped water including laying of temporary pipeline for transmission of water during the period of excavation providing bedding, laying & jointing of sewer, pipes and construction of any structure up to ground level. The cost of all such works required for pumping and disposal of water from trenches/ pits shall be considered to be included in the BOQ rates for excavation. No extra cost whatsoever shall be payable to the Contractor.

5.4 Maintenance of Excavation

All excavation shall be properly maintained with while they are opened land exposed. Sufficient suitable barricades, warning lights, flood lights, signs, and similar items shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage due to his negligence.

5.5 Surplus Materials

All surplus materials shall be disposed off at locations approved by the Engineer. The disposal of surplus material shall not interfere with other works and shall not damage or spoil other material. When it is necessary to haul earth or rock material over street or pavement, the Contractor shall prevent such materials from falling on the street or pavement.

5.6 Cutting Pavement

In cutting or breaking street surfacing, the Contractor shall not use equipment which will damage the adjacent pavement. Existing paved surface shall be cut back beyond the edge of trenches to form neat square cuts. The road ballast and other materials shall be placed on one side and shall be preserved for re-installment when the trench is filled. Wherever necessary or required for the convenience of the public or individual residents, at street crossings and at private driveways, the Contractor shall provide suitable temporary bridges over unfilled excavations. All such bridges shall be maintained in service until backfilling has been completed. The Contractor shall keep the road crossings manned 24 hours per day. During night time, enough red lights shall be provided to warn traffic. If detour is necessary, the Contractor shall make proper detour for the traffic and shall install- signs 3 ft x 4 ft in size indicating the detour.

6. TIMBERING SHORING & BRACING 6.1. General

As the sub-soil stratas are mostly clayey silt and fine sand with high ground water table, slush is likely to be formed if adequate dewatering is not done, and the sides are likely to collapse if not adequately supported. The Contractor shall provide where required all shoring, supports etc., to the sides of excavation to prevent sliding or any movement. The timbering, shoring and bracing shall be of adequate strength to with stand the pressure encountered and the Contractor shall be soley




responsible for the losses due to collapse or failure of shuttering, bracing, shoring etc. Where formation of slush is unavoidable, the Contractor shall provide steel piling of adequate size and strength. The driving of sheet piling shall continue simultaneously as the work of excavation proceeds. No payment for side support including shoring, shuttering or bracing or sheet piling shall be made. The Contractor's rate for excavation shall be deemed to include the cost of providing and removing side supports timbering, sheet piling, shoring, strutting and bracing with all connected operations. When directed by the Engineer, the contractor shall produce the calculations for the structural stability of any temporary works and method statement of proposed construction, but approval shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibility for adequately supporting the sides of any excavation. In Subsoil conditions comprising sands, gravels, silts and soft clay materials full close sheeting of steel or timber shall be provided. Excavation support must be considered for depths of vertical sides exceeding 1200 mm. Half sheeting or quarter sheeting spacing shall be used only with the specific agreement of the Engineer. The contractor's Method statement shall detail such proposal in order that the Engineer may signify his approval or otherwise advise the contractor before construction commences.

6.2. For Pipe Line Trenches

A considerable amount of side supports is expected to be required in view of the unstable sub-soil strata likely to be met with. The clayey silt and fine sand with sub-soil water will have tendency to form slush which will need special measures including sheet pile. The work of driving sheet piling where required will continue simultaneously with excavation. The Contractor shall at all times support effectively the sides of the pipe trenches and other excavation by suitable timbering, sheet piling, sheeting, bracing, strutting etc. Where required the contractor shall use close timbering in all loose or sandy or unstable stratas either above or below ground level, if found necessary by the Engineer and accord approval. It is intended that all timbering and side supports for sewer trenches shall be removed as the work proceeds. The Contractor shall ensure that the removal of timbering and side supports is done gradually and carefully to avoid any damage to existing or new structures, roads, pavements or any other private or public property. All timbering, sheeting and their supports shall be of adequate strength and dimension and fully braced and strutted so that no collapse, subsidence or any damage to public or private property shall take place. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the sufficiency of all timbering, sheet piling and their supports to be used and all damages to persons or property resulting from the improper quality, strength, placing, maintaining or removal of the same shall be payable by him under all circumstances.

7. PUMPING, BAILING AND DEWATERING

The work covered by this section of Specifications consists of furnishing all plants, labour, materials, equipments and appliances for performing all operations for Pumping, Bailing, Dewatering and Draining water from the areas, excavated for trenches for sewers and construction of manholes, and all other works in this contract in accordance with this section of Specifications, and subject to terms and conditions of the contract. a) The Contractor shall at all times during the progress of work remove any water which may

accumulate, inflow or be found in the trenches and other excavations made under the contract, and shall keep them entirely free from water at all times while excavating, providing sewer bedding, laying of sewers or construction of manholes etc.

b) The water table shall be established through trial pits and joint inspection of Engineer and

Contractor. In case of any dispute the Engineer shall decide the issue in writing which shall be final and binding upon the contractor. The earthwork below water table shall be considered as wet. The methods employed in all cases shall be agreed and approved by the Engineer. If any slush is formed this shall be removed and the space filled with lean concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer at Contractor's own cost.

c) The Contractor shall keep excavations free from water at all time and provide adequate

pumping plant including special dewatering equipment and means of disposing off the pumped water. The Contractor shall ensure to keep away un-desired water clear of excavation for




permanent works and provide all necessary plant and equipment for dealing with any subsoil condition that may be encountered.

d) If necessary for the construction of the works, the contractor shall lay sub-drain where directed

to convey the water to pumping sumps. The sub-drains shall be laid unjointed with the invert not less than 300 mm below formation level of the permanent works and shall be covered with gravel to formation level.

e) The Contractor shall be required to arrange well point equipment and / or adequate number of

tube wells or both and pumping machinery for dewatering and lowering the existing water table for construction purposes in the areas where sub- soil water or any sewage and water from any other sources are encountered. The system shall be capable of working non-stop 24 hours a day for the entire duration of the work without break during excavation and for laying of sewer pipes and sewer bedding, construction of manhole, testing of sewers and backfilling. The system of dewatering proposed to be adopted shall be submitted by the contractor with sufficient details alongwith the tender for approval of the Engineer. The Contractor is required to visit the site before submitting his tender and investigate the available mean of disposal of pumped water including laying of temporary pipeline for transmission of water during the period of excavation providing bedding, laying and jointing of sewer pipes. The cost of all such works required for pumping and disposal of water from trenches shall be considered to be included in the BOQ rates for bailing and pumping of subsoil water or any other water from trenches. No extra cost whatsoever shall be payable to the Contractor.

f) Water pumped from the trenches shall be disposed off by the Contractor in a manner that will

neither cause injury to the public health nor damage to the existing structures or the works completed or in progress or to the surface of any roads or streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the same by the public.

g) The Contractor shall be held fully and wholly responsible for all damages done to building and

other structures or property resulting from his dewatering, pumping and all other connected operations. If he fails to make good or to pay the expenses of making good damages with all practicable dispatch, the Engineer shall be at liberty to get the work done by other means or to pay the cost of the said damages by deducting the amount from any money that may be or become due to the Contractor or may recover the same from the Contractor from his dues, as decided and found feasible by Engineer, the decision of Engineer will be final.

h) The Contractor shall be paid on the basis of item rate quoted by him for pumping, Bailing and

dewatering required during all under ground works of, laying of sewer pipes, sewer bedding, construction of manholes etc. The payment shall be made on the basis of volume of earth excavated below ground water table in two parts as under.

i. One-half payment for dewatering shall be made after satisfactory completion of excavation

works upto required depth, width below subsoil water level.

ii. Next one-half payment will be payable after the satisfactory completion of the work of, laying of sewer pipes, sewer bedding and construction of manholes and backfilling of sewer trenches.

8. FILL, BACKFILLING AND RESTORING OF GROUND TO ORIGINAL CONDITION 8.1. Fill, where required to raise the sub-grade for concrete slabs, shall be clean, unadulterated local

river sand and shall be free from wood, stones and other debris. Excavated material shall only be used for fill if approved by the Engineer or his representative.

All fill backfilling or earthwork in embankment shall be compacted by mechanical rammer, or other approved equipment in layers not more than 150 mm thick. Each layer shall be uniformly spread and fully compacted and shall have proper moisture content for the required degree of compaction which shall be done by mechanical tampers as approved by Engineer. After completion and final approval of the work of sewers and other construction as shown on drawings and prior to backfilling, forms shall be removed carefully and excavation shall be cleaned of stones and debris. Backfill shall be brought to a suitable elevation above ground to provide for anticipated settlement and shrinkage thereof.




Backfill shall not be placed against walls etc., prior to the water proofing treatment if provided and approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be brought up evenly on each side of walls as far as practicable. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to the wall than distance equal to the height of the backfill above the top of base slab footing. No back filling shall be done before the new structure has been cured for atleast two weeks.

8.2. Backfilling and Restoring of Ground to Original Condition

The back filling of the trench shall be allowed after the sewer pipe has been laid and jointed over the specified bed, inspected, checked, tested and approved by the Engineer. Backfilling of the trenches shall be carried out by filling to depth up to half pipe level. The filling shall then be thoroughly rammed more filling shall be carried out and rammed again until the consolidated filling reaches pipe top level. Only selected, dry materials free from stones or debris shall be used for backfilling, which shall be spread and rammed evenly across the trench. Thereafter, the trench shall be filled in layers not exceeding 150 mm in depth, each layer being properly rammed before the next layer is placed so that 95-100% compaction is obtained as per AASHTO Standard. On completion of backfilling, the Contractor shall level all grounds disturbed by him in the course of the work, spread topsoil where necessary as directed by the Engineer.

8.3. Backfilling for Structures

Backfilling operations for structures shall be performed as part of the Contractor’s work under the payment items for earth excavation and at no cost to the Employer. It would comprise returning and filling the selected excavated material around foundations, and at back of walls etc., upto finished levels shown on the Drawings or as required in layers not exceeding 6 inches, carefully rammed and consolidated (With addition of water if required so as to achieve a minimum relative density of 85 or 90 as directed by the Engineer. No filling shall be made until the concrete foundations and footings etc., have been inspected and approved by the Engineer. Earth to be used for filling must be free of all the organic impurities, debris or any other foreign matter. Earth which contains more than 1% of salts particularly sulphates will not be used in filling.

8.4. Backfilling of Trenches

The trenches shall not be completely backfilled until all required pressure tests are performed and until the lines as installed conform to the requirements of specifications. Where in the opinion of the Engineer, damage is likely to result from withdrawing sheeting, shoring the same shall be left in place and cut off at a level 1 ft. below ground surface. Sheeting left in place shall be paid for at the approved rate for the item of Trenches shall be backfilled to the ground surface with selected excavated material or other material that is suitable for proper compaction. Trenches improperly backfilled shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and compacted to the specified density. The surface shall be restored to its original or better condition. Pavement and base course disturbed by trenching operations shall be replaced.

8.5. Lower Portion of Trench Backfill material shall be deposited in 6 inch maximum thickness layers and compacted with suitable hand tampers to ninety five percent of maximum density until there is a cover of not less than 1 ft. over the pipe. The backfill material in this portion of trench shall consist of sandy clay or other approved materials free from stones and humps.

8.6. Remainder of Trench The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled with material that is free from stones larger than 6 inch in any dimension. Backfill material shall be compacted to 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive soils and 95 percent of maximum density for others.

9. BORROW

In case of non-sufficiency of excavated material and un-suitability of earth for backfilling, conforming to the above specifications, such material shall be brought from the approved source, by the Contractor.




10. GRADING

After the completion of all backfilling operations, the Contractor shall grade the work areas to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Finished grading shall not be done until the installation of all utilities of appurtenances has been completed and tested. Prior to final acceptance, all damage due to settlement shall be repaired by an at the expense of the Contractor.

11. TESTING OF SOIL IN PLACE

The Engineer will make tests using the calibrated sand cone method/core cutter method to determine the density of soil in place. If soil in place fails to meet the specified degree of compaction the areas represented by the failing tests shall be removed, replaced and compacted to the specified density in the manner directed by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner.

12. REMOVAL OF EXCESS AND UNDESIRABLE MATERIALS 12.1 Excess and undesirable material from excavation not required for fill or backfill shall be disposed off,

removed and / or deposited and leveled on the site where directed by the Engineer. Earth suitable and meant for backfill shall be stored at site in a manner not to interfere with the progress of construction works in progress.

12.2 The Contractor shall keep all excavated soil sprinkled with water during the excavation work so as to prevent any dust nuisance.

12.3 Surplus Excavation Debris etc.

All surplus soil arising out of the work shall be carried away to approved site, within a week, deposited and spread as directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall carry out the cutting of existing bituminous road as required for excavation for carrying out the work, to the full depth of hard crest of any existing thickness. The stone metal soling etc. shall be separately stacked along the side of excavation for possible reuse.

13. PROTECTION OF UTILITY SERVICES 13.1 Utility Lines

The Contractor shall take every necessary precaution not to endanger the safety, occupation or operation of any property, structures, installations or services in the vicinity of his operations and shall observe any restrictions imposed by authority concerned / Engineer to this end. Should any such property, structures, installations or services be endangered or damaged as a result of the Contractor's operations, he shall immediately report any such danger or damage to the Engineer's Representative and any authority concerned and shall forthwith undertake remedial measures to the satisfaction of the Engineer or the appropriate authority. When any existing utility lines are encountered within the area of operations, the contractor shall take all necessary measures so that these are neither disturbed nor damaged. The Contractor shall be fully and solely responsible for any damage occurring due to non-providing of adequate measures for the protection of such services. The Contractor shall be required to obtain all necessary permissions from different departments / agencies in writing prior to start of work and maintain the affective liaison for trouble free progress of work(s). The contractor shall pay all fees, charges officially levied by such department / agencies while issuing required permission. The Contractor shall furnish originals of payment receipts alongwith his written request for allowing payments by the Engineer accordingly. In case of restoration to unavoidable damage to any utility service, line or by passing such line the procedure as detailed shall be followed in accordance with rules, regulation, specification or practice as preferred by the concerned department / agency.

13.2 Damage to Surface

If carriage ways, verges or footways in roads, whether paved or unpaved, or gardens, plantations or other surfaces are damaged outside the limits of the excavations due to lack of proper traffic control or moving plant and equipment or other operations of the contractor then such surfaces shall be reinstated by the contractor at his own expenses. The surfaces shall be restored to their original




condition using such materials as may be required whether obtained from the excavated materials or not.

13.3 Maintenance of Traffic

The Contractor shall keep the road crossings manned 24 hours per day. During night time, enough red lights shall be provided to warn traffic. If detour is necessary, the Contractor shall make proper detour for the traffic and shall install- signs 3 ft x 4 ft in size indicating the detour.

When the excavation is in roads, care shall be taken to cause the least inconvenience to traffic. When directed or necessary for the maintenance of traffic, the contractor shall remove from the site all materials as excavated from the trenches and return the same as necessary for refilling after the structures have been completed or the pipes tested and approved.

13.4 Control of Traffic on Roads

The Contractor shall ensure that the flow of traffic over the existing roads and access to properties is maintained at all times during the contract. The flow of traffic is to take place at all time over a reasonable surface, which is to be segregated as far as possible from areas where work is in progress. The contractor shall provide flagmen and signaling equipment as may be necessary to control the traffic to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the appropriate controlling Authority. In the planning and execution of any temporary or permanent works, which may effect the traffic flow and / or access to properties, the contractor shall co-operate closely with the Engineer and the appropriate controlling Authority.

14. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

14.1 Excavation and Backfilling

Measurement and payment for excavation and filling shall be made in accordance with the following provision: a) Method of Measurement The measurement shall be made of the earth acceptably excavated for trenches and structures within the lines and grades shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. b) Basis of Payment Payment for earth excavations for trenches and structures will be made at unit price stated in Bid Schedule of this contract or in applicable Variation Orders.

14.2 Dewatering of Subsoil Water

a) General

The work covered consists in furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in connection with dewatering of subsoil water from excavations for the purpose of construction of sewers and other structures in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. b) Dewatering Methods and Procedures

Dewatering of subsoil water from excavations of trenches and excavations for other structures shall be arranged by an adequate process of bailing and/or pumping.

c) Disposal of Sub-soil Water The water pumped and drained from the work shall be disposed of in a manner satisfactory to Engineer’s Representative. The Contractor shall build all drains and do ditching required in this connection and shall also take necessary precautions against flooding, at no extra cost.




14.3 Measurement and Payment No payment shall be made for the Works involved within the scope of this Section of Specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities or herein. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of other items of the Bills of Quantities.




1. GENERAL

EEAARRTTHHWWOORRKK EEXXCCAAVVAATTIIOONN

The Contractor shall Judge for himself the nature of the ground and shall be fully responsible for ascertaining all necessary information concerning permanent water table, periods of rainfall, flooding of the site and all matters affecting the excavations and foundation work including the need to excavate in rock should this occur. The methods of excavation, which the contractor desires to use, shall be at the sole discretion of the Contractor. The use of explosives may be permitted only with the Engineer’s written consent and permission of police. The contractor shall report to the Engineer when excavations are ready to receive foundation concrete and shall obtain consent before depositing concrete. In the event of excavations being made larger than the sizes directed by the Engineer, the contractor shall fill in the excavated void to the correct profile with mass concrete as described under section “Concrete work” hereinafter, at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. The final 150 mm depth of all excavations shall be taken out by hand unless allowed by the Engineer otherwise and the bottom leveled and rammed immediately prior to placing concrete.

2. NEW AND EXISTING LEVELS Before work commences on the site the Contractor shall carry out survey of the levels of the site and obtain the verification of the Engineer of these levels. Levels shall be taken one grid to be agreed by the Engineer and the Contractor shall produce a drawing of these levels for record purposes.

3. POOR GROUND Loose soil, bad ground or cavities met within any part of the excavations for foundations of structures shall be excavated to a solid formation and filled to foundation level with hardcore or other approved material properly compacted to the Engineers approval, beneath all strip footings the excess excavated material shall be replaced with concrete.

4. SHORING EXCAVATION The Contractor shall, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, shore the sides of excavations for structures, trenches and pits to prevent them from slipping or falling. Should any slips fail or settlement nevertheless occur they should be made good by the Contractor at his own expense with selected fill or with mass concrete as may be directed by the Engineer. In removing shoring from the sides of excavations, care shall be taken to avoid bringing loads on to any concrete until it has hardened sufficiently to carry such loads. Timber or other material used for shoring the sides of excavations shall be removed as the work proceeds except when ordered to be left, in by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, not later than four weeks before commencing any excavation, submit to the Engineer for inspection calculations and working drawings for the proposed scheme for strutting and retaining the sides of the excavations and shall not proceed with the appropriate sections of the works until receipt of the Engineer’s written consent. The receipt of such consent shall not relieve the contractor of any of his duties and responsibilities under the Contract.

5. BACK FILLING Foundation trenches, column bases and the like, are to be backfilled with selected materials, well rammed and consolidated by hand tamping to the satisfaction of the Engineer in layers not exceeding 200 mm thick, and sufficiently watered during the tamping to achieve maximum consolidation.

6. DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL




Surplus excavated material not required for backfilling or for maintaining the made up levels shall be removed from the site to a soil heap approved by the Municipality, by the Contractor.

7. TRIMMING OF SLOPES The slopes of cutting and embankments shall be trimmed by hand or by approved mechanical means to uniform batters is shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. A tolerance of plus or minus 100 mm measured at right angles to the batter will be permitted. Any rock or boulder appearing in the face of a cutting shall be trimmed back to within the tolerance specified above and in addition any such rock or boulder which in the opinion of the Engineer is unstable shall be completely removed and the resulting void filled with compacted material to the approval of the Engineer.

8. KEEPING EXCAVATIONS FROM WATER The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping all excavations free from water from whatever cause arising and shall provide such pumping capacity and other temporary works as may be necessary for this purpose. All rates for excavation to include for all pumping and dewatering necessary to achieve the works. The Contractor shall make good at his own expense any damage that may result from his failure to keep the excavations free from water. Due regard should be given to the stability of the neighboring structures.

9. COMPACTED FILL Compacted fill shall comprise non-plastic granular material or well graded hardcore or “Sabkha” from an approved source. a) The granular fill is to be compacted using a vibrating compactor of not less than 1.5 tons. The fill

to be compacted in layers 150 mm thick. Compaction shall continue until there is no creep of the hardcore ahead of the roller, all voids are filled and the surface is smooth and even. Pressing of the surface with lines is permitted if required. See separate specification for compacting road sub-bases.

b) The Sabkha is to be compacted in a like manner, but is to be rolled wet.

c) The hardcore shall be blended with a 50 mm bed of sand well tamped to produce a dense level

surface.

10. POLYTHENE SHEETING Polythene sheeting where shown on the drawings shall be Visquenn 1000 super D.P.M. Sheeting manufactured by approved supplier in rolls and laid by rolling over the prepared base at the levels and in the areas shown on the drawings. Where a joint is necessary at the side or end of a sheet this shall be a double welt folded joint made by placing the edges together and folding over twice. The joint shall be prevented from opening prior to concreting by blocks placed at intervals on top of the joint. Particular care shall be taken in forming the joint between horizontal and vertical sheets where the concrete requires to be wrapped so that a continuous damp proof membrane is formed. The contractor shall protect the sheets from damage during laying and subsequent operations and shall replace all damaged sheets to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

11. COMPACTION PROCEDURE The procedure for compacting the existing sub-grade and any filling material is subject to the approval by the Engineer and shall be generally as outlined below. The adoption of the procedure outlined below and the giving of approval by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility in providing compacted soil in accordance with sub-clause a below. a) Each layer of profile shall be compacted to give a minimum density of 90% of the Maximum Dry

Density throughout the whole thickness of the layer or the top 300 mm of existing sub-grade.




The maximum dry density being established by B.S Standard Tests (or AASHO equivalent tests). (B.S test to BS 1377:1975 – Test No. 9 AASHO test to AASHO T 160 – 61).

b) After carrying out the grading, leveling, scarifying, pulverizing, etc., of the soil layer to be

compacted as per specifications, the Contractor shall add the necessary amount of water to permeate the pulverized soil in the quantity required, all in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.

c) The soil shall then be thoroughly mixed after adding each lot of water so as to achieve

homogenous moisture content in the whole thickness of the layer. d) Before compacting, sample from the pulverized soil will be taken and tested, in order to check

the natural moisture content and to bring it within +2 and or -4 per cent of the Optimum Moisture Content. When the material is within this moisture range, it shall be primarily leveled in order to commence earth compaction.

e) After primary leveling referred to above, compaction shall be commenced by means or

approved rollers depending on the type or soil being compacted in order to obtain the required density.

f) The rolling shall be carried out until the soil reaches the required density. If the surface is super-

elevated, rolling shall commence from lower side and continue to the higher side. In order to compensate for the amount of water lost in evaporation in the course of compaction, additional quantities of water shall be added as required.

g) The surface shall thereafter be leveled longitudinally and transversely by motor graders and

finally rolled to achieve uniform compaction free from undulations, soft spots and depressions all in conformity with the allowable tolerances for evenness of surfaces.

h) Compaction of sloped sections of embankments and ditches shall be carried out as hereinafter

specified with regard to pulverization of soil, addition of the necessary water. Shaping and compaction to the required degree of compaction and the required design sections.

i) The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the necessity of providing all machinery, equipment and

attachments required for the effective and efficient shaping and compaction of these sloped sections.

12. ACCEPTANCE OF EARTHWORK AND FILLING

Acceptance of earthwork and filling shall be determined by testing the degree of compaction and the levels and evenness of surface of the approved materials. Such testing and acceptance shall be performed as the work progresses. Each layer shall be tested and approved prior to progressing with additional layers. The engineer shall have the right to retest any areas at any time and the Contractor shall be responsible for correcting and deficiencies.

13. DEGREE OF COMPACTION

The maximum dry reference density and optimum moisture for earthwork materials shall be determined by the BS or AASHTO tests by using the methods described in Clause A–5 above subject to approval of the Engineer. The density and thickness of any compacted layer shall be ascertained by obtaining a specimen from the soil after completing compaction In accordance with the B.S or AASHO Specifications and control curves of dry density compaction and optimum moisture content established for each type of soil material being used. In case this specimen does not conform with the required density and thickness, additional tests may be taken to determine’ the limits of the failing area, after which the contractor shall scarify, pulverize, water, compact and level the layer again, and if necessary, add new material (or otherwise modify the existing material) at his own expense, all in accordance with specifications, until the required result is obtained. The Contractor shall allow in his daily work program enough time to permit the performance and checking of the above tests, all in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer and under his guidance.




14. LEVELS AND EVENNESS OF SURFACES The Engineer shall test the levels and evenness of the sub-grade surface and/or of finished surface to ascertain their conformity with the drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer a four-meter straight edge & crown template of sturdy & approved design & necessary labour to assist in checking operation.

15. SOIL INVESTIGATION This Clause shall apply to soil mechanics as well as foundation engineering to the Site where the works are being constructed, to determine the suitability of the foundation proposed for the works to be constructed on the site. The Contractor should carry out his own soil investigation to see the soil conditions and its bearing capacity and this should be priced in the Preliminaries Section of the bill of quantities.

15.1 Digital Submittals of Soil Investigation All reports and drawings shall be submitted in digital form (CD or similar), as follows: a) The Contractor shall provide on recordable CD media an identical reproducible copy of the

report. This shall be in a PDF format to be directly readable as a single file. b) The Contractor shall provide in digital format all relevant information in an editable Excel

spreadsheet form able to be directly convertible in “KEY AGS3”. The format spreadsheet will be made available from the Engineer.

The Contractor should make himself aware of the following software to ensure the relevant information and content is provided. • KEY AGS 97 • HOLEBASE 3 • KEYHOLE 5 • KEYHOLE VETRA The Contractor shall provide in editable format the following in CD media: • *.doc (WinWord) All report text. • *.jpeg All borehole records. • *.jpeg All laboratory test data sheets and results. • *.jpeg All core photography • *.dwg (AutoCAD V14) Miscellaneous report drawings




1. DESCRIPTION

PP LLAAIINN && RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEDD CCOONNCCRREETTEE

This work consists of furnishing placing, curing, finishing including transport of cement concrete

made from approved type of Cement, water, fine and coarse aggregates all in accordance with the requirements in these specifications and conforming to the lines, grades, and typical sections shown on the Drawings or called for in the Special Provisions and to the approval of the Engineer.

1.1 Classes of Concrete

The classes of concrete recognized in these specifications shall be designated: A, B, C, D, Y and Lean Concrete. The Class of concrete to be used shall be as called for on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or specified in the Special Provisions. The following requirements shall govern unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

Class A Concrete shall be used everywhere, for non-reinforced and reinforced concrete structures, except as noted below or directed by the Engineer. Concrete placed under water and for piles shall be Class A with a minimum content of four hundred (400) kg. per cubic meter of concrete with a slump between ten (10) and fifteen (15) cm. Class B Concrete shall be used only where specified. Class C Concrete shall be used for cribbing, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer or specified in the Special Provisions or on the Drawings. Class D concrete shall be used for precast, pre-stressed and post- tensioned elements, as indicated on drawings. Class Y concrete shall be used as a filler in steel grid bridge floors, or where indicated in the Special Provisions or on the Drawings. Lean Concrete shall be used in thin layers underneath footings and when called for on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. The concrete of the various classes shall satisfy the requirements shown in the following Table.

TABLE

Class of Concrete

Portland Cement Concrete Requirements

Min. Cement

Max. Size of Coarse

Aggregate

Min 28 days Compressive

Strength

Consistency (Range in Slump)

Maximum Permissible

Water Cement Vibrated Non- Vibrated

(kg/M3 (mm) ) (kg/cm2) (mm) (mm) Ratio A 300 20 210 25 - 75 60 -100 0.58 B 250 51 170 25 - 75 50 - 80 0.65 C 275 38 210 25 - 75 60 - 100 0.58 D 450 25 350 50 - 100 75 - 125 0.40 Y 400 13 210 25 - 75 60 - 100 0.58

Lean Concrete 175 51 100 - - - 1.2 Types of Concrete Works

Under Ground Concrete Concrete poured below Natural Surface Level with or without shuttering and shoring. On Ground Concrete Concrete poured by erecting formwork with necessary bracings on ground.




Elevated Concrete Concrete poured by erecting props, bracing and towers to support the formwork at higher levels.

2. EFFECT OF MATERIALS STRENGTH

The cement and aggregate used have significant influence on strength properties. The use of unsound aggregates will produce large variations in the strength of concrete. In general, however, a good aggregate will develop the full strength of the cementing matrix and therefore should cause little variation in the product. Strength is increases slightly with larger size coarse aggregates.

3. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Cement

i). The cement shall be fresh and of approved origin and manufacture, it shall be one of the

following as may be specified by the Engineer. a). Ordinary or Rapid Hardening Portland Cement shall comply with the requirements of

PS 232 or BS 12.

b). Sulphate-Resisting Portland Cement complying with the requirements of PS 612 or BS 4027.

ii). Unless otherwise specified, ordinary Portland Cement shall conform the requirements of the

standard specifications for Portland Cement, AASHTO Designation M55, ASTM Designation C150.

iii). Mill Certificates shall accompany delivery of the material to the work.

iv). There shall be sufficient cement on site to ensure that each section of work is completed without interruption. If the cement is supplied by the Employer, the contractors should inform the Employer of his requirements much before its use in construction.

v). Cement reclaimed from cleaning of bags or from leaky containers shall not be used.

vi). The Contractor shall provide and erect (at his cost) in a suitable place dry, well ventilated, weather-proof and waterproof shed of sufficient capacity to store the cement.

vii). The cement shall be used as soon as possible after delivery and cement which has become stale or unsuitable through absorption of moisture from the atmosphere or otherwise shall be rejected and removed immediately from the site at the Contractor’s expense. Any cement in containers damaged so as to allow the contents to spill or access of the atmosphere to the cement prior to opening at the time of concrete mixing shall be rejected and removed immediately from the site at the Contractor’s expenses.

viii). Cement stored through a monsoon or for more than six months should not be used in reinforced concrete.

ix). Different brand or different types of cement from the same mill, or the same brand or type from differing mills shall not be mixed or used alternately in the same item of construction unless authorized by the Engineer, after preparing new mix designation.

3.2 Fine Aggregate

The fine aggregate shall consist of sand, stone screening or other approved inert materials with similar characteristics or a combination thereof, having clean, hard, strong, sound, durable, uncoated grains free from injurious amount of dust, lumps, soft or flaky particles, shale alkali, organic matter, material reactive with alkalis in the cement loam or other deleterious substances, and shall not contain more than three (3) percent of material passing the No.200 sieve by washing nor more than one (1) percent of clay lumps or one (1) percent of shale. The use of beach sand is prohibited without the written consent of the Engineer.




For exposed work, the fine aggregate shall be free from any substance that will discolour the concrete surface. The fine aggregate shall be uniformly graded and when tested in accordance with AASHTO Designation T-11 and T-27 shall meet the following grading requirement.

Sieve Designation

GRADING OF FINE AGGREGATES

Percentage Passing by Weight 3/8 inch 100

No. 4 95 - 100 No. 16 45 - 85 No. 50 10 - 30 No. 100 2 - 10 No. 200 0 - 3

In case if fine aggregates fail under fineness Modulus or Gradation however material passing No. 4 in combined aggregate, qualifies for these requirements, then the material can be accepted. Fine aggregates shall be of such quality that mortar specimens, prepared with standard Portland cement and tested in accordance with AASHTO Designation T-71, shall develop a compressive strength at 7 days of not less than 90 percent of the strength developed by a mortar prepared in the same cement and graded sand having a fineness modulus of 2.3 to 3.1 Natural aggregates if required shall be thoroughly and uniformly washed before use. Sand equivalent (T-176) shall be 75 min. For the purpose or determining the degree of uniformity, a fineness modulus determination shall be made upon representative samples submitted by the contractor from such sources as he proposes to use. Fine aggregate from any one source having a variation in fineness modulus of greater than 0.20 either way from the fineness modulus of mix design samples submitted by the contractor may be rejected till new trial mixes are prepared and tested by the contractor.

3.3 Coarse Aggregate

The coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed or broken stone, gravel or other approved inert materials with similar characteristics, or a combination thereof, having clean, hard, strong, sound, durable unquoted particles, free from injurious amount of soft, friable, thin elongated, or laminated pieces, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter and conforming to the requirements of these Specifications. The coarse aggregate shall be of uniform grading with maximum sizes as required for the various classes of concrete as shown in Table 2 and when tested in accordance with AASHTO Designation T-11 & T-27 shall meet the following grading requirements.

Table 2

Designated Size Percentage by Weight Passing Laboratory Sieves Having Square Openings,

in Inches 2 ½ 2 1 ½ 1 ¾ ½ 3/ No.4 8

½ in to No.4 - - - - 100 90-100 40-70 0-15* ¾ in to No.4 - - - 100 90-100 - 20-55 0-10* 1 in to No.4 - - 100 95-100 - 25-60 - 0-10* 1½ in to No.4 - 100 95-100 - 35-70 - 10-30 0-5* 2 in to No.4 100 95-100 - 35-70 - 10-30 - 0-5* 1½ in to 3/4 in - 100 90-100 20-55 0-15 - 0-5 - 2 in to 1 in 100 90-100 35-70 0-15 0-5 - -

• Not more than five 5 percent shall pass No.8 sieve.

Coarse aggregate shall contain not more than one (1) percent by weight of material passing the No.200 sieve by washing and not more than five (5) percent of soft fragments. It shall have an abrasion loss of not more than forty (40) percent at five hundred (500) revolutions, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-96.




When tested in accordance with AASHTO T-104, for five cycle, the loss with the sodium sulphate soundness test shall be not more than 12 percent. Natural aggregates, if required, shall be thoroughly washed before use. The aggregate shall be non alkali/silica reactive.

3.4 Combined Aggregate

The coarse and fine aggregate shall be combined in the proportions according to the approved trial mixes for each class of concrete.

3.5 Rubble or Cyclopean Concrete

Rubble or cyclopean concrete shall consist of tough, sound, and durable rock. The stone shall be free from coatings, seams, or flaws of any character. In general, the percentage of wear shall not exceed fifty (50) when tested in accordance with the Standard Method of Testing for Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate by use of the “Los Angeles Machine” ASTM C535.

3.6 Storage of cement and Aggregates

a) All cement shall be stored, immediately upon arrival on the site of the work, in weather-proof

building, which will protect the cement from dampness. The floor shall be raised from the ground. The buildings shall be placed in locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall be ample, and the shipments of cement as received shall be separately stored in such a manner as to provide easy access for identification and inspection of each shipment. Storage buildings shall have capacity of a sufficient quantity of cement for at least thirty (30) days use. Bulk cement, if used, shall be transferred to elevated air tight and weatherproof bins. However, if approved, sacked cement on small jobs may be stored in the open, upon a raised platform provided that ample waterproof covering is ensured. Stored cement shall meet the test requirements at any time after storage when retest is ordered by the Engineer. At the time of use all cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps. Cement bags shall be weighed at random to check for variation.

b) The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be such as to prevent segregation or the inclusion of foreign materials. The Engineer may require that aggregates be stored on separate platforms at satisfactory locations.

In order to secure greater uniformity of the concrete mix, the Engineer may require that the coarse aggregate be separated into two or more sizes. Different sizes of aggregate shall be stored in separate bins or in separate stock piles to prevent the material at the edges of the piles from becoming intermixed. If aggregates are stored on the ground the bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning and approval of the Engineer. Aggregates exposed to a marine environment shall be covered to protect them from salt contamination.

3.7 Water

The water for curing, for washing aggregates and for mixing shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. It shall be free from oil and shall contain not more than one thousand (1,000) parts per million of chlorides nor more than one thousand three hundreds (1,300) parts per million of sulfates (SO4). In no case shall the water contain an amount of impurities that will cause a change in the setting time of Portland cement of more than twenty five (25) percent nor a reduction in the compressive strength of mortar at fourteen (14) days of more than five (5) percent when compared to the result obtained with distilled water. In non-reinforced concrete work, the water for curing, for washing aggregates, and for mixing shall be free form oil and shall not contain more than two thousands (2,000) parts per million of chlorides nor more than one thousand five hundreds (1,500) parts per million of sulfates as SO4. In addition to the above requirements, water for curing concrete shall not contain any impurities in a sufficient amount to cause discoloration of the concrete or produce etching of the surface.




When required by the Engineer, the quality of the mixing water shall be determined by the standard Method test for Quality of water to be used in concrete, AASHTO Methods of Sampling and testing, Designation: T 26.

3.8 Admixtures

Admixtures shall only be allowed to be used with written permission from the Engineer. If air-entraining agents, water reducing agents, set retarders or strength accelerators are permitted to be used, they shall not be used in greater dosages than those recommended by the manufacturer, or permitted by the Engineer, and shall conform to the requirements for each of agents specified by the manufacturer.

4. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

The manufacturing, transport, handling and placing of concrete shall conform with the requirements given hereinafter. Unless otherwise specified, ordinary Portland cement shall be used for all types of concrete. When sulphate resisting cement or other type of cement is required, it will be specified on the Drawings/or in BOQ or ordered by the Engineer.

4.1 Proportioning of concrete

All concrete shall be proportioned by weighing, except as specified herein. The proportions by weight of cement, fine aggregates, coarse aggregates and water necessary to produce concrete of the required strength and consistency shall be approved by the Engineer. Such approval may be withdrawn at any time, and changes in the proportions may be required for the purpose of required workability density, impermeability, durability and strength. Based on the approved mix proportions, the contractor shall prepare lists showing the number of kilograms of the various materials to be used in the batch size adopted. The required consistency shall also be shown. Such lists are subject to approval by the Engineer, and shall be pasted at the mixer. The amount of water in the mix is the total amount of free water, including the free water held by the aggregates.

Samples shall be made from three separate batches of concrete. No concrete shall be placed in the Works until the results of the twenty eight (28) day tests indicate that the design proportions comply with the requirements. Adjustment of the proportions shall be subject to the following provisions.

a) Adjustment for variation in workability – if it is found impossible to obtain concrete of the desired

workability with the proportion originally approved, the Engineer shall make such changes as shall be necessary.

b) Adjustment for new materials - No change in the source or character of the material shall be made without due notice to the Engineer and no new materials shall be used until the Engineer has accepted such materials and has approved new proportions based on trial mixes.

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the time required to prepare and test trial batches and the contractor shall be responsible for production of trial batches at a sufficiently early date so that the progress for the work is not delayed.

4.2 Consistency

Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the required position. It shall be of such a consistency that it will flow around reinforcement steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate when isolated shall show a coating of mortar containing its proportionate amount of sand. The consistency of concrete shall be determined to be as dry as it is practicable to satisfy the requirements for transportation and placing of the concrete as described hereinafter.




4.3 Mixing Concrete

a) Mixing General

The concrete shall be mixed only in the quantity required for immediate use. Concrete that has developed an initial set shall be rejected. Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a mixer of an approved size and type that will ensure a uniform distribution of their materials throughout the mass. All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated mixers. Mixing plant and equipment for transporting and placing concrete should be arranged with an ample auxiliary installation to provide a minimum supply of concrete in case of breakdown of machinery or in case the normal supply of concrete is disrupted. The auxiliary supply of concrete shall be sufficient to complete the casting of a section up to construction joint. Equipment having components made of aluminum or magnesium alloys, which would have contacted with plastic concrete, during mixing, transporting or pumping of Portland cement concrete, shall not be used. Concrete mixers shall be equipped with adequate water storage and a device for accurately measuring and automatically controlling the quantity of water used. Materials shall be measured by weighing, except as otherwise specified or where other methods are specifically authorized by the Engineer. The apparatus provided for weighing the aggregates and cement shall ensure accurate measurement of each ingredient. The accuracy of all weighing devices except that for water shall be such that successive quantities can be measured to within one (1) percent of the desired value. Cement in standard package (bags) approved by the Engineer need not be weighed. The water measuring device shall be accurate to plus or minus half percent + 0.50%. All measuring devices be subjected to the approval of the Engineer. Scales and measuring devices shall be tested at the expense of the Contractor as frequently as the Engineer may deem necessary to ensure their accuracy. Weighing equipment shall be isolated so that vibration or movement of other operating equipment do not effect the accuracy of reading. When the entire plant is running, the scale reading at cut-off shall not vary from the weight designated by the Engineer more than one (12) percent for cement one and half (1½) percent for any size of aggregate, or one (1) percent for the total aggregates in any batch. Where volumetric measurements are authorized by the Engineer, the weight proportions shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions. In Such cases, suitable allowances shall be made for variations in the moisture condition of the aggregates, Boxes or similar containers of the exact volume required shall be filled and struck off. Measurement by wheel barrow volumes will not be permitted.

b) Mixing at Site

Concrete mixers may be of the revolving drum or the revolving blade type and the mixing drum or blades shall be operated uniformly at the mixing speed recommended by the manufacture. The pick-up and throw-over blades of mixer shall be restored or replaced when any part or sections is worn two and half (2.5) cms. or below than the original height of the manufacturer’s design. Mixers and agitators, which have an accumulation of hard concrete or mortar, shall not be used. When bulk cement is used and volume of the batch is one cubic meter or more, the scale and weigh hopper for Portland cement shall be separate and distinct from the aggregate hopper or hoppers. The discharge Mechanism of bulk cement weigh hopper shall be interlocked against opening before the full amount of the cement is in the hopper. The discharging mechanism shall also be inter locked against opening when the amount of cement in the hopper is underweight by more than one percent or overweight by more than three (3) percent of the amount specified.




When the aggregates contain more water than the quantity necessary to produce a saturated surface-dry condition, representative samples shall be taken and the moisture content determined for each kind of aggregate. The temperature of mixed concrete immediately before placing, shall be not more than thirty (30) degree C. aggregates and water shall be cooled as necessary to produce concrete within this temperature limit. If ice is used to cool the concrete, discharge of the mixer will not be permitted until all ice has melted. The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in advance of cement and aggregates. All water shall be in the drum by the end of the first quarter of the specified mixing time. Cement shall be batched and charged into the mixer by means that will not result in loss due to the effect of wind, or in accumulation of cement on surfaces of conveyors or hoppers, or in other conditions, which reduce or vary the required quantity of cement in the concrete mixture. The entire contents of a batch mixer shall be removed from the drum before materials for a succeeding batch are placed therein. The materials composing a batch except water shall be deposited simultaneously into the mixer. After all materials, including water, are in the mixer the concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than one and a half (1½) minutes. This may only be reduced if on the basis of site tests, the Engineer is satisfied that the reduced mixing time will produce a concrete of the same strength and uniformity. The reduced mixing time shall under no circumstances be less than fifty (50) seconds. During the period of mixing, the mixer shall operate at the speed for which it has been designed. Mixers shall be operated with an automatic timing device that can be locked by the Engineer. The time device and discharge mechanism shall be so interlocked that during normal operation no part of the batch will be discharged until the specified mixing time has elapsed. In case of failure of the timing device, the contractor will be permitted to operate while it is being repaired, provided he furnishes an approved timepiece equipped with minute and second hands. If the timing device is not repaired within twenty four (24) hours, further use of the mixer will be prohibited until repairs are made. When mixing is to stop for a period of thirty (30) minutes or more, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. To ensure that the drum does not remove mortar from the mix, the first batch of concrete after cleaning of the drum shall have the required amount of coarse aggregate placed in the mixer prior to the addition of the cement, sand and water.

c) Plant Mixing

At central mixing plant, batches shall be discharged from the weighing hopper into the mixer either directly by gravity or by an elevating container large enough to contain the batch. The plant shall be arranged to ensure that there is no loss of cement during transfer from weighing hopper to the mixer drum. The mixing time shall be ninety (90) seconds. The plasticizer, accelerator or retarder or water reducing admixture, if required, shall be fed separately at the rate recommended by the manufacture, or as established by laboratory trials.

d) Transit Mixing

Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, shall be of the revolving drum type, watertight, and so constructed that the concrete can be mixed to ensure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass. All solid materials for the concrete shall be accurately measured and charged into the drum at the proportioning plant. The truck mixer shall be equipped with a device by which the quantity of water added can be readily verified. Concrete shall be poured within one hour of the cement and aggregate being added to the drum. However, after the mixing water has been added to the batch, the concrete shall be poured within thirty (30) minutes. The maximum size of the batch in truck mixers shall not exceed the maximum rated capacity of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer and stamped in metal on the mixer. Truck mixing shall




be continued for not less than one hundred (100) revolutions after all ingredients, including water, are in the drum. The mixing speed shall not be less than seven (7) revolutions per minute, or more than ten (10) revolutions per minute. Mixing shall begin immediately after the cement has been added to the aggregate. The limitation in time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregate and the beginning of the mixing may be waived when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the aggregate is sufficiently free from moisture so that there will be no harmful effects on the cement.

e) Partial Mixing at the Central Plant

When a truck mixer, or an agitator provided with adequate mixing blades, is used for transportation, the mixing time at the central plant mixer may be reduced to thirty (30) seconds and the mixing completed in a truck mixer/agitator. The mixing time in the truck mixer or agitator equipped with adequate mixing blades shall be as specified for truck mixing.

f) Stiff Concrete Mix

For mixing concrete of zero slumps to be laid by pavers, gravity mixer shall not be used. Only force mixer of moving blades shall be allowed to ensure homogenous mix.

g) Hand Mixing

Hand mixing of materials shall not be allowed in any case.

4.4 Hauling and Delivery of Mixed Concrete

Mixed concrete may be transported to the delivery point in truck agitators or truck mixers operation at the speed designated by the manufacturer, provided the consistency any workability of the mixed concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitable for adequate placement and consolidation in place. Truck agitators shall be loaded not to exceed the manufacturer’s rated capacity. They shall maintain the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during hauling. Bodies of non-agitating hauling equipment shall be so constructed that leakage of the concrete mix, or any party thereof, will not occur at any time, and they shall be self-cleaning during discharge. For Zero slump concrete to be laid by paver, concrete will be allowed to be hauled in open trucks. However concrete hauled in open-top vehicles shall be protected during hauling against rain or exposure to the sun for more than twenty (20) minutes when the ambient temperature exceeds twenty five (25) degree C. No additional water shall be incorporated into the concrete during hauling or after arrival at the delivery point. The rate of discharge of mixed concrete form truck mixer agitators shall be controlled by the speed of rotation of the drum in the discharge direction with the discharge gate fully open. When a truck mixer or agitator is used for transporting concrete to the delivery point, discharge shall be completed within one hour after the introduction of cement to the aggregates. Under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, or when the temperature of the concrete is thirty (30) degrees centigrade or above, a time less than one hour will be required. When non-agitating hauling equipment is used for transporting concrete to the delivery point, discharge shall be completed within one hour after the addition of the cement to the aggregates. Under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, or when the temperature of the concrete is thirty (30) degree C or above, the time between the introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge and discharge shall not exceed forty five (45) minutes.

a) Delivery

The organization supplying concrete shall have sufficient plant capacity and transportation vehicles to ensure continuous delivery at the rate required. The rate of the delivery of concrete




during concerning operations shall be such as to provide for the proper handling, placing, and finishing of the concrete. The rate shall be such that the interval between batches shall not exceed twenty (20) minutes. The methods of delivering and handling the concrete shall be such as will facilitate placing with the minimum rehandling and without damage to the structure of the concrete.

b) Retempering

The concrete shall be mixed only in such quantities as are required for immediate use and any concrete that has developed initial set shall not be used. Concrete that has partially hardened shall not be retempered or remixed.

4.5 Handling and Placing Concrete

i). General

In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips and other construction debris and extraneous matter shall be removed from inside the formwork to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Struts, stays and braces serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape and alignment pending the placing of concrete at their locations shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their services unnecessary. These temporary members shall be entirely removed from the forms and shall not buried in the concrete.

All excavations and other absorbent contact surfaces such as timber formwork shall be damp but no free water will be permitted to remain on any such surface. The internal surfaces of all formwork shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No concrete shall be used that does not reach its final position in the forms within the time stipulated above. Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the displacement of the reinforcement. The use of long troughs, chutes, and pipes for conveying concrete to the forms shall be permitted only on written authorization of the Engineer. In any case the Engineer will reject the use of equipment for concrete transportation that will allow segregation, loss of fines, or in any other way will have a deteriorating effect on the concrete quality. Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal or metal lined; where steep slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement. All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free form coatings of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each run; water used for flushing shall be discharged clear off the structure.

When placing operation would involve dropping the concrete more than one and half (1½) meters, it shall be conveyed through sheet metal or other approved pipes. As far as practicable, the pipe shall be kept buried in the newly placed concrete. After the initial set of the concrete the forms shall not be jarred and no loading of any kind shall be placed on the ends of projecting reinforcement bars. The concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible to its final position and the use of vibrators for extensive shifting of the mass of fresh concrete will not be permitted.

ii). Pneumatic Placing

Pneumatic placing of concrete will be permitted only if authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall be so arranged that no vibration will occur that might damage freshly placed concrete. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means, the equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The machine shall be located as close as practicable to the work. The discharge lines shall be horizontal or inclined upwards from the machine.




At the conclusion of placing the concrete, the entire equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.

iii). Pumping

The Placing of concrete by pumping will be permitted only if specified in the special provisions or if authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall be so arranged that no vibration will occur that might damage freshly placed concrete. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure the equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The operations of the pump shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets is obtained. When pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, shall be ejected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of the concrete or separation of the ingredients. After this operation, the entire equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.

iv). Placing Concrete Under Water

Concrete shall not be placed under water except where inevitable in which case approval must be sought from the Engineer and the work carried out under his immediate supervision. In this case the method of placing shall be as hereinafter specified. Concrete deposited under water shall be Class A with a minimum cement content of four hundred (400) kilograms per cubic meter of concrete. To prevent segregation, it shall be carefully placed in a compact mass in its final position by means of a tremie, a bottom-dump bucket, or other approved means, and it shall not be disturbed after being placed. Water must not be allowed to flow past the surface of fresh concrete. A tremie shall consist of a tube having a diameter of not less than 25 cm constructed in sections having flanged couplings fitted with gaskets with a hopper at the top. The tremie shall be supported so as to permit fee movement of the discharge end over the entire top surface of the work and so as to permit rapid lowering when necessary to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The discharge end shall be closed at the start of work so as to prevent water entering the tremie tube shall be kept full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the flow of concrete shall be induced by slightly raising the discharge end, but always keeping it in the; placed concrete. The flow shall be continuous until the work is completed. When the concrete is placed with a bottom-dump bucket, the top of the bucket shall be open. The bottom doors shall open freely downward and outward when tripped. The bucket shall be completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the concrete is to be deposited and when discharged shall be withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete. Dewatering may proceed when the concrete seal is sufficiently hard and strong. All laitance or other unsatisfactory material shall be removed from the exposed surface by scraping, chipping or other means, which will not injure the surface of the concrete.

v). Compaction

Concrete, except lean concrete under footings and concrete deposited under water, shall be thoroughly compacted during and immediately after placing Concrete in walls, beams, columns etc. shall be placed in horizontal layers not more than thirty (30) centimeters thick except as hereinafter provided. When less than a complete layer is placed in one operation, it shall be terminated in a vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall be placed and compacted before the preceding layer has taken initial set to prevent injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of separation between the layers. The concrete shall be compacted to ensure that successive layers of the same lift are thoroughly bonded together. The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration. The concrete shall be vibrated internally unless special authorization of other methods is given by the Engineer or is provided herein. Vibrators shall be of a type, design, and frequency approved by the Engineer. The intensity of vibration shall be such as visibly to affect a mass of concrete with a 3 cm slump over a radius of at least half a meter. The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly compact each batch immediately after it is placed in the forms. Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into




the corners and angles of the forms and shall be applied at the point of placing and in the area of freshly placed concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted into and withdrawn from the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to compact the concrete thoroughly but shall not be continued at any one point to the extent that localized areas of grout are formed. Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and not farther apart than twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective. Vibration shall not be applied directly to the reinforcement or to sections or layers of concrete that have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. It shall not be used to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause segregation and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete neither in the forms nor in troughs or chutes. Vibration shall be supplemented by such external vibrator as is necessary to ensure smooth surfaces and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners and locations impossible to reach with the normal vibrators.

vi). Adverse Weather Conditions

Concrete shall not be placed during falling temperatures when the ambient air temperature falls below 5 degrees centigrade or during rising temperatures when the ambient air temperature is below 2 degrees centigrade. When placing concrete at air temperature below 5 degrees centigrade the concrete temperature shall not be below 10 degrees centigrade. The temperature of placed concrete shall not be allowed to fall below 5 degrees centigrade until the concrete has attained strength of at least 50 kg/cm2 and the Contractor shall be responsible for all protective measures necessary to ensure this. All concrete that has been damaged by frost or the formation of ice in the concrete shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. When the ambient air temperature exceeds 32 degrees centigrade during a concreting operation the Contractor shall take such measures as may be necessary to control the temperature of the concrete ingredients so that the temperature of the placed concrete does not exceed 30 degrees centigrade. Such measures shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and will include spraying the aggregate stock piles with water to promote cooling by evaporation and, where feasible, shading of the stock piles and the area where concreting is carried out. Curing shall commence immediately after placing of the concrete to prevent excessive moisture loss.

vii). Holes, Chasses and Fixings in Concrete

No holes or chases shall be cut in the concrete work without the prior written approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that all necessary holes and chases, including fixing holes for railings, balustrades and the like, are carefully formed in the correct positions prior to the placing of concrete. Where these are to be provided, conduits, pipes and special fixings shall be firmly fixed in the positions required before concreting in.

No pipes and conduits other than those shown on the drawings shall be embedded in the concrete without the Engineer’s approval. The clear space between such pipes or any reinforcement shall be at least 40 mm or the maximum size of the aggregates plus 5 mm, whichever is the greater. The amount of concrete over the pipes and fittings shall be a minimum of the cover specified for that situation.

4.6 Casting Sections and Construction Joints

a) General

The concrete in each integral part of a structure shall be placed continuously, and the Contractor will not be allowed to commence work on any such part unless sufficiently inspected and approved material for the concrete is at hand, and manpower and equipment are sufficient to complete the part without interruption in the placing of the concrete. Construction joints shall be allowed only where specified on the drawings or otherwise approved. If not detailed on the drawings, or in the case of emergency, construction joints shall be placed as directed. Shear keys or inclined reinforcement shall be used where necessary to transmit shear or bond the two sections together. When shear keys or inclined reinforcement are not provided, the concrete shall be roughened as directed. Joints in the concrete due to




discontinuity of work shall be avoided as far as possible. Such joints, when necessary, shall be constructed to meet the approval of the Engineer. When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete after becoming firm enough to retain its shape shall be cleaned of Latinate and other objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose sound concrete. Where a “feathered edge “ might be produced at a construction joint, as in the sloped top surface of a wing wall, an inset formwork shall be used to produce an edge thickness of not less than 15 centimeters in the succeeding layer. Work shall not be discontinued within fifty (50) centimeters of the top of any face, unless provision has been made for a coping less than 50 centimeters thick, in which cases, if permitted by the Engineer, the construction joint may be made at the underside of coping. Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete all accumulations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcing steel and the surface of forms shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not be puddle in to the unset concrete. Care shall be exercised, during the cleaning of the reinforcing steel, not to injure or break the concrete steel bond near the surface of the concrete. Stub columns for stub walls (kickers) on footings shall be cast integrally with the footing and not afterwards.

b) Slab Culverts

In general, the lean concrete below the foundation shall be placed and allowed to set before the reinforced concrete is started.

After the construction of masonry abutment walls, as specified in Special Provisions, the concrete bedplate and curtain walls shall be constructed monolithically. Construction joints in wing walls where unavoidable shall be horizontal and so located that no joint will be visible in the exposed face of the wing wall above the ground line.

c) Box Culverts

Vertical construction joints shall be at right angles to the axis of the culvert. In general, the base slab or footings of box culverts shall be placed and allowed to set before the remainder of the culverts is constructed. In this case, suitable provision shall be made for bonding the sidewalls to the culvert base, preferably by means of raised longitudinal keys so constructed as to prevent, as far as possible, the percolation of water through the construction joint. In the construction of box culverts one and quarter (1-¼) meters or less in height, the sidewalls and top slab may be constructed as a monolithic unit. When this method of construction is used, necessary construction joints shall be vertical and at right angles to the axis of the culvert. In the construction of box culverts more than one and quarter (1-¼) meters in height the concrete in the walls shall be placed and allowed to set before the top slab is placed. In this case, appropriate keys shall be left in the sidewalls for anchoring the cover slab. If possible, each wing wall shall be constructed as a monolithic unit. Construction joints, where unavoidable, shall be horizontal and so located that no joint will be visible in the exposed face of the wing wall above the ground line.

d) Girders, Slabs and Columns

For simple, spans, concrete shall preferably be deposited by beginning at the center of the span and working from the center towards the ends. Concrete in girders shall be deposited uniformly for the full length of the girder and brought up evenly in horizontal layers. For continuous spans, where required by design considerations, the concrete placing sequence shall be shown on the plans or in the Special Provisions. Concrete in girder haunches less than one (1) meter in height shall be placed at the same time as that in the girder stem, and the column or abutment tops shall be cut back to form seats for the haunches. Whenever any haunch or fillet has a vertical height of one(1) meter or more, the




abutment or columns, the haunch, and the girder shall be placed in three successive stages; first to lower side of haunch; second, to the lower side of the girder; and third to completion. For hunched continuous girders, the girder stem (including haunch) shall be placed to the top of stem. Where the size of the pour is such that it cannot be made in one continuous operation, vertical construction joints shall preferably be located within the area of contra flexure. Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for each span unless otherwise provided. The floors and girders of through girder superstructures shall be placed in one continuous operation unless otherwise specified, in which case a special shear anchorage shall be provided to ensure monolithic action between girder and floor. Concrete in T-beam or deck girder spans may be placed on one continuous operation or may be placed in two separate operations; each of which shall be continuous; first, to the top of the girder stems and second, to completion. In the latter case, the bond between stem and slab shall be provided by suitable shear keys or by artificially roughening the surface of the top of the girder stem. In general, suitable keys may be formed by the use of timber blocks approximately five (5) by the (10) cm in cross-section and having a length of ten (10) cms less than the width of the girder stem. These key blocks shall be spaced along the girder stems as required, but the spacing shall be not greater than thirty (30) cms center to center. The blocks shall be removed as soon as the concrete has set sufficient to retain its shape. Concrete in box girders may be placed in two or three separate operations. In either case the bottom slab shall be placed first. Bond between the bottom slab and stem shall be positive and mechanical. If the webs are placed separately from the top slab, bond between the top slab and webs shall be secured in the same manner as for T-beams. Requirements for shear keys for T-beams shall also apply to box girders, except that keys need not be deeper than the depth to the top of bottom slab reinforcement. Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous operation, unless otherwise directed. The concrete shall be allowed to set at least 24 hours before the caps are placed. When friction collars are used to support cap forms, the concrete of columns shall have been poured at lest seven (7) days earlier. Unless otherwise permitted, no concrete shall be placed in the superstructure until the column forms have been stripped sufficiently to determine the character of the concrete in the columns. The load of the superstructure shall not be allowed to come upon the bents until the test cylinders representing the bents have obtained the minimum compressive strength but in no case in less than seven (7) days.

e) Construction Joints

Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, construction joints shall be made only where shown on the drawings or called for in the pouring schedule. The location of all construction joints not indicated on the drawings or of any construction joint necessary as a result of an emergency interruption in the placing of the concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, shear keys or reinforcement shall be used to transmit shear or to bond the two sections together. Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has hardened, the forms shall be re-tightened and the surface of the hardened concrete shall be roughened in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer and in a manner that will not have loose particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the surface. The roughened surface shall be thoroughly washed with clean water to remove all foreign matter and laitance. If directed by the Engineer, the surface of the hardened concrete which will be in contact with new concrete shall be kept continuously wet for at least two hours prior to recommencement of concreting to ensure an excess of moisture at the junction of the hardened and the newly deposited concrete. The cleaned and vetted surface, including vertical and inclined surfaces, shall be thoroughly covered with a coating of mortar approximately 10 mm thick and of the same proportion of sand and cement as the class of concrete to be used. The new concrete shall be placed before the grout or mortar has attained its final set.




The placing of concrete shall be carried out continuously from joint to joint. The face edges of all joints, which are exposed to view, shall be carefully finished true to line and elevation.

f) Rubble or Cyclopean Concrete

Rubble or cyclopean concrete shall consist of Class B concrete containing large embedded stones. The stone for this class of work shall be placed carefully so as to avoid damages to the forms or to the partially set adjacent concrete. Stratified stone shall be placed upon its natural bed. Stone shall be washed and saturated with water before placing. The total volume of the stone not be greater than one third of the total volume of the portion of the portion of the work in which it is which it is placed. For walls of piers greater than sixty (60) cms in thickness, stone of such size that one man can handle it, shall be used. Each stone shall be surrounded by at least fifteen (15) cms of concrete and no stone shall be closer than thirty (30) cm to any top surface nor any closer than fifteen (15) cms to any coping. For walls or piers greater than one (1) mater in thickness, larger stone (50 kg or more) may be used. Each stone shall be closer than sixty (60) cms to any top surface nor closer than twenty (20) cms to any coping.

g) Concrete Exposed to Sea Water

Unless otherwise specifically in the Contract documents or directed by the Engineer, concrete for structure exposed to sea water shall be class A. The clear distance from the face of the concrete to the nearest face of reinforcement steel shall be not less than the cover. The concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 1½ minutes and the water content of the mixture shall be carefully controlled and regulated so as to produce concrete of maximum impermeability. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and air pockets shall be avoided. No construction joints shall be formed between levels of extreme low water and extreme high water. Between any such levels, sea water shall not come in contact with the concrete for a period of not less than thirty (30) days. The original surface, as the concrete comes from the forms, shall be left undisturbed.

h) Concrete exposed to Alkali Soils or Alkali Water

Where concrete may be exposed to the action of alkaline water or soils, special care shall be taken to place it in accordance with specifications herein. Wherever possible, placing shall be continuous until completion of the section or until the concrete is at least fifty (50) cms, above ground or water level. Alkaline water or soils shall not be in contact with the concrete during placement and for a period of at least seventy two (72) hours thereafter.

i) Protection of Concrete from Environmental Conditions

i) General

Precautions shall be taken as needed to protect concrete from damage due to weather or other environmental of conditions during placing and curing operation. Any concrete placed during hot weather or during cold weather shall be at the Contractor’s risk and any damaged concrete shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

ii) Rain Protection Under conditions of rain, the placing of concrete shall not commence or shall be stopped unless adequate protection is provided to prevent damage to the surface mortar or damaging flow or wash off the concrete surface. iii) Work in Hot Weather The temperature of concrete shall not exceed thirty two (32) degree C at the time of laying. Unless the Contractor incorporates in the mix a plasticizer, of a make and in proportion which he has shown by laboratory tests and full scale trial to be satisfactory, to eliminate detrimental effects of high temperature without introducing any other detrimental effects on quality. The following may be used to keep the temperature of concrete below the above limitations.




i). Chilling of concrete water by heat exchange coils or by addition of broken ice, provided that the water shall be free from ice at the time of entry into the mixer.

ii). Cooling of coarse aggregate by watering. Provided that the water content of the aggregate so cooled shall be uniform.

iii). Reclaiming of aggregate from stock piles by the tunnel method to avoid using the surface

layer of the stock pile with shade and wind protection of conveyor elevating to batching plant.

iv). Night work provided that (i), (ii) and (iii) are proved inadequate or unsatisfactory in their

results and providing also that the engineer has no other reason for refusing permission for night work.

The engineer shall have power to order the suspension of concrete production in case of not taking precautionary measures by the contractor as mentioned above. Under no circumstance will the contractor be entitled to receive any additional payment for complying with the Requirements of this clause.

j) Work In Cold Weather

Except by written approval of the engineer, concerting operations shall not be continued when a descending air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat false below five (5) degree c nor resumed until an ascending air temperature in the shad and away from artificial heat reaches two (2) degree C in such case, the mixing water and/or aggregates shall be heated to not less then twenty one (21) degree C nor more then sixty six (66) degree c, prior to being placed in the mixer by an approved type of heating device so that the temperature of the concrete shall not be less then ten (10) degree C, nor more then twenty seven (27) degree C, at the time of placing. No materials containing frost shall be used. Cement or fine aggregates containing lumps or crusts of hardened materials shall not be used.

4.7 Concrete surface finishing/rendering

a) General

Concert surface finishing shall be classified as follows: Bridge deck surface finishing Sidewalk surface finish Ordinary surface form finish Class 1 surface form finish The bridge deck surface finish shall be given to the surface of the bottom slabs of all box type underpass structures. The requirements for sidewalk surface finish apply to the surface of the bottom slabs in box culverts, except that the acceptable variation from a three-meters straightedge shall be 10 mm, and brooming shall be omitted. The ordinary surface form finish shall be the final finish applied to all surface after removal of forms, unless otherwise specified or called for on the drawings. The class 1 surface form finish shall be applied only where specified, or as required by the engineer when the ordinary surface finish did not produce the required smooth even surface of uniform texture and appearances.

b) Sidewalk surface finish

After the concrete has been placed it shall be compacted and struck off by means of a strike board, floated with a wooden or cork float and finished with a broom. The corrugations produced shall be approximately (1) mm deep and be uniform in character. An approved edging tool shall be used on all edges and at all expansion joints. Brooming shall be transverse to the line of traffic and if water is necessary it shall be applied to the surface immediately in advance of brooming. The surface shall not vary more than six (6) millimeters under a three meter straight-edge and the finished surface shall be free from blemishes.




c) Ordinary Surface Form Finish

Ordinary surface finish shall consist of filling holes, honeycombing or depressions in the surface of the concrete and repairing all bolt pockets stains and discolouration shall be removed from concrete visible from traveled ways. Ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to the Class 1 finish. On surfaces which are to be buried underground or surfaces which are enclosed, such as the cells of box girders, the removal of fins will not be required.

Except as may be otherwise provided herein, all formwork bolts and any metal placed for the convenience of the Contractor shall be removed to the minimum depth of cover for the class of concrete and exposure condition. All rock pockets and other unsound concrete shall be removed. The resulting holes or depressions shall be cleaned and filled with mortar. Form bolts projecting into the cell of box girders need not be removed unless permanent access is provided into the cells and in these cases, such bolts shall be removed flush with the surface of the concrete. Mortar used to fill bolt holes shall consist of one part cement and two parts sand. Other depressions and pockets shall be filled with either packed mortar or air blown mortar as directed by the Engineer.

If rock pockets or holes in the opinion of the Engineer, are of such an extent or character as to affect the strength of the structure materially or to endanger the life of the steel reinforcement, he may declare the concrete defective and require the removal and replacement of the portions of the structure affected.

d) Class 1 surface form finish

Class 1 surface finish shall consist of finishing the surfaces of the structure as necessary to produce even surfaces of uniform texture and appearance, free of unsightly bulges, depressions and other imperfections. The degree of care in building forms and character of materials used in for work will be a contributing factor in the amount of additional finishing required to produce even surfaces of uniform texture and appearance, free of unsightly bulges, depressions and other imperfections, and the Engineer shall be the sole judge in this respect. After completion of the ordinary surface finish, areas which do not exhibit the required smooth, even surface of uniform texture and appearance shall be sanded with power sanders or other approved abrasive means until smooth, even surfaces of uniform texture and appearance are obtained. The use of power carborundum stones or disks will be required to remove bulges and other imperfections.

Class 1 surface finish shall not be applied until a uniform appearance can be obtained. Class 1 surface finish shall be applied as the final finish for the following surfaces, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

i. All form finish surfaces of bridge super-structures, except the under surfaces between

girders and the inside vertical surfaces of T girders. ii. All surfaces of bridge piers, columns and abutments, and retaining walls above finished

ground and to at least three tenth (0.3) meter below finished ground. iii. All surfaces of open spandrel arch rings, spandrel columns and abutment walls. iv. All surfaces of pedestrian under crossings, except floors and surfaces to be covered with

earth. v. Surface above finished ground of culvert headwalls, endwalls and retaining walls.

vi. Surface inside of culvert barrels having a height of one and half (1.5) meters or more for a

distance inside the barrel at least equal to the height of the culvert. vii. All surfaces of railings.

e) Surface Rendering

All faces of concrete which are to come in contact with back fill or pavement materials shall be applied two coats of hot bitumen of approved quality, before placing any material around concrete.




4.8 Curing Concrete

a) General

All newly placed concrete shall be cured in accordance with these specifications, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

b) Method of Curing

The curing method shall be one or more of the following as described hereinafter.

Water Method Curing compound method Reinforced waterproof paper method if required by the engineer. Forms-in-Place Method Steam method Polyethylene Sheeting Method Wetted Burlap Blanket Method

• Water Method

The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum period of seven (7) days after the concrete has been placed. Cotton mats, burlaps, rugs, carpets, or earth or sand blankets, may be used as a curing medium to retain the moisture, the entire surface of the concrete shall be kept damp by applying water with a nozzle that so atomizes the flow that a mist and not a spray is formed, until the surface of the concrete is covered with the curing medium. The moisture from the nozzle shall not be applied under pressure directly upon the concrete in a quantity sufficient to cause a flow or wash the surface. At the expiration of the curing period the concrete surface shall be cleared of all curing mediums. When concrete bridge decks and flat slabs are to be cured without the use of a moisture retaining medium, the entire surface of the bridge deck or slab shall be kept damp by the application of water with an atomizing nozzle as specified in the preceding paragraph until the concrete has set, after which the entire surface of the concrete shall be sprinkled continuously with water for a period of not less than seven (7) days.

• Curing Compound Method

Surface exposed to the air may be cured by the application of an impervious membrane if approved by the Engineer. The membrane-forming compound used shall consist of a practically colourless liquid. The use of any membrane forming compound that will alter the natural colour of the concrete or impart a slippery surface to any wearing surface shall be prohibited. The compound shall be applied with a pressure spray in such a manner as to cover the entire concrete surface with a uniform film, and shall be of such character that it will harden within 30 minutes after application. The amount of compound applied shall be ample to seal the surface of the concrete thoroughly. Power operated spraying equipment shall be equipped with an operational pressure gauge and means of controlling the pressure. The curing compound shall be applied to the concrete following the surface finishing operation immediately after the moisture sheen begins to disappear from the surface, but before any drying shrinkage or craze cracks begin to appear. In the event of any delay in the application of curing compound which results in any drying or cracking of the surface. Application of water with an atomizing nozzle as specified under “Water Method” shall be started immediately and shall be continued until application of the compound which shall not be applied over any free standing water surface. Should the film of compound be damaged from any cause before the expiration of seven (7) days after the concrete is placed in the case of structures. The damaged portion shall be repaired immediately with additional compound.




Curing compounds shall not hard settle in storage. They shall not be diluted or altered in any manner after manufacture. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition. If the compound has not been used within one hundred twenty (120) days after the date of manufacture, the Engineer may require additional testing before use to determine compliance to requirements. An anti-settling agent or combination of anti-settling agents shall be incorporating the curing compound to prevent caking. The curing compound shall be packaged in clean barrels or steel containers or shall be supplied from a suitable storage tank located at the job-suit. On site storage tanks shall have a permanent system designed to completely re-disperse any settled material without introducing air or any other foreign substance. Containers shall be well sealed with ring seals and lug type crimp lids. The linings of the containers shall be of a character that will resist the solvent of the curing compound. Each container shall be of a character that will resist the solvent of the curing compound. Each container shall be labelled with the manufacture’s name, specification number, batch number, number of gallons, and date of manufacture. The label shall also warn that the curing compound shall be well stirred before use. When the curing compound is shipped in tanks or tank trucks, a shipping invoice shall accompany each load. The invoice shall contain the same information as that required here for container labels. Curing compound may be sampled by the Engineer at the source of supply and at the job-site.

• Reinforced Waterproof Paper Method

The exposed finished surfaces of concrete shall be sprayed with water, using a nozzle that so atomizes the flow that a mist and not a spray is formed, until the concrete has set, after which the waterproof paper shall be placed. The paper shall remain in place for a period of not less than 72 hours. Reinforced waterproof paper shall comply with ASTM C 171 specifications. it shall be composed of two sheets of Kraft paper cemented together with a bituminous adhesive and reinforced with fiber. The waterproof paper shall be formed into sheets of such width as to provide a complete cover of entire concrete surface. All joints in the sheets shall comply be securely cemented together in such a manner as to provide a waterproof joint. The joint seams shall have minimum lap of ten (10) cm. The sheets shall be securely weighted down by placing a bank of earth on the edges of the sheets or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer. Should any portion of the sheets be broken or damaged within seventy two (72) hours after being placed, the broken or damaged portions shall be immediately repaired with new sheets properly cemented into place.

• Forms-in-Place Method

Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining the forms in place. The forms shall remain in place for a minimum period of seven (7) days after the concrete has been placed, except that for members over five (5) cms in least dimension the forms shall be in place for a minimum period of five (5) days. Wooden forms shall be kept wet by watering during the curing period.

• Steam Method

After placing and vibration the concrete shall be allowed to attain its initial set before steam is applied. During the placing of concrete and application of steam, provision shall be made to prevent surface drying by means of a coating of approved material. The optimum curing temperature shall not exceed sixty five (65) degree C.




• Polyethylene Sheeting Method

The wet surface of fresh concrete shall be covered with white polyethylene sheeting as soon as possible without marring the surface and should cover all exposed surfaces of the concrete. The edges of the sheeting shall be weighted securely with a continuous windrow of earth or any other means satisfactory to the Engineer to provide an airtight cover. Adjoining sheets shall overlap not less than thirty (30) cms. And the laps shall be securely weighted with earth, or any other means satisfactory to the Engineer to provide an air-tight cover.

• Wetted Burlap Method

The surface of the concrete shall be covered with Wetted Burlap Blankets as soon as the concrete has sufficiently hardened to prevent marking of the surface. At least two (2) layers of Wetted Burlap - Blanket shall be used and they shall be in contact with the edges of the concrete. That portion of material in contact with the edges shall be kept saturated with water. The Burlap, Blankets shall be maintained in place for a minimum period of seven (7) days.

c) Curing Structure

When determining the period of curing, days when the temperature was below five (5) centigrade shall be disregarded. All newly placed concrete for cast-in-place structures, other than highway bridge decks, shall be cured by one of the permitted methods, which shall be covered out. The curing compound method may be used on concrete surfaces which are to be buried underground and surfaces where only Ordinary Surface Finish is to be applied and on which a uniform colour is not required and which will not be visible from any public traveled way. The top surface of highway bridge decks shall be cured by both the curing compound method and by the water method. The curing compound shall be applied progressively during the deck finishing operation immediately after finishing operations are completed on each individual portion of the deck. The water cure shall be applied not later than four (4) hours after completion of the deck finishing or, for portions of the decks on which finishing is completed after normal working hours. The water cure be applied not later than 8.00 a.m. the following morning. When deemed necessary by the Engineer during periods of hot weather water shall be applied to concrete surfaces being cured by the curing compound method or by the forms in place method, until the Engineer determines that a cooling effect is no longer required.

d) Curing Precast Concrete Members

Precast concrete members shall be cured for not less than seven (7) days by the water method or by steam curing for a period in which 80% of strength achieved, at the option of the Contractor. Steam curing for precast members shall conform to the following provisions: After placement of the concrete, members shall be left for a minimum four (4) hours precasting period. To prevent moisture loss on exposed surfaces during the presteaming period, members shall be covered immediately after casting or the exposed surfaces shall be kept wet by fog spray or wet blankets. Enclosures for steam curing shall allow free circulation of steam about the member and shall be constructed to contain the live steam with a minimum moisture loss. The use of the tarpaulins or similar flexible covers will be permitted, provided they are kept in good repair and secured in such a manner to prevent the loss of steam and moisture. Steam at jets shall be low pressure and in a saturated condition. Steam at jets shall not impinge directly on the concrete, test cylinders, or forms. During application of the steam, the temperature rise within the enclosure shall not exceed twenty (20) degree C per hour. The curing temperature throughout the enclosure shall not exceed sixty five (65) degree C and shall be maintained at a constant level for a sufficient time necessary to develop the required




compressive strength. Control cylinders shall be covered to prevent moisture loss and shall be placed in a location where temperature is representative of the average temperature of the enclosure. The rate of subsequent cooling shall not exceed the rate of heating. Temperature recording devices that will provide an accurate continuous permanent record of the curing temperature shall be provided. A minimum of one temperature recording device per sixty (60) meters of continuous bed length will be required for checking temperature. Curing of precast concrete will be considered completed after a termination of the steam curing cycle.

e) Curing Precast Concrete Piles

All newly placed concrete precast piles, both conventionally reinforced and prestressed shall be cured by the “Water Method” except that the concrete shall be kept under moisture for at least fourteen (14) days. At the option of the Contractor steam curing may be used in which case the steam curing shall apply except that the concrete shall be kept wet for at least seven (7) days including the holding and steaming period.

f) Applied Loading

No load shall be applied to any part of a structure until the specified curing period has expired and, thereafter, until the approval of the Engineer has been obtained. The Engineer’s decision will be based on the type of load to be applied, the age of the concrete, the magnitude of stress induced and the propping of the structure.

No structure shall be opened to traffic until test cubes made from the concrete in all parts thereof have attained the specified minimum twenty eight (28) days strength.

4.9 Testing of Aggregates

Samples of fine and coarse aggregate to be used shall be selected by the Engineer. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to designate the source or sources of aggregate and to obtain the necessary samples and submit them for testing at least thirty (30) days before actual concreting operations are to begin. Samples of aggregates shall be obtained and tested in accordance with the following standard AASHTO methods:-

a) Sampling aggregates T-2 b) Sieve analysis T-27 c) Amount of material passing the No. 200 sieve T-11 d) Organic impurities T-21 e) Mortar strength T-71 f) Sodium sulphate soundness T-104 g) Friable particles T-112 h) Abrasion loss T-96 i) Specific gravity T-84 j) Absorption T-85 k) Production of plastic fines T-176 l) Aggregate durability index T-210 m) Sand Equivalent – T-17. n) Finess Modulus – T-27

Coarse aggregates shall be tested for grading once for every 100 cm3 and fine aggregate once for every 50 cm3

4.10 Testing of Compressive Strength

delivered to site, or more frequently if considered necessary by the Engineer.

Concrete compressive strength requirements consist of a minimum strength at the age of twenty eight (28) days and the minimum strength which must be attained before various loads or stresses are applied to the concrete.




The compressive strength of concrete will be determined from test cylinders, which have been fabricated from concrete sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 23 and AASHTO T 22. A set of six (6) cylinders shall be taken from each fifty (50) cubic meters of each class of concrete or fraction thereof placed each day, three (3) of the six (6) cylinders to be tested after seven (7) days and three (3) after twenty eight (28) days.

a) The minimum average 28 days test result of all samples tested at any time shall be the specified

twenty eight (28) days strength. b) No individual samples tested after 28 days shall show a test result lower than eighty five (85)

percent of the required twenty eight (28) days. c) Not more than 5% of all samples tested up to that date shall fall below the required 28 day

strength.

Concrete represented by any single test cylinders that fails to comply with the requirement under (b) above will be rejected unless the Contractor at his expense, provides evidence that the strength and quality of the concrete placed in the work are acceptable. If such evidence consists of tests made on cores taken from the work, the cores shall be obtained and tested in accordance with the specifications of AASHTOT-24.

Test results of the cores shall meet the following requirements:-

a) Average test result of the cores shall be less than the minimum required twenty eight (28) days

strength. Such that average shoulder >95% of the 25 days strength. b) No individual core shall show strength less than Ninety five (95) percent of the required twenty

eight (28) days strength.

Should the above test results fail to comply with the requirements, concrete of that particular pour shall be rejected and removed as directed by the Engineer. Further more contractor shall redesign the concrete mix for approval of the Engineer. In case, seven (7) days strength shows less than seventy (70) percent of the twenty eight (28) days strength (in case of type-I cement), Engineer may stop further work on that particular portion of concrete, unless twenty eight (28) days strength gives satisfactory results.

4.11 Trial Batches for Mix Productions The placing of concrete shall not begin until trial batches of the mix design to be used have been produced by the Contractor and tested and approved by the Engineer. The trial mix proportions shall be such that the average strength of five (5) consecutive test cylinders shall be 20% higher than the specified twenty eight (28) days strength and no individual test cylinder shall be below the specified strength. When concrete compressive strength is specified as a pre-requisite to applying loads or stresses to a concrete structure or member, test cylinders will be cured under conditions similar to those at the casting site. The compressive strength of concrete determined for such purposes will be evaluated on the basis of individual tests.


5.1 Measurement

The quantity of concrete to be paid for shall be as per the BOQ item of concrete of the various classes complete in place and accepted. In measuring the volume of concrete to be paid for, the dimension to be applied shall be those shown on the Drawings except where others ordered by the Engineer in writing. Deductions from the theoretical volume of concrete shall be made for the volumes of draining holes, weep holes, pipes and conduits, etc., in case where their cross-sectional areas exceed 500 square centimeters.




The measurement shall not include any concrete used in the construction of cofferdams or false work, or anywhere else by that Contractor to facilitate his works. The volume involved in fillets, scorings, or chamfers ten square centimeters in cross-sectional area or less shall be disregarded when measuring the quantity of concrete to be paid for. Concrete for railings, pipe culverts, etc., is not to be measured under this item, but under separate items.

5.2 Payment

The accepted quantity measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price respectively for the pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities which prices and payment shall be full compensation for Material, Labour equipment/plant concrete quality tests and any incidentals to complete the activity, also for such works as curing, surface finishing and/or rendering as required, formation of construction joints and any such work necessary to complete the item except works that are paid for under other pay items. For all concrete structures or portions, thereof, no separate measurement or payment shall be made for false work, centering, formwork or any other temporary work to complete the concrete structure or portion thereof, payment for all such temporary works shall be deemed to be included in the contract price paid under various items of concrete work.




A. GENERAL NOTES

PP RREECCAASS TT CCOONNCCRREETTEE

1. GENERAL

1. Precast concrete units shall be designed and fabricated by an experienced and approved

precast concrete manufacturer. The manufacturer shall have been regularly and continuously engaged in the manufacture of precast concrete units similar to that indicated in the project specifications or drawings for at least 10 years.

2. The contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate access to the site to facilitate hauling, storage and proper handling of the precast concrete units

3. Precast concrete units shall be installed to the lines and grades shown in the contract

documents or otherwise specified.

4. Precast concrete units shall be lifted by suitable lifting devices at points provided by the precast concrete producer.

5. Field modifications to the product shall not relieve the precast producer of liability regardless if such modifications result in the failure of the precast concrete unit.

2. SUBMITTALS

The following items may be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer-in-charge for approval;

1. Preconstruction Submittals - Submit quality control procedures established by the precast

manufacturer.

2. Shop Drawings for Standard Precast Concrete Units for approval by the Engineer-in-charge.

3. Installation and construction information shall be included on shop Drawings.

4. Details of steel reinforcement size and placement as well as supporting design calculations shall be included in the submittals.

3. DESIGN / DESIGN DATA

1. Design standard precast concrete units to withstand indicated design load conditions in accordance with applicable industry design standards [ACI 318, ACI 350, ASTM and AASHTO].

2. Design must also consider stresses induced during handling, transportation and installation in order to avoid product cracking or other handling damage. Design loads for precast concrete units shall be indicated on the shop drawings.

3. The precast concrete producer shall supply precast concrete unit design calculations and concrete mix design proportions and appropriate mix design test data. Structural design calculations shall be signed by a licensed professional Engineer.

4. DURABILITY

1. Precast concrete units shall have a 28-day Cylinder compressive strength as follows, a) Precast prestressed column 4500 psi b) Precast wall panel 3000 psi c) Pedestal Column & footing 3000 psi d) R.C.C. wall / beam 3000 psi

2. REINFORCEMENT- All non prestressed reinforcement steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM-A615, Grade 60 having minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi.

3. All prestressed steel / wire strands shall conform to ASTM-A416 of Grade 250.




5. ANCHORAGE, LIFTING INSERTS AND DEVICES

For anchors, lifting inserts and other devices, the precast concrete producer shall provide product data sheets and proper installation instructions. The Precast concrete unit dimensions and safe working load shall be clearly indicated.

6. JOINTS AND SEALANTS

Joints and sealants between adjacent units shall be of the type and configuration indicated on shop drawings meeting specified design and performance requirements

7. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

The precast concrete producer shall submit a mix design for each strength and type of concrete that will be used. Submitted mix designs shall include the specification details.

8. TEST REPORTS

1. The precast concrete producer shall supply copies of material certifications and/or laboratory test reports, including mill tests and all other test data, for portland cement, blended cement, pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, silica fume, aggregate, admixtures, and curing compound proposed for use on this project.

2. The precast concrete producer shall submit copies of test reports showing that the mix has been

successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and will be suitable for the project conditions. Such tests may include compressive strength, flexural strength, plastic or hardened air content, freeze-thaw durability, abrasion and absorption. Special tests for precast concrete items shall be clearly detailed in the specifications.

B. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1. MANUFACTURE

1.1. Forms

Manufacturing precast concrete units shall be of the type and design consistent with industry standards and practices. They should be capable of consistently providing uniform products and dimensions. Forms shall be constructed so that the forces and vibrations to which the forms will be subjected cause no damage to the precast concrete unit. Forms shall be cleaned of concrete build-up after each use. Form release agents shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall not be allowed to build up on the form casting surfaces.

1.2. Reinforcement Applicable ASTM International and/or ACI 318 standards for placement and splicing Cages of reinforcement shall be fabricated either by tying the bars, wires or welded wire reinforcement into rigid assemblies or by welding, where permissible, in accordance with AWS D1.4. Reinforcing shall be positioned as specified by the design and so that the concrete cover conforms to requirements. The tolerance on concrete cover shall be one-third of that specified but not more than 1/2 in. Concrete cover shall not be less than 1/2 in., unless otherwise specified. Positive means shall be taken to assure that the reinforcement does not move significantly during the casting operations.

1.3. Embedded Items Embedded items shall be positioned at locations specified in the design documents. Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1 when necessary. Inserts, plates, weldments, lifting devices and other items to be embedded in precast concrete units shall be held rigidly in place so that they do not move significantly during casting operations.




1.4. Concrete

1.4.1 Concrete Mixing Mixing operations shall produce batch-to-batch uniformity of strength, consistency, and appearance.

1.4.2 Concrete Placing Conventional concrete shall be deposited into forms as near to its final location as practical. Self-consolidating concrete shall be placed in a manner in which it flows and consolidates without segregation or air entrapment. The free fall of the concrete shall be kept to a minimum. Concrete shall be consolidated in such a manner that segregation of the concrete is minimized and honeycombed areas are kept to a minimum. Consolidation efforts are often not required when using self-consolidating concrete. Vibrators used to consolidate concrete shall have frequencies and amplitudes sufficient to produce well-consolidated concrete.

1.4.3 Cold Weather Concreting Recommendations for cold weather concreting are given in detail ACI 306 R. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. All concrete materials and all reinforcement, forms, fillers, and ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost. Frozen materials or materials containing ice shall not be used. In cold weather the temperature of concrete at the time of placing shall not be below 45°F. Concrete that freezes before its compressive strength reaches 500 psi shall be discarded.

1.4.4 Hot Weather Concreting Recommendations for hot weather concreting are given in ACI 305 R. During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to constituents, production methods, handling, placing, protection, and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation that could impair required strength or serviceability of the member or structure. The temperature of concrete at the time of placing shall not exceed 90° F.

1.4.5 Concrete Curing Commence curing operations immediately following the initial set of the concrete and completion of surface finishing.

1.4.6 Curing by Moisture Retention Moisture shall be prevented from evaporating from exposed surfaces until adequate strength for stripping the precast concrete unit from the forms is reached by one of the following methods: Cover with polyethylene sheets a minimum of 6 mils thick (ASTM C 171) _Cover with burlap or other absorptive material and keep continually moist _Use of a membrane-curing compound applied at a rate not to exceed 200 sq. ft. per gallon, or per manufacturers’ recommendations (ASTM C 309) [Surfaces that will be exposed to weather during service shall be cured as above a minimum of [ ] days. Forms shall be considered effective in preventing evaporation from the contact surfaces. If air temperature is below 50°F the curing period shall be extended.

1.4.7 Curing with Heat and Moisture Concrete shall not be subjected to steam or hot air until after the concrete has attained its initial set. Steam, if used, shall be applied within a suitable enclosure, which permits free circulation of the steam in accordance with ACI 517.2R. If hot air is used for curing, precautions shall be taken to prevent moisture loss from the concrete. The temperature of the concrete shall not be permitted to exceed 150° F. These requirements do not apply to products cured with steam under pressure in an autoclave.




1.4.8 Surface Finish Unformed surfaces of wet-cast precast concrete products shall be finished as specified. If no finishing procedure is specified, such surfaces shall be finished using a strike-off to level the concrete with the top of the form.

C. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Qualifications of Manufacturer Manufacturer shall have a minimum of Ten (10) years of production experience in architectural precast concrete work of the quality and scope required on this project.

2. Qualifications of Erector Erection of precast concrete panels shall be performed by an established firm regularly engaged for at least two (2) years in the erection of precast concrete panels of sizes similar to those required on this project. Perform inspection of panels under the supervision of a foreman employed by the erection firm for this type of work.

3. Testing All testing shall be performed by the manufacturer’s in-house quality control inspectors and in accordance with all provisions, Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products as published by PCI.

D. QUALITY CONTROL The precast concrete producer shall show that the following quality control tests are performed as required and in accordance with the ASTM International standards indicated. Slump: A slump test shall be performed for each 150 cu yd of concrete produced per mix design, or once a day, whichever comes first. Slump tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slump flow tests on self-consolidating concrete mixes shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 1611. Temperature: The temperature of fresh concrete shall be measured when slump or air content tests are made and when compressive test specimens are made in accordance with ASTM C 1064 Compressive Strength: At least four compressive strength specimens shall be made for each 150 cubic yards of concrete of each mix design in accordance with the following applicable ASTM standards; C 31, C 39, C 192, C 497 [no-slump concrete]. Air Content: Tests for air content shall be made on air-entrained, wet-cast concrete for each 150 cu yd of concrete, per mix design, but not less often than once each day when air-entrained concrete is used. The air content shall be determined in accordance with either ASTM C 231 or ASTM C 173 for normal weight aggregates and ASTM C 173 for lightweight aggregates. Density (Unit Weight): Tests for density shall be performed a minimum of once per week to verify the yield of batch mixes. Density tests shall be performed for each 100 cu yd of lightweight concrete in accordance with ASTM C 138. Density tests shall be performed for each 100 cu yd of concrete per mix design, but not less often than once per day when volumetric batch equipment is used.

E. INSPECTION The customer or customer’s agent (specifier) may place an inspector in the plant when the units covered by this specification are being manufactured. The precast concrete producer shall give notice of days prior to the time the precast concrete units will be available for plant inspection.




F. SUBMITTALS

1. Samples a). Before starting the manufacture of precast concrete panels, submit for review to the

Architect/Engineer one (1) sample which represents the finished product and which clearly indicates the color and texture of the panels.

b). Samples are to be 12" x 12" face size by 1-½" thick.

c). Label each sample to indicate name of manufacturer and finish code.

d). After standard samples are accepted for color and texture, submit three (3) mock-up panels at least 4'-0" x 5'-0" for review of the Architect/Engineer to show the extreme maximum variations which may occur in the color and texture of the production pieces.

e). The mock-up panels are to be the standard of quality for precast concrete panel work, when they are accepted by the Architect/Engineer.

f). The Architect/Engineer should visit the precast plant shortly after the start-up of production in order to inspect actual production pieces.

2. Shop Drawings General Contractor shall expedite the submittal with the Architect to conform with

allotted shop drawing approval time, shown on the precast concrete supplier's order acknowledgment.

The content shall be as follows: Unit shapes (elevations and sections) and dimensions. Finishes Joint and connection details. Lifting and erection inserts. Location, dimensional tolerances and details of anchorage devices that are embedded in or attached to structure or other construction. Other items cast into panels. Handling procedures, plans and/or elevations showing panel location and sequence of erection for special conditions. Relationship to adjacent material Show location of unit by same identification mark placed on panel. Individual panel details may be submitted at the request of the Architect/Engineer. It is recognized that a review of the panel details prior to actual release for production will greatly impact the construction schedule.

3. Test Reports Submit, upon request, reports on materials, compressive strength tests on concrete and water absorption test on units.

4. Design Calculations Submit upon request structural design calculations.

5. Design Modifications Submit design modifications necessary to meet performance requirements and field coordination. Variations in details or materials shall not adversely affect the appearance, durability or strength of the units. Maintain general design concept without altering the size of members, profiles and alignment.




A. MATERIALS

PART II - PRODUCTS

1. Portland Cement

a). ASTM C150, Type I or III cement. White or gray.

b). Use same brand, type and source of supply of cement for all exposed precast concrete.

2. Air Entraining Agent ASTM C979

3. Aggregates

a). Facing and Backing Aggregates

ASTM C33 and ASTM C330 Provide fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for the entire job. They shall be clean, hard, strong, durable and inert, free of staining or deleterious material.

4. Water a). Free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete. Potable water is ordinarily

acceptable.

5. Reinforcing Steel a). Reinforcing bars

New billet deformed steel, grade 40 or grade 60, as per ASTM A615. Weldable deformed steel, as per ASTM A706. Galvanized reinforcing bars, as per ASTM A775. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars, as per ASTM A775.

b). Welded wire fabric Welded steel, as per ASTM A185 Welded deformed steel, as per ASTM A497 Epoxy coated welded wire fabric, as per ASTM A884. Fabricated steel bar or rod mats, as per ASTM A184 Prestressing strand, as per ASTM A416, grade 270.

6. Cast-in Anchors a). Materials

Structural steel, as per ASTM A36 Stainless steel, as per ASTM A666, type 304, grade Carbon Steel plate, as per ASTM A283, grade Malleable iron castings, as per ASTM A47, grade Carbon steel castings, as per ASTM A27, grade 60 - 30 Bolts, as per ASTM A307 or A325 Welded headed studs, as per AWS D1.1, Chapter 4, Part F

b). Finish

Shop primer: FS TT-P-86, oil base paint, type I or SSPC-paint 14, or manufacturer's standard. Galvanized: hot dip galvanized (ASTM A153), electroplated or metallized. Cadmium coating, as per ASTM A165.




Zinc rich coating: MIL-P-21035, self curing, one (1) component, sacrificial organic coating.

7. Grout Cement grout: Portland cement, sand and water sufficient for placement and hydration. Non-shrink grout: Premixed, packaged ferrous and non-ferrous aggregate shrink resistant grout.

B. MIXES a). Water-Cement Ratio

Maximum of five (5) gallons of water per 94 lbs. of cement.

b). Air Entrainment Minimum 3% not more than 6% when concrete is placed.

c). Salt Calcium Chloride and other ionic compounds which are electrolytic will not be permitted in concrete mix.

d). Super Plasticizer

Can be used at manufacturer's option.

e). Concrete Proportions Selection of proportions for concrete shall be based on the methodology presented in ACI 211.1 for normal weight concrete, ACI 211.2 for lightweight concrete and ACI 211.3 for no-slump concrete. The concrete proportions shall be developed using the same type and brand of cement, the same type and brand of pozzolan, the same type and gradation of aggregates, and the same type and brand of admixture that will be used in the manufacture of precast concrete units for the project. Accelerators containing calcium chloride shall not be used in precast concrete containing reinforcing steel or other embedded metal items. Upon request, the precast concrete producer shall submit a mix design for each strength and type of concrete that will be used. Submitted mix designs shall include the quantity, type, brand and applicable data sheets for all mix design constituents as well as documentation indicating conformance with applicable reference specifications. The use of self-consolidating concrete is permitted provided that mix design proportions and constituents meet the requirements of this specification.

f). Water-Cement Ratio Concrete that will be exposed to freezing and thawing shall contain entrained air and shall have water-cement ratios of 0.45 or less. Concrete which will not be exposed to freezing, but which is required to be watertight, shall have a water-cement ratio of 0.48 or less if the concrete is exposed to fresh water or 0.45 or less if exposed to brackish water or sea water. For corrosion protection, reinforced concrete exposed to deicer salts, brackish water or seawater shall have a water-cement ratio of 0.40 or less.

g). Air Content The air content of concrete that will be exposed to freezing conditions shall be within the limits given below.

Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size (in)

Air Content %

Severe Exposure Moderate Exposure 3/8 6.0 to 9.0 4.5 to 7.5 1/2 5.5 to 8.5 4.0 to 7.0




3/4 4.5 to 7.5 3.5 to 6.5 1 4.5 to 7.5 3.0 to 6.0

1-1/2 4.5 to 7.0 3.0 to 6.0 * For specified compressive strengths greater than 5000 psi, air content may be reduced 1%

C. MANUFACTURING

Minimum ultimate compressive strength of precast concrete after 28 days shall be a minimum of as shown in the General Notes of Tender Drawing & BOQ. Water absorption of architectural precast concrete panels shall not exceed a maximum of 6% by weight. Compression test for precast concrete Number of tests: Make compression test for each day's production of each type of concrete. Two test cylinders should be made for each load of concrete delivered to the casting bed. Specimens Provide test specimens for compression test at 7 and 28 days. Obtain concrete for specimens from the actual production batch they will represent. 6" x 12" (or 4" x 8") molded concrete cylinder meeting applicable requirements of ASTM C31. 2" x 2" molded or sawed cubes. Test results will be reduced by 20%. Finishes Exposed face surfaces of precast concrete panels: Finished to match the approved sample panel. Back surfaces of precast concrete panels: Should match approved sample panel. Curing (Wet Cast) Form cure precast units until a sufficient stripping strength has developed. Maintain precast units at a minimum temperature of 33° F until 50% of the design strength has been reached.

Panel Identification Mark each precast concrete panel to correspond to the code markings appearing on the shop drawings for panel location. Do not mark on the finish surfaces. Maintain a record of casting date.

PART III - EXECUTION A. JOBSITE CONDITIONS

Before starting to erect the precast concrete panels, the General Contractor shall verify that the structure and anchorage inserts not within the tolerances required to erect the panels have been corrected. Determine field conditions before commencing erection.

B. PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE Delivery and Handling Deliver all architectural precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times as to assure the continuation of erection. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid stresses which would cause cracking or damage.




Lift or support units only at the points shown on the shop drawings. Place non-staining resilient spacers of even thickness between each unit. Support units during shipment on non-staining shock-absorbing material. Do not place units directly on the ground. Storage at Jobsite Store and protect units to prevent contact with soil, staining and physical damage. Store units, unless otherwise specified, with non-staining resilient supports located in the same positions as when transported. Store units on firm, level and smooth surfaces to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage. Place stored units so that identification marks are discernible and so that product can be inspected.

C. ERECTION

Clear, well-drained unloading areas and road access around and in the structure shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor, to include providing and maintaining accessible roadways in which cranes and trucks can maneuver under their own power. Contractor shall erect adequate barricades, warning lights or signs to safeguard traffic in the immediate area of hoisting and handling operations. Any overhead obstructions interfering with the erection must be removed by others and any underground equipment installed where cranes and trucks must maneuver is installed at the risk of the trade requiring them and be protected by that contractor. Set precast concrete units level, plumb, square and true within the allowable tolerances. The General Contractor shall provide true, level bearing surfaces on all fields placed concrete which are to receive precast concrete units. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing offset lines and elevations in sufficient detail to allow installation. Provide temporary supports and bracing, as required, to maintain position, stability and alignment as units are being permanently connected. Non-cumulative tolerances for location of precast concrete units shall be as follows:

Plan location from building grid datum ± ½” Plan location from centerline of steel ± ½” Top elevation for nominal top elevation Exposed individual panel ± ¼” Non-exposed individual panel ± ½”. Exposed relative to adjacent panel ¼” Non-exposed relative to adjacent panel ½”

Support elevation from nominal elevation Maximum low ½” Maximum high ¼” Maximum plumb variation over height of structure or 100 ft. whichever is less 1” Plumb in any 10 ft. of element height ¼” Maximum job in alignment of matching edges ¼” Joint width (governs over joint taper) ± ¼” Joint taper maximum ⅜” Joint taper over 10 ft. in length ¼” Maximum jog in alignment of matching faces ¼” Differential bowing or camber as erected between adjacent members of the same design ¼”




Set non-load bearing units dry without mortar, attaining specified joint dimension with, steel or plastic cement spacing shims. Fasten precast concrete units in place by bolting and/or welding, completing dry packed joints, grouting sleeves and pockets and/or placing cast-in-place concrete joints, as indicated on approved erection drawings. Temporary lifting and handling devices cast into the precast concrete units shall be completely removed or if protectively treated remove only where they interfere with the work of any other trade.

D. REPAIR Repair exposed exterior surface to match color and texture of surrounding concrete. Adhere large patch to hardened concrete with bonding agent.

E. CLEANING Precast concrete panels will be clean upon completion of erection and leaving the job site. After installation and joint treatment the General Contractor should protect the architectural precast concrete panels against damage and maintain the cleanliness of the panels. Any final wash-down of the precast architectural panels should be the responsibility of the General Contractor.

F. PROTECTION All work and materials of other trades shall be adequately protected by the Erector at all times. A fire extinguisher, of an approved type and in operating condition, shall be located within reach of all burning and welding operations at all times.

G. WARRANTY

The Precast Concrete Manufacturer shall guarantee the precast concrete products against defects in material and workmanship, for a period of minimum one (1) year, after acceptance of the units by the owner.




1. SCOPE

SS TTEEEELL RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT

The work under this section of specifications consists of furnishing, cutting, fabricating, bending and placing steel reinforcement and Welded wire, fabric in concrete structures or elsewhere as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The scope of this section of specification is covered with detailed specifications as laid down herein.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of the following Pakistan, British and ASTM Standards are relevant to these specifications wherever applicable. Pakistan Standard PS 241 Tensile Testing of Steel PS 244 Bend test for Steel PS 580 Rolled deformed Steel bars (intermediate grade) for concrete reinforcement. PS 605 Rolled deformed steel bars (hard grade) for concrete reinforcement. PS 606 Rolled formed Steel bars (structural grade) for concrete reinforcement. PS 607 General technical delivery requirement for steel

British Standard

BS 693 General requirements for Oxy-acetylene welding of mild steel BS 785 Hot rolled bars and hard drawn wire for the reinforcement of concrete BS 1856 General requirement for the metal arc welding of mild steel BS 4449 Hot rolled steel bars for reinforcement of concrete BS 4461 Cold worked steel bars for reinforcement of concrete BS 4466 Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the reinforcement of concrete

ASTM Standard A 305 Minimum requirement for the deformations of deformed steel bars for concrete

reinforcement A 615 Deformed billet steel bars for concrete reinforcement. In addition to the above, the latest editions of other Pakistan Standards, British standards, American Concrete Institute Standards, American Society for Testing and Materials Standards and other standard as may be specified by the Engineer for Special Material and construction are also relevant.

3. MATERIAL AND SIZE OF BARS

i. Reinforcement for concrete shall conform to the respective Pakistan, British, ASTM, or other Standards as specified in the Drawings and in the Contract Documents or as may be specified by the Engineer.

ii. Unless otherwise specified, all plain reinforcing bars shall comply with the requirements of BS

4449 for plain mild steel bars and shall have a minimum characteristic strength of 275 MPA. iii. Unless otherwise specified, all deformed reinforcing bars shall comply with the requirements of

BS 4461 for deformed cold worked new stock billet steel bars and shall have minimum characteristic strength of 460 MPA.

iv. Not used.

v. If the reinforcement is supplied by the Employer, the Contractor should inform the Employer of his requirements much before its use in construction.

vi. Reinforcement of all types is to be stored at on site in an approved manner so as to avoid

damage.




vii. If the reinforcement is supplied by the Employer, the Contractor should report immediately on receipt of any consignment, any deviation from the standard of three enforcement bars beyond those allowed in respective standards. If the Engineer directs, the Contractor shall test the samples of reinforcement at his cost and submit to him the test report.

viii. Steel wire mesh reinforcement shall conform to requirements of ASTM Designation A 185 - 64

or BS 4483, 1969: Standard Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for concrete reinforcement. It shall be used where shown on the Drawings.

ix. Reinforcement shall be free from all loose or flaky rust and mill scale, or coating, including ice,

and any other substance that would reduce or destroy the bend. Reduced sections steel reinforcement shall not be used.

4. DELIVERY & STORAGE

Steel reinforcement bars shall be kept in bundles firmly secured and tagged. Each bar or bundle of bars shall be identified by marks stamped on hot or cold or painted on or by any other means, The identifying marks shall contain the following information: Name of the producer or his trade. Standard to which the bars have been manufactured. The class type and strength The diameter The number of the test certificate The method of storage shall be approved by the Engineer. Reinforcing bars shall be stored in racks or platforms above the surface of ground and shall be protected free from scaling, rusting, oiling, coatings, damage, contamination and structural defects prior to placement in works. Bars of different diameters and grades of steel reinforcement shall be kept separately.

5. BAR BENDING SCHEDULES The Contractor shall prepare bar bending schedules of all the reinforcing steel bars and these bar bending schedules shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the bar bending schedules before starting actual bar bending works.

6. FABRICATING, BENDING & PLACING

i. All metal reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale, loose rust, mud, oil, grease, or other harmful matter immediately before the concrete is placed.

ii. Reinforcement is to be accurately placed as shown in the drawings, and secured against

displacement by using 16 gauges G.I wire ties or suitable slips at intersections and supported from the formwork by using concrete, metal or plastic chairs and spacers or hangers of an approved pattern. Where concrete blocks are used for ensuring the cover, they shall be made of mortar not leaner than 1 part of cement to 2 parts of sand.

iii. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall be fabricated in accordance with the dimensions shown in the bar bending schedule approved by the Engineer.

iv. The cutting tolerance for all bars shall be ± 25 mm. v. Where an overall or an internal dimension of a bent bar is specified in the schedule, the bending

tolerance, unless otherwise stated, shall be as in following Table.

Table Bending Tolerances

Dimensions of bent bars Tolerance

Over Up to & including Plus Minus mm mm mm mm -- 1000 5 5

1000 2000 5 10 2000 -- 5 25




vi. Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances:

1. Concrete cover to formed surfaced + 5 mm 2. Minimum spacing between bars ± 5 mm 3. Top bars in slabs and beams

a. Members 8 inch deep or less ± 5 mm b. Members more than 8 inch

But not over 24 inch deep ± 10 mm Members more than 24 inch deep ± 25 mm

4. Crosswise members : Spaced evenly within : 50 mm 5. Lengthwise members +50 mm

vii. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or

embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter or enough to exceed the above tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to approval of Engineer.

viii. Vertical bars in columns shall be offset at least one bar diameter at lapped splices. To ensure

proper placement, templates shall be furnished for all column dowels. ix. Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material.

No bars shall be bent twice in the same place, nor shall they be straightened after bending. Unless permitted, by Engineer, reinforcement shall not be bent after being partially embedded in hardened concrete. Bars which depend for their strength on cold working shall not be heated for any reason. Other kinds of reinforcement larger than 40 mm in dia: may be bent by the use of heat at cherry - red heat (not exceeding 840 Bars) bent shall not be cooled by quenching.

x. No splice of reinforcement shall be made except as shown on the working drawings. xi. Welding shall be permitted for bars only under suitable conditions and with suitable safeguards

in accordance with BS 693, BS 1856, or AWS D 12.1, provided the type of reinforcement bar has the required welding properties. Tack welding may be used to fix in position bars that cross each other, only with prior approval of the Engineer.

xii. Exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions is to be effectively protected

from corrosion. Protection is also to be provided to reinforcement partly built into concrete where the exposed pat is to be built into later concrete.

xiii. No concreting is to be carried out until the reinforcement has been checked and approved by

the Engineer. xiv. Welding shall be done as in section Structural Steel Works. xv. All detailing shall be done as per ACI standards ACI - 315 and ACI - 318. xvi. Concrete clear cover for reinforcing steel shall be as follows:

Structural Members Minimum Cover, inch a) Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 75 mm b) Concrete exposed to earth or weather:-

Bar Dia > 20 mm 50 mm Bar Dia > 16 mm 40 mm




c) Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground Slabs, Walls 20 mm Beams, Columns (Primary Reinforcement) 40 mm

All reinforcing steel shall be held firmly in place before and during the placing of concrete by means of wires and supports adequate to prevent displacement during the course of construction.

7. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT 7.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, no separate measurement and payment will be made for providing and installing chairs, supports, hooks, spacers, binding wires and laps not shown on Drawings including wastage and rolling margin, the cost of which shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bill of quantities.

7.2 Measurement

All measurements of acceptably completed works of reinforcement shall be made in linear dimensions end to end according to the cut lengths shown in bar bending schedules approved by the Engineer and converted into theoretical weight as per schedules.

7.3 Payment Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of reinforcement on the basis of unit rate per kg quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all the works related to the item.




BBRRIICCKK MMAASS OONNRRYY

1. DESCRIPTION

This work shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment and labour required for constructing brickwork as shown on the drawings and in accordance with these specifications.


2.1 Portland Cement

Portland cement shall conform to the requirements.

2.2 Sand

Sand for mortar used in brickwork shall conform to the requirement for the fine aggregate except that the grading shall be according to AASHTO M 45.

2.3 Water

The water used in the preparation of mortar shall be free from objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter, salts or other impurities and should conform to the requirements. No water shall be used without the approval in writing of the Engineer.

2.4 Mortar

The mortar for all brickwork shall consist of one (1) part of Portland cement to three (3) parts of sand by volume and of sufficient water to produce the proper consistency for the intended use.

2.5 Bricks

The size of the bricks shall be standard size (9" x 4½” x 3") 22.86 cm x 11.43 cm x 7.62 cm. They shall be well-burnt without being vitrified. They shall be of uniform colour, regular in shape and size with sharp and square corners and parallel faces. They must be homogeneous in texture and emit a clear ringing sound when struck. They shall be free from flaws and cracks. They shall not absorb water more than 1/6th of their weight after being soaked for one hour, and shall show no signs of efflorescence on drying. Compressive strength shall not be less than 105.48kg/sq.cm (1500 psi).


3.1 Mixing of Mortar

The methods and equipment used for mixing mortar shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be such that each ingredient entering into the mortar can be separately measured. If a mixer is used, it shall be of approved design and the mixing time after all the ingredients are in the mixer, except the full amount of water, shall not be less than two minutes. Mortar shall be mixed only in sufficient quantities for immediate use. All mortar not used within thirty (30) minutes after addition of the water to the mix shall be wasted. Retempering of mortar will not be allowed. Mixing troughs and pans shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed at the end of each day's work. Hand mixing of the mortar shall not be allowed.

3.2 Brick Laying

Brickwork shall not be placed during heavy or prolonged rain which may wash the mortar from the bricks. Mortar already spread and diluted by rain shall be removed and replaced before restarting the work. The Contractor shall maintain a maximum and minimum thermometer in a position close to the works for measuring the atmospheric shade temperature. Mortars shall not be mixed when the air temperature is at or below 3 degrees centigrade and falling or below 1 degrees centigrade and rising. The Contractor shall take precautions to ensure that the temperature of new work is maintained above freezing point for a period of at least 4 days after laying, and for protecting the work against any harmful effects of frost, Calcium Chloride or frost resisting additives shall not be used.




All bricks to be used in brickwork with mortar joints shall be immersed in water from three (3) to four (4) hours before use. All bricks shall be skillfully laid with level courses uniform joints, square corners, plumb verticals and true surface, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings. All walls and abutments shall be provided with weep holes. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the weep holes shall be placed at the lowest points where free outlets can be obtained and shall be spaced not more than two (2) meters center to center. All surfaces exposed to weather, shall be struck and deep cut pointed to give a workmanlike appearance and to seal the cavities in mortar joints.

3.3 Curing

All brickwork shall be cured for at least seven (7) days after laying. The curing method shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.


4.1 Measurement

Measurement of brickwork shall be made to the lines of the structures as shown on the Drawings or as modified by the Engineer for the appropriate items in which such brickwork is incorporated. The quantities to be measured shall be as per the item of brickwork laid and accepted.

4.2 Payment

The accepted quantities measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price shown in the Bill of Quantities against this item, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labour, equipment and incidentals for performing all the work involved under Brick Work.




1. SCOPE

CCEEMMEENNTT PP LLAASS TTEERR

The work under this section of the Specification consists of furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in connection with providing and installation of cement plaster, and specified external rendering complete in strict accordance with this section of the Specifications and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and condition of the Contract. The scope of this section of Specification is covered with detailed Specifications as laid down herein.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of following Pakistan, British & ASTM standards are relevant to these specifications wherever applicable. Pakistan Standard PS 232 Ordinary Portland Cement ISO (International Organization for Standardization) R 597 Definitions and terminology of cement R 679 Method of testing strength of cements, Compressive and flexural strength of plastic

mortar (Rilem - (embureau method) R 680 Chemical analysis of cement & main constituents of Portland cement R 681 Chemical analysis of cement - mixer Constituents of Portland cement R 682 Chemical analysis of cements - determination of sulphur as sulphide

ASTM (American Society for testing and Material) C 144 Aggregate for Masonry mortar C 631 Bonding compounds for interior plastering BSI (British Standards Institution) BS 812 Methods for sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sands and fillers BS 1199 Sands for external renderings internal plastering with lime and Portland cement and

floor screeds. BS 1369 Metal lathing (steel) for plastering BS 5262 External rendered finishes BS 5492 Internal plastering

3. GENERAL

a). Except as may be otherwise shown on surfaces specified, all plaster work, both internal and external shall be Sulphate resisting cement plaster of the require d thickness as shown on the drawings.

b). Plastering shall not commence unit all sanitary pipes, rackets, frames and all sorts of inserts and

embedded items are fixed in position. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make sure that all such wok is carried out before starting of plaster work. Chiseling and repairing of cement plaster shall not be permitted without the approval of the Engineer.

c). Sample of materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to use in the works.

4. MATERIAL

a). Cement for plaster shall be Sulphate resisting cement (BS 4027 or PS 612) as specified and shall conform to requirements specified in the section “Plain and Reinforced Concrete".

b). Sand for plaster shall comply with the requirements of BS 1199, BS 1200 or the draft Pakistan

Standard "Sand for Plaster' as directed by the Engineer.




c). Water for plaster shall conform to requirements specified in the section for "Plain and reinforced concrete".

d). All materials and workmanship for plaster, not explained in these Specifications, shall comply with the requirements of relevant BS CP 211 and CP 221 as directed by the Engineer.

e). All plaster works shall be water proof with 1:4 cement mixed with approved water proofing

agent. 5. PROPORTIONING AND MIXING

a). Measurement of materials by volume shall be by containers of known capacity to maintain consistent proportions. No lumpy or caked material shall be used. Mixing equipment boxes and tools shall be clean. Materials shall be proportioned as specified on the Drawings, in the Bill of Quantities or as directed by the Engineer. Mixing shall be continuous until all ingredients are evenly distributed and thoroughly mixed.

b). Only limited water shall be added for proper workability and such quantity of mortar shall be

prepared which can be consumed in thirty minutes after preparation. Preparation of mortar in bulk quantity for use during the entire day or for any other time more than that stipulated above is expressly prohibited. Remembering shall not be permitted and all mortar which has begun to stiffen shall be discarded.

6. PREPARATION OF SURFACE TO BE PLASTERED

Concrete surface to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all grease, form oil and other surface impurities which will otherwise adversely affect the adhesion of plaster to the surface concerned. The surface of all concrete shall be lightly hacked by approved means to give the required key for plastering.

7. APPLICATION OF PLASTER

a). The plaster of thickness less than the specified thickness shall be rejected. If the plaster is to be more than 13 mm thick, it shall be done in two coats. The surface of first coat shall be made rough before the second coat is applied. The plaster shall not have wavy surface and shall be perfectly in plumb. The edges and corners shall represent a straight line. The plaster shall be kept wet continuously for at least ten (10) days. No extra payment shall be allowed for jambs, junctions, corners, edges, round surfaces or for more than one layer of plaster required due to any unevenness in the work done by the Contractor.

b). Plaster containing cracks, blisters, pits, discoloration or any defects shall not be acceptable. Any

such plaster or loose plaster shall be removed and replaced with plaster in conformity with these specifications and as additionally directed by the Engineer.

Contractor shall cut out and patch all defective work at his own cost. All damaged plaster shall

be patched as directed by the Engineer. Patching plaster shall match appearance of and shall be finished level with adjoining plaster.

8. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT

Plaster shall be measured as executed in number or square meters/ feet as shown on drawings and as directed by the Engineer. Payment shall be made for the accepted measured quantity on the basis of unit rate quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all the works related to the item.




1. GENERAL

PP AAIINNTTIINNGG

All painting and decorating materials shall be supplied in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Every possible precaution shall be taken to keep down dust before and during painting processes. No paint shall be applied to surface structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from condensation, efflorescence, etc., before the application of each coat. Primer or undercoated woodwork and metalwork should not be left in an exposed or unsuitable situation for an undue period before completing the painting process. No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions, such as rain, extreme humidity, dust storm, etc. Metal fittings such as ironmongery etc. not required to be painted shall first be fitted and then preparatory processes are commenced. When all painting is completed the fittings shall be cleaned and re-fixed in position. The contractor will be required to repaint, at his own expense, any work where the paint is incorrectly applied. The contractor shall be responsible for protecting from damage the paintwork and all other work during and after painting operations including the provision of all necessary dust sheets, covers, etc. Brushes, pails, bottles, etc., used in carrying out the work shall be clean and free from foreign matter. They shall be throughout cleaned before being used for different types or classes of material. The number of coats stated in this specification is the minimum, and the contractor must apply sufficient coats to achieve a proper even finish to the approval of the architect.

2. MATERIALS The decorating material shall be obtained from approved manufacturers and shall be supplied in the manufacturer’s sealed and branded containers. All materials must be thoroughly stirred before use, unless not recommended by the manufacturer. Details of mixing and application shall be in accordance with the specifications of the manufacturers concerned and to the approval of the Architect. The mixing of paints, etc., of different brands before or during application will not be permitted. No dilution of painting materials shall be allowed except strictly, as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved by the Architect. Mordant solution shall be of approved manufacture. Rust inhibitors shall be of approved manufacture. Stopping for woodwork to receive clear finish shall be tinted to match surrounding woodwork, to approval. Stopping for internal woodwork, plywood, hardboard, and fiberboard, shall be linseed oil putty to BS 544, tinted to match the color of the undercoat. Stopping for external woodwork shall be white lead paste and gold size well mixed. Thinners shall be approved turpentine or white spirit to BS 245 Priming paints shall be: a). for woodwork: leadless grey priming paint in accordance with the recommendations of the

decorative coating manufacturer; b). for steel work: red oxide priming paint in accordance with BS 2524 c). for galvanized, zinc or aluminum alloy surfaces: grey zinc chromate priming paint in accordance

with BS 3698 d). for plaster: concrete and block work, ceiling boards, etc., alkali resisting priming paint in

accordance with the recommendations of decoration ceiling manufacturer. Knotting shall be in accordance with BS 1336. Undercoating shall be: a). zinc oxide based undercoating paint; b). White lead based undercoating paint in accordance with BS 2525-7. Colors shall approximate to

the finishing paint; c). Synthetic alkyd based undercoating in accordance with the recommendations of the decorative

coating manufacturer.




Finishing paint shall be as shown on the drawings with the minimum specifications: a). zinc oxide based oil paint; b). White lead based oil gloss finishing paint in accordance with BS 2525-7. Colors shall

approximate to the finishing paint; c). Synthetic alkyd based finishing paint as approved by the Architect. Petrifying liquid shall be used undiluted as supplied by the manufacturer. A small quantity of water paint of the finishing color may be mixed with the petrifying liquid. Water paint shall be an approved brand of washable oil bound water paint complying with BS 1053 type A. Thinning shall be done with petrifying liquid or fresh water only. Emulsion paint shall be of the Polyvinyl Acetate (PVA) type obtained from an approved manufacturer. The precise specification shall comply with the manufacturer’s normal practice. In all cases thinning shall be done with thinners supplied by the manufacturer or fresh water only. Stain for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil stain complying with BS 1215. Polyurethane lacquer for woodwork shall be of an approved manufacture.

3. PREPARATION PROCESS Surfaces shall be allowed to dry out completely and cracks shall be cut out and make good with suitable hard plaster or cement and sand mix as appropriate, such repaired portions shall be allowed to dry out. No painting shall be carried out on plastering less than five weeks old. Efflorescent shall be completely removed by rubbing down with dry coarse cloths followed by wiping down with down with damp cloths and allowed to dry. All surfaces shall be rubbed down with fine glass paper and brushed free of dust before applying any from of decoration. Surfaces, which are to receive water paint, shall be treated with one coat of petrifying liquid applied by brush and allowed to dry for at least 24 hours before the application of water paint. A period of 24 hours or longer if necessary shall be allowed between subsequent coats. Fair-faced concrete and/or cement and sand plastered surfaces, which are to receive oil paint, shall be given one day. The surfaces shall then be rubbed down with fine glass paper and given a second thin coat of oil putty and when completely set shall be rubbed down again with fine glass paper before applying the priming coat of oil paint. All surfaces, which are to receive oil paint, shall be treated with one coat of alkali resisting priming paint applied by brush and allowed to harden completely.

4. FIBER BOARD, ETC.

Soft board: where used eternally or under humid conditions will receive ore coat of priming paint and one coat of undercoat on back, face and edges. Soft board: where used internally will receive one coat of priming paint and one coat of emulsion paint on back, face and edges. Hard board: composite panels will be treated in the same way as soft boards under humid conditions. Acoustic board: will be treated on the face in the same way as plaster, but the paint may be applied by spray; the backs and edges should not be treated.

5. STEELWORK INCLUDING WINDOWS, LOUVERS, ETC, INTERNALLY & EXTERNALLY If delivered galvanized, the surface shall be cleared to remove grease and dirt before priming. Where rusting has occurred through damage to the galvanizing such rust shall be removed by wire brushing back to clean metal and the surface shall then be treated with one coat of mordent solution and one coat of zinc chromate priming paint. If delivered primed, the surfaces shall be examined to ascertain that the priming paint is hard, firmly adhering and in good condition. If not satisfactory, the priming paint shall be removed and the surfaces cleaned to remove rusts and re-primed. If the condition of the priming paint is satisfactory, the surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt, minor damage to the priming paint, being made good with red oxide priming paint after removal of rust.




If delivered unprimed and not galvanized, the surfaces shall be clean remove grease and dirt, and wire brushed and scraped to remove all rust and scale before applying a red oxide priming paint. Priming paint shall be brushed well into the surface and shall be allowed to dry and harden thoroughly before the application of subsequent coats. Items of steel work such as frames to roller shutters, covers to expansion joints, etc., which are to be built into walls, shall first be primed. The Architect reserve the right to have rusted items removed from the site and reloaded at the contractor’s expense if he considers the item has been too badly affected or incorporation in the works.

6. EXPOSED SERVICE PIPES

Copper and brass pipe work shall have the surface slightly abraded with glass paper and white sprite or similar solvent and wiped cleared. No priming paint will be necessary, the surface being finished in two coats of gloss paint. Steel pipes will be treated as for steel work with exception that galvanized pipes are to be treated with a zinc chromate priming paint. Coated soil pipes shall be wiped clean and treated with two coats of knotting followed by priming paint as described earlier.

7. WOODWORK REQUIRED TO BE PAINTED Surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt. The surface of teak shall be cleaned with white spirit to remove free oil. The preparation process shall then be: Knot: All knots shall be treated with shellac knotting; Prime: One coat of primer shall be thoroughly applied by brush to all surface and when dry a further

coat to be applied to end grain surfaces; Stop: When priming paint is hard all cracks, hole, open joints, etc., shall be make putty or an

approved filler and rubbed down with, fine glass paper. No joinery shall be primed until the Architect has approved it. Priming shall be carried out on the site and not in contractor’s workshop. Items of carpentry work, which are to be built into walls, etc., shall be first treated by twice coating with creosote or other approved preservative.

8. WOODWORK REQUIRED TO BE STAINED Surface shall be cleaned to remove crease and dirt. The wood shall be stopped, filled and rubbed down. In case of teak, free oil shall be removed by cleaning with white spirit.

9. FINISHING PROCESSES Where emulsion paint is specified at least three coats shall be applied by brush in addition to any priming paint in order to produce a finish to the Architect’s satisfaction. Where water paint is specified two coats shall be applied by brush in addition to the petrifying liquid. The water shall be thinned to the consistency of thick cream. Where oil paint is specified this shall be two or three coat work as detailed in the manufacturer’s specifications, applied by roller or brush, but not by spray, to produce hard gloss, oil gloss, eggshell or flat finish as required. The finishing coat of paint to walls and ceiling shall be applied after the completion and testing of the electrical installation. Any paint splashes on electrical fittings shall be carefully cleaned off.

10. WOODWORK REQUIRED TO BE STAINED AND POLYURETHANED The woodwork, internally and externally shall be stained as directed on site, rubbed down, brushed off, and treated with at least two coats of polyurethane to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

11. PROTECTION OF FACTORY FINISHED WORK The contractor is to allow for protecting all factory finished doors, frames, windows, suspended ceiling and the like at all times to ensure that factory finishes are not damaged and must make good or replace any defective component at his own expense. The contractor must also remove, store




and replace ironmongery, electrical faceplates, light fittings and the like as necessary to protect them from surrounding.

12. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 12.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in Contract Documents, no measurement and payment will be made related to the relevant item of the Bills of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items of Bills of Quantities. Preparation works, including preparatory materials, scraping, scratching, sand blasting, cleaning, priming, protection of finished works etc. Wax and spirit polishing to specified wood works including preparatory works and materials.

12.2 Painting

a) Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of paint to specified surfaces will be made on the basis of net actual area of the surface painted as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

b) Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of paint to specified surface on the basis of unit rate quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all the works related to the items.




1. PREPARATION OF SURFACE

BBIITTUUMMEENN CCOOAATTIINNGG

The base course shall be rendered free from all ruts and pot holes or other defects and shall have a camber as directed by the Engineer. The surface shall be swept clean and free from dust, dirt or other deleterious matter, by hand brushing using wire brushes and finally by dusting with gunny bags.

2. MINERAL AGGREGATE

The graded screened bajri/ crushed stone shall consist of clean, consolidated, durable materials of uniform quality throughout, free from soft or disintegrated or other objectionable matter and shall not contain any dust. The bajri shall be of ½” standard size (i.e. passing though ¾” square mesh and retained on 3/8” square mesh) and ¼” standard size (i.e. passing 3/8” square mesh and retained on 1/10” square mesh) for second coat.

3. APPLICATION OF FIRST COAT OF BITUMEN

The bitumen as for the grade and shall be heated in a proper heating plant to the temperature and it shall be maintained at the same temperature. It shall be applied to the surface by means of pressure spryer at 25 lbs./100 Sft.

4. SPREADING OF CHIPS OR BAJRI

Immediately following the application of bitumen, stone chips or bajri in perfectly dry condition shall be uniformly and evenly sprayed at 6 cft. per 100 sft. over the whole surface which has been sprayed. Precaution shall be taken so that the whole of the bitumen surface is covered with uniform layer of chips or bajri without any accumulation of surplus chips or bajri at any point. Hand brooming or light drag brooming shall follow the application of the chips prior to rolling.

5. ROLLING

Immediately following the application of the stone chips or bajri and the completion of light brooming the whole area shall be rolled with a roller weighing 8 to 10 tons. Rolling must be done carefully so as not to crush the stone or bajri. The roller must be accompanied by spreading chips or bajri to fill any surface voids. The second coat should be applied immediately after the first coat. The consolidated surface should be examined and any excess chips or bajri removed by hand. Depressions should be made up by the addition of more chips or bajri.

6. PREPARATION OF SURFACE FOR SECOND COAT APPLICATION

The sprayer used for applying the bitumen shall be operated in such a way as will ensure an even and uniform distribution of the bitumen on the road surface. Excessive deposits of bitumen on the road caused by stopping and starting the sprayer or distributor or by leakage, should not be allowed. Spraying shall in all cases be carried out parallel to the central line of the road. The edges of the bitumen surface shall be defined by wire or other cord lines stretched and pegged in position.

7. APPLICATION OF THE SECOND COAT OF BITUMEN

The Bitumen of the grade and the made specified shall be heated in a proper heating plant to the temperature and shall be maintained at the same temperature. It shall be applied using pressure sprayer, evenly and uniformly at the rate of 45 lbs. per 100 sft. the same precautions as those specified for the first coat should be observed during spraying.

8. SPREADING OF CHIPS OR BAJRI

While the bitumen is still hot, it should be blinded with ¼” size (i.e. passing through 3/8” square mesh and retained on 1/10” square mesh) stone chips or bajri as specified. This blindage must be




clean and contain no dust and the rate of application should be approximately 3½ cft. per 100 square ft. After spreading it should be brushed evenly over the surface.

9. ROLLING

Final rolling should be carried out with 8 to 10 ton power roller. Consolidation will be complete when the Bitumen has absorbed as mush of the blindage as possible. After rolling, the road may be thrown open to traffic and, two or three weeks later, loose blindage on the surface may be removed. If, at any subsequent date, there are any signs of the road bleeding, coarse sand shall be spread over it by the contractor




1. DESCRIPTION

EXPANSION JOINTS FOR DRAIN

The work covered in this section shall consist of furnishing all plant, equipment, materials and labour and in performing all operations in connection with furnishing and placing in concrete structures all expansion joints for drains, complete and in accordance with the following Specifications, the applicable Drawings, and or as required by the Engineer.

2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler

Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, preformed joint filler shall conform to the requirement of AASHTO M-213.

2.2. PVC Water Stops Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, PVC water stops shall comply with the requirements of BS 2571. Tensile strength, kg/cm2 :


140 (minimum) Elongation, at break, percent : 300 B.S. Softness : 45 Specific gravity : 1.3

3.1 Filled Joints

When joints of the preformed type is required on the Drawings or by the Engineer, the filler shall be placed in the correct position before concrete is placed against the filler. Holes and joints in the filler shall be caused for their being rejected.

3.2 PVC Water Stops

Waterstops shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings or where required by the Engineer and in accordance with the provisions in these Specifications. Waterstops shall be furnished in full strength for each straight portion of the joint, without field splices. Manufacturer's shop splices shall be fully vulcanised. Reinforcing bars provided to support the waterstops as required by the Engineer shall be securely held in position by the use of spacers, supporting wires, or other approved devices. Such reinforcing bars used to securely fasten the water stop in position shall not be payable separately such cost shall be deemed to have been included in the unit rate of relative item. If, after placing concrete, waterstops are materially out of position or shape, the surrounding concrete shall be removed, the waterstops reset, and the concrete replaced, all at the Contractor's expense. Field splices for polyvinyl chloride waterstops shall be performed by heat-sealing the adjacent surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A thermostatically controlled electric source of heat shall be used to make all splices. The heat shall be sufficient to melt but not char the plastic. Waterstops when being installed shall be cut and spliced at changes in direction, as may be necessary to avoid buckling or distortion of the web or flange. Care should be taken so that the PVC water stop does not get punctured during installation, any length damaged or punctured shall immediately be replaced by the Contractor, without any extra cost to the project.

3.3 PVC Installation - Slab Joints The PVC Waterstop is supported in the horizontal plane so that half of its width shall be cast into concrete approximately half way through the thickness of the slab.




Care shall be taken to ensure that the waterstop is retained in the horizontal plane and that adequate compaction of concrete takes place below the web of the waterstop so as to avoid honeycombing of the concrete. The second half of the waterstop shall be cast into the adjoining slab, with similar precautions being taken with regard to honeycombing of the concrete.

3.4 Installations - Vertical Joints The waterstop shall be supported in a similar manner as described for slab joints with great care taken to ensure that the waterstop does not fold over under the weight of poured concrete.

4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1. Measurement

The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of linear metres of expansion joints placed and completed as per the specification, drawings and to the satisfaction and acceptance by Engineer.

4.2. Payment

The quantities shall be paid for at the Contract unit price for the particular pay item mentioned in BOQ. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including preformed joint filler, thermopore and PVC waterstops (fixing the same in position) and for all other costs necessary or usual to the proper completion of the work.

RROOAADD WWOORRKKSS



TP - Road Page 1 of 55

1. DESCRIPTION

CCLLEEAARRIINNGG AANNDD GGRRUUBBBBIINNGG

This work shall consist of removal to the specified depth, grubbing and disposal of all surface objects, as and where directed in writing by the Engineer, including, bushes, trees with stumps and roots of less than 150 mm girth, vegetation, logs, rubbish and all other objectionable material except such objects as are designated to remain or are to be removed in accordance with other sections of specification. Such organic topsoil would carefully be stored, and re-applied on top of new surfaces as directed by Engineer upon completion of work. In this way new vegetation would be facilitated for early/quick regeneration.

2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Clearing/ Grubbing

In roadway cut areas, all surface objects or any object to the depth of 30 Cm, below subgrade level such as stumps, roots, vegetation, bushes, logs, rubbish shall be cleared and/or grubbed as directed by the Engineer. In roadway fill areas where clearing and grubbing is required, same shall be carried out to the depth of 30 cm below original surface level as described above. Original surface is the surface of the ground received by the contractor for the purpose of road construction under contract and upon which joint levels were taken and joint cross section were prepared prior to clearing grubbing. Operation of clearing and grubbing shall in no way be deemed to effect any level or volume change of the area and the Embankment quantities shall be calculated/ measured and paid from the joint levels prior to clearing and grubbing operation. After clearing and grubbing, which includes the removal of top 15 cm soil or any layer of unsuitable material or after excavation; the compaction of cleared/grubbed surface, suitable filling material shall be placed and compacted, up to original ground level as determined by joint leveling and the compaction of the area will be restored to its original value without any extra payment. Before bottom layer of embankment is placed, contractor will grub up and remove without extra payment, any vegetation that may, in the meantime have grown on surface previously cleared and grubbed. All trees having girth less than 150 mm measured at (600) mm above ground and falling within the construction limits shall be felled & removed by the contractor. The excavation and removal of trees, roots and stumps including backfilling and compacting of holes and restoring the natural ground to the original condition shall be responsibility of the contractor for which no extra payment shall be made to him. The trees, stumps & roots remains the property of the Employer, which shall be delivered at designated place as directed by the Engineer.

2.2. Protection and Restoration

The Contractor shall prevent damage to all pipes, conduits, wires, cables or structure above or below ground. No land monuments, property markers, or official datum points shall be damaged or removed until the Employer/Engineer has witnessed or otherwise referenced their locations and approved their removal. The Contractor shall so control his operations as to prevent damage to shrubs, which are to be preserved. Protection may include fences and boards latched to shrubs, to prevent damage from machine operations. Any damage as a result of contractor's operation shall immediately be rectified by him at his own expense.


Clearing and grubbing will be measured for payment only on areas so designated in writing by the Engineer or shown on the drawings. The quantity to be paid for shall be satisfactorily clearing and grubbing & disposal of 15 cm top soil & filling with suitable material and compacting it to the required




density as defined below, to attain the levels determined by joint leveling prior to the clearing and grubbing works.

Depth Percent of Maximum Dry Density below sub grade level.

3.2. Payment

as determined by AASHTO T -180.* 0 to 30 cm 95 30 to 75cm 93 Over 75 cm 90 Below the foundation of structures 95

Any tree having girth of less than 150 mm (measured 600 mm above ground level) shall be measured under this item and no separate payment shall be admissible for this, as it is included in clearing & grubbing. Clearing and grubbing carried out by the Contractor in roadway cut areas and borrow pits is not payable, as such, shall not be measured for payment.

The quantities determined as provided above will be paid for at the contract unit price for the pay item shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for clearing and grubbing as per the requirement of this item and restoration of area, to its original level upto the required density as determined by joint leveling.




1. DESCRIPTION

CCOOMMPP AACCTTIIOONN OOFF NNAATTUURRAALL GGRROOUUNNDD

The natural ground or surface ready for construction purposes after stripping (if required) and/or excavation will be considered for natural ground compaction in this item only. The compaction of cleared / grubbed surface after Clearing and Grubbing is covered in “Clearing and Grubbing”. The compaction of natural ground shall be carried out through a written order by the Engineer.


After striping of the topsoil or any layer of unsuitable material or after excavation, the ground up to a depth of 20 cms below the surface of exposed road bed (natural ground) shall be broken up by ploughing and scarifying to compact to a degree as defined below:

Depth Percent of Maximum Dry Density below sub grade level.


as determined by AASHTO T -180.* 0 to 30 cm 95 30 to 75cm 93 Over 75 cm 90 Below the foundation of structures 95 2.1 Compaction of original ground in areas of high water levels and salinity Compaction of natural ground surface in such areas will be difficult if not impossible.

Accordingly, the locations/ areas shall be strengthened with stones of a minimum 30cm thick layer soling or as directed by the Engineer.

3.1. Measurement

The measurement shall be made by multiplying the length and breadth of the area approved in writing by the Engineer to be paid under this item. The measurement of the item shall be as per the BOQ. Any subsidence of levels of Natural Ground due to compaction under this item shall not be measured for payment; the Contractor is expected to take care of such factors while bidding.

3.2. Payment

The payment under this item shall be made at the contract unit price shown in BOQ of compaction of (natural) ground measured as above and shall be deemed to include cost of scarification, ploughing, watering, mixing, leveling, rolling, labour, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this item.




1. DESCRIPTION

EXCAVATION OF UNSUITABLE OR SURPLUS MATERIAL

The work shall consist of excavation and disposal of unsuitable or surplus material arising from roadway excavation, which is declared in writing by the Engineer to be unsuitable for use or surplus to the requirements of the project. When excavation of unsuitable material requires special attention for a known condition on a specific project, construction requirements and payment shall be covered under relevant provision.

2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT

All suitable material excavated within the limits and scope of the project shall be used in the most effective manner for the formation of the embankment for widening of roadway for backfill or for other work included in the contract.

Any material surplus to these requirements or any material declared in writing by the Engineer to be unsuitable shall be disposed of and leveled in thin layers by the contractor outside the right of way within 7 Km of excavation. The Engineers hall decide regarding the unsuitability of the material by Conducting appropriate laboratory tests when unsuitable materials are ordered to be removed and replaced the soil left in place shall be compacted to a depth of twenty (20) cm to the density prescribed under item 108.3.1 of NHA Specification. Payment for such compaction shall be included in the contract prices for the excavation materials.

lf the unsuitable material which is to be removed, is below standing water level and the replacement material is gravel or a similar self-draining material of at least thirty (30) cm in depth, the compaction may be dispensed with if approved by the Engineer.


When the contractor is directed to excavate unsuitable material below the surface of original ground in fill areas, the depth to which these unsuitable materials are to be removed will be determined by the Engineer. The contractor shall schedule his work in a such a way that authorized cross sections can be taken before and after the material has been removed. Only material which is surplus to the requirements of the project or is declared in writing by the Engineer to be unsuitable will qualify for payments under pay Item mentioned in BOQ as the case may be.

The cost of excavation of material which is used anywhere in the project shall be deemed to be included in the pay item relating to the part of the work where the material is used.

The pay items mentioned in BOQ shall include the cost of obtaining the consent of the owner or tenant of the land where the disposal of surplus or unsuitable material is made.

Unsuitable or surplus material shall be measured in its original position and its volume shall be calculated in cubic meters using end area method.

3.2. Payment The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit price for each of the particular pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities which prices and payment shall constitute full compensation for all costs involved in the proper completion of the work prescribed in this item.




1. DESCRIPTION

FFOORRMMAATTIIOONN OOFF EEMMBBAANNKKMMEENNTT

This work shall consist of formation of embankment, including preparation of area for placing and compaction of embankment material in layers and in holes, pits and other depressions within the roadway area in accordance with the specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-section shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.


Material for embankment shall consist of suitable material excavated from borrow, roadway excavation or structural excavation and shall include all lead and lift. Borrow material will be used only when material obtained from roadway or structural excavation is not suitable or is deficient for embankment formation.

The material under this item shall conform to the following specification.

a. Contractor shall use AASHTO Class A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4, soil as specified in AASHTO M-145 or

any other combination of proportionately blended materials as approved by Engineer, which must meet the requirements as shown on the Drawings (Wherever required non-cohesive/granular materials used in the formation of embankment shall be confined by cohesive materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer.)

b. The material shall have a soaked CBR value as stated on the Drawings and determined in accordance with ASSHTO T-193. CBR value shall be obtained at a density corresponding to the degree of compaction for the layer concerned. The swell value for the material used in the construction of embankment shall not exceed one and half (1.5) percent. However while establishing the swell value, surcharge rates representing the over burden will be used.

c. In case sandy material be used for embankment formation, it shall be properly confined with a

material approved by the Engineer and shall not be used on slopes of embankment. d. In areas subject to flood and prolonged inundation of the embankment, such as at bridge sites,

and other roadway areas or lengths, the material used in embankment, unless rock, shall be AASHTO Class A-1, A-3 and A-2-4 soils. Other soils may be used only with the written consent of Engineer.

e. In areas as stated under sub-section 3.5 (Formation of Embankment in water logged area)

working platform, if required, shall be constructed as per provision of sub-section 3.5 and as directed by the Engineer.

3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 3.1. Formation of Embankment with Borrow Common Material

Material for embankment obtained and approved as provided above, shall be placed in horizontal layers of uniform thickness and in conformity with the lines, grades, sections and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer. The layers of loose material other than rock shall be not more than 20 cm. thick, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer after a trial section is prepared and approved. The material placed in layers and that scarified to the designated depth for formation of embankment shall be compacted to the density specified below:

Depth in centimeters Percent of Maximum Dry Density below subgrade Level as determined by AASHTO T -80.* 0 to 30 95 30 to 75 93 Over 75 90 * Method 'B' or 'D' whichever is applicable or corresponding Relative Density in

case of sand fill.




In-place density determinations of the compacted layers shall be made in accordance with AASHTO T-191 or other approved methods. For all soils, with the exception of rock fill materials, containing more than 10% oversize particles (retained on 3/4 inch/ 19 mm sieve), the in-place density thus obtained shall be adjusted to account for such oversize particles or as directed by the Engineer. Subsequent layers shall not be placed and compacted unless the previous layer has been properly compacted and accepted by the Engineer. Material for embankment at locations inaccessible to normal compacting equipment shall be placed in horizontal layers of loose material not more than 15 centimeters thick and compacted to the densities specified above by the use of mechanical tempers, or other appropriate equipment. The compaction of the embankment shall be carried out at the designated moisture content consistent with the available compacting equipment. Embankment material that does not contain sufficient moisture to obtain the required compaction shall be given additional moisture by means of approved sprinklers and mixing. Material containing more than the optimum moisture may not, without written approval of the Engineer, be incorporated in the embankment until it has been sufficiently dried out. The drying up of wet material may be expedited by scarification, disking or other approved methods. When materials of widely divergent characteristics, such as clay and chalk or sand, drawn from different sources, are to be used in the embankment they shall be deposited in alternate layers of the same material over the full width of the embankment to depths approved by the Engineer. Rock, clay or other material shall be broken up, and no accumulation of lumps or boulders in the embankment will be permitted. No surplus material shall be permitted to be left at the toe of embankment or at the top of cut sections. Side slopes shall be neatly trimmed to the lines and slopes shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer and the finished work shall be left in a neat and acceptable condition.

3.2. Formation of Embankment with Rock Material

Embankment formed of material consisting predominantly of rock fragment of such size that the material cannot be placed in layers of the thickness prescribed without crushing, pulverizing or further breaking down the pieces, such material may be placed in layers not exceeding in thickness than the approximate average size of the rocks except that no layer shall exceed eighty (80) centimeters of loose measurement and compacted by a vibratory roller with the minimum mass as shown in the following table.

Mass per meter width of vibrating roller (Kg/M)

Depth of fill layer (mm)

Number of passes of the roller on each layer

2300-2900 2900-3600 2600-4300 4300-5000 >5000

400 500 600 700 800

5 5 5 5 5

The material shall be carefully placed in layers, so that all larger stones will be well distributed and voids completely filled with smaller stones, clean small spells, shale, earth, sand, gravel, to form a solid mass. After placing rock material, surface shall be covered with a layer of fine material having thickness less than twenty (20) centimeters. Such fine material shall be reserved from roadway excavation by the Contractor. Should such material be available but not reserved, Contractor will supply and place borrow material for forming smooth grade without extra payment. Each layer shall be bladed or levelled with motor grader, bulldozer or similar equipment capable of shifting and forming the layer into a neat and orderly condition. No rock larger than eight (8) centimeters in any dimension shall be placed in the top fifteen (15) centimeters of embankment unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. Material for each layer should be consolidated with heavy weight vibratory roller until settlement as checked between two consecutive passes of roller is less that one (1) percent of the layer thickness. In evaluation of settlement, survey points should be established and rolling continued until difference




of levels as checked after two consecutive passes is less than one (1) percent of the total layer thickness. Moreover initial rolling of overlaid fine material shall be done without watering to ensure their intrusion in voids of rock layer beneath. Watering shall be done when voids are properly filled. Embankments, which are formed of material that contain rock but also contain sufficient compactable material other than rock or other hard material to make rolling feasible, shall be placed and compacted in the manner prescribed above and to the point when settlement is within above-mentioned requirement. Compaction test will be made whenever the Engineer determines they are feasible and necessary. The Engineer must approve each layer before the next layer is placed.

When rock to be incorporated in fill is composed largely of weak or friable material, the rock shall be reduced to a maximum size not exceeding fifty (50) percent of the thickness of the layer being placed.

3.3. Formation of Embankment on Steep Slopes

Where embankments are to be constructed on steep slope, hill sides or where new fill is to be placed and compacted against existing pavement or where embankment is to be built along one half the width at a time, the original slope of the hill side, of existing pavement or adjacent to half width of embankment shall be cut in steps of twenty (20) centimeters depth. Benching shall be of sufficient width to permit operation of equipment possible during placing and compaction of material. Cut material shall be incorporated with the new embankment material and compacted in horizontal layers. No extra payment will be allowed for such an operation.

3.4. Formation of Embankment on Existing Roads

Before fill is placed and compacted on an existing roadway, the existing embankment and/or pavement may be levelled by cutting, rooting or scarifying by approved mechanical means to a level to be determined by the Engineer. The earth, old asphalt or other material arising as a result of this operation will be declared either suitable or unsuitable, for use in the embankment or other items by the Engineer.

3.5. Formation of Embankment in Water Logged Areas

Where embankments are to be placed in water logged areas and which are inaccessible to heavy construction equipment, a special working platform shall be first established, consisting of a blanket of fill material placed on top of the soft layer. The material of the working table shall consist of normal or processed granular fill, obtained from borrow excavation. This material shall conform to the following specifications:

Percentage of Weight Passing Sieve Description Mesh Sieve. AASHTO T -27 3 inch (75 mm) 100

The remaining grading shall be such as to avoid intrusion into the working platform material of subgrade or natural ground surface material. For this condition to be met it will be required that the ratio.

D15 (Working Platform Material) ----------------------------------------- is less than 5. D85 (Natural Ground Material)

D85 and D15

The thickness of the working table as prescribed above shall be approximately 0.5 meter unless directed otherwise by the Engineer and the width shall be that of the embankment. The placement

mean the particle diameters corresponding to 85% and 15%, respectively, passing (by weight) in a grain size analysis.

Construction of this working table shall proceed from one edge of the soft area by using the fill as a ramp for further material transport.




and compaction of the working table shall be carried out by use of light equipment or as directed by the Engineer. No density requirements are specified for the working platform, however, subsequent layers above it shall be compacted to the densities.

3.6. General Requirements

To avoid interference with the construction of bridge abutments and wing walls, the Contractor shall at points determined by the Engineer, suspend work on embankments and/or in cuts forming the approaches to any such structure until such time as the construction of the later is sufficiently advanced to permit the completion of the approaches without the risk of interference or damage to the bridge works. The cost of such suspension of work shall be included in the contract unit prices for embankment. In carrying embankments up to or over bridges, culverts or pipe drainage, care shall be taken by the Contractor to have the embankments brought to equally on both sides and over the top of any such structure. Contractor shall make special arrangements to ensure proper compaction in restricted spaces and around structures. No compensation shall be made to the Contractor for working in narrow or otherwise restricted areas. When as a result of settlement, an embankment requires the addition of material up to 30 cm in thickness to bring it up to the required grade level, the top of the embankment shall be thoroughly scarified before the additional material is being placed, without extra payment to Contractor for the scarification. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all embankments and shall replace any portions that in the opinion of the Engineer have been damaged or displaced due to carelessness or neglect on the part of the Contractor. Embankment material which may be lost or displaced as a result of natural causes such as storms, cloud-burst or as a result of unavoidable movement or settlement of the ground or foundation upon which the embankment is constructed shall be replaced by the Contractor with acceptable material from excavation or borrow. No additional compensation will be allowed for the replacement. During construction, the roadway shall be kept in shape and drained out at all times. When unsuitable material has been placed in the embankment by the Contractor, he shall remove it without extra payment.

4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1 Measurement

The quantities to be paid for shall be calculated on theoretical designed lines and grades and the original ground levels, using Average End Area Method compacted in place, accepted by the Engineer formed with material resulting from:

a). Formation of Embankment from Borrow Excavation

Measurement shall be made as under:- Formation from Borrow = Total Embankment Quantity (cal. from original ground level by Average End

Area Method) (Minus) Roadway excavation Quantity (Minus)

structural excavation Quantity

b). Formation from structural Excavation

This quantity shall be the same as calculated for structural excavation irrespective of its haulage distance except that declared unsuitable by the Engineer, which shall not be placed in Embankment and shall be disposed off as per the direction of Engineer.

c). Formation from Roadway Excavation

This quantity shall be the same as calculated for Roadway Excavation except that declared unsuitable by the Engineer which shall not be placed in embankment and shall be disposed off




as directed by the Engineer. The contractor will be supposed to use only declared suitable material from Roadway Excavation irrespective of haulage distance. However if contractor, for his own convenience, uses the material from borrow, the payment will still be made. In the measurement of "Formation of Embankment on steep slopes" no allowance will be made for the benching or volume of material cut out from the hill side or from the first half width fill to accommodate the compacting equipment but will be calculated only on the net volume of fill placed against the original hill sides, the old embankment or the first half width fill.

4.2 Payment

a). Formation from Borrow Excavation

The quantity to be paid for shall be placed in embankment, measured as provided in BOQ for material from borrow excavation and such a payment will be deemed to include cost of excavation, payment of royalty, levies and taxes of Local, Provincial and Federal Government, cost of hauling including all lead and lift, spreading, watering, rolling, labour, equipment, tools and incidental necessary to complete this item.

b). Formation from Structural Excavation

The quantity to be paid for shall be placed in embankment irrespective of the haulage distance and measured as provided above for suitable material from structural excavation and such payment will be deemed to include cost of excavation, hauling, dumping, spreading, watering, rolling, labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

c). Formation from Roadway Excavation

The quantity to be paid for shall be placed in embankment irrespective of the haulage distance and measured as provided above for suitable material from roadway excavation and such payment will be deemed to include cost of excavation, hauling, dumping, spreading, watering, rolling, labour, equipment, tools and incidental necessary to complete this item.




1. DESCRIPTION

SS UUBBGGRRAADDEE PP RREEPP AARRAATTIIOONN

The sub grade preparation shall be that part of the work on which, the sub base is placed or in the absence of sub base, acts as the base of the pavement structure. It shall extend to the full width of the road bed including the shoulders and laybyes as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein.

2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT

2.1. Prior Work

Before commencing the work all culverts, drains, ditches including fully compacted backfill over

them, outlets for drainage, head walls/wing walls of culverts and any other minor structure below thirty (30) centimeters of existing subgrade level or all structures which will be below thirty (30) centimeters of newly placed subgrade level, shall be in such operative conditions as to ensure prompt and effective drainage and to avoid damage to subgrade by surface water. No work of subgrade preparation will be started before the prior work herein described have been approved by the Engineer.

2.2. Compaction Requirement

All materials down to a depth of 30 cm below the subgrade level in earth cut or embankment shall

be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined according to AASHTO T -180 Method 'B' or 'D' whichever is applicable, or corresponding Relative Density as per D-4254-83 (ASTM).

2.3. Subgrade Preparation in Earth Cut In case bottom of subgrade level is within thirty (30) cm of the natural ground, the surface shall be

scarified, broken up, adjusted to moisture content and compacted to minimum density of ninety five (95) percent of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T -180 Method D. Subsequent layer of approved material shall be incorporated to ensure that the depth of subgrade layer is thirty (30) cm.

In case, the bottom of subgrade is below the natural ground by more than Thirty (30) cm, the

material above the top of subgrade shall be removed and subsequent layer of thirty (30) cm shall be scarified, broken up, adjusted to moisture content and compacted to the same degree of compaction as described above.

In case, unsuitable material is encountered at the sub grade level within a depth of thirty (30) cm, the same shall be removed in total and replaced by the approved material. The contractor shall be paid for removal of unsuitable material as per pay item.

2.4. Subgrade Preparation in Rock Cut Excavation in rock shall extend to the subgrade level as shown on drawings. Rock shall be undercut

nearly to required elevation and sections shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Transverse and longitudinal profiles checked by template shall be accurate to the requirement. Cuts below subgrade level shall be backfilled with selected subbase material and compacted to minimum ninety eight (98) percent of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T -180, method 'D'. No compensation shall be made to the Contractor for over-cut or remedial measures as described above.

No rock shall be higher than two (2) centimeters above the under cut section elevation. The under

cut material shall be placed in embankment or disposed of at the direction of Engineer. 2.5. Subgrade in Embankment When the subgrade is formed in embankment, its width shall be the full width of top of embankment

and material placed in the upper part of embankment down to a depth of thirty (30) centimeters below subgrade level shall meet compaction requirements of 2.2 above. Soils having a minimum value of C.B.R of five (05) percent and swell value of not more than 0.3 percent shall be used.




Unsuitable material if encountered within the existing formation layer as per laboratory specified test, shall be removed, disposed of and replaced by suitable one as per direction of the Engineer of which the payment will be made under relevant items of work.

Rollers and other equipments of approved size and type, accepted by the Engineer, shall be used

for compaction. Water shall be added to obtain optimum moisture content if necessary. Contractor shall ensure proper compaction in restricted areas by use of special equipments and rollers. No compensation shall be made for extra work due to restricted space.

Performance of this item of work shall not be paid for under this section but shall be deemed to be

covered by the contract price for pay item, Formation of Embankment. 2.6. Sub-grade Level in Existing Road Where indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer that the existing road surface is to be

used as the subgrade, the correct elevation on which the base or subbase is to be laid shall be obtained, where necessary, either by means of leveling course or by excavation. The leveling course shall be constructed to the requirements of the Engineer and paid for under the appropriate pay item involved. Excavation shall include disposal of any surplus material in the adjacent embankment or elsewhere as directed by the Engineer.

In case, the design level of subgrade is within 30 cm of the existing ground/road then the item shall

be measured and paid accordingly. When the width of the new road is greater than the existing road then the part of the new road

subgrade which comprises the existing road surface shall be prepared as herein provided and the part that falls outside the existing road surface shall be prepared as provided in items above as the case may be.

2.7. Sub-grade reinforcement When the width of the existing pavement, either to be scarified or not, is insufficient to contain the

subbase or base to be placed upon it, the Engineer may order to strengthen and support the subbase or base on one or both sides of the existing pavement. This work shall consist of the removal and disposal of any unsuitable material and its replacements with suitable material to such width and depth as required by the Engineer.

The excavated material shall, if declared suitable for use elsewhere in the embankment by the

Engineer, be so used, and payment for its removal shall be covered under the contract price for Formation of Embankment, if declared unsuitable it shall be disposed of and paid under the contract price for Excavation of unsuitable material. The finished compacted surface shall be as specified in item 2.3 above.

2.8. Protection of Completed Work Any part of the subgrade that has been completed shall be protected and kept well drained. Any

damage resulting from carelessness of the Contractor shall be repaired as directed by the Engineer without additional payment.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all the consequences of traffic being admitted to the

subgrade. He shall repair any ruts or ridges occasioned by his own traffic or that of others by reshaping and compacting with rollers of the size and type necessary for such repair. He shall limit the area of subgrade preparation to an area easily maintained with the equipment available. Subgrade preparation and subbase or base placing shall be arranged to follow each other closely. The subgrade, when prepared too soon in relation to the placing of the subbase, is liable to deteriorate, and in such case the Contractor shall, without additional payment, repair, re-roll, or re-compact the subgrade as may be necessary to restore it to the state specified herein.

2.9. Templates and Straightedges The Contractor shall provide for the use of the Engineer, satisfactory templates and straightedges in

sufficient numbers to check the accuracy of the work, as provided in these specifications and no subsequent work shall be permitted until the subgrade levels have been checked and approved by the Engineer. For tolerances refer to the "Table for Allowable Tolerances" in NHA specifications.




3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3.1. Measurement The quantity to be paid for shall be as per BOQ of subgrade prepared as herein before prescribed

and accepted. Subgrade in rock cuts and on embankment not consisting of the existing road surface in fill area shall not be measured for direct payment.

Subgrade preparation on "Existing Surface" shall only be measured for payment when ordered by

the Engineer. 3.2. Payment

The quantities, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price respectively, for each of the particular pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities which prices and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing of material, water, equipment, tools, labour and all other items plus incidentals necessary for completion of work.




1. DESCRIPTION

IMPROVED SUBGRADE

This work shall consist of the formation of the roadbed, under subbase or base course as the case may be, with an approved blend of materials, uniformly mixed, compacted, shaped and finished to the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Drawings, or in thickness as directed by the Engineer. Improved subgrade as herein referred to may be defined as material suitable for embankment to which better quality of material is blended in proper proportion to improve its strength properties or performance.


The major component of improved subgrade shall consist of material conforming to item "Material requirements for embankment" of these specifications.

The blending material shall be any soil that classifies as A-1(a), A-1(b),A-2-a or A-3 according to AASHTO M-145 with Pl of not more than 6.

The blended mixture when compacted to ninety five (95) percent of the maximum dry density determined by AASHTO T 180-D Method, shall exhibit a laboratory soaked CBR (96 hours) of not less than 20, or as specified in the drawings.

3. CONSTRUCTION REOUIREMENTS

3.1 Preparation

The surface of the roadbed on which the improved subgrade is to be constructed shall be compacted to the density specified under item “Formation of Embankment with Borrow Common Material” of these specifications.

3.2 Proportioning of Materials

Prior to start of construction, the proportion of each material to be incorporated for improved subgrade shall be established as approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall specify a single percentage of each material to be blended and shall establish the gradation of the resulting mixtures alongwith the ranges of permissible gradation tolerances to obtain the required CBR for the improved subgrade.

The blend proportions thus established shall apply only when each material to be used is obtained from same source. Should a change in source of material be made, a new proportion shall be established. When unsatisfactory results or other conditions make it necessary, the Engineer may require additional laboratory tests.

3.3 Mixing and Spreading

Improved subgrade may be constructed with any combination of machines or equipment that will yield results meeting these specifications.

a) Stationary Plant Method

The soil ingredients and water shall be mixed in an approved mixing plant (pug Mill).The plant shall be equipped with feeding and metering devices that will add the materials to be blended in the specified quantities. Water shall be added during the mixing operation in the quantity required for proper compaction, which is approximately optimum moisture content plus or minus two (2) percent. The mixing time shall be that which is required to secure a uniform mixture. After mixing, the blended material shall be transported to the job site while it contains the sufficient moisture and shall be placed on the roadbed by means of an approved mechanical spreader. The mixture shall be spread at rate that will produce a uniform compacted thickness conforming to the required grade and cross-section .compaction shall start as soon as possible after spreading and shall continue until the specified relative compaction is achieved.




b) Traveling Plant Method

The traveling plant shall be either a flat transverse shaft type or a windrow type pugmill. After the materials have been placed by a mechanical spreader or windrow sizing device the materials shall be uniformly mixed by the traveling mixing plant. During the mixing operation, water shall be added as necessary to bring the moisture content of the mixture to the percentage suitable for proper compaction.

c) Road Mix Method

The materials shall be transported to the site and spread in layers on the roadbed in the quantities required to produce the specified blend. After the materials for each lift have been spread, the materials shall be mixed by motor graders and other approved equipment until the mixture is uniform throughout. During mixing operation, water shall be added as necessary to bring the moisture content to the proper percentage.

3.4 Compaction

Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer based on the performance of the compacting equipment used as determined from the trial section, each layer of improved subgrade shall be placed in horizontal layers of uniform loose thickness not exceeding twenty (20) centimeters. Each layer shall be compacted to the density conforming to the requirements specified in item “Formation of Embankment with Borrow Common Material” of these specifications.

In-pace density determination of the compacted layers shall be made in accordance with AASHTOT-191, T-238 or other approved methods.

3.5 Trial Sections

Prior to the formation of the improved subgrade, the contractor shall construct three trial sections of 200 meter length one (1) for each blend of improved material proposed to be incorporated for improved subgrade, or as directed by the Engineer. The compacting equipment to be used in the trial sections shall be the same equipment that the contractor intends to use for main work, accepted by the Engineer. The object of these trials is to determine the proper moisture content, the relationship between the number .of passes of compacting equipment, density obtained for the blended material, and to establish the optimum lift thickness that can be effectively compacted with the equipment used. No separate payment will be made for this work, which will be regarded as a subsidiary obligation of the contractor.

3.6 Protection of Completed Work

Any part of the completed improved subgrade shall be protected and well drained and any damage shall be repaired as directed by the Engineer without additional payment.

The contractor shall be responsible for all the consequences of traffic being admitted to the improved subgrade. He shall repair any ruts or ridges occasioned by his own traffic or that of others by reshaping and compacting with rollers of the size and type necessary for such repair. He shall limit the improved subgrade preparation to an area easily maintained with the equipment available. Subgrade preparation and placement of succeeding layer to follow each other closely. The improved subgrade, when prepared too soon in relation to the placing of the layer above it, is liable to deteriorate, and in such case the contractor shall, without additional payment, repair, reroll or recompact the improved subgrade as may be necessary to restore it to the state specified herein.

3.7 Templates and Straightedges

The contractor shall provide for the use of the Engineer, satisfactory templates and straightedges in sufficient numbers to check the accuracy of the work, as provided in these specifications and no subsequent work shall be permitted until the improved subgrade level have been checked and approved by the Engineer.

3.8 Tolerance




The allowable tolerances for the finished improved subgrade surface prior to placing the overlying subbase, base or asphaltic concrete course are given in the relevant, “Table for Allowable Tolerances" in theses specification.


4.1 Measurement

The quantity of improved subgrade to be paid for shall be measured in square meter by the theoretical area covered in place as shown on the Drawings, completed and accepted improved subgrade in a thickness of 30 cms.

4.2 Payment

The accepted quantities measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter of improved subgrade for the pay item listed below and shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price

and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, hauling, mixing, placing in layers, watering and compacting, labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.




Grading Requirements for Subbase Material

GGRRAANNUULLAARR SS UUBBBBAASS EE 1. DESCRIPTION This item shall consist of furnishing, spreading in one or more layers and compacting granular

subbase according to the specifications and drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer. 2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS Granular subbase material shall consist of natural or processed aggregates such as gravel, sand or

stone fragment and shall be clean and free from dirt, organic matter and other deleterious substances, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable subbase.

The material shall comply to the following grading and quality requirements:

a) The subbase material shall have a gradation curve within the limits of grading given below:

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing Grading Mm Inch A B

60.0 50.0 25.0 9.5 4.75 2.0 0.425 0.075

(2.1/2) (2) (1) (3/8) No.4 No.10 No.40 No.200

100 90-100 50-80

-- 35-70

-- --

5-15

-- 100

55-85 40-70 30-60 20-50 10-30 5-15

The Coefficient of Uniformity D60 / D10 shall be not less than 3, where D60 and D10 are the particle diameters corresponding to 60% and 10%, respectively, passing (by weight) in a grain size analysis, curve.

b) The Material shall have a CBR value of at least 30%, determined according to AASHTO T-193.

The CBR value shall be obtained at a density corresponding to Ninety eight (98) percent of the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T-180 Method-D.

c) The coarse aggregate material retained on sieve No.4 shall have a percentage of wear by the

Los Angeles Abrasion (AASHTO T-96) of not more than forty (40) percent. d) In order to avoid intrusion of silty and clayey material from the subgrade in the subbase, the

ratio D15 (Subbase)/D85 (Subgrade) should be less than 5. Where D85 and D15 are the particle diameters corresponding to eighty five (85) % and fifteen

(15) %, respectively passing (by weight) in a grain size analysis curve. e) The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No.200) sieve shall not be greater than two third of the

fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve. The fraction passing the 0.425 mm sieve shall have a liquid limit of not greater than 25 and a plasticity index of 6 or less.

f) If over-size is encountered, screening of material at source shall invariably be done, no hand picking shall be allowed, however hand picking may be allowed by the Engineer, if over-size quantity is less than 5% of the total mass.

g) Sand equivalent for all classes shall be 25 min.




3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Spreading Granular subbase shall be spread on approved subgrade layer as a uniform mixture. Segregation

shall be avoided during spreading and the final compacted layer shall be free from concentration of coarse or fine materials.

Granular subbase shall be deposited on the roadbed or shoulders in a quantity which will provide

the required compacted thickness without resorting to spotting, picking up or otherwise shifting the subbase material. In case any material is to be added to compensate for levels, the same shall be done after scarifying the existing material, to ensure proper bonding of additional material.

Where the required thickness is fifteen (15) cm or less, the aggregates may be spread and

compacted as one layer, but in no case shall a layer be less than seven and one half (7.5) centimeters thick. Where the required thickness is more than 15 cm, the aggregates shall be spread and compacted in 2 or more layers of approximately equal thickness, but in any case the maximum compacted thickness of one layer shall not exceed 15 cm. All subsequent layers shall be spread and compacted in a similar manner.

Granular subbase shall be spread with equipment that will provide a uniform layer conforming to the

specified item both transversely and longitudinally within the tolerances as specified in "Table for Allowable Tolerances" in these specifications. No hauling or placement of material will be permitted when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the weather or road conditions are such that the hauling operation will cause cutting or rutting of subgrade or contamination of sub base material.

3.2 Compaction Trials Prior to commencement of granular subbase operation, contractor shall construct a trial length, not

to exceed, five hundred (500) meters and not less than two hundred (200) meters with the approved subbase material as will be used during construction to determine the adequacy of the contractor's equipment, loose depth measurement necessary to result in the specified compacted layer depths, the field moisture content, and the relationship between the number of compaction passes and the resulting density of the material.

3.3 Compaction The moisture content of subbase material shall be adjusted prior to compaction, by watering with

approved sprinklers mounted on trucks or by drying out, as required, in order to obtain the specified compaction. The subbase material shall be compacted by means of approved vibrating rollers or steel wheel rollers (rubber type rollers may be used as a supplement), progressing gradually from the outside towards the centre, except on super elevated curves, where the rolling shall begin at the low side and progress to the high side. Each succeeding pass shall overlap the previous pass by at least one third of the roller width. While the rolling progresses, the entire surface of each layer shall be properly shaped and dressed with a motor grader, to attain a smooth surface free from ruts or ridges and having proper section and crown. Rolling shall continue until entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly compacted to the specified density.

Any area inaccessible to rolling equipment shall be compacted by means of hand guided rollers,

plate compactors or mechanical tampers, where the thickness in loose layer shall not be more than 10 cm.

If the layer of subbase material or part thereof does not conform to the required finish, the

Contractor shall, at his own expense, rework, water, and re-compact the material before succeeding layer of the pavement structure is constructed.

Immediately prior to the placing of first layer of base course the subbase layer (both under the

travelled way and the shoulders) shall conform to the required level and shape. Prior to placing the succeeding layers of the material, the top surface of each layer shall be made sufficiently moist to ensure bond between the layers. The edges or edge slopes shall be bladed or otherwise dressed to conform to the lines and dimensions shown on the plans.

No material for construction of the base shall be placed until the subbase has been approved by the

Engineer.




3.4 Compaction requirements The relative compaction of each layer of the compacted subbase shall not be less than Ninety Eight

(98) percent of the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T-180 Method-D. The field density shall be determined according to AASHTO T-191 or other approved method. For all materials, the field density thus obtained shall be adjusted to account for oversize particles (retained on 19 mm sieve) as directed by the Engineer. Also for adjustment of any material retained on 4.75 mm sieve, AASHTO Method T-224 shall be used.

3.5 Moisture Content Determination As it is customary in the project laboratories that small samples of materials are placed in ovens for

moisture determination for proctor, following precautions are necessary to ensure proper compaction results.

a) Same size of sample is placed in oven for moisture determination in case of laboratory density

(modified proctor) and field density. b) Moisture content for calculation of field density and proctor shall be observed on material

passing 4.75 mm sieve. 3.6 Tolerance The subbase shall be compacted to the desired level and cross slopes as shown on the drawings.

The allowable tolerance shall be according to the "Table for Allowable Tolerances" in these specifications.

4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1 Measurement The quantity of subbase to be paid for shall be measured by the theoretical volume in place as

shown on the drawings or as directed and approved for construction by the Engineer, placed, compacted and accepted in the completed granular subbase course. No allowance will be given for materials placed outside the theoretical limits as shown on the cross-sections.

4.2 Payment The accepted quantities measured as provided above shall be for the Pay Item shown in the Bill of

Quantities, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, hauling, placing, watering, rolling, labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.




a) The gradation curve of the material shall be smooth and within the envelope limits for Grading A or B given below.

AAGGGGRREEGGAATTEE BBAASS EE CCOOUURRSS EE 1. DESCRIPTION This item shall consist of furnishing, spreading and compacting one (1) or more layers of aggregate

base on a prepared subgrade, subgrade or existing road surface, in accordance with the specifications and the drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer.

2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS Material for aggregate base course shall consist of crushed hard durable gravel, rock or stone

fragments. It shall be clean and free from organic matters, lumps of clay and other deleterious substances. The material shall be of such a nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base for both flexible and rigid pavements. The aggregate base shall comply with the following grading and quality requirements.

Grading Requirements for Subbase Material

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing Grading Mm Inch A B

50.0 25.0 9.5 4.75 2.0 0.425 0.075

2 1 3/8 No.4 No.10 No.40 No.200

100 70-95 30-65 25-55 15-40 8-20 2-8

100 75-95 40-75 30-60 20-50 12-25 5-10

The material shall be well graded such that the coefficient of Uniformity D60/D10 shall be greater than four (4).

b) Crushed Aggregate (material retained on sieve NO.4) shall consist of material of which at least

ninety (90) percent by weight shall be crushed particles, having a minimum of two (2) fractured faces.

c) The Coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear by the Loss, Angeles Abrasion test

(AASHTO T-96) of not more than forty (40). d) The material shall have a loss of less than twelve (12) percent when subjected to five cycles of

the Sodium Sulphate Soundness test according to AASHTO T-104. e) The sand equivalent determined according to AASHTO T-176 shall not be less than 40 or the

material shall have a Liquid limit of not more than twenty five (25) and a plasticity Index of not more than 6 as determined by AASHTO T-89 and T-90.

f) The material passing the 19 mm sieve shall have a CBR value of minimum eighty (80) percent,

tested according to the AASHTO T193. The CBR value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T 180, Method D.

g) Laminated material shall not exceed 15% of total volume of Aggregate Base Course.

2.1 Filler for Blending If filler, in addition to that naturally present in the aggregate base material is necessary for meeting

the grading requirement or for satisfactory bonding of the material, it shall be uniformly blended with the base course material at the crushing plant or in a pugmill unless otherwise approved. The material for such purpose shall be obtained from sources approved by the Engineer. The material shall be free from organic matter, dirt, shale, clay and clay lump or other deleterious matter and shall conform to following requirement.




AASHTO Sieve Percent Passing 3/8 Inch 100 No. 4 85-100 No. 100 10-30 Plasticity Index (AASHTO T -90) 6 maximum Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T -176) 30 minimum

However the combined aggregates prepared by mixing the coarse material and filler shall satisfy the

requirements. 3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Preparation of surface for Aggregate base course In case crushed aggregate base is to be laid over prepared sub base course, the subbase course

shall not have loose material or moisture in excess to optimum moisture content. 3.2 Compaction Compaction process shall conform in all respect to the requirements specified. 3.3 Compaction Requirement The relative compaction of each layer of the compacted base shall not be less than 100 percent to

the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T -180, Method D (Modified). The field density shall be determined according to AASHTO T -191 or other approved method. For all materials, the field density thus obtained shall be adjusted to account for oversize particles (retained on 19 mm sieve) as directed by the Engineer. Also for adjustment of any material retained on 4.75 mm sieve, AASHTO Method T-224 shall be used. Completed base course shall be maintained in an acceptable condition at all times until prime coat is applied. When base course is to carry traffic for an indefinite length of time before receiving surfacing, the contractor shall maintain the surface until final acceptance and shall prevent reveling by wetting, blading, rolling and addition of fines as may be required to keep the base tightly bound and leave a slight excess of material over the entire surface which must be removed and the surface finish restored before application of prime coat.

3.4 Moisture Content Determination Moisture content determination shall conform in all respects to the requirements specified. 3.5 Trial Sections Prior to commencement of aggregate base course operations, a trial section of two hundred (200)

meters minimum, but not to exceed five hundred (500) meters shall be prepared by the contractor using same material and equipment as will be used at site to determine the adequacy of equipment, loose depth measurement necessary to result in the specified compacted layer depths, field moisture content and relationship between the number of compaction passes and the resulting density of material.

3.6 Tolerance The completed base course shall be tested for required thickness and smoothness before

acceptance. Any area having waves, irregularities in excess of one (1) cm in three (3) M Or two (2) cm in fifteen (15) M shall be corrected by scarifying the surface, adding approved material, reshaping, re-compacting and finishing as specified. Skin patching of an area without scarifying the surface to permit proper bonding of added material shall not be permitted. The allowable tolerances shall be according to the "Table for Allowable Tolerances" in these specifications.

3.7 Acceptance, Sampling and Testing Acceptance of sampling and testing with respect to materials and construction requirements shall be

governed by the relevant, "Table for Sampling and Testing Frequency" or as approved by the Engineer.




4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1 Measurement The quantity of aggregate base to be paid for shall be measured by the theoretical volume in place

as shown on the drawings or as directed and approved for construction by the Engineer, placed and accepted in the completed crushed aggregate base course. No allowance will be given for materials placed outside the theoretical limits as shown on the cross sections.

4.2 Payment The accepted quantities measured as above shall be paid for at the contract unit price, for the item

shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, hauling, placing, watering, rolling, labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this item.




1. DESCRIPTION

SURFACE TREATMENT

This work shall consist of upto three applications of asphaltic material each followed by a cover of

aggregates or an application of asphaltic material without aggregates applied in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines and width shown on the drawings or as established by the Engineer.


2.1 Aggregate Aggregate shall consist of clean, dry, hard, durable, tough, angular, sound crushed stone or crushed

gravel of uniform quality and free from dirt, clay and other objectionable matter. Aggregates from only the sources of established adhesion properties would be used. The percentage of wear by the Los Angeles Abrasion test (AASHTO T-96) shall not be more than forty (40). Aggregate crushing value (ACV) when tested as per BS-812 (1990) shall not exceed 25%. When subjected to five (5) cycles of sodium-sulphate soundness testing as determined by AASHTO T-104, it shall have a weight loss of not greater than ten (10) percent. The moisture content in the aggregate applied directly to the surface of the bituminous material shall not exceed three (3) percent by weight plus one-half (1/2) the water absorption of the aggregate at the time of delivery to the Project. In no case shall free moisture be drawing from the truck bed.

The portion of aggregate retained on the 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) sieve shall not contain more than fifteen (15) percent of particles by weight of flat or elongated, or both, that the ratio between the maximum and the minimum dimensions exceeds 2.5:1.

Flakiness Index, tested under BS-812 (1990) part 105, shall be 25 (max) for nominal size 18 mm

and 12 mm and 30 (max) for nominal size 9mm. The nominal sizes of aggregates used for surface treatment shall be as under:- Size No. 1 Nominal size 18 mm

Size No. 2 Nominal size 12 mm Size No. 3 Nominal size 9 mm Size No. 4 Nominal size 6 mm

The nominal sizes are defined in the table below:-

Nominal Sizes (mm)

Specified size * Passing Retained

Sieve (mm) %age Sieve (mm) %age 18 19 100 12.5 85 12 12.5 100 9.5 85 9 9.5 100 6.3 85 6 6.3 100 4.75 85

* By convention, this item defines a fraction of material within the respective sieve. For Material passing 3/8” Sieve, following Table shall be used:

Sieve Designation Percent Passing by Weight mm Inch Size No.1 Size No.2 Size No.3 Size No.4

9.5 3/8 0-15 0-10 - - 4.75 No. 4 0-5 0-5 0-10 - 2.38 No. 8 - - 0-5 0-5 1.18 No. 16 - - - 0-3 0.075 No. 200 0-2 0-2 0-1 0-1




2.2 Asphaltic Material The asphaltic material shall conform to the requirements of NHA Specifications of 'Asphaltic

Materials'. The type shall be one of the following, as shown in the Bill of Quantities or ordered by the Engineer. Spraying temperature shall be as shown against each type.

Table: Spraying Temperatures (0

Asphalt Type / Grade

C) for Surface Treatments

Spraying Temperature for Surface Treatments

a. Asphalt Cements AC-2.5 AC-5 AC-10 AC-20 AC-40 AR-1000 AR-2000 AR-4000 AR-8000 AR-16000 200-300pen. 120-150pen. 85-100pen. 60-70pen. 40-50pen.

130 min. 140 min. 140 min. 145 min. 150 min. 155 min. 140 min. 145 min. 145 min.

- 130 min. 130 min. 140 min. 145 min. 150 min.

b. Emulsified Asphalts RS-1 RS-2 MS-1 MS-2 MS-2h HFMS-1 HFMS-2 HFMS-2h HFMS-2s SS-1 SS-1h CRS-1 CRS-2 CMS-2 CMS-2h CSS-1 CSS-1h

20-60 50-85 20-70

- -

20-70 - - - - -

50-85 50-85

- - - -

c. Cutback Asphalts (RC, MC, SC) 30 (MC only) 70 250 800 3000

30 min. 50 min. 75 min. 95 min.

110 min. 3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS At the time of the application, the weather shall be warm and dry, and the road surface shall be

clean and dry. Spraying shall not be done unless the road temperature is above twenty (20) degree C for at least one hour prior to the commencement of spraying operations, and the temperature shall not be less than twenty (20) degree C during the spraying. Prior to applying the asphaltic material, dirt and other objectionable materials shall be removed from the surface and surface shall be primed as per NHA Specifications of “Bituminous Prime Coat”. If so directed by the Engineer, the surface shall be cleaned by power brooming or wire brush until all loose and foreign materials are removed.




3.1. Equipment Equipment shall conform in all respects to the provisions under NHA Specifications “Bituminous

Prime Coat - Equipment”. The equipment shall be operated by the manpower specially trained for this work. Necessary safety arrangement for the workers, equipment and traffic shall be ensured during the operations.

3.2. Preparation of Surface Irregularities and surface damage e.g. potholes, depressions, raveling, shall be corrected prior to

surface dressing. The Engineer shall also satisfy himself that fundamental pavement defects e.g. base failure, drainage problems etc. have been remedied before surface dressing is attempted. Areas, which are excessively rich in bitumen e.g. 'bleeding', shall be cut out and patched. All patches, however, occasioned shall be thoroughly compacted, sealed and blinded with crusher dust before opening to traffic for several days before surface dressing commences.

Immediately prior to the application of binder all dirt, dust are foreign material shall be removed by

thorough brooming and or the use of compressed air. Adhering mud or other soiling may be removed using water and brushes, the general use of water to wash the road shall not be permitted.

No application of asphaltic material shall be undertaken until the surface has been cleaned to the

satisfaction of the Engineer. For application of prime coat, asphaltic material shall be medium curing cut-back asphalt consisting

of an asphaltic base fluxed with suitable petroleum distillates. Where a prime cat has been applied to the surface, any area in which the prime coat has been

insufficiently applied and is defective in any way shall be re-primed as directed by the Engineer. For re-primed surfaces, atleast a waiting period of 48 hours may be necessary for the prime to become completely dry before any further asphaltic operation, shall be applied above it.

3.3. Application of Asphaltic Materials Asphalt cement, liquid asphalt and emulsified asphalt shall applied by means of pressure distributor

manual or automatic at the temperature specified for the type and grade of asphalt being used. The rates of application shall be within the ranges given in Table “Quantities of Materials for Bituminous Surface Treatments”.

The spread of bituminous materials shall be at least ten (10) cm more than the width to be covered

by the aggregate from the spreading device. The distributor shall be moving forward at proper application speed at the time the spray bar is opened. Any skipped areas or deficiencies shall be corrected in an approved manner. Junctions of spreads shall be carefully made to assure a smooth riding surface. The length of spread of bituminous material shall not exceed than that which trucks loaded with cover coat material can immediately cover. Under no circumstances shall operations proceed in such manner that bituminous material will be allowed to chill, set up, dry, or otherwise impair retention of the cover coat.

The distributor when not spreading shall be so designed that the spray bar or mechanism will not

drip bituminous material on the surface of the traveled way. Distribution of the bituminous material shall be so regulated and sufficient bituminous material left in the distributor at the end of each application, so that there will be a uniform distribution of bituminous material. In no case shall the distributor be allowed to expel air with the bituminous material thereby causing uneven coverage. The angle of the spray nozzles and the height of the spray bar shall be so adjusted and frequently checked that uniform distribution is ensured. The distribution shall cease immediately upon any clogging or interference of any nozzle and corrective measures shall be taken before distribution is resumed.

Asphalt cement, liquid asphalt and emulsified asphalt shall be applied by means of a pressure

distributor manual or automatic at the temperature specified for the type and grade of asphalt being used.




3.4. Spreading of Aggregate

Immediately after applying the asphaltic material, dry aggregate shall be uniformly and evenly distributed over the treated surface from an approved mechanical aggregate spreader. The truck carrying the aggregate shall move backward, so as to prevent the tyres of the truck and the mechanical aggregate spreader from driving directly on the newly sprayed asphalt. No portion of the binder shall remain uncovered for a period in excess of twenty (20) minutes after spraying.

Immediately after spreading of the aggregate, the treated surface shall be rolled with a self-propelled

Pneumatic-Tyre roller having a minimum contact pressure of 2.8 Kg/square centimeters. A steel-wheeled roller weighing between six (6) to eight (8) tons may be used as a second roller. Rolling shall continue only until a smooth, thoroughly compacted surface is obtained. Procedures of starting, stopping, or turning of any piece of equipment which results in displacement of the cover material or damage to the seal courses be prohibited.

Any place where binder shows undulation on the surface shall be covered with additional aggregate

and further rolled and broom dragged until an even surface results, and does not adhere to wheels of vehicles. Overlapping the applications of cover material shall be avoided and' all spillage shall be removed from the surface.

The quantity of aggregates to be applied shall be within the ranges specified in Table “Quantities of

Materials for Bituminous Surface Treatments”. 3.5. Maintenance of Traffic Detouring of highway traffic for this work on running road will not be provided for or permitted,

except when authorized by the Engineer. All construction operations shall be coordinated to result in the least practicable delay of traffic. One way traffic shall be maintained and traffic speeds restricted to fifteen (15) Km per hour. The contractor shall provide flagmen, warning signs, barricades, and a sufficient number of pilot cars to control traffic through the bituminous sealing operations when so directed by the Engineer. Pilot cars shall be used to lead the traffic through the areas of all distribution and sealing operations. Pilot cars shall be light "Pick up" trucks or other approved vehicles and shall be equipped with signs reading "PILOT CAR -DO NOT PASS" in both English and Urdu languages. Two (2) signs shall be mounted on the vehicles so as to be clearly visible from both directions. One (1) flagman shall be stationed immediately ahead of the application of the bituminous material and one (1) flagman immediately behind the section being rolled. Suitable speed limit signs shall be displayed, and the signs shall move forward with the flagman as the work progresses.

No separate payment shall be made for conformance to this paragraph. All these items being

considered subsidiary to the item (s) given in the Bill of Quantities. 3.6. Working Period All work shall be so conducted that the work of applying asphalt and, aggregate and of all rolling

shall be completed during the time as fixed by the Engineer who shall determine it by using his experience and looking into weather conditions.

3.7. Maintenance of completed work When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor will be required to add bituminous material or

aggregate or both to the portion of road identified for such purpose on the project. Furnishing additional bituminous material and furnishing, spreading, dragging and rolling of additional aggregate will not be paid for separately but will be considered as subsidiary work pertaining to the relevant item of "Bituminous Surface Treatment".

3.8. Opening to Traffic and after-care There shall be no delay in opening a completed surface dressing to traffic at a controlled speed.

Prior to opening to traffic any spillage of aggregates shall be removed and any binder drips or windblown contamination shall be dusted. After 2-3 days under traffic, excess stone will be removed by brushing.




4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1. Measurement The quantity of surface treatment to be paid for shall be measure in as per unit shown in BOQ within

the theoretical line in place as shown on drawings., no allowance will be given for material placed outside the theoretical limits of finished surfacing whether placed for, due to requirement of contractor’s operations or placed outside the limits due to inadequate control.

4.2. Payment

The aggregate and asphaltic material measured as stated above shall be paid for a particular item at the contract unit price shown in Bill of Quantities, which payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools equipment and incidental for performing all the work in the construction of bituminous surface treatment complete in place and according to specification, including priming of surface.

Table Quantities of Materials for Bituminous Surface Treatments

Surface treatment Aggregate Bituminous material

Type Application Size No. Quantity Kg./Sq.M

Quantity Litres/ Sq.M

Type

Single Single 2 12.5 1.19 (a) 1.63 (b)

Double First 1 24.0 1.90 (a)

2.14 (b)

Second 3 12.5 1.19 (a) 1.63 (b)

Triple First 1 24.0 1.90 (a) 2.14 (b)

Second 2 12.5 1.19 (a) 1.63 (b)

Third 3 6.5 0.68 (c)

i). Bituminous material types area (a) asphalt cement, (b) cut-back or emulsified and (c) asphalt cement, cut-back and emulsified.

Notes:-

ii). Quantities of bituminous material may be varied by the Engineer by ±15% depending on site

conditions.

iiiiii)).. Prime coat shall be applied prior to the surface treatment for the newly constructed pavement at the rate as specified in the NHA Specifications “Bituminous Prime Coat – Application of Asphaltic Material.




a). The top of earth surface or water bound base courses from a point twenty (20) centimeters outside the edge of the pavement line to 20 cm outside the line on the opposite side of the roadway.

BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT 1. DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, material and performing all

operations in applying a liquid asphalt prime coat on a previously prepared and untreated earth sub grade, water-bound base course, crushed aggregate base course, tops of roadway shoulders and as otherwise shown on the plans in strict accordance with the specification and in conformity with the lines shown on the drawings.

2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS Asphaltic material shall conform to the requirements of asphalt cement, cutback or emulsified

asphalt, whichever is specified in the Bill of Quantities. 3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Prime coat shall be applied when the surface to be treated is dry except that when emulsified

asphalt is used, the surface may be reasonably moist. The application is prohibited when the weather is foggy or rainy, or when the atmospheric temperature is below fifteen (15) degree C unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Prior to the application of the prime coat, all loose materials shall be removed from the surface and the same shall be cleaned by means of approved mechanical sweepers or blowers and/or hand brooms, until it is as free from dust as is deemed practicable. No traffic shall be permitted on the surface after it has been prepared to receive the bituminous material. Prior to the application of prime coat on bridge decks and concrete pavements, the surfaces shall be cleaned of all loose material. All expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with bituminous material as directed by the Engineer. Areas to be primed will be classified as under:

b). The top of the shoulders from the inter-section of embankment slope and top of subgrade to the

edge of the pavement line. c). The bridge wearing surface from curb to curb and end to end of bridge wearing surface. d). Other surfaces as shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer.

Primed surface shall be kept undisturbed for at least 24 hours, so that the bituminous material travels beneath and leaves the top surface in non tacky condition. No further asphaltic operations shall start on a tacky condition.

3.1 Equipment The liquid asphaltic material shall be sprayed by means of a pressure distributor of not less than

1000 liter capacity, mounted on pneumatic tyres of such width and number that the load produced on the road surface will not exceed hundred (100) Kg per cm width of tyre. It shall be of recognized manufacturer.

The tank shall have a heating device able to heat a complete charge of asphaltic liquid up to one

hundred eighty (180) degree C. The heating device shall be so that overheating will not occur. Consequently, the flames must not touch directly on the casting of the tank containing the asphaltic liquid or gases there-from. The Contractor will be responsible for any fire or accident resulting from heating of bituminous materials. The liquid shall be circulated or stirred during the heating. The tank shall be insulated in such a way that the drop in temperature when the tank is filled and not heated, will be less than two (2) degree C per hour. A thermometer shall be fixed to the tank in order to be able to control continuously the temperature of the liquid. The thermometer shall be placed in such away that the highest temperature in the tank is measured. The tank shall be furnished with a device that indicates the contents. The pipes for filling the tank shall be furnished with an easily interchangeable filter.




The distributor shall be able to vary the spray width of the asphaltic liquid in steps of maximum 10 cm, to a total width of four (4) M. The spraying bar shall have nozzles from which the liquid is sprayed fan-shaped on the road surface equally distributed over the total spraying width.

The distributor shall have a pump for spraying the liquid driven by a separate motor, or the speed of

the pump shall be synchronized with the speed of the distributor. The pump shall be furnished with an indicator showing the performance in litres per minute. At the suction side the pump shall have a filter easily exchangeable. A thermometer shall be fixed, which indicates the temperature of the liquid immediately before it leaves the spraying bar.

The distributor shall be furnished with a tachometer indicating the speed in meter per minute. The

tachometer shall be visible from the driver's seat. The function of the distributor shall be so exact that the deviation from the prescribed quantity to be spread on any square meter does not exceed 10% The distributor shall be equipped with a device for hand spraying of the bituminous liquid, to cover any irregular area or covering the area improperly sprayed.

3.2 Application of Asphaltic Material Immediately before applying prime coat, the full area of surface to be treated shall be swept with a

power broom to remove all dirt and other objectionable material. If required by the Engineer, the surface shall be made moist but not saturated. Asphaltic Materials shall be applied temperature by approved pressure distributors operated by skilled workmen. The spray nozzles and spray bars shall be adjusted and frequently checked so as to ensure uniform distribution. Spraying shall cease immediately upon any clogging or interference of any nozzle and remedial measures taken before spraying is resumed. The rate for application of asphaltic material (cut back/emulsified) shall be as under: -

TYPE OF SURFACE LITRES PER SOUARE METER

Minimum Maximum 1. Subgrade, Subbase, Water bound base courses, 0.65 1.75 and Crushed stone base course. 2. Bridge, Wearing Surfaces, Concrete Pavement 0.15 0.4 However, the exact rate shall be specified by the Engineer determined from field trials. The test methods shall be determined by the Engineer and performed by the Contractor in the

presence of Engineer. The prime coat shall be left undisturbed for a period of at least 24 hours, and shall not be opened to

traffic until it has penetrated and cured sufficiently so that it will not be picked up by the wheels of passing vehicles. The Contractor shall maintain the prime coat until the next course is applied. Care shall be taken that the application of bituminous material is not in excess of the specified amounts; any excess shall be blotted with sand or similar treatment. All areas inaccessible by the distributor shall be sprayed manually using the device for hand spraying from the distributor.

The surface of structures and trees adjacent to the area being treated shall be protected in such a

manner as to prevent their being spattered or marred. Where no convenient detour is available for traffic, operations shall be confined to one-half the

roadway width at a time. The Contractor shall provide proper traffic control so that vehicles may proceed without damage to the primed area. Work shall not be started on the portion of the road not covered by previous application until the surface previously covered has dried.

Any area which gets damaged by traffic or otherwise due to the negligence of the contractor shall be

re-primed by the contractor at his own cost.





The unit of measurement shall be for the area as actually covered by prime coat in accordance with these specifications. No measurement or payment will be made for the areas primed outside the limits, specified, herein shown on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer. Blotting material will not be measured for payment and shall be considered subsidiary to the prime coat.

4.2 Payment

The payment for area primed measured as stated above, shall be made for the adjusted contract unit price as shown in BOQ item, which payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, material, tools, equipment and incidentals and for performing all the work involved in applying prime coat, complete in place.




US Standard Sieve

AASS PP HHAALLTT CCOONNCCRREETTEE WWEEAARRIINNGG CCOOUURRSS EE -- PP LLAANNTT MMIIXX 1. DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing aggregates and asphalt binder at a central mixing plant, to a

specified mixing temperature, transporting, spreading and compacting the mixture in an approved manner on primed on tacked base, sub base. Subgrade, bridge deck or concrete pavement in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENT 2.1 Mineral Aggregates The Aggregates shall consist of coarse aggregates, fine aggregates and filler material, if required

and shall be clean, hard, tough, durable and sound particles of uniform quality, geology, petrology and free from decomposed material, vegetable matter, soil, clay, lumps and other deleterious substances.

Coarse aggregate which is the material retained on an AASHTO No. 4 Sieve, shall consist of one

hundred (100) % crushed rock or crushed gravel having two (2) faces mechanically crushed. The type of source shall be uniform throughout the quarry location from where such a material is obtained. The coarse aggregates shall be free from an excess of flat or/and elongated particles.

Fine aggregate which is the material passing from AASHTO No. 4 sieve, shall consist of 100%

crushed material from rock or boulder. Fine aggregate shall be stored separately, and no natural sand will be allowed in the mix.

When the combined grading of the coarse and fine aggregates is deficient in material passing the

AASHTO No. 200 sieve, mineral filler material shall be added as approved by the Engineer. The filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic, calcined dust cement or other suitable mineral matter free from lumps, balls or other deleterious material and shall conform to the following gradation.

Percent Passing by Weight mm Inch 0.600 0.300 0.075

No. 30 No. 50 No. 200

100 95 - 100 70 - 100

The coarse and fine aggregates shall meet the Joilowin9 requirements:

a) The percent of Wear by the Los Angeles Abrasion test (AASHTO T 96) shall not be more than

thirty (30). b) The loss when subjected to five cycles of the Sodium Sulphate Soundness test (AASHTO T 104)

shall be less than twelve (12) percent c) The Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T 176).determined after all processing except for addition of

asphalt cement shall not be less than 45. d) All aggregates shall have a liquid limit of not more than twenty five (25) and a Plasticity Index of

not more than four (4) as determined by AASHTO T-89 and T-90. e) The portion of aggregates retained on the 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) sieve shall not contain more than 10

percent by weight of flat and/or elongated particles (ratio of maximum to minimum dimension = 2.5:1)

f) Stripping test shall be performed on crush aggregates as described under AASHTO-182 and

only that material shall be allowed which qualifies the test. g) The coarse aggregates shall be checked if desired by the Engineer for cationic and anionic

behavior so that their affinity with the bitumen to be used is verified.




h) Petrographic examination of the coarse aggregate shall be conducted if so directed by the Engineer.

The percentage of particles having certain, proportions between their largest and smallest dimensions (i.e. between the largest distance the particles can fill out between two parallel planes that will permit the particle to pass), shall be determined in the following way:

i. Form a sample of coarse aggregates, all particles passing No. 4 sieve are eliminated. The

sample shall be of sufficient quantity that at least 100 particles remain. ii. By means of a sliding caliper, the largest and smallest dimensions, as defined above, are

determined for each particle and its proportion calculated (with one decimal). iii. The total weights of particles having the proportions two and a half (2-5) or less and three (3) or

less, are determined and their percentage in relation to the total sample are calculated. 2.2 Asphaltic Material Asphaltic binder to be mixed with the aggregate to produce asphaltic base shall be asphalt cement

penetration grade 40-50, 60-70 or 80-100 as specified by the Engineer. Generally it will meet the requirement of AASHTO M-20.

2.3 Asphalt Concrete Wearing Course Mixture The composition of the asphaltic concrete paving mixture for wearing course shall conform to Class

A and/or Class B shown in the following table:

Table Asphalt Concrete Wearing Course Requirements

Mix Designation Class A Class B Compacted Thickness 50-80mm 35-60 mm

Combined Aggregate Grading Requirements:

US Standard Sieve Sizes Percent Passing by Weight mm Inch 25 1 100 - 19 ¾ 90 - 100 100

12.5 ½ - 75 - 90 9.5 3/8 56 - 70 60 - 80 4.75 No. 4 35 - 50 40 - 60 2.38 No. 8 23 - 35 20 - 40 1.18 No. 16 5 - 12 5 - 15

0.075 No. 200 2 - 8 3 - 8 Asphalt Content weight percent of total mix 3.5 (Min.) 3.5 (Min.)

The asphalt concrete wearing course mixture shall meet the following Marshal Test Criteria:-

Compaction, number of blows at each end of specimen 75

Stability 1000 Kg (Min) Flow, 0.25 mm (0.01 inch) 8-14 Percent air voids in mix 4-7 Percent voids in mineral aggregates

According to table 5.3 Ms-2 (Asphalt Institute – USA), sixth addition, 1993

Loss of Stability 20% (Max) 2.4 Job-M ix Formula

At least one week prior to production, a Job-Mix Formula (JMF) for the asphaltic wearing course mixture or mixtures to, be used for the project, shall be established jointly by the Engineer and the Contractor.




The JMF shall be established by Marshall Method of Mix Design according to the procedure prescribed in the Asphalt Institute Manual Series No. 2 (MS-2), sixth edition 1993 or the latest Edition. The JMF, with the allowable tolerances, shall be within the master. Each JMF shall indicate a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve and a single percentage of bitumen to be added to the aggregates. The ratio of weight of filler (passing No. 200) to that of asphalt shall range between 1 - 1.5 for hat climate areas with temperature more than 40o C. After the JMF is established, all mixtures furnished for the project represented by samples taken from the asphalt plant- during operation, shall conform thereto with the following ranges of tolerances:

Combined aggregates gradation:

Passing No. 4 and larger sieves ± 6.0% Passing No. 8 to No. 100 sieves ± 4.00/0 Passing No. 200 ± 2.0%

Asphalt Content: Weight percent of total mix ± 0.3%

In addition to meeting the requirements specified in the preceding items, the mixture as established

by the JMF shall also satisfy the following physical property. Loss of Marshall Stability by immersion of specimen in water at sixty (60) degree C. for twenty four

(24) hours as compared with the stability measured after immersion in water at sixty (60) degree C. for twenty (20) minutes shall not exceed twenty (20) percent. If the mixture fails to meet this criterion, the JMF shall be modified or an anti-stripping agent shall be used.

Should a change of sources of materials be made a new Job Mix Formula shall be established

before the new material is used. When unsatisfactory results or other conditions make it necessary, a new Job Mix Formula will be required.

3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT Construction requirements for this item shall conform to the same as specified for Asphaltic

Concrete Base Course Plant mix, except as modified in the following sub-items. 3.1 Preparation of Base Course Surface Before spreading materials, the surface of the previously constructed and accepted base course on

which the mix is to be placed shall be conditioned by application of a lack coat, if directed by the Engineer.

3.2 Pavement Thickness and Tolerance The asphalt concrete wearing course shall be compacted to the desired level and cross slope as

shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The tolerances in compacted thickness of the wearing course shall be ± 3mm from the desired

thickness shown on the drawings. For determination of thickness one (1) core per hundred meters of each lane will be taken. If the thickness so determined is deficient by more than three (3) mm, but not more than ten (10) mm, payment will be made at an adjusted price of this specification.

The surface of the wearing course shall be tested by the Engineer using a 5 meters straightedge at

selected locations. The variation of the surface from the testing edge of the straightedge between any two contacts, longitudinal or transverse with the surface shall at no point exceed five (5) millimeters, The cross fall (camber) shall be with ± 0.2 percent of that specified, and the level at any point shall be within + three (3) mm of the level shown on the Drawings. All humps or depressions exceeding the specified tolerance shall be corrected by removing the defective work and replacing it with new material, by overlaying, or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer.




3.3 Acceptance Sampling and Testing Acceptance of sampling and testing for this Item with respect to materials and construction

requirements, not specified herein, shall be in accordance with the relevant, "Tables for Sampling and Testing Frequency" in these specifications.

4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1 Measurement The quantities of Asphaltic wearing course shall be measured and compacted in place.

Measurements shall be based on the dimension as shown on plans or as otherwise directed or authorized by the Engineer. A tolerance of ± three (3) mm shall be allowed in compacted thickness of wearing course however, any asphalt in excess of 3 mm shall not be paid and any layer deficient by more than 3 mm but not exceeding 10 mm shall be paid.

The quantity of bitumen material used is included in the asphalt concrete mixture and will not be

measured separately. Quantities of Bitumen, wasted or remaining on hand after completion of the work, shall not be

measured or paid for. 4.2 Payment

1) The quantities measured as determined above shall be paid for the pay item as shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for the furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and for excavation, concreting, backfilling and erection of posts, installation of sign panels and all incidental costs necessary to complete the work as prescribed in this item.

2) Price adjustment

If the thickness determined of this specification is deficient by more than three (3) mm, but not more than ten (10) mm, payment will be made at an adjusted price as specified in table-1 below:

Deficiency in thickness as determined

by cores Proportional Rate of contract Price

allowed 0.0 mm to 3.0 mm 3.1 mm to 50.0 mm 5.1 mm to 10.0 mm

100%

90%

80%

When wearing course is more than ten (10) mm deficient in thickness, the contractor shall remove such deficient areas and replace them with wearing course of an approved quality and thickness or the contractor may opt to place an additional layer of wearing course asphalt, grading with a minimum thickness of 35 mm. The contractor will receive no compensation for the above additional work. Alternately, the contractor may choose to overlay the area in a thickness of 30 mm (min.) with smooth transition as approved by the Engineer on either side with no extra compensation.




TRAFFIC ROAD SIGNS AND SAFETY DEVICES

1. DESCRIPTION

This work shall comprise of furnishing and installing traffic signs, permanent safety devices and post assemblies in accordance with these specifications and to the details shown on the Drawings. All sign faces and lettering shall be in accordance with the latest NTRC sign standards. Prior to manufacture and fabrication of the signs the contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval detailed drawings showing letter sizes, traffic symbols and sign layout. The permanent safety devices shall consist of road posts and hazard markers and will be provided as per specifications, drawings or as directed by the Engineer.


2.1 Sign Panels

Sign panels for regulator, warning and informatory signs shall be manufactured from aluminum alloy conforming to ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6 or 5052 - H38 plates of three (3) mm thickness as shown on the drawings. Alternatively, Polyvinyl panels can also be used as per direction of the Engineer. The blank sheets of panels shall be free form laminations, blisters, open seams, pits, holes, or other defects that may affect their appearance or use. The thickness shall be uniform and the blank commercially flat. Perform shearing, cutting and punching before preparing the blanks for application of reflective material. The blanks shall be cleaned, degreased and chromate or otherwise properly prepared according to methods recommended by the sheeting manufacturer.

2.2 Reflective Sheeting

Reflective sheeting used on road sign made of flexible white or colored, wide angle retro-reflective sheeting (herein after called sheeting) and related processing materials designed to enhance nighttime visibility. The sheeting shall consist of optical elements adhered to a synthetic resin and encapsulated by a flexible transparent plastic that has a smooth outer surface. The sheeting shall have either a precoated pressure sensitive adhesive or a tack-free adhesive activated by heat applied in a heat vacuum applicator in a manner recommended by the sheeting manufacturer. Both adhesive classes shall be protected by an easily removable liner. The manufacturer of the sheeting being offered shall furnish the process inks, clears and thinners produced by the sheeting manufacturer recommended for and compatible with the sheeting to meet the performance requirements of this specification and shall further be responsible for technical assistance in the use for these inks or alternatively sheeting can be used on sheeting. The sheeting manufacturer must provide documented evidence to the satisfactions of the Engineer that representative production materials of the type to be supplied has been used successfully in a substantial traffic signing program in similar climatic conditions for at least three years.

a) Color Requirements

Color shall be specified and conform to the requirements of the following Table I.

Table I Color Specification Limits * and Reference Standards

Reflectance Limit (Y) Munsell **

Color X Y X Y X Y X Y Min Max Paper White .303 .287 .368 .353 .340 .380 .274 .316 27.0 5PB 7/1 Yellow .498 .412 .557 .442 .479 .520 .438 .472 15.0 40.0 1.25Y 6/12

Red .613 .297 .708 .292 .636 .364 .558 .352 2.5 11.0 7.5R 3/12

Blue .144 .030 .244 .202 .190 .247 .066 .208 1.0 10.0 5.8PB 1.32/6.8

Orange .550 .360 .630 .370 .581 .418 .516 .394 14.0 30.0 2.5YR 5.5/14




Brown .430 .340 .430 .390 .550 .450 .610 .390 3.0 9.0 5YR 3.6 Green .30 .380 .166 .346 .286 .4288 .201 .776 3.0 8.0 10G 3/8

*

Table II

The four pairs of chromaticity coordinates determine the acceptable color in terms of the CIE 1931 standard colormeteric system measured with standard illumination source C.

** Available from Munsell Color Company, 2441 Calvert Street, Baltimore, Maryland 21218. Catalog No. MCP-90040.

b) Coefficient of Retro reflection

The coefficient of retro reflection shall conform to the minimum requirements of the following Table II.

Minimum Coefficient of Retro Reflection

Observation Angle (

(Candelas per foot Candle per square foot)

OEntrance Angle () o White ) Red Yellow Green Blue Brown Orange

0.2 -4 250 45 170 45 20.0 12.0 100.0 0.2 +30 150 25 100 25 11.0 8.5 60.0 0.5 -4 95 15 62 15 7.5 5.0 30.0 0.5 +30 65 10 45 10 5.0 3.5 25.0

For screen printed transparent coloured areas on white sheeting, the coefficients of retro reflection shall not be less than 70% of the values for corresponding colour in the above table.

Upon demand from the Engineer the sheeting manufacturer shall provide a test report from British Standards Institution (BSI) or any internationally recognized laboratory stating that the sheeting meets the requirements according to BSI 873 Part 6 or FP 92 of FHWA.

The brightness of the reflective sheeting totally wet by rain, shall be at least ninety (90)% of the above values. The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible as to permit application over and adhesion to a moderately embossed surface. It shall not show damage when bent (90) degree over a fifty (50) mm diameter mandrill.

The sheeting shall show no cracking or reduction in reflection after being subjected to the dropping of a twenty five (25) mm diameter steel ball from a height of two (2) meters onto its surface.

For heat activated material the adhesive shall permit the reflective sheeting to adhere securely forty eight (48) hours after application at temperatures of up to ninety (90) degree centigrade.

The reflective material shall be weather-resistant and following cleaning, shall show no definite fading, darkening, cracking, blistering or peeling and not less than seventy five (75) % of the specified wet or dry minimum brightness values when exposed to weathering for five (5) years.

c) Performance requirements and obligations.

On demand from the Engineer the sign manufacturer shall submit a certificate from the sheeting manufacturer stating that the sheeting used for finished retroreflective signs meets all requirements listed herein. Sheeting processed and applied to sign blank materials in accordance with sheeting manufacturer’s recommendation, shall perform effectively for the number of years stated in Table-III of this specification. The retro reflective sheeting will be considered unsatisfactory if it has deteriorated due to natural causes to the extent that: (1) the sign is ineffective for its intended purpose when viewed from a moving vehicle under normal day and night driving conditions: or (2) the coefficient of retro reflection is less than the minimum specified for that sheeting during that period listed in following Table III:




Table III

Minimum Coefficient of Retro Reflection Candelas per foot Candle per square foot (.20 obs, and –4o

Sheeting colour

entrance)*

Minimum Coefficient

of Retro reflection (7 years)

Minimum Coefficient

of Retro reflection (10 years)

White 212 200 Yellow 144 136 Green 38 36 Red 38 36 Blue 17 16

Brown 10 9

*

a) The entire seven years the sign manufacturer and sheeting manufacturer will replace the sheeting required to restore the sign surface to its original effectiveness.

For screen printed transparent coloured areas on white sheeting, the coefficients of retro reflection shall not be less than 50% of the values for the corresponding colour in the above table.

All measurements shall be made after sign cleaning according to sheeting manufacturer’s recommendations.

Where it can be shown that retro reflective traffic signs supplied and used according to the sheeting manufacturer’s recommendations have not met the performance requirements above the sheeting manufacturer shall cover restoration costs as follows for sheeting shown to be unsatisfactory during:-

b) In addition, during the first five years sign manufacturer and sheeting manufacturer will cover the

cost of restoring the sign surface to its original effectiveness at no cost to the employer for materials and labor.

Samples of the reflective sheeting shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the Contractor placing his order.

2.3 Metal Posts

Wide flange of 10 x 10 centimeters metal posts shall be fabricated from structural steel conforming to the specifications of ASTM A 283 Grade D. In lieu of wide flange steel posts the contractor may use tubular GI or Black Steel MS posts of minimum internal diameter of sixty five (65) mm with 4.8 mm wall thickness conforming to the specifications of ASTM A 501. All posts shall be thoroughly cleaned, free from grease, scale and rust, and shall be given one coat of anti-corrosive priming paint and two coats of grey paint. Length of the posts shall be such that their top flushes with the top of the sign panel, where as bottom of sign panel is at least hundred and eighty (180) centimeters above shoulder/footpath level.

2.4 Plates

a). Plates shall be non-porous, smooth, flat, rigid, weather proof and shall not rust or deteriorate

otherwise. It shall be so cut that there are no sharp edges and that the corners are rounded off to a radius of thirty seven and half (37.5) mm. Any trade mark or other printing shall be careful removed with liquid thinner.

b). The High Intensity Grade sheeting for the background should cover the whole area of the sign plate.




c). Prior to application of the High Intensity Grade reflective sheeting, the sign plate shall be cleaned and shall be wax-free. They shall be degreased by vapour or by alkaline immersion and etched by scrubbing with abrasive cleaner. The plate shall be rinsed thoroughly and dried with hot air before applying the sheets.

d). The sheeting after application to the sign base shall not come off the edges, which shall be sealed, nor shall it peel off nor warp. The surface shall be smooth and free from any bubbles, pimples, edge chipping or edge shattering. It shall be washable and weather-proof.

2.5 Nuts and bolts

All Nuts and bolts and metal washers shall be of heavily galvanized quality ten (10) mm dia of G.l or aluminum alloy. The bolt heads to be such that they do not protrude out too much nor show very much on the front face of the plate. The heads should be flush with the plate face and covered with sheeting galvanized according to ASTM A 153.

2.6 Rubber Washer All rubber washers shall have thick walls and shall not get dry and brittle when exposed to weather

at the site after they are in position during the life of the sign. 2.7 Caps over the pipes

These can be of heavy plastic or of aluminum well fitted so that they cannot be removed; any good adhesive can be used.

2.8 General

a). Very large signs need not be made of one piece; in that case extended panels shall be used or the various pieces of sheet shall be joined by angle-irons in anticorodal materials, and, if necessary, with connecting cross pieces in order to ensure the solidity of the joint and with slanting struts embedded in the concrete as directed by the Engineer.

b). All the nuts and bolts and metal washers must be heavily galvanized, or may be of stainless steel of high quality.

c). Relevant holes to receive ten (10) mm bolts shall be drilled into the pipes and the plates and not punched. These are to be drilled through the plates before the application of scotchlite.

d). After the plates are fixed with nuts and bolts, the nuts shall be TACK WELDED to the bolts against pilferage.

2.9 Concrete Foundation Blocks

The concrete for the foundation blocks shall be in situ Class A and shall of the size 450 x 450 x 650 mm for category 1 & 2 and variable for category 3 as per sizes shown in the drawings.

2.10 Road Posts and Hazard Markers

The road posts and hazards markers used as permanent safety devices shall conform fully with the requirements of the statutory instruments, current British standards and relevant section of the traffic signs manual. The safety device shall consist of delineators and detours of verge master, flex master, edge master, passing place post, chevroflex etc. and will be manufactured from highly durable tough plastic material withstanding vehicular impact. These shall be of high intensity grade reflective sheeting for maximum visibility during both day and night and consequently be resistant to impact, damage and vandalism.

3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Excavation and Backfilling

Holes shall be excavated to the required depth of the bottom of the concrete foundation as shown on the drawing.




Backfilling shall be carried out by using the surplus excavated material if approved by the engineer and shall be compacted in layers not exceeding fifteen (15) cm in depth. Surplus excavated material shall be disposed of by the contractor as directed by Engineer.

3.2 Erection of Posts / Anchor Bolts

The posts/anchor bolts shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the foundation block prior to the placing of the concrete and shall be adequately supported by bracing to prevent movement of the post/anchor bolts during the setting process of the concrete. The posts /anchor bolts shall be located at the positions shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. The post shall be covered from the top by plastic cover in order to stop the rainwater from entering the pipes and to protect the pipe from rusting.

3.3 Sign Panel Installation

Sign panels shall be installed by the Contractor in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. Any chipping or bending of the sign panels shall be considered as sufficient cause to require replacement of the panels at the Contractor’s expense. The exposed portion of the fastening hardware on the face of the sign shall be painted with enamels matching the background colour. All newly erected traffic road signs shall be covered with burlap or other material until their uncovering is ordered by the Engineer.

3.4 Categories of signs

Traffic road signs shall be of three categories according to type of construction.

a). Warning signs

Constructed with single post and sign of equilateral triangle shape, as shown in drawings Category 1.

b). Regulatory Signs Constructed with single post and sign of circular shape, as shown in the drawings Category 2.

c). Informatory Signs These signs shall be rectangular in shape and constructed with one, two or three numbers of posts or as shown on the drawings. Dimensions may vary according to the requirements, however total area of sign shall be as under.

Category 3 a = One Sq. meter Category 3 b = Two Sq. meter Category 3 c = as shown on drawings

d). Additional Panel

If any panel is required to be installed, it shall be of the sizes 60 x 30 cm or 90 x 30 cm.

3.5 Installation of safety Devices

Safety devices comprising of road posts, delineators of various types, fixed/portable safety barriers and hazard markers e.g. verge-master, flex-master chevroflex, bigmax, edge master and passing place post and others, shall be installed in accordance with the techniques and methods laid down in the manufacturer’s manual or guide and in conformity to the line and level and locations shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer to ensure maximum visibility and safety, even in adverse weather conditions. These shall be constructed strictly with the specifications and full assistance by the manufacturer for installation with precision. These safety devices shall be used as delineators at sharp curves of highways verges, high embankments, culverts, bridges, as a visual




and physical deterrent for a prohibiting car parking on grass verges and protecting kerb-side areas on public and private roads.

3.6 Sign Faces

a). Design All sign faces shall be of the type, colour, design and size as shown in the drawings. Size and spacing of letters shall be as under. i). The Urdu writing shall be in “Persian” Character. ii). The Urdu and English writing shall be about the same in length, width and spacing. iii). English letters are to be in italics except the first letter of the word, which is to be in

capital. iv). Height of Capital letters 21 cm v). Height of italics letters 17 cm vi). Stroke width and width of border 3.5 cm vii). Space between words and borders (at least) 5 cm viii). Space between words 5 cm ix). Space one line will occupy 4 cm x). Space between digits of numerals 4 cm xi). Height of numerals same as capital letters 23 cm xii). Space between lines (at least) 5 cm xiii). Size of letter for km. Height K-23 cm

m-8 cm xiv). Width of letters for km including spacing K-8 cm

m-9.6 cm xv). Width of dividing line 2.0 cm xvi). The size and spacing for Urdu letter and Words will

generally conform to the dimensions Shown above for English letters.

xvii). The spelling of place names in Urdu and in English shall be as written in the Survey of Pakistan, maps.

b). Shop Drawings

The contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, three (3) copies of drawings for all special sign faces and all sign faces bearing messages, showing the design and/or arrangement and spacing of both the Urdu and English sign messages. Official town names and their spelling shall be as provided by the Engineer. Size and style of lettering shall be as shown on the drawings or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.

3.7 Storage of Signs

Signs delivered for use on a project shall be stored off ground and under cover in a manner approved by the Engineer. Any signs damaged, discolored or defaced during transportation, storage or erection shall be rejected.





4.1 Measurement

The quantities of traffic road signs and safety devices to be paid for shall be measured as per unit shown in BOQ item, each category of sign supplied and installed at site as per drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

4.2 Payment

The quantities measured as determined above shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and for excavation, concreting, backfilling and erection of posts, installation of sign panels and all incidental costs including sheeting/painting necessary to complete the work as prescribed in this item.




a) White Traffic Paint

PP AAVVEEMMEENNTT MMAARRKKIINNGG 1. DESCRIPTION

This work shall consist of furnishing non reflective or reflective chlorinated rubber based on thermoplastic paint material or retro-reflective preformed pavement marking (tape) whichever is called for in the special provisions and shown in the Bill of Quantities for sampling and packing for the preparation of the surface and for the application of the paint to the pavement surface all in accordance with these Specifications. The paint shall be applied in conformance to the size, shape and location of the markings as shown in the Drawings.

2. CHLORINATED RUBBER PAINT 2.1 Material Requirement

A standard and acceptable quality of Chlorinated Rubber based paint shall be used. The paint shall be ready for application and shall be of a smooth quality. The paint shall be homogeneous well dispersed to a smooth consistency and shall not cake, liver, thick-an, curdle, gel, settle badly or show any objectionable properties after period of storage not to exceed six (6) months.

Composition

i) Pigment Titanium Dioxide Rutlile and extenders 100% ii) Vehicle

Modified Chlorinated Rubber Plasticised and Resin Blend 52 ± 4%

Solvents 45 ± 4% Additives i.e. Floe leveling, adhesion improving

agents, anti-oxidants, siccatives etc. 1 – 3% iii) Paint Composition Pigments 55 ± 4% by Weight Vehicle, Solvent and Additives 45 ± 5% by Weight

b) White Traffic Paint

i) Pigment Chrome yellow and Extenders 100% by weight ii) Vehicle Same as for white traffic paint iii) Paint

Composition Pigments 55 ± 4% by Weight

Vehicle, Solvent and Additives 45 ± 5% by Weight

c) Black Traffic Paint

i) Pigment Chrome yellow and Extenders 100% by weight ii) Vehicle Same as for white traffic paint iii) Paint

Composition Pigments 55 ± 4% by Weight

Vehicle 45 ± 5% by Weight

The volatile material shall be of such character that has a minimum solvent action of asphalt, and such that the resins and non-volatile components will be entirely dissolved in the volatile material, and will not precipitate from the solution on standing. The non-volatile material shall be of such quality that is will not darken or become yellow when a then section is exposed to the sunlight. Other pavement marking paint may be submitted by the Contractor as an alternative to the above, for the approval of the Engineer.

2.1.1 Ballotini for Reflective Road Paint

The grading of ballotini dispersed in the paint shall be as follows: -




Sieve Sizes Percentage Retained No. 12 0 No. 20 30 No. 32 50 No. 50 80 No. 80 100 Glass bends shall conform with AASHTO Designation M-247. At least ninety (90) percent glass bends shall be transparent reasonable stencil and free from flaws. The proportion of ballotini paint shall be not less than five hundreds (500) grams per liter of paint.

2.2 Photometric Requirements for Reflective Road Paint

Other reflective road paints may be considered for use by the Engineer provided they have minimum brightness values at two tenth (0.2) degree and half (0.5) degree divergence expressed as candle power per meter per square meter of surface coating, as follows: -

COLOUR White Yellow Divergence Angle (Degree) 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.5 Incidence Angle 4 (Degree) 237 118 129 75 Incidence Angle 40 (Degree) 75 43 43 32

2.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

Traffic markings shall be applied with approved equipment capable of applying the paint at the specified width and at the specified rate of application. In no case shall the contractor proceed with the work until the equipment, method of application and rate of application as established by a test section have been approved by the Engineer. The painting of lane markers and traffic strips shall include the cleaning of the pavement surfaces, the application, protection and drying of the paint coatings, the protection of pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic on the pavements, the protection of all parts of the road, structures or appurtenances against disfigurement by spatters, splashes or smirches of paint or of paint materials, and the supplying of all tools, labour and traffic paint necessary for the entire work. The paint shall not be applied during rain, wet weather, when the air is misty, or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are otherwise unfavourable for the work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp pavement surfaces, or upon pavements which have absorbed heat sufficient to cause the paint to blister and produce a porous paint film. The application of paint shall preferably be carried out by a purpose-made machine but where brushes are used only round or oval brushes not exceeding 10 cm. in width will be permitted. The paint, when applied, shall be so applied as to produce a uniform, even coating in close contact with the surface being painted. Traffic paint shall be applied to the pavement rate of one (1) litre to two and half (2.5) square meters or less. Contractor shall provide adequate arrangements that applied paint is not disfigured by moving traffic, till its complete drying and sticking to road surface.

3. HOT APPLIED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD PAINTS

3.1 Material Requirements 3.1.1 Aggregate

The aggregate shall consist of light coloured silica sand, calcite, quartz, calcined flint, or other material approved by the Engineer.




3.1.2 Pigment and extender

a) White material The pigment shall be titanium dioxide complying with the requirements of Type A (anatase) or Type R (rutile) of BS 1851.

b) Yellow materials Sufficient suitable yellow pigment shall be substituted for all or part of the titanium dioxide to comply with the other requirements of this specification.

c) All materials The extender shall normally be whiting (i.e. calcium carbonate prepared from natural chalk) complying with the requirements of BS 1795. The manufacturer may substitute lithopone complying with the requirement of BS 296 for any or all of the whiting.

d) Binder The binder shall consist of synthetic hydrocarbon resin, or, with the approval of the Engineer, gun or wood resin plasticized with mineral oil.

e) Composition of mixture Thu proportions of the constituents of the mixed material as found on analysis shall comply with the requirement of the following table; PROPORTIONS OF CONSTITUENTS OF MIXTURE

Constituent Percentage by mass of total mixture Minimum Maximum

Binder (resin and oil) 18 22 Pigment 6* - Pigment and extender 18 22 Ballotini 20 - Aggregate

78 82 Pigment Extender and ballotini

* For titanium dioxide only. No minimum is specified for yellow material. Where specified, 10% in the case of material to which surface ballotini is to be applied by pressure application. The grading of the combined aggregate, pigment, extender and ballotini (where specified) as found on analysis shall comply with the requirements of table shown below;

Grading of Combined Aggregate, Pigment, Extender and Ballotini

Sieve Percentage by mass passing Sprayed

2.80 mm 100 600 mm 75 - 95

3.2 Sampling and Testing 3.2.1 Sampling

For the purpose of carrying out the testing, it is essential that adequate and representative samples be taken in the manner prescribed in specification BS-3262 at following stages. a) At the manufacturer’s plant. b) After it has been re-melted by the read application contractor.




3.2.2 Testing

The samples shall be prepared and tested in accordance with BS Specification 3262 (1976) Appendix-A to H. The test results shall conform the following properties.

• Softening Point

The softening point measured in accordance with Appendix-C shall be not less than 65o

• Color and luminance

C.

a) White Material

The luminance factor of white as delivered by the manufacturer shall be measured in accordance with Appendix-D and shall not be less than 70 whereas the luminance factor of material obtained from an applicator or melter on site after re-melting measured in accordance with Appendix D, shall not be less than 65.

b) Yellow Material

The color of yellow material shall be approximately BS 381C Color No. 355, Lemon. The luminance factor of yellow material as delivered by the manufacturer shall not be less than 60 whereas the luminance factor of material obtained from an applicator or melter on site after re-melting measured in accordance with Appendix-D shall not be less than 55.

• Heat Stability

a) White Material

When tested in accordance with Appendix-E, the luminance factor of white material as measured in accordance with Appendix-D shall be not less than 65.

b) Yellow Material

When tested in accordance with Appendix-E the luminance factor of yellow material as measured in accordance with Appendix-D shall be not less than 55.

• Flow resistance In testing the flow resistance made and tested in accordance with Appendix-F, shall not slump by more than 25%.

• Skid resistance When tested in accordance with Appendix-G, the skid resistance of a newly laid marking prepared under the stated conditions shall be not less than 45.

3.3 Manufacturing, Packing and Storing of Paint 3.3.1 Manufacturing

The paint shall be produced in a plant owned and operated by the manufacturer following a process which has been used by the manufacturer for at least five (05) years to produce paint. The equipment for mixing and grinding shall be clean, modern and in good condition.

3.3.2 Packing

a) The material shall be supplied in sealed containers which do not contaminate the contents and which protect them from contamination.

b) Each container shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the manufacturer’s name, Batch number, date of manufacture, reflectorisation (if applicable), color, chemical type of binder and maximum safe heating temperature.




3.3.3 Storing

The material shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and any material that is in damaged containers of which the seal has been broken, shall not be used.

3.4 Certification

The Contractor shall furnish a certificate from manufacturer that the material he proposes to use has the required properties, stating the maximum and minimum proportions and grading of the constituents, the acid value of the binder, the setting time, the maximum safe heating temperature, the temperature range of the apparatus and the proposed method of laying.

3.5 Application of Material to the Road

a) Preparation of site The thermoplastic paint shall only be applied to surfaces, which are clean and dry. Immediately before the application of paint, the surface shall be cleaned with mechanical broom compressed air or other approved means to remove surplus asphalt, oils, mud dust and other loose or adhered material. The material shall not be applied if the road surface is at a temperature of less than 5o

b) Preparation of material on site

C.

The material shall be melted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction in a heather fitting with a mechanical stirrer to give a smooth consistency to the thermoplastic material and such that local overheating will be avoided. The temperature of the mass hall be within the range specified by the manufacture, and shall on no account be allowed to exceed the maximum temperature stated by the manufacture. The molten material shall be used as expeditiously as possible, and for thermoplastic material, which has natural resin binders or is otherwise sensitive to prolonged heating the material shall not be maintained in a molten condition for more 4 hours. • After transfer to the laying apparatus, the material shall be maintained within the

temperature range specified by the manufacturer and stirred to maintain the right consistency for laying.

• On concrete carriage, a tack coat compatible with the marking material shall be applied in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction prior to the application of thermoplastic material.

c) Laving

Carriageway centre lines, lane lines and edge lines shall be laid to a regular alignment by self propelled machine. Other marking may be laid by hand, hand propelled machine or self propelled machine as approved by the engineer. The surface produced shall be uniform in texture and thickness and appreciably free from blister and streaks.

d) Reflectorization by surface application When surface application of ballotini is required, additional ballotini (400 g/m2 to 500 g/m2 from the machine) shall be applied by pressure concurrently with the laying of the line with sufficient velocity to ensure retention in the surface of the line. The ballotini so sprayed shall give uniform cover and immediate reflectivity over the whole surface of the marking. Ballotini dispensed on the surface of the marking shall conform to the following grading.

Sieve Percentage by mass passing 17 mm 100 600 µ 80-100 400 µ 40-100 300 µ 10-45 212 µ 0-25 75 µ 0-5




Not less than 90% by mass of the ballotini shall be of transparent glass, spherical in shape and not more then ten (10) percent shall be ovate in shape or have other flaws. The ballotini shall be made of soda glass.

e) Thickness Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the material shall be laid to the following thickness.

a) Sprayed lines other then yellow not less than 1.5 mm. b) Sprayed yellow edge lines not less than 0.8 mm.

The minimum thicknesses specified are exclusive of surface applied ballotini. The method of thickness measurement shall be in accordance with Appendix-H of BS 3262 (1978).

3.6 Trail Section

In no case shall the contractor proceed with the work until the equipment, method of application and rate of application conforming the required thickness (as established by a test section) have been approved by the Engineer.

4. RETOROREFLECTIVE PREFORMED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 4.1 Material Requirement

The performed marking shall consist of white or yellow films with pigments selected to conform to standard highway colours. Ceramic and glass beads shall be incorporated to provide immediate and continuing retroflection. Ceramic skid particles shall be bonded to a top urethane layer to provide a skid resistant surface. The performed marking shall be capable of being adhered to asphalt cement concrete (ACC) or Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) by a pre-coated pressure sensitive adhesive. A primer may be used to precondition the pavement surface. The preformed marking film shall mold itself to pavement contours by the action of traffic. The pavement marking film wearing courses during the paving operation in accordance with the manufacture’s instruction, approved by the Engineer. Following proper application and tamping, the marking shall be immediately ready for traffic. The bidder when bidding, shall identify proper solvents and / or primers (where necessary) for proper application and recommendation for application that will assure effective product performance. The performed marking shall be suitable for use one year after the date of receipt when stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The marking film shall be durable retro-reflective plisot polymer pavement marking film for performed longitudinal marking subject to low to medium traffic volumes and moderate wear conditions such as repeated shear action from crossover or encroachment on channelization lines. The retro-reflective pavement marking film shall consist of mixture of high-quality pigmented polymeric materials with a reflective layer of ceramic and glass beads, and a layer of skid resistant ceramic particles bonded to the top urethane wear surface. The film shall have a pre-coated pressure sensitive adhesive. The edges of the preformed tape shall be clear cut and true.

4.2 Colour

The day time colour of the white film shall provide a minimum initial luminance factor. Y of 80 and shall conform to the following chromaticity requirements: X = 0.290, Y = 0.315, X = 0.491, Y = 0.435, X = 0.512, Y = 0.486, X = 0.536, Y = 0.463. Measurements shall be made in accordance with ASTM E 1349, using illuminant “C” and 0/45 (45/0) geometry. Calculations shall be in accordance with ASTM E 308 for the 2o standard observer.

4.3 Reflectance

The white and yellow films shall have the following initial minim reflectance values as measured in accordance with the testing procedures of ASTM D 4061. The photometric quantity to be measured shall be specific luminance (SL) and shall be expressed as millicandels per square foot per foot-




candle (mcd.ft2 fc-1). The metric equivalent shall be expressed as millicandals per square meter per lux (mcd.m-2) 1x -1

).

4.4 Skid Resistance

The surface of the retro-reflective films shall provide and initial minim skid resistance values of 55 BPN as measured by the British Portable Skid Tester in accordance with ASTM E 303.

4.5 Patchbility

The pavement marking film shall be capable of use for patching worn areas of the same type of film in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.

4.6 Reflectance Retention

To have a good, effective performance life, the ceramic and glass beads must be strongly bonded and not be easily are moved by traffic wear. The following test shall be employed to measure reflectivity retention.

4.6.1 Taber Abraser Simulation Test

Using a Taber Abraser with an H-18 wheel and a 125 gram load, the sample shall be inspected at 200 cycles, under a microscope to observed the extent and type of bead failure no more than 15% of the beads shall be lost due to pop-out and the predominant mode of failure shall be “wear down” on the beads.

4.7 Beads

The size quality and refractive index of the ceramic and glass beads shall be such that the performance requirements for the marking shall be met. The bead adhesion shall be such that beads are not easily removed when the material surface is scratched.

4.8 Bead Retention

The film shall be ceramic and glass bead retention qualities such hat when a 2 in x 6 in (5.08 cm x 15.24 cm) sample is bent over a ½ in (1.27 cm) diameter-mandrel with the 2 in dimension perpendicular to the mandrel axis, microscopic examination of the area on the mandrel shall show no more than 10% of the beads with entrapment by the binder of less than 40%.

4.9 Thickness

The film without adhesive shall have a minimum thickness of 0.030 in (0.76 mm).

4.10 Effective Performance Life

The film when applied according to the recommendations of the manufacturer, shall proved neat, durable marking that will no flow or distort due to temperature if the pavement surface remains stable. The film shall be weather resistant and through normal traffic wear shall show no fading, lifting or shrinkage which will significantly impair the intended usage of the marking throughout its useful life and shall no significant tearing, roll back or other signs of poor adhesion.

4.11 Installation

The marking shall be applied in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.

White Yellow Entrance Angle 86.00 86.50 86.50 0 Observation Angle 1.0 1.00 0 Specific Luminance 300 175 SL (mcd. ft-2. f -1




5. CEMENTITIOUS MARKING COMPOUND

Cementitious marking compound shall be used for Concrete Surface Dressing and Bitumen to provide enhanced night and wet, weather visibility. The compound will be applied at following locations. • Kerbs – Pavement and Car Park Areas • Roundabout – vertical and sloping faces • Traffic Islands – vertical edges and bull noses, etc • Traffic dividers – black and white chevrons • Concrete wall and faces – on high speed intersection and traffic merging


The quantity of non-reflective or reflective chlorinated rubber based or thermoplastic pavement marking paint shown in BOQ for the specified width as indicated in BOQ. The retro-reflective performed pavement marking (tape) shall be measured in square meters. The arrows shall be measured in number. The measurement shall be made of painted areas, complete and accepted. No measurement shall be made of unauthorized areas. Paint that is applied in un-authorized areas shall be completely removed from the surface of the road to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at Contractor’s expense.

6.2 Payment

The quantities measured as determined above shall be paid for a the contract unit price respectively for the pay items shown in BOQ items, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including sampling packing and testing at approved laboratory. The cost shall also include the preparation of the surface and for all other coasts necessary to complete the work as prescribed in this item.




a). Raised Profile Type

REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT STUDS 1. DESCRIPTION

This item shall consist of furnishing and installing reflectorized pavement studs set into the traveled way of the type in accordance with the specifications and at the locations shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1. Reflectorized Studs

Reflectorized Studs shall be “cat-eyes” with `Raised Profile' type having the following characteristics.

The `Raised Profile' reflectors shall consist of metallic or acrylic plastic shell filled with an adherent epoxy compound molded from methyl methacylate into the shape of a shallow frustum of a pyramid having base dimension of approximately 10 cm x 10 cm or variable and thickness not more than two (2) cm or as shown on the drawings. A written approval is required from the Engineer regarding selection of reflectorized pavement studs especially with respect to material and size prior to execution of works. The shell shall contain one or two prismatic reflector each inclined at an angle of thirty (30) degree to the horizontal and having an area not less than twenty (20) square cm or as indicated on the drawings. The reflectors shall attain the following standards for their photometric and physical qualities. i) Photometric Requirements

The reflectors shall have the following minimum Specific Intensity (S.I) values expressed as candle power per foot candle of illumination at the reflector on a plane perpendicular to the incident light.

Colour

Crystal Yellow Red Divergence Angle

(in Degree) 0.20 S.I

0.20 S.I

0.20 S.I

Incidence Angle 0 3.00 1.80 0.75

20 1.20 0.72 0.30

The reflector for testing shall be located with the centre of the reflecting face at a distance of one and half (1.5 m) from a uniformly bright light source having an effective diameter of half (0.5) centimeter.

The width of the photocell shall be 1.27 cms and shall be shielded from stray light. The distance from the centres of the light source and photocell shall be 0.53 cms.

Failure of more than four (4) % of the reflecting faces shall be cause for rejection of the lot.

ii) Strength Requirement

The reflectors shall support a vertical load of 1,000 kg when tested in the following manner.

A reflector shall be centered horizontally over the open end of a vertically positioned hollow metal cylinder seventy five (75) mm internal diameter, twenty five (25) mm high and wall thickness of six (6) mm. The load shall be applied to the top of the reflector through a six (6) mm diameter by six (6) mm high metal plug centered on top of the reflector.

Failure shall constitute either breakage or significant deformation of the marker at any load less than one thousand (1000) kg.




2.2. Adhesive

When Raised Profile type of reflectors are used, a two-part adhesive having the following ingredients shall be applied to the stud for bonding to the pavement surface.

Package A Epoxy Resin

Kg/Liter 0.94

Titaniurn Dioxide 0.07 Colloidal Silica 0.05 Talc 0.345

Package B Modified Asphaltic Amine

Kg/Liter

Hardner (Reinchold 2611) 0.24 Modified Aliphatic Amine Hardner (Reinchold 2613) 0.472 Carbon Black 0.0022 Colloidal Silica 0.04 Talc 0.650

Equal volumes of Package A & B should be mixed together until a uniform colour is obtained. No more than one quart of adhesive shall be prepared at one time.

2.3. Cement Mortar

Cement mortar shall consist of one (1) part Portland cement to three (3) parts of fine aggregates.


3.1 Raised Profile Type

The pavement studs shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions or to the requirements of the Engineer.

4. MEASUREMENT

4.1. Measurement

The quantity of reflectorized pavement studs to be paid for shall be the number of ‘Raised Profile’ type provided and installed as mentioned above.

4.2. Payment

The quantities measured as described above shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities, which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, excavating cavities, preparation of surfaces, applying adhesive and mortar, for all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.




1. DESCRIPTION

PP RREE CCAASS TT CCEEMMEENNTT CCOONNCCRREETTEE RROOAADD KKEERRBB BBLLOOCCKK

This work shall consist of CC pre cast kerb block constructed of the following materials and in accordance with the specifications, dimensions and designs shown on the drawings or as approved by Engineer.


Pre cast concrete kerbing units industrial made shall consist of cement concrete 1:1½:3 having a minimum works cylindrical strength of 3000 lbs. per sq. inch at 28 days, hydraulically compressed, steam cured & to the lengths, shapes and other details shown on the drawing. Kerbing which shows surface irregularities of more then 5 mm when checked with 3 meter straight edge or surface pits more then fifteen (15) mm in diameter will be rejected.


a). Excavation and Bedding Excavation shall be made to the required depth as shown on the Drawings. All soft and unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with a suitable material acceptable to the Engineer.

Bedding shall consist of Class B Concrete and shall be to the section and dimension shown on the drawings.

b). Placing

Pre cast concrete kerbs shall be set in 1:3 of cement sand mortar to the line, level and grade as shown on the Drawing or as directed buy the Engineer.

c). Joints

Joints between consecutive kerbs shall be three (3) to five (5) mm wide and filled with cement mortar to the full section of the kerb.

d). Back filling

After concrete has been cured as specified, excavation of kerb, shall be back filled with suitable earth or granular material tamped into place in layers of not more than fifteen (15) cm each until firm and solid.

4. MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT

The unit of measurement for pre cast concrete kerb shall be measured by the linear foot along the front face of the section at the finished grade elevation. Deduction in length will be made for drainage structure installed in the kerbings such as catch basins and drop lintels etc. measurement will not include any area in excess of those shown on the drawing except for any area authorized by the Engineer in writing.

Bed course material shall me measured by the cubic foot of material compacted in place. a). Payment

Measurement and excepted quantities shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials for concrete, drainage opening, excavation, backfilling and dumping and disposal of surplus material and for all labour, equipment tool and incidental necessary to complete the item. Payment for expansion joint filler material used in transverse expansion and contraction joint in kerb shall be understood to be included in the price tendered per linear foot for the kerbs.




Mortar required for bedding and jointing of pre cast concrete kerbs as shown on the drawings shall not be paid for as separated item, but the cost shall be included in the contract price for pre cast concrete kerb.




IINNTTEERRLLOOCCKKIINNGG CCOONNCCRREETTEE PP AAVVIINNGG BBLLOOCCKKSS 1. DESCRIPTION

The work shall consist of precast concrete paving blocks intended for the construction of low speed roads, parking areas, lay byes, industrial and other paved surfaces subjected to all categories of static and vehicular loading and pedestrian traffic. Paving blocks covered by these Specifications are designed to form a structural element and the surfacing of pavements, having the block to block joints filled, so as to develop frictional interlock and placed in conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross section shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

2. MATERIAL REOUIREMENTS

For execution of this item provisions made in BS 6717 shall be applicable. 3. BINDERS AND BINDER CONSTITUENTS

Paving blocks shall be made using one or more of the following binders or binder constituents complying with the requirements of the relevant standards.

Ordinary Portland Cement BS 12 Portland Blast furnace Cement BS 146 : Part 2 Portland Pulverized Fuel ash Cement BS 6588 Pulverized fuel ash BS 3892 : Part 1 Ground granulated Blast furnace slag BS 6699

Where pulverized fuel ash is used, the proportions and properties of the combination with Portland Cement shall comply with BS 6588. Where ground granulated blast-furnace slag is used, the proportions and properties of the combination with Portland Cement shall comply with BS 146 : Part 2.

4. AGGREGATES

Paving blocks shall be made using one or more of the following aggregates complying with the relevant standards:

Natural Aggregates (Crushed or BS 882 : 1983 (except grading Uncrushed) requirements in clause 5) Air Cooled blastfurnace slag BS 1047 : 1083 (except grading requirements in 4.8) Pulverized fuel ash BS 3892 : Part-1 or Part-2 Ground granulated blastfurnace slag BS 6699 5. ACID SOLUBLE MATERIAL FINE AGGREGATE

When tested as described in BS 812 : Part 119, the fine aggregate (material passing a 5 mm sieve complying with SS 410) shall contain not more than 25% by mass of acid soluble material either in the fraction retained on, or in the fraction passing, a 600 mm sieve.

6. WATER

The water shall be of drinking quality .or in accordance with the recommendations of Appendix-A of BS 3148: 1980.

7. ADMIXTURES AND PIGMENTS

Proprietary accelerating, retarding and water reducing agents shall comply with BS 5075: Part 1. Pigments shall comply with BS 1014. Calcium chloride shall comply with BS 3587

8. FINISHES

The finish should be agreed between the manufacturer and the Engineer.




Concrete described as "natural colour" shall contain no pigment. In composite paving blocks the surface layer shall be formed as an integral part of the block and shall be not less than 5 mm thick.

9. BINDER CONTENT

The cement content of the compacted concrete shall be not less than C80 kg/m3. For equivalent durability, paving blocks made with binder constituents other than ordinary Portland cement shall have higher binder content than paving blocks made in a similar way using only Portland Cement. The Engineer will decide the additional binder content. The compressive strength test will be the only guide to the amount of additional binder needed.

10. SIZES AND TOLERANCES 10.1 Sizes

Paving blocks shall have a work size thickness of not less than 60 mm. Type-R blocks shall be rectangular with a work size length of 200 mm and a work size width of 100 mm. Type-S blocks shall be of any shape fitting within a 295 mm square coordinating space and shall have a work size width not less than 80 mm. The preferred work size thicknesses are 60 mm, 65 mm, 80 mm & 100 mm. A chamfer around the wearing surface with a work size not exceeding 7 mm in width or depth shall be permitted. All arises shall be of uniform shape.

10.2 Tolerances

The maximum dimensional deviations from the stated work sizes for blocks shall be as follows:

Length ± 2 mm Width ± 2 mm Thickness ± 3 mm

Where a paving block includes profiled sides, the profile shall not from the manufacturer's specification by more than 2 mm.

11. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

The compressive strength of paving blocks shall be not less than 49 N/mm2 and the crushing strength of any individual block shall be not less than 48 N/mm2.

12. SAMPLING

The following sampling procedure shall be used for the compressive strength test: a) Before laying paving blocks, divide each designated section, comprising not more than 5000

blocks, in a consignment into eight approximate equal groups, clearly mark all samples at the time of sampling in such a way that the designated section or part thereof and the consignment represented by the sample are clearly defined. Take two (2) blocks from each group.

b) Dispatch the sample to the test laboratory, taking precautions to avoid damage to the paving

blocks in transit. Each sample shall be accompanied by a certificate from the person responsible for taking the sample, stating that sampling was carried out in accordance with this Part of BS 6717.

c) Protect the paving blocks from damage and contamination until they have been tested. Carry

out any tests as soon as possible after the sample has been taken. 13. MARKING

The following particulars relating to paving blocks made in accordance with this standard shall be indicated clearly on the delivery note invoice, manufacturer's or supplier's certificate or brochure supplied with the consignment of blocks:




a) The name, trade mark or other means of identification of the manufacturer. b) The number and date of this British Standard, i.e. BS 6717 : Part 1 1986'; or latest revision.

14. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT 14.1 Laying the Concrete Blocks

The total area to be covered with paving block shall be prepared by: a) Compaction of subgrade b) Laying of subbase in a thickness specified c) Laying of crushed aggregate base or lean concrete in thickness as per typical section

14.2 Tolerance

Tolerance of these layers shall be as per applicable requirement of each item of this specification. Payment for each of the above item shall be made under the relative item of work. The total area will thereby be dividing with nylon strings into sectors of not more than 1.5 square meters. This shall be done to control the alignment of paving blocks and to avoid multiplication of deviation in sizes of paving blocks.


The area to be measured shall be bound by lines shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer Unit of measurement shall be measured in horizontal plane.

15.2 Payment

The quality determined as provided above shall be paid for the unit price of contract shown in Bill of Quantities of paving blocks installed including sand cushion and sand filling in joints and all other work related for installing paving blocks. Cost shall include all labour, materials and equipment for proper completion of work.

WWAATTEERR SSUUPPPPLLYY



TP - Water Supply Page 1 of 15

1. SCOPE

PP OOLLYYEETTHHYYLLEENNEE PP IIPP EE,, PP IIPP EE LLAAYYIINNGG AANNDD AAPP PP UURRTTEENNAANNCCEESS

The work covered by this Section of the specification "consists in furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in connection with water supply lines and appurtenances in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable Drawings.

2. POLYETHYLENE (PE) PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS

Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe shall be made from materials conforming to standard PE code designations PE 2406, PE 3406, and PE 3408. The pipe is primarily intended for use in transporting potable water in either buried or aboveground installations.

2.1. Standard Followed

This standard references the following documents. In their latest editions, they form a part of this standard to the extent specified within the standard. In any case of conflict, the requirements of this standard shall prevail. ASTM D1598-Standard Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe Under Constant Internal Pressure. ASTM D1599-Standard Test Method for Short-Time Hydraulic Failure Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing and Fittings. ANSI/ASTM D2839-Standard Test Method for Use of a Melt Index Strand for Determining Density of Polyethylene. ASTM D3035-Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter. ASTM D3350-Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials ANSUAST1\1 D4218-Standard Test Method for Determination of Carbon Black Content in Polyethylene Compounds by the Muffle-Furnace Technique. ASTM F412-Standard Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems. ASTM F714-Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter. ASTM F1055-Standard Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing. ANSI/AWWA Cl01/A21.1-67(R77)-American National Standard for Thickness Design of Cast Iron Pipe. ANSI/AWWA C901- Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe and Tubing ½ In. (13 mm) through 3 in (76mm) for Water Service. CSA* B 137.1 - Polyethylene Pipe, Tubing and Fitting for cold Water Pressure Service PPI TR -3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Recommended Hydrostatic Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials. AWWA Standards Committee Report on Design and Instillation of Polyethylene Pipe in Accordance With AWWA C906. Polyethylene Pipes for Potable water application shall be PN8 or PN10 as mentioned in BOQ, should conform to latest International Standard.




2.2. Materials

a) General

This standard describes PE pipe, fittings, and joints made from PE materials with standard PE code designations as listed below and established in accordance with ASTM D3350 and ASTM D2837. In addition, the Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) shall be established in accordance with PPI TR-3.

PE pipe and fittings materials

Standard PE Code

Designation PE Material, Minimum Cell

Classification* ASTM D3350 Hydrostatic Design Basis at 73.4°F (23°C) ASTNI D2837

PE 2406 PE 213333C, D, or E 1,250 psi (8.62 MPa) PE 3406 PE 3244$3C, D, or E 1,250 psi (8.62 MPa) PE 3408 PE 334434C, D, or E 1,600 psi (11.03 MPa)

b) Composition

PE piping compounds shall contain 2% minimum of a well-dispersed and finely-divided carbon black or for colored products, shall contain sufficient UV stabilization for 24 months of outdoor storage. Sufficient antioxidant must be added to ensure that production pipe meets the thermal stability requirements.

c) Properties

PE materials shall meet the requirements for one of the standard PE code designations.

d) Qualification for potable water service

The PE materials used to make pipe and fittings shall contain no ingredient in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities that are considered to be detrimental to the water quality.

e) Elevated-temperature sustained-pressure test

The PE pipe materials, when tested as pipe according to method ASTM D1598 at the corresponding stress for the pipe-material test category and using 176±3.6°F (80±2°C) water as the pressurizing and external media, shall meet the requirements.

f) Colored materials used for pipe identification

The use of solid color, non-black pipe, color-striped pipe or a co-extruded colored pipe is allowed. The color compound incorporated into the wall structure shall meet all the requirements of this standard.

2.3. Pipe Requirements

a) Workmanship

Pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and as uniform as commercially practical; however, according to other provisions of the standard, coextrusions and pipe striping will be allowed. The inside and outside surfaces shall be semi-matte to glossy in appearance and free from sticky or tacky material. The pipe walls shall be free of cuts, cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusions, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity.

b) Dimensions and tolerances

Pipe shall conform to the applicable dimension requirements through 6 of this standard and to any other dimensional requirements. Measurements shall be made according to the methods specified in ASTM D2122.




• Wall thickness variability

Wall thickness variability as measured and calculated according to ASTM D2122 in any diametrical cross section of the pipe shall not exceed 121k.

c) Thermal stability

A specimen taken from the mid-wall area of production pipe shall be tested for thermal stability by the method described in ASTM D3350 Section 10.1.9, Thermal Stability The minimum induction temperature measured by this method shall be 220°C.

d) Ring-tensile strength test

Specimens shall be cleanly cut from the pipe and tested in accordance with ASTM D2290. The tensile strength shall be not less than 2,500 psi (17.2 Mpa) for pipe made from PE 2406 material and not less than 2,900 psi (20.0 MPa) for pipe made from PE 3406 and PE 3408 materials.

e) Quick burst test

Specimens shall be cleanly cut from the pipe and tested in accordance with ASTM D1599. The test pressure at failure shall not be less than that which results from a minimum hoop stress value of 2,500 psi (17.2 1 Mpa) for PE 2406 materials. For PE 3406 and PE 3408 materials, the minimum hoop stress value shall be 2,900 psi (20.0 MPa). All hoop stress values shall be based on the initial (prior to test) dimensions of the specimens.

f) Bend back test

Specimens shall be taken from the pipe and tested in accordance with the test method. The inner surface of the pipe shall give no indications of brittle-like cracking or crazing when examined with the naked eye.

g) Elongation at break test

Five specimens cut equally spaced around the circumference of the pipe in the longitudinal direction shall be prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM D638 using a cross-head separation speed of 2 in. (50.8 mm) per minute. If the sample thickness must be reduced by milling, the inside surface of the pipe shall be left unaltered. The elongation at break for each test specimen shall exceed 400%.

h) Five-second pressure test

A section of pipe shall be prepared and tested in accordance with test method ASTM D1598. The pipe shall not burst, crack, split or otherwise fail a test pressure of four times the pipe pressure class applied for five seconds.

i) UV stabilization

For black product, carbon black content shall be verified to be at least 2% and not more than 3% by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM D1603 or D4218.

The quantity of UV stabilizer shall be verified by the manufacturer’s specifications. The stabilizer content shall be verified either by direct analytical measurement or by verification of the blend percentages.

j) Melt index

Specimens taken from the pipe shall be tested in accordance with test method ASTM D1238. Maximum determined values shall conform to those established by the manufacturer based on the manufacturer's extrusion practices and the particular PE material used.

k) Density

Specimen taken from the pipe shall be prepared and tested according to the test method contained in ASTM D2839. Values for this test should be established by the manufacturer based on the manufacturer’s extrusion practices and the PE material being used.




l) Pipe ends and lengths

Pipes shall be provided with squarely cut plain ends in lengths and tolerances agreed upon between the manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser.

m) Toe-in

The outside diameter, when measured in accordance with ASTM D2122 at the cut-end of the pipe length, shall not be more than 1.5% smaller than the average outside diameter when measured at any point not closer than 12” (approx. 300 mm) to the squarely cut-end of the pipe length.

2.4. Fusion Fittings Requirements

a) General

Fittings described by this standard include all fittings intended to be joined to polyethylene piping by thermal heat fusion. Polyethylene fusion fittings may include one or more ports for effecting a mechanical connection, such as by compression or flange, to other piping. Polyethylene fittings shall primarily be molded or heating extrusion. If molded is not possible, other option may be adopted by the contractor after approval of the Engineer and 50% rebate. The other options may be thermoformed from pipe sections or fabricated by heat fusion joining polyethylene components prepared from pipe, molded fittings, thermoformed pipe, or polyethylene sheet or block. Molded fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2683 for socket-type fittings, ASTM D3261 for butt-type fittings or ASTM F1055 for electrofusion type fittings, and the requirements of this standard.

b) Workmanship

Fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and as uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties as commercially practical however, co-extrusions and pipe striping will be allowed. The inside and outside surfaces shall be semi-matte to glossy in appearance and free of sticky or tacky material. The walls shall be free of cuts, cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusions, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity.

c) Dimension and tolerances

Molded fittings shall conform with the dimensional requirements described in the applicable ASTM fitting standard when measured as specified in that standard. Fabricated fittings shall meet the minimum dimensional requirements and tolerances of the pipe at the point of fusion.

d) Physical requirements

Each polyethylene fusion fitting shall meet all the material requirements established for the pipe to which the fitting is to be joined. Fittings fabricated from pipe shall be manufactured from pipe stock with a wall thickness at least 25% greater than that of the pipe to which the fitting is to be joined or shall be otherwise externally reinforced so that the fitting carries a pressure rating equal to that of the pipe from which it is made. The wall thickness of an outlet maybe the same as the wall thickness of the pipe to which the outlet is to be joined. Each fitting shall be designed and manufactured to operate at not less than the design pressure of the pipe system for which it is intended. The fitting shall meet the five second pressure test using the test frequency.

2.5. Joining Method

a) General

Polyethylene piping described in this standard may be joined by thermal butt fusion, socket fusion, electrofusion, flange assemblies, or mechanical methods. Polyethylene piping shall not be joined by solvent cements, adhesives (such as epoxies), or threaded type connections. All joining methods shall be capable of conveying water at the design pressure of the piping system. In situations where different kinds of polyethylene piping materials must be joined to each other, the manufacturers of the subject pipe or fitting should be consulted to determine the appropriate fusion procedures.




b) Thermal butt fusion

Thermal butt fusion is a widely used method of joining PE pipe. This procedure uses portable, field-proven equipment to hold pipe or fittings in close alignment while the opposing butt-ends are faced, cleaned, melted, and fused together and then cooled under fusion parameters recommended by the pipe and fusion equipment supplier.

For each polyethylene material there exists an optimum range of fusion conditions, such as fusion temperature, interface pressure, and cooling time. Prior to attempting fusion of polyethylene pipe, personnel should verify that they have this information for the material being joined. Thermal fusion shall be conducted only by persons who have received training in the use of the fusion equipment in accordance with the recommendations of the pipe supplier or the equipment supplier.

c) Flanged joining

A polyethylene flange assembly consists of a metal backup flange or ring and a polyethylene stub-end or flange adapter. The backup flange is placed over the pipe profile, and the stub-end or flange adapter is then fused into the plain end pipe.

Flanged joining methods may be used to make connections to polyethylene pipe, alternate piping materials, and to pumps, valves, and other appurtenances.

d) Electrofusion

This procedure uses equipment to prepare the pipe surfaces by scraping, aligning of the pipe sections to be joined, and holding them in place through the heat-fusion and cool-down cycle. Electrofusion is a heat fusion process where the heat source is an integral part of the fitting, such that when electric current is applied, heat is produced that melts and joins the plastics.

With the electrofusion joining method, fusion times and temperatures are included in the design of the equipment. There is no concern of different heat times or pressures between the polyethylene materials described in this standard. Dissimilar PE materials can be joined without concern for special handling by the operator. The procedures for dissimilar polyethylene materials are the same as for similar material being joined.

e) Other joining methods

Other methods to join polyethylene pipe or to make service connections to polyethylene pipe are available. These include socket fusion, compression-type connectors, wraparound clamps, saddle fusion and various quick-connect devices. Because these methods have certain performance limitations, they should be used carefully and after consultation with the pipe or component manufacturer or both.

2.6. Verification

a) General

The manufacturer shall take sufficient measures to check incoming materials and to produce pipe that complies with the requirements of this standard. The following tests relative to qualification of compounds and manufacturing processes and for quality assurance shall be conducted at or more often than the indicated intervals, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. The actual frequency at which each of these tests is conducted should be determined in the manufacturer's quality control program, which shall be designed to ensure compliance with the requirements of this standard.

b) Material Testing Requirement

i) Incoming material

All incoming lots of PE materials shall be sampled and tested for melt-flow index and density by the pipe manufacturer. The pipe manufacturer or the resin supplier must provide thermal stability test results on each lot of incoming material, indicating that the raw material meets




the requirements. The testing results shall fall within the limits established by the material supplier and piping manufacturer.

ii) Rework internal

Rework materials shall meet all the requirements.

c) Manufacturer Qualification

One size of pipe manufactured in each of the size ranges in each particular material shall be evaluated. Each size of pipe must demonstrate conformance to the minimum requirements of the following tests in order to qualify the manufacturer's specific plant location for the size range of pipe. One pipe size from each size range for each material at each plant location shall be tested at the beginning of production and semiannually thereafter. i) Elevated temperature sustained pressure

The tested pipe shall comply with the requirements.

ii) Thermal stability

A test specimen taken from the mid-wall of the pipe shall comply with the requirement.

d) Pipe Testing Requirement

i) Workmanship

Each length of pipe surface shall be visually checked inside and out for defects and the presence of these defects shall be cause to reject the pipe.

ii) Dimensions and tolerances

Dimensions and tolerances shall be measured once per hour or once per length of pipe, whichever is less frequent.

iii) Bend-back test

This test shall be performed daily or at least once per production run, whichever is more frequent, on specimens prepared. A sufficient number of specimens shall be tested to ensure that representative samples of the entire inside surface of the pipe have been tested. The elongation-at-break test may be substituted for this test.

iv) Elongation-at-break test

This test shall be performed daily or at least once per production run, whichever is more frequent. The bend-back test may be substituted for this test.

v) Ring-tensile strength test

This test shall be performed at least once per production run. The quick burst test or the five-second pressure test may be substituted for-this test.

vi) Quick burst test

This test shall be performed at least once per production run. The ring-tensile strength test or the five-second pressure test may be substituted for this teat.

vii) Carbon black content

Carbon black levels shall be determined daily or for each production run of pipe, whichever is more frequent.




viii) Five-second pressure test

This test shall be performed at least once per production run. The ring-tensile strength test or the quick burst test may be substituted for this test.

ix) Melt-flow index

This test shall be run on samples from the pipe at least once per day.

x) Density

This test shall be run on samples from the pipe once per day, or once per lot of pre-compounded black PE material, whichever is more frequent.

xi) Marking

Each length of pipe shall be visually examined and checked for marking accuracy and legibility.

e) Fitting Testing Requirements

i) Workmanship

Each fitting shall be visually checked inside and outside for defects, and the presence of these defects shall be cause to reject the fitting.

ii) Five-second pressure test

This test shall be performed on the first fitting of a particular outside diameter and style and every fiftieth fitting thereafter for fabricated fittings only. Fittings that are produced by injection molding shall be tested once per production run.

Fitting styles are characterized as elbows, tees, reducing tees, reducing laterals, branch saddles, flange adapters, mechanical joint adapters, and end caps. The elevated temperature sustained pressure test may be substituted for this test.

f) Provision for Test Sample Failure

When any PE product fails to meet a requirement of this or a referenced standard, additional tests shall be performed to determine which products are acceptable of those produced from the same extruder or mold since the last favorable test. Products failing to meet any of these requirements shall be rejected.

g) Bend-Back Test

i) Scope

The bend-back test evaluates the inside pipe surface for brittleness. The evaluation is made by observing the inside pipe surface for cracking or crazing under highly strained test conditions.

ii) Significance

Inside pipe surface brittleness, which may be the result of improper processing or material oxidation, can be detrimental to the long-term performance of the pipe. The presence: of this condition in PE pipe is cause for its rejection for use in water distribution systems.

h) Rejection

Any indication of cracking or crazing is cause for rejection of the pipe.




i) Plant Inspection by Purchaser

i) Production notice When plant inspection is specified by the purchaser, manufacturer shall provide the purchaser with adequate advance notice of when d where production of ordered materials will begin. ii) Manufacturer's responsibility

Plant inspection by the purchaser or the omission of these inspections shall not relieve the manufacturer of the responsibility to provide materials complying with the applicable requirements of this standard and of the purchaser. iii) Plant access The inspector shall have free access to those parts of the manufacturer's plant that are necessary to ensure that products comply with all requirements. iv) Inspection aids The manufacturer shall make available for use by the inspector, without charge, the tools and assistance that are necessary for the inspection and handling of materials.

2.7. Delivery

a) Marking

i) General

Marking of the product with the designation "AWWA C906-99" affirms that the product has been manufactured, inspected, sampled, and tested in accordance with this standard and has been found to meet its requirements.

Pipe shall bear identification markings that will remain legible during normal handling and storage. The markings shall be applied in a manner that will not reduce the strength or otherwise damage the pipe.

ii) Required markings

Minimum marking on the pipe shall include the following and shall be applied so that intervals between markings are no greater than 5 ft (1.5 In):

• Nominal size and OD base (such as 18 in. IPS, 12 in. DIOD, or 400 mm ISO) • Standard material code designation (such as PE 3408). • Dimension ratio (such as DR 17). d. Pressure class (such as PC 100). • AWWA designation number for this standard, AWWA C906-99. • Manufacturer's production code to include day, month, year, and the additional

markings that may be agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser, as long as they do not interfere with the legibility of the required markings.

Exceptions to these requirements may only be made with the mutual consent of the manufacturer and the purchaser.

iii) Marking for special sizes

For special sizes of pipe, the required markings shall be as determined by the mutual consent of the purchaser and the manufacturer.

iv) Special markings

If plant inspection is required by the purchaser, a special marking; of no more than three letters, as specified by the purchaser, may be added to the markings on the pipe.




Colored print lines, colored stripes, a co-extruded color as an external skin, or solid wall non-black pipe are allowed for identification. Where the color for identification purposes is co-extruded or in the case of solid wall color pipe, the materials must meet all the requirements.

2.8. Shipping

All pipe and fittings, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, shall be prepared for standard commercial shipment. Care shall be taken during shipment to prevent cuts, scratches and other damage.

2.9. Affidavit of Compliance

The manufacturer shall provide an affidavit that all materials delivered comply with the requirements of the standard and of any additional requirements specified on the purchase contract.

3. TRANSPORT OF PIPES AND FITTINGS

Any vehicle on which pipes are transported shall have a body of such length that the pipes do not overhang. Large pipes shall be placed on cradles and the loads properly secured during transit. The pipes shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

4. INSPECTION OF PIPES AND FITTINGS

Transportation of pipes to Site over extremely rough terrain may give rise to the proportion arriving damaged. Before incorporating into the pipeline each pipe all be brushed out and carefully examined for soundless. Damaged pipes which in the opinion of the Engineer cannot be satisfactorily repaired, shall be rejected and moved from Site. The Engineer considers that an unacceptable proportion of the pipes within a test length has failed the Contractor may be required to test hydraulically to the Site test pressure each pipe and joint before pipelaying. In this event, test results shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before any further pipes are laid. The cost of such individual pipe testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

5. STORAGE OF PIPELINE MATERIAL Pipes and fittings shall be stored raised off the ground, and shall be carefully supported, cushioned and wedged. Pipes shall not rest directly on one another and shall not be stacked more than four pipes high. Special care shall be taken to ensure that flexible pipes are cradled and supported in a manner that prevents any distortion of the pipes.

6. CUTTING OF PIPES Pipes shall be cut by a method which provides a clean square cut of the pipe and of the lining, if any, without damage to pipe or lining. All cut or trimmed ends and the parts of any pipe on which the coating may have suffered damage shall be recoated as specified before the pipes are laid.

7. PIPELAYING Pipes shall be laid in accordance with CP 312 and BS 8010 unless otherwise specified herein. No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to come into contact with the pipes or fittings. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipes or fittings. During laying operations, no debris, tools, cloth or other material shall be placed in the pipe. Pipes and fittings, and shall be carefully cleaned before jointing. Pipes shall be laid accurately to the lines and levels shown on the Drawings, within a tolerance of ¼ inch. Pipe alignments shall be straight between bends or curves. Length laid to curves shall only be allowed where shown on Drawings or in accordance with detailed proposals approved by the Engineer.




The jointing of pipes shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Specification. The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer all special information regarding the handling of the pipes and the formation of the joints and he will be deemed to have made himself thoroughly conversant with all phases of laying the pipes before submitting his tender. The Contractor shall provide his supervisory staff with the manufacturer’s jointing instructions. A ‘badger’ or ‘bung’ about ¼ inch smaller than internal diameter of the pipe shall be kept in the pipe at all times pulled forward as the work progresses. When pipe laying is not in progress, including overnight, the open ends of the pipeline shall be blanked off with a temporary watertight fitting approved by the Engineer. The pipe shall suitably held down so that the pipe does not become buoyant in the event of the trench becoming flooded.

8. CLASSES OF PIPELINE BEDDING The classes of pipe bedding to be used are indicated below: Class of bedding Brief description of bedding material A Plain concrete cradle B Granular material C Trimmed excavated surface Class C bedding shall normally be used on all pipelines unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer, except where the pipe excavation is in rock when the bedding will be Class A or B as directed by the Engineer.

10.1. CLASS A BEDDING The concrete used in Class A bedding shall be plain concrete Class C. Before pacing concrete the pipes shall be supported near each joint with a padding of compressive material on a precast concrete block. Concrete shall not be placed until the pipes have been jointed and inspected. The concrete shall be placed to ensure full contact with the underside of the barrel the pipe throughout its length. Concreted bedding shall be made discontinuous at flexible pipe joints by a diaphragm of fiber board or other compressible material of at least ¾ inch thickness to the full section of the concrete bed.

10.2. CLASS B BEDDING The material for use in Class B bedding shall be Granular Bedding Material (as specified in Clause 2.22) or Sand for Bedding (as specified in Clause 2.24), as shown on the drawing or instructed by the Engineer. The bedding material shall be evenly spread over the full width of the formation and lightly hand compacted to a level slightly higher than the level corresponding to the underside of the pipe barrel to allow for settlement of the pipe to the correct level. Further bedding material shall be placed in the trench, special care being taken to fill under the sides of the pipes of ensure full contact with the barrel of the pipe but leaving the joints exposed for a length of approximately 8 inches on each side of the joint collar or sleeve. The bedding material shall then be thoroughly compacted evenly on both sides of the pipe to an overall thickness as shown on the Drawings, and to provide a bedding angle not less than 120 degrees.

10.3. CLASS C BEDDING The trench bottom shall be trimmed by hand, and recesses excavated to accommodate pipe joints, to ensure full contact between the ground and the barrel of the pipe. All stones and projecting nibs of rock that would come into contact with the pipe barrel shall be removed. The resulting voids and local low spots shall be filled with well rammed selected excavated material.




9. PIPELINES UNDER EXISTING ROADS The Contractor shall programme the works to reduce disruption to road traffic to a minimum, and before any work commences in existing roads shall: (i) obtain the full permission and approval of all authorities concerned serving notices of intent

to start work as may be necessary and observing all the local Laws and Regulations; (ii) submit details of his proposals, and obtain approval from the Engineer.

Pipelines shall cross roads at the angles shown on the Drawings. Excavations in roads shall be backfilled, above the level of any pipe surround, with granular bedding material, deposited in layers not exceeding 4 inches unconsolidated thickness, fully compacted and brought up to the level of the underside of the sub-base. Where the pipe cover is less than 3 feet or where directed by the Engineer the pipe shall be further protected by a reinforced concrete slab as shown in the drawings. The roadway shall he reinstated using the form of construction and materials specified by the relevant authority or as directed by the Engineer.

10. PIPELINE DISINFECTION a) General

The internal surfaces of all pipelines and pipework including all equipment incorporated in a pipeline or pipework through which water will pass shall be disinfected after they,

b) Disinfection Process

have been cleansed to the satisfaction to the Engineer.

Disinfection shall be effected by filling the pipeline with water heavily dosed with chlorine, and shall be carried out when filling the pipeline with water for carrying out the hydraulic test on completion. Alternative methods may be adopted with the approval to the Engineer. The level of chlorine dosing shall be such as to make available 50 mg/I of free chlorine throughout the pipelines. The water, heavily dosed with chlorine, shall stand in the pipeline for a period of 24 hours or for such longer period as the Engineer shall require and all valves in the system shall be operated at least once during this period. At the termination of the required period, chlorine residual tests shall be taken at the end of the pipeline farthest from the point of injection and the test shall be repeated if necessary until the residual is not less than 10 mg/l. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval to the method to be adopted for disposing of the chlorinated water and the time when such disposal shall take place on completion of disinfection.

11. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

As soon as practicable but within 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed and before any materials or equipment are purchased, the Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer a complete schedule, in triplicate, of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work, together with the names and addresses of the manufacturers and their catalogue cuts, diagrams, drawings, and such other descriptive data as may be required by the Engineer. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to time. Approval of material and equipment under this provision shall not be constructed as authorization of any deviations from the specifications unless the attention of the Engineer has been directed to the specific deviations. Laboratory results and certifications, specified or otherwise required, shall be submitted prior to delivery of the material and equipment to site.





Measurement and payment of pipe work fittings, specials and appurtenances will be made in accordance with the provisions of this clause specified hereinafter.

14.1. Pipe Work

a) Method of Measurement

Measurement will be made for the number of linear feet of Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe, acceptably installed complete in all respects as per relevant Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

b) Basis of Payment

Payment will be made for the number of linear feet of pipe work as measured above at the Contract Unit Price of each unit and shall constitute full compensation to provide, handle, lay and joint PE pipes including excavation, backfilling, leakage testing after backfilling, disinfecting, final flushing and all other work related to the item.

14.2. Service Connections


Measurement will be made for the number of linear feet of PE pipe acceptably installed complete in all respects as per relevant Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

b) Basis of Payment

Payment will be made for the number of linear feet of PE pipe work as measured above at the Contract Unit Price of each unit and shall constitute full compensation to provide, handle, lay and joint PE pipe, fittings, ferrules, clamps with bolts and washers, backfilling, testing, disinfesting and all other work related to the item.

14.3. Pipe Fittings and Specials


Measurement will be made for the number of pounds of fittings and specials acceptably installed complete in all respects as per relevant drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

b) Basis of Payment

Payment will be made for the number of pounds of fittings/specials as provided above at the Contract Unit Price and shall constitute full compensation for the cost of providing, handling, fixing and jointing, disinfecting, respective type of fitting/special, and all other work related to the item.




1. SLUICE VALVE

VVAALLVVEESS

The gate face rings shall be securely pegged over their full circumference. They shall also have renewable channel and shoe linings. The gap between the shoe and channel shall be limited to 1.5 mm. valve may be provided with a gear arrangement for ease of operation. The operation gear of all valves shall be such that they can be opened and closed by one man against an unbalanced head 15% in excess of the maximum specified rating. Valve and gearing shall be such as to permit manual operation in a reasonable time and not to exceed a required rim pull of 400 N. All hand wheels shall be arranged to turn in a clock wise direction for opening and counter clockwise for closing. These directions shall be indicated on the hand wheels. All valves shall be rated for not less than PN 10.

Material of Construction

Body, Bone, Wedge : CI conform to AWWA C-500 & BS-5150 Spindle : SS AISI 431 Seat Ring, Wedge Ring : SS AISI 431 Back seat Bush : Bronze Confirming to international standard Parameters Type : Non-rising spindle Nominal pressure : 2 times working pressure in pipeline Nature of operation : Horizontal/vertical Applicable code : As per international codes Tests : Acceptance tests as per international codes

2. AUTOMATIC AIR RELIEF VALVES

Air Relief Valve shall be designed to meet the following conditions: a). Discharge air during charging of the pipeline b). Admit air during emptying of the pipeline c). Discharge air accumulated at local peaks along the pipeline under normal operating conditions. Conditions (a) and (b) shall be met by the employment of a large orifice capable of handling large volumes of air at a high flow rate and condition (c) by a small orifice capable of discharging small quantities of air as they accumulate.

Valves with air intake or exhaust facilities shall have approved screening arrangements to prevent the ingress of air borne sand. a). Double Acting Air Valves

These shall combine both large and small orifices within one valve. The large orifice shall be sealed by a buoyant rigid ball and the chamber housing shall be designed to avoid premature closing of the valve by the air whilst being discharged. The small orifice shall be sealed by a buoyant ball at all pressures above atmospheric except when air accumulates in the valve chamber.

b). Single Air Valves These include a small orifice only, operating in a manner identical with the small orifice to a double acting valve. The nominal pressure range shall be PN 16 or as indicated on Drawings. Body ends shall be flanged with raised faces and drilled to ANSI B 16.1 for the nominal pressure specified or indicated on the Drawings or shall be screwed 25 mm BSPTc male as indicated on the drawings.

The materials for the valves shall be as follows:

Body cover and cowl : Cast iron




Small orifice : Cast iron with gunmetal seat Small orifice ball : Rubber covered or other approved Large orifice : Cast iron with rubber seat Large ball : Vulcanite covered or other approved

Each valve shall be provided with its own isolating gate valve, or cock, which will permit the removal of the entire valve whilst the pipeline is live.

Valves shall be factory finished with a two-pack epoxy paint system to the approval of the Engineer.

3. FIRE HYDRANT

The metal of the fire hydrant shall conform to AWWA C-502 Standard and shall be of screw down streamline pattern. The body shall be best quality, closed grain, grey cast iron with spindle of magnese bronze having tensile strength of not less than 11.0 tons per square in machined from solid rolled bars, the seating valves and other parts shall be of best quality gun metal with Brinell Hardness No. 80. The direction of closing shall be by clockwise rotation and outlet shall have screwed joint for accommodating 2" dia hose connection. Inter flanges of hydrant shall be suitable for jointing with flanges of hydrant bends and test. All fire hydrants shall be coated with three coats of solution from an approved manufacturer to give a uniform protective coating on cast iron. Fittings Injection moulded & fittings shall be fabricated, compatible with dimensions pipes and conform to the following operating pressures:- Class “C” pipes upto 9 bars (max, working pressure). Field Test Pressure 1.5 times the working pressure of pipes.

4. BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS AND FASTENINGS

Bolts, nuts, washers, straps etc shall be of stainless steel except where otherwise specifically required. The heads and nuts of bolts shall comply with BS 4190. The ends of the bolts nuts shall be cleanly cut with standard threads and the nuts must fit with bolts accurately and so tightly that they can just be screwed down by hand. Washers of approved shapes and sizes are to be provided when required. Machinery and stanchions shall be held in position with stainless steel foundation bolts suitable for the purpose with a minimum embedded length of 200 mm. Rag bolts and self tapping bolts will not be acceptable in these conditions.

5. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENTS


Measurement will be made for the number of valves acceptably installed complete in all respects as per relevant Drawings and as given in the specification.

b) Basis of Payment

Payment will be made for the number of valves measured as above at the Contract Unit Price for each unit and shall constitute full compensation for providing, handling, fixing and jointing and all other work related to the item.




1. SCOPE

MMAANNHHOOLLEESS AANNDD MMAANNHHOOLLEE CCOOVVEERR && FFRRAAMMEE

The work to be done under this section of the specifications includes furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, application, materials and performing all operations required in connections with construction of manholes complete as specified herein, in accordance with the contract documents, as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

2. CONSTRUCTION

All concrete work, steel reinforcement, pipe and pipe fitting, etc. shall be provided and constructed/ installed in accordance with the relevant sections of the contract documents. Galvanized ladder rungs, heard duty C.I. cover (under traffic area) and concrete cover (under non traffic area) with C.I. frames to resist 10 Ton wheel load, making of concrete chambers and concrete benching in manholes, complete as specified in the contract documents shall be included in work to be done under this section of the specifications. Depth of manholes shall be considered as difference in elevations of top of cover and invert level of pipe.


a) Measurement for payment of Manholes shall be made on the basis of actual number provided and constructed. The Contractor's bid against this items shall include construction of complete structures with all installations of pipe, pipe fittings, ladder rungs, cover and frames, reinforcement, concrete, steel work complete in accordance with the contract documents.

b) Payment of manholes shall be made at the applicable unit price per number bid as provided in

the Bill of Quantities. The bid amount shall be full payment for the work specified herein.

SSEEWWEERRAAGGEE SSYYSSTTEEMM



TP - GRP Pipe Page 1 of 9

1. GENERAL

GGRRPP PP IIPP EESS ,, PP IIPP EE LLAAYYIINNGG AANNDD AAPP PP UURRTTEENNAANNCCEESS

Pipe manufacturers must be members of, or affiliated with, a quality control or certification authority relevant to the pipes or fittings proposed for incorporation in the works. ISO 9001 certification is required for pipe / fittings manufacturers. The following specifications are referenced as applicable:

Reference Description

BS 5480:1990 British standard specification for glass reinforced plastic (GRP) pipes, joints, and fittings for use for water supply or sewerage.

ASTM D3262:1996

Specification for fiber glass sewer pipes for use in gravity flow systems for conveying sanitary sewage.

ASTM D3754:2003

Specification for fiber glass sewer and industrial pressure pipes for use in pressure systems for conveying sanitary sewage and industrial wastes.

ASTM D3517:1996

Specification for fiberglass pressure pipes for conveying water system

AWWA C950:2001

Standard for fiberglass pressure pipes

AWWA M45 Fiberglass pipe design manual

GRP Pipe and fitting shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5480 and ASTM D-3262 for gravity application and BS 5480 and ASTM D-3754 for pressure application. GRP Pipe and fitting shall be at least adequate to achieve a minimum working life of 50 years under all applicable loading, environmental and installation conditions. The pipes and fittings shall be designed to withstand up to 5% long term deflection in the installed conditions. Pipes shall have a 50 years strain corrosion design performance as per the latest editions of ASTM D3262/ASTM D-3754, for sewer pipes, but the mean value of the regression line at 50 years shall not be less than 0.9% strain. The GRP pipes used for gravity application shall comply with the minimum requirements for 6 Bar pressure pipes as the pipe lines may be intended to operate under surcharged conditions and not as gravity pipe lines.

2. MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

2.1 Resin

The resin used for the internal liner of the pipes and fittings shall be of an epoxy based vinylester resin complying with DIN 16946:P2 Group 1310 and shall have a minimum elongation to break of 5% when fully cured. The resin in the structural wall of the pipes and fitting shall be of the unsaturated Isophtalic polyster type incorporating styrene as the monomer and meeting the requirements of BS 3532 Type B. the use of vinylester resin in the structural layer in also permitted. All GRP products shall be hot cured.

*No pigments in the liner or structure shall be added.

2.2 Glass

The internal and external layer shall be of “C” glass veil produced from a chemically resistant glass durable in both acid and alkaline environment used shall be of high acid resistant type “ECR/Advantex” and shall have a surface treatment compatible with the resin.

The reinforcement shall comply with the standards listed below as appropriate.

BS 3691 “ Glass fiber roving for the reinforcement of polyster resin systems”. BS 3496 “ Glass fiber chopped strand mat for the reinforcement of polyster resin systems”.




BS 3396 “Woven glass fiber fabrics for plastic reinforcement. BS 3749 “Woven glass fiber roving fabrics for the reinforcement of polyester resin systems”. Glass rovings used in the structural wall shall not exceed 2400 Tex.

3. AGGREGATES AND FILLERS

Aggregate if used, shall be minimum 98% pure silica sand as defined in BS 5480:1990 and AWWA C950 and shall contain no impurities. The aggregates shall only be used in the stiffening layer of the pipe wall, where it is designed as part of the composite structure. The final product shall meet the requirements of the specifications. Silica sand aggregates as defined in BS 5480 shall contain no impurities. Fillers as defined in BS 5480 shall not be used. The silica sand content of the pipe material shall not exceed 50% in accordance with the type test submitted for approval. The resin shall be cured to reach hardness not less than 90% of the resin manufactures recommended hardness. A manufacturer’s tolerance of ±1.00% shall be allowed on the nominal diameter of the pipe. The pipes shall be supplied in standard lengths of 3, 6 or 12 meters with a tolerance of ±25.00 mm. The deviation from straightness of the bore of the pipe shall not exceed 0.30% of the effective length or 15.00 mm whichever is smaller and shall apply when measured on site. Up to 10% of the pipes will be allowed in random lengths. The ellipticity of any pipe when measured resting freely on the ground shall not be more than 2% of the mean diameter at any point. No pipe known to have undergone a deflection greater than 7% shall be incorporated into the works. Stiffness shall be minimum 5000 N/m2 for all pipes but for pipes to be used in pumping stations and valve chambers the stiffness shall be minimum 10,000 N/m2 and pipes for use in microtunnelling or similar jacking operations the stiffness shall be minimum 50,000 N/m2 unless enclosed in concrete. The hoop flexural modules shall be demonstrated by application of the following equation: Stiffness of the pipe = EI/D3

Where: E = bending modulus of pipe wall circumferentially (in N/m2) I = second moment of area of pipe wall per unit length (in m4

4. REQUIREMENTS PARTICULARS TO SEWER PIPES, COUPLERS AND JOINTS

/m) D = mean diameter of the pipe in meters

4.1 The Inner Layer

All pipes and fitting shall have a resin reach liner, having a minimum thickness of 2.5mm consisting of an inner most 0.3mm layer reinforced with chemical resistance “C” glass impregnated with 90% resin. The remainder of the liner shall consist of acid resistant (ECR/ ADVANTEX) chipped glass stands or powder bound chip strand mat and having glass content between 25 and 30% by weight. The lining materials selected should provide a good impact resistance.

4.2 The structural layer

The structural wall of the pipe shall be reinforced with closely spaced continuous fiber glass (ECR/ADVANTEX) filament winding, chipped roving, Silica Sand all impregnated with Isophtalic polyester resin. No dark pigments or resin fillers such as Calcium Carbonate shall be used in the pipes or fittings. Fine Silica Sand containing no impurities and complying with the requirements of BS 5480 may be added in a core layer sandwich, between the pipe structural layers.

4.3 The exterior layer

The exterior resin rich layer of the pipe shall have a minimum thickness of 1mm reinforced with corrosion resistant glass (ECR/ ADVANTEX) and “C” glass veil impregnated with isophthalic resin/vinyl ester resin. For protection against ultra violet light degradation at translucent “UV” inhibitor should be included in the resin mix.




4.4 Fittings

All fittings such as bends, tees, junctions, reducers and the like shall conform to BS 5480:1990. The construction of bends shall be swept or mitered; as design laminated joints used in the fabrication of fittings shall be equal or superior in strength to the sections the join. All hand laminations or winding shall utilize only one type of resin throughout.

4.5 Flanges

GRP flanges shall be flat faced and drilled to BS 4504 PN10 or PN16 drilling pattern. Flanges shall be filament wound up to 1800mm and may be contact moulded fro larger sizes. Flanges shall meet the requirements specified in ASTM D4024. GRP flange gasket shall be of a design, material and thickness as recommended by the GRP fitting manufacturer. The use of epoxy resin in a flange manufacturer is permitted.

Note: All fittings and flanges shall be factory mould for which the Contractor shall prepare the shop drawings based on design drawings/ ground conditions, and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for accuracy of the manufactured fittings/ flanges. If for any reason the fittings/ flanges are not accurately manufactured, the Contractor shall, at his own cost provide a replacement fittings/ flanges.

4.6 Joints

Except where otherwise detailed on the drawings, all pipes and joints shall be of flexible type. Joints shall be of loose GRP machine made coupling type having two rubber rings gaskets. All joints shall be capable of withstanding the various tests specified for the appropriate class of pipe. Joints shall withstand while maintaining the specified test pressure at a deflection of not less than the values specified in the BS5480:1990/ASTM D3262/ASTM D4160. Pipes used for adjustment and short length should be ordered from the manufacturer. Cutting and rejoining is only allowed when butt joints are used and a calibration machine is available and approved by the manufacturer. No cutting on site is allowed without manufacturer recommendation. Rubber rings shall meet the requirements of the appropriate parts of BS EN681-1 and be of the EPDM formulation. Calculations shall be provided to show that the proposed method of pipe manufacture will give the specified physical properties identified in this specification. Pipes shall have a resistance to longitudinal tensile force per unit circumference as under:-

Nominal Diameter (mm) Initial ultimate resistance(N/mm) Up to 700 100

700 to 1,000 120 1,000 to 1,600 160 1,600 to 2,400 250 2,400 to 4,000 300

When subjected to a parallel plate lading test no evidence of crazing or cracking shall be evident with a deflection of 10% and no structural failure with a deflection of 20%.

THE TEST FOR GRP PIPES, JOINTS AND CHEMICAL RESISTANCE OF VINYL ESTER RESIN

Type tests shall be carried out on locally produced representative products in accordance with table 1.

Qualification or Type Tests Test Method Minimum Requirements 1) Long term (10,000 hrs )

chemical test (strain corrosion resistance)

BS 5480 ASTM D3262 ASTM D3681

Extrapolated predicted failure strain at 50 yrs not less than 0.9%

2) Long term hydrostatic or pressure design basis (for

ASTM D2992/ AWWA C950/

Hydrostatic strain at 50 yrs not less than 0.65%




Qualification or Type Tests Test Method Minimum Requirements pressure pipes only) 10,000 hrs test

BS 5480/ ASTM D3754

3) Long term specific ring stiffness (creep factor) under ring deflection (10,000 hrs test)

BS5480 Appendix L 50 Years extrapolated stiffness value shall not be lower than 70% of the initial stiffness

4) Long term ring bending stain (sb)

ASTM D5365 50 Years stain shall not less than 1.3%

5) Acid immersion test (6 months at 75% acid concentration and 40 C (Vinyl ester resin chemical resistance evolution)

ASTM C581 Loose of flexural strength not greater than 40%

6) Impact resistance BS 5480 Appendix J As specified in relevant standard

7) Joint water tightness ASTM 4161 / BS 5480 {Requirements as specified in relevant standard}

8) UV exposure on GRP Pipe (1 year)

Manufactures recommended test method

No surface deterioration due to UV effect

Quality control test on raw material and final products shall be carried out as listed below: 5. QUALITY CONTROL TEST 5.1 General Requirements

The pipe manufacture must demonstrate the capability to produce pipes of consistent properties and quality meeting the requirements of these specifications. A detailed quality control/quality assurance program must be implemented at the manufacturing facilities and all necessary test equipment to be operated by skilled technicians. Calibration of test equipment shall be performed at least once a year. Details of the pipe manufacture QC/QA program, testing equipment, testing program shall be presented to the engineer for review and approval prior to commencement of pipe manufacture. The manufacture’s quality control scheme shall be certified by a recognized independent authority.

The manufacturer shall carry out the quality control test listed bellow using the pipe production sample selected and witnessed by the Engineer at the frequency stated. The manufacturer shall maintain records of all tests and inspection and two copies of all test certificates and reports shall be forwarded to the Engineer.

6. RAW MATERIALS

Checks shall be made on all raw materials to ensure that they comply with the manufacturers’ state values. All deliveries of resin shall be checked for consistency of viscosity and reactivity. Any resin deviation from the manufacturers published figures shall not be used. Glass samples shall be checked for yield/tex, moisture and size content. All deliveries of aggregate shall be checked for consistency of grading, moisture content and purity. The pipe manufacturer should provide a copy of the materials certificate of analysis for the material supplied together with in in-house Q.C. test reports stating that the material used in the pipe wall construction is conforming in all respects to the relevant specification.

TABLE QUALITY CONTROL TESTS ON FINAL PRODUCT

1. Pipes and Fittings Hydrostatic-Pressure Test (Pressure and Gravity)

1) 100% of Pipes and couplers.

2) 1% of the pipes and couplers

2. Stiffness (For Gravity & Pressure) 1 in every 30 pipes

Test Method BS 5480 / ASTM D3262/ ASTM 3754 AWWA C 950.

Minimum Requirements 1) 2x Rated working pressure

for 5 minutes. 2) 2x Rated working pressure

for 4 hours a) 5000/1000 N/m2

b) No linear crack

(minimum).

c) No Structural failure d) Continue to deflect to




manufactures (minimum). a) At 5% deflection b) At level “A” (12%/19%)

deflection. For 5000 / 10000 STIS pipe.

c) At level “B” (20%/15%) deflection for 5000/10000 STIS pipe

d) After Level “A”

ASTM D2412/BS 5480 ASTM D3262/D3754

the point of linear cracking and record

3. Wall Thickness (on 100% pipes, Couplers and Fitting )

ASTM D3567 Manufactures minimum quoted thickness gives in the calculation for the pipe design.

4. Hardness (On 100% of pipes, Couplers and Fitting) using barcol impressor 934-1, on linear

BS 4549: PI Appendix A or ASTM D2583

Minimum 90% of the hardness value declared by the resin manufacture but not less than 33 bacrol readings using bacrol impressor 934-1

5. Loss on Ignition (1 in every 30 pipes)

ASTM D2584 +/-5% of manufactures specified resin/glass/sand ratio.

6. Hoop Tensile Strength (For pressure pipes only) 1 in 30 pipes.

ASTM D2290/BS 5480 Requirement specified in table 10 of ASTM D 3754 as appropriate for the pressure class or AWWA C950 Table 10

7. longitudinal Tensile Strength (1 in 30 pipes ) in axial direction

BS 5480: 1990 Appendix A

BS 5480:1990 Table 2/Table 13 of ASTM D3754

8. Short time Hydraulic failure pressure of pipes and fittings (After the first production)

ASTM D1598/D1599 a) Withstands 3.5 times the rated working pressure with no sign of leakage or weep.

b) Determine the failure pressure by pipe bursting.

9. Fittings a) Visual inspection b) Dimension c) Pressure tests d) Barcol hardness (Resin

cure)

ASTM D2563 ASTM D3567 BS 5480/AWWA C 950 ASTM D2583

a) Every items b) Every items c) 1 in 10 items 20 bar for 60s d) Every item minimum. Barcol

reading 33. 10. Chemical Control Test: (100 & 1000 hours test) on samples of manufactured pipes during pipes supply for each contract.

ASTM D3681 ASTM D3262 BS 5480

Strain level shall not less than those established in qualification test.

7. VISUAL INSPECTION

Each pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a complete schedule inspection before shipment and after off loading at site. All pipes and fittings shall be commercially free of defects such as delaminations, bubbles, exposed or protruding fiber, cracks, air voids, pits, or resin-starved areas that due to their nature, degree of extent detrimentaly affects the strength and serviceability of the pipe. The maximum allowable visual defects of GRP pipe laminate parts shall be classified to type and level as given in ASTM D2563: Table 1. The acceptable quality level for the pipes internal and external shall be the level 2 as specified in CI. 3.3 of the above standard. Visual inspection report of the pipes, couples and fittings in accordance with the above standard are to be provided by the manufacturer. Joints surface shall be free of dent and other surface irregularities that will affect the integrity of the joints. Any repairs of site if approved by the Engineer shall be carried out by qualified and skilled staff of the pipe manufacture.

8. DESIGN CALCULATION

The manufacture shall design the pipes for a life of not less than 50 years and shall submit calculations for initial and long term deflection with truck loads, buckling, vacuum, pressure, class, design and strain in accordance with APPENDIX “A” of AWWA C950 and AWWA M45.




For the purpose of design calculations only the bedding and back fill for the pipes shall be consider as crushed stones/gravel with slight compaction. The maximum calculated long term deflection should not exceed 5% copies of the design calculation can be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval.

9. SAFETY FACTOR

The following safety factor shall apply: AWWA M 45 Design Procedure Pressure Rating >= 1.8 Ring Bending Strain or stress >= 1.5 Combined Strain strain or stress >= 1.5 and 4.8 Bucking >=2.5

10. INSPECTION AND TESTING

a). The manufacture shall take adequate measures in the production of products covered by this

specification to assure compliance with the requirements herein. An inspection and testing plan should be forwarded to the Engineer for approval prior to start of manufacture.

b). Production and testing notice: When plant inspection is required by the Engineer the manufacturer shall provide adequate advance notice of when and where production and testing of order products will commence.

c). The Engineer shall have free access with reasonable advance notice to the manufacture’s plant

areas are necessary to assure that products comply with all requirements herein.

11. WORKMANSHIP

GRP Pipes, fittings and joints shall be free from delaminations, bubbles and pinholes, pits, blisters, dry spots, pimples, resin pocket, deep scratches, wormholes and deep wrinkles. All GRP Fittings shall be fabricated in the factory to ensure quality control (under no circumstance fortification of fittings be allowed on site by the contractor). Complex fittings arrangements may be pre-assembled by the pipe manufacturer on the factory such that the field joints are kept to a minimum.

12. MARKING

Each pipe and fitting shall be legibly marked with the following information”

• Manufacture name of trademark • Manufacturing date • Manufacturing number • Nominal diameter in mm • Operating pressure in bar • Pipe stiffness class • Nominal lying length (for pipe only) • Manufacture inspection mark • Contract name and number

13. SUBMITTAL/DRAWINGS

The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer by the manufacturer. a). Resin, Glass reinforcement, aggregate, joint and gasket data, with material manufactures

certificate of analysis. b). Pipe supply specification & installation manuals. c). GRP manufactures Pre-qualification. d). GRP Manufactures Quality Control and Assurance Manual. e). GRP pipe data sheet in the standard format shown below.




In addition to the above information, the following information shall be submitted during the mobilization period. a). Detailed manufacturing process for pipe, joints and fittings. b). Detailed drawing of pipe end and couplers including pipe spigot OD, home line length, allowable

tolerance, and allowable gap between pipes. c). Complete design calculations and design requirements including pressure class from HDB,

working pressure and surge pressure using pressure class, calculation of allowable deflection from ring bending, external loads, WC & WL based on Burrial depth, predicated buckling etc.

d). Quality Procedure e). Type test result and reports specified f). Safety factor g). Proposed inspection and testing programme.

Prior to start production the manufacture shall submit to the Engineer dimensional drawings of each fittings required for approval. The Engineer may require design calculations, and samples for approval at no extra cost.




GRP PIPE DATA SHEET (FOR EACH DIAMETER/PRESSURE/SURVICE) (TO BE PROVIDED PRIOR TO START OF PIPE MANUFACTURING)

Design Parameters

1) A scratch of greater depth than 0.30 mm.

Units Service (Pipe class) PN Nominal Diameter (DN) mm Pipe manufacturing process Installation service Rated Working pressure (PN) Barg Joint Type Maximum allowable vacuum Barg Factory hydro test pressure Times x PN Laying Factor M Pipe Wall Structure Nominal Wall Thickness mm Inner Layer Thickness mm Resin Type Epoxy based Vinyl ester Glass Type C glass + ECR Advantex Structural Wall Thickness mm Resin Type Glass Type ECR/ Advantex Outer Layer Thickness 1mm mm Resin Type Glass Type C glass + ECR Advantex Mechanical Properties Design specification Tangential initial stiffness (STIS) Pa Design initial longitudinal tensile strength PMa Tensile modules MPa Design initial hoop tensile strength MPa Flexural Modules MPa Allowable design stress MPa Calculation Method Internal Pressure AWWA C950 (AWWA M45) & External Load The jointing system shall be an approved coupling system. Where the system involves separates reinforced plastic couplings of sockets formed by a lay-up process subsequent to pipe production, the resins used shall be clear and non-pigmented to permit visual examination within the laminate. Where GRP laminate is cut, exposed ends shall be sealed with a suitable resin and approved prior to incorporation into the works. Where such cutting and sealing takes place at site the resin used and the methods of storage, mixing, application and curing shall be strictly to the manufacture’s recommendation. Before any such work takes place the manufacturer’s representative shall visit the site to demonstrate and give clear procedural advice to the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. GRP pipe and fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other physically properties. GRP pipe and fitting shall be smooth and both the internal and external surfaces shall be clean and free from delaminations, cracks, bubbles, pinholes, pits, blisters, foreign inclusions and resin-starved areas that due to their nature, degree or external detrimentally affect the strength and serviceability of the pipe. Unless authorized by the Engineer, repair will not be permitted on any pipes with defects, as listed below and such pipes shall not be incorporated into the works:-




2) Cracks of any type on the inside of the pipe.

3) Cracks on the outside, longer than 200 mm circumferentially or 6mm longitudinally.

4) Delaminations. 5) Damaged ends including bubbles, cracks, voids, exposed reinforcement of extraneous matter.

6) Internal producing fibers.

7) More than 25% of the external area with profrusions of any sort.

8) Air voids and blisters exceeding 5 mm diameter or 1 mm in depth, greater in area than 0.50% of

internal or 1.00% of external surfaces.

9) Pitting to more than 5% of the internal or 10% of the external surface area and individual pits more than 1 mm diameter or 0.5 mm in depth.

10) Winkles over than 3% of the surface area and individual wrinkles more than 2 mm deep.

TTUUBBEEWWEELLLL



TP - Tubewell Page 1 of 7

1. CONTRACTOR'S SITE SUPERVISION

TTUUBBEEWWEELLLL

The Contractor shall supply an experienced chiller in charge of the drilling and testing rid, who shall have overall responsibility for operations on ,site. He shall be competent to take all measurements and make all records and reports required by the Contract in connection with drilling and testing

2. PROVISION OF TESTING EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall provide all testing equipment necessary for carrying out all tests specified hereinafter. Records. For file purpose of recording daily drilling and construction operations. all depths may be referred to the level of the surface of the rig rotary. table. but for the purpose of permanent records delivered to the Engineer-in-charge, the reference datum shall be the ground level. To allow comparison of daily and permanent records, the Contractor shall record the height of the rotary table wells the ground level at set-up and shall also record any changes in this level. The Contractor shall keep a complete record of all operations for incorporation in a Daily Report. The Daily Report shall be delivered to the Engineer-in-charge within 48 hours of the expiry of the period to which it relates. All records shall be submitted on approved forms to the Engineer-in-charge. These shall include drilling records and testing records as specified. The Contractor shall produce a record at an approved scale of each well constructed. This drawing shall show sizes. Grades and setting depths of all components used. It shall also record all depths of drilling at all diameters and all materials used.

3. METHOD OF DRILLING

Unless otherwise approved, boreholes in unconsolidated formations shall be drilled by the reverse circulation rotary method using sound drilling practice- All drilling and ancillary equipment used shall be capable of completing the Works in the specified time and shall be in good repair and capable of meeting the manufacture’s ratings. Any equipment not considered adequate h~ the Engineer-in-charge shall be immediately replaced by approved plant. The Contractor shall prepare the site for the disposal of water and take cuttings and refuse from his operations away from the TUBEWELL in a manner approved by the Engineer-in-charge. No drilling fluid additives shall be used during= drilling unless such use is specifically approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Good control of the drilling fluid shall be exercised so as to ensure all cuttings are brought to the surface. The continuous uninterrupted supply of water for drilling purposes shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The source, quality and storage of such water shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. The water quality shall lie such as to have no adverse effect on the water quality of the completed bore or water sampling operations that may be carried out during the construction of the bore. The water volume of the settling pond shall be approximately three times that of the volume of the borehole. The Contractor shall increase the elevation of the settlement pond by building up a platform wherever the groundwater level is close to the original ground level such that the resulting head difference will be adequate to support the borehole.

4. DRILLING RECORDS

The Contractor shall keep the following records and submit them to the Engineer-in-charge daily: (a) driller's description of strata penetrated and comments on downhole conditions: (b) full tulle of took. Collins and drill pipe in each trip into the hole:

(c) detailed rate of penetration log obtained by recording time of start and finish of each 10 foot interval:

(d) general description of ancillary operations including material use summary: (e) results of any tests or measurements. These and any other records shall be available for inspection by the Engineer-in-charge at all times and shall be included in the Contractor's daily report.




5. FORMATION SAMPLES

Every attempt shall be made by the Contractor to maintain a good fluid return and to obtain representative formation samples. Sample collection shall be made at 5 foot intervals and at every change of stratum. Samples shall be taken from the circulation fluid immediately upon exit from the well casing before any settlement or segregation can occur. Samples shall be contained in an open fully partitioned tray until sufficiently dry to allow bagging. They shall be labelled with the depth of origin immediately upon exit from the well and stored in a place of safety. Samples should contain not less than one pound dry weight of material and shall be stored in plastic bags, securely tied and indelibly labelled with depth of origin, date and borehole designation. Samples shall be bagged as soon as is practicable and retained on site in strong wooden containers. The containers shall consist of wooden boxes with a hinged lid and padlock. The wooden boxes shall be marked on the lid with the scheme name, borehole number, location, depth, date, Clients name and Contractor's name using black paint and stencil. On completion of the Works the samples shall be delivered to the Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor may be required to analyse samples, these being selected by the Engineer-in-charge.

6. FACILITY FOR SIEVE ANALYSIS

The Contractor shall have at site a set of sieves for sand and gravel analysis with the required accessories for sieve analysis. Based on the sieve analysis a decision will be made to adjust the gravel grading if considered necessary by the Engineer-in-charge.

7. BOREHOLE AND WELL DIMENSIONS

The borehole shall he drilled in diameters suitable lot the satisfactory installation of the permanent casing string to depths ordered die Engineer-in-charge. Unless otherwise specified, drilling diameters shall be at the discretion of the Contractor buts hail he such as to allow a minimum of 2 inches clearance round all casings and couplings clearance round all casings and couplings shall be suitable for the satisfactory installation and removal of trenches pipes rot placement of gravel pack material to the required setting depths. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the suitability of the diameter of the boreholes at which he drills.

8. USE OF TEMPORARY CONDUCTOR CASING

Where necessary to prevent sloughing and caving of surface material, the Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary conductor casing. with a minimum diameter of two inches greater than the bit diameter to a sufficient depth to prevent surface washout. The conductor casing may be new or used pipe of adequate strength for the purpose. Alter the drilling is completed, the conductor casing may be removed by the Contractor and shall remain his property.

If, during drilling at any depth. unstable material is encountered, the Contractor shall stabilize the material in a manner approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The use of drilling fluid additives or other such materials shall only be employed in stabilizing the borehole where such use is specifically approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

9. CASING AND SCREEN

Casing and screen in unconsolidated formations shall be composed of uPVC Class C conforming to BS 3505 and shall have flush screw threaded or socketed joints. Casing diameters shall be as specified in the Contract Drawings. Screens shall normally he of machine slotted type with minimum open area of 6 per cent. The slots or groups of slots shall be distributed in a uniform pattern around the periphery of the casing pipe and shall be smooth, sharp edged and free of bunts, chipped edges or broken areas on the interior or exterior surfaces of the pipe.

Casing, screen and couplings shall be stored off the round in shade or under cover. Casing and screen shall be cradled and supported to prevent any distortion

All socketed plastic casing and screen couplings shall be coated with a solvent cement prior to installation.

The casing screen siring shall include all centralizers, couplings, end caps and fittings as required for the satisfactory completion of the work. A five foot blank section with end cap will be required as a bail plug. The Contractor shall install a concrete plug not less than 9 inches in depth in the bottom




of the bail plug. The plug shall be fixed to the casing by steel cross bars or other means approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Centralizers shall be attached to the lower well casing to ensure that the gravel packing thickness between casing and borehole face is maintained. The design of centralizers shall lie to tile approval of the Engineer-in-charge. One centralizes will be installed at die bail plug. one at the. blank pipe immediately below the pump chamber casing and intermediates as directed by the En sneer-in-change at intervals not exceeding 40 feet. Depths of installation of casing, and screen shall be as ordered by the Engineer-in-change. Prior to tile installation of the casing string,• the borehole shall be flushed clean to total depth so its to accommodate the casing to within 3 feet (it .

10. GRAVEL PACK

the drilled depth. All casing and screen shall be suspended rather than landed and shall remain suspended froth tile surface until the gravel pack has been placed and stabilized.

Gravel pack material shall consist of the best natural material available from Attock or other approved source. It shall be clean. hard. well-rounded. washed. carbonate lice and water worn, without thin and flat particles. The grading of tile gravel pack shall be as shown on the Contract Drawing. Prior to installation of the gravel pack material the Contractor shall carry out siege analysis of at least five samples selected by the Engineer-in-charge to check compliance with the required grading. If necessary the Contractor shall regrade the material to achieve compliance. Graded and washed gravel shall not be stored on the ground in contact with any dirty surface or nonapproved material or in any other manner which could lead to contamination of the gravel. The volume of gravel available for installation should be at least 1.5 times the theoretical volume to be filled. The annular space between the outside of the casing assembly and the wall of the drilled hole shall be gravel packed by the Contractor from the bottom to the top of the hole in such a manner that there will be no voids other than the intergranular spacing between the gravel particles. Am uncased length of the borehole shall be filled with gravel pack material.

11. METHOD OF PLACING GRAVEL PACK

The method of placing the gravel and the equipment used will be subject to approval by the Engineer in-charge-in charge. The gravel shall be placed using hoppers or other devices attached to a tremmie pipe which should extend to the bottom of the pump housing casing. A continuous uniform gravel feed is necessary to minimize segregation by particle sizes in the gravel pack. The Contractor shall circulate water in the borehole as the gravel is being placed. This shall be done by lowering three or four inch pipes coupled with the drill pipes inside the casing to about 10 feet above the bottom and operating the circulating pump. The circulation shall he dune slowly and at such a rate as to avoid formation collapse. Pipes may be withdrawn simultaneously with the gravel placement such that the bottom of the pipes is kept about 5 feet above the level of the top of the gravel in the annulus. An accurate pipe tally and a record of the amount of gravel placed shall be kept to estimate the position of the bottom of the pipes relative to the top of the gravel in the annulus. Once the gravel has been placed to the level of the pump housing casing reducer and the circulation has stopped the verticality of the pump housing casing shall be checked and adjusted keeping it concentric with the hole and the casing then maintained under slight tension until gravel placement is complete. The Contractor shall maintain a record of the volume of gravel placed until graveling is complete at which time the Contractor shall give the record. clearly identifying the total volume of gravel placed to the Engineer-in-change. The Contractor shall maintain a record of the volume of gravel placed until graveling is complete at which time the Contractor shall give the record. clearly identifying the total volume of gravel placed to the Engineer-in-change




Gravel and gravel placement not meeting these requirements may lead to rejection of the tubewell by the Engineer-in-charge. All gravel so rejected shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. Temporary casing. if used. Must be withdrawn simultaneously with gravel placement and such a rate and manner as to avoid both formation collapse and gravel 'locking the easing'. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible bit ensuring that the well annular space is completely filled with gravel. The process of withdrawing the temporary casing shall be continued until the bottom of the temporary casing is at least 10 feet above the top of the reducer. Above this point, the temporary casings may be removed or left in place at the option of the Contractor, although no payment kill be made for temporary casing left in place. The top of the gravel pack shall be maintained at ground level by the addition of gravel as necessary during all developing and testing operations

12. WELL HEAD SECURITY

Tire Contractor shall not at any time leave the open well head unattended. Access to the well for purposes other than those directly concerned with well construction and testing shall not be permitted. After the installation of the gravel pack has been satisfactorily completed and approved by the Engineer-in-charge, the Contractor shall install well head casing to externally sleeve and protect the pump housing casing. The well head casing shall be of mild steel pipe about 3 feet 6 inches long with a nominal diameter 6 inches greater than the nominal diameter of the pump housing casing and minimum wall thickness of 0.25 inch. The well head casing shall be fitted over the pump housing casing to a depth of two feet below natural ground level and cement grout shall be placed to fill the entire length of the annulus between the vertically held well head casing and the wall of the borehole. The Contractor shall take care to avoid loss of grout into the annulus below the well head casing. The well head casing shall be fitted with a well cap. The well cap shall be fabricated from mild steel plate 0.25 inch thick, shall fit the well head casing around its full circumference and shall be welded in position. The cap shall be fitted with handles or other attachments for ease of handling. The well cap shall be removed for each subsequent phase of well construction. development and testing and immediately rewelded in position after completion of such work. Compliance with this requirement will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for safeguarding any part of the tubewell completed until the entire tubewell installation is handed over.

13. CEMENT GROUT

Cement grout shall be based on cement and water or on cement. fine sand and water and shall be of a type resulting in minimum shrinkage. All cement used shall be sulphate resisting. Water must be clean, fresh and free font earth and organic matter. All grout shall be thoroughly mixed in a plant having a capacity able to produce the maximum required theoretical quantity in less than one hour. Water used shall be the minimum amount necessary to produce a homogeneous mixture suitable for injection and not exceeding 4½ , parts of water to 10 parts of cement by Weigh. Mixed grout shall not be allowed to stand for more than one hour before use and shall be continuously agitated before injection. The addition of plasticisers, set retarders and expanding additives to the mix will be permitted subject to approval by the Engineer-in-charge of a type and method of use, but the addition of chloride based accelerators or metallic additives will not be permitted. On completion of each grouting operation the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment used for it. Drilling operations in a well shall not recommence within a period of 24 hours after grouting. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer-in-charge, cement grout shall be injected into the annulus via tremmie pipe.




14. VERTICALITY AND STRAIGHTNESS Installed pump housing casing Shall he straight, plumb and concentric in the drilled hole so that the deviation of its axis from the vertical shall not exceed 10 minutes at any depth. Measurement for the determination of the vertical alignment and straightness of the pump housing casing shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer-in-charge, upon completion of the gravel packing. Measurements for determining the deviation of the pump housing casing from the vertical shall be made by use of a circular plumb having a minimum outside diameter of 0.25 inch less than the inside diameter of the pump housing casing and suspended by a piano %sire from a point exactly 10 feet above the casing head. The plumb shall hang vertically and shall be initially suspended in the centre of the top of the casing. The line from which the plumb is suspended shall, with the plumb at any depth, not deviate from the centre of the pump housing casing at the top by more than that corresponding to a deviation of the plumb of 10 minutes at the bottom of the pump housing casing. All deviations shall refer to a vertical line passing through the centre of the pump housing casing at the top. Deviation shall be recorded against depth of measurements, every 10 feet, in a manner approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Straightness shall be checked by lowering a section of pipe 10 feet long or a dummy of the same length to the bottom of the pump housing casing. The minimum outside diameter of the pipe or dummy shall be 0.5 inch less than the inside diameter of the pump housing casing. The pump housing casing shall be sufficiently straight so that the pipe or dummy can be passed freely throughout the entire length of the pump housing casing. Plumbs, pipes and dummies used in these tests shall be as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Any tubewell failing to meet the specified requirements for straightness, verticality and concentricity shall be abandoned. The Contractor shall construct a new well at an alternative site as designated by the Engineer-in-charge. No payment will be made to the Contractor for the abandoned hole or for the material abandoned therein.

15. WELL DEVELOPMENT Unless otherwise approved wells shall be developed by air lift surging and pumping immediately after installation of casing, screen and gravel pack. These operations will be witnessed by the Engineer in charge from initiation to completion. The Contractor shall maintain a complete record of the development operations and shall make regular periodic measurements of discharge rates, sand content and water level. Development shall continue at least until the water returned is clear and clean and free of suspended material to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall ensure that development operations are carried out in such a manner as to avoid any damage to the casing/ screen string. Development of all wells shall he pet tot me(]in two stages, oi its ordered or approved by the Engineer-in-charge, its described below:

(i) Development by air lift method

The air lift development tool shall be similar to that shown in Figure 7.1, with rubber seals incorporated in the isolators. Compressors shall be of sufficient capacity to initiate and sustain discharge from the well.

The air lift tool shall be assembled and lowered towards the bottom of the well, the water being gently discharged during lowering in order to settle gravel in the annulus. An accurate pipe tally shall be kept to confirm the tool's position opposite the screen. On reaching the lowest screened portion, the tool shall be operated its described below or as approved by the Engineer-in-charge until the desired results are achieved prior to lifting the tool by a length equal to the distance between isolators, or into the upper screen section if appropriate where the operation shall be repeated.

Air lift tool operation shall consist of adjusting the airline position and airflow to maximize discharge from any section. After maintaining the discharge for a few minutes the discharge valve shall be rapidly closed and opened in it timed sequence to achieve several flow reversals in the treated length without venting excess air to the gravel shrouding. Following such it sequence. the maximum continuous discharge shall be maintained until the discharge is




effectively sand-free. The whole operation of flow reversal. followed by maximized discharge, shall be repeated until the discharge is sand-free to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. Throttling of the compressor airflow may be required for these operations.

After the development of the entire screen length, the well shall be sounded. If an material has collected at the bottom, it shall be removed with an approved device.

(ii) Development by pumping method

The development by air lift shall be followed by pumping and back-washing of the tubewell for four hours (minimum) with a vertical turbine pump subject to approval by the Engineer-in-charge. The pumping shall be done in steps at rates of 75, 100, 125 and 150 percent of the design discharge capacity. At each step the pumping shall be interrupted at 10 minute. intervals to produce a surging effect and shall continue until the sand content specifications described below are met.

On completion of the development operations. the well shall be allowed to recover for a minimum period of one hour. During this recovery period the well shall be sounded. if any material has collected at the bottom, it shall be removed with an approved device.

(iii) Sand Test

Following the recovery period the tubewell shall be pumped at 150 percent of rated capacity for it period of one hour after which the specific capacity of the well shall he determined float the measurement of water level and flow at the end of the period. The water humped shall, at all tines, be free of turbidity. Within the first 30 seconds of the pumping and again after two minutes, the sand content of the water shall be determined by using a 1000 milliliter Imhoff cone or by a centrifugal sand sampler (to be approved by the Engineer-in-charge) and shall be less than 100 ppm. Determination shall also be made 5 minutes after the start of pumping and sand content at this time shall be traces/clear. A further determination shall be made 10 minutes after the start of pumping and the water shall be free of sand at this time and at all subsequent intervals. If these sand content tolerances are exceeded at any time up to final acceptance of the installation, while pumping in the rate of 150 percent or less, the development of the tubewell shall be considered incomplete and the Contractor shall resume development by pumping at his own expense until such tune as the sand content tolerance are met. If the sand content tolerance cannot be met within the first 24 hours of pump development the airlift development process shall be repeated. Sand content determination, water

The Contractor shall also supply and maintain: - all necessary temporary pipework at the casing head together with a discharge regulating

valve so as to enable the total flow to be evenly delivered to a discharge measuring device.

- all necessary equipment for the accurate and continuous measurement and recording of discharge from bores during test pumping. Orifice and rectangular or V notch weirs with suitable stilling tanks will be permitted with a strong preference for properly calibrated circular orifice weirs. Discharge shall be maintained within 5% of the rate ordered by the Engineer-in-charge.

- at least two electric contact water level gauges accurately calibrated in 0.01 metre intervals for measuring water levels in wells during tests. Wellhead arrangements shall permit these gauges to be entered freely into the well. The contractor shall measure and record water levels at time intervals ordered by the Engineer-in-charge.

- all necessary pipework or channels for the conveyance of water discharged during pumping tests from the point of discharge measurement to a point 20(1 yards from the casing head, or such distance ordered by the Engineer-in-charge to prevent leakage interference with the pumping; test and interference with property.

If any test is stopped due to plant failure it shall be repeated at the Contractor's cost at a time and date to be specified by the Engineer-in-charge who will allow the aquifer time to recover fully.




16. DISINFECTION

Disinfection shall be carried out after the pumping test programme and immediately prior to capping the well by mixing 1.5 Ib of chloride of little (bleaching powder) with 1000 gallons of clear water and pumping into the well.

17. HEAD WORKS

A concrete Class B plinth shall be constructed around the well head casing to the dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings.

18. LINE SHAFT TUBE WELL PUMPS

Line shaft tube well pumps shall be of the mixed flow bowl type and shall consist of a strainer, single or mull-stage bowl assembly, column pipe, line shaft with bearings and a discharge head. The pump shall be suitable for direct coupling to a hollow shaft electric motor or via a hollow shaft right-angle gear to an internal combustion engine.

The pump efficiency shall not fall below 60% throughout the operating range. Maximum pump speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm. The natural frequencies of the assembly shall not occur within ±20% of the operational speed. The impeller may be of closed or semi-open pattern and shall be manufactured flout bronze or cast iron. The bowl assembly bearings shall be bronze or cut less rubber. The bowls shall be manufactured from cast iron to BS 1452 and shall incorporate replaceable wear rings. The adjoining faces between bowls shall be spiggoted to ensure accurate alignment and shall be fastened with stainless steel bolts. The impeller shaft shall be of stainless steel and shall incorporate replaceable bearing sleeves. The upper end shall be threaded for connection to the line shaft. The impeller shall be secured by stainless steel fittings. The rotating assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Pump bearings shall be bronze or metal backed cut less rubber and shall be lubricated by the pumped liquid. With the exception of the top section of column pipe, all sections shall be of equal length, up to a maximum of 10 feet and shall be of the same length as the line shaft sections. They shall be manufactured from seamless mild steel to BS 3601 and shall be screwed with parallel threads. The column pipe shall be able to withstand the pressure imposed under closed valve conditions allowing for surge pressure. Flanges shall be joined using mild steel bolts. The line shaft section length shall not exceed 10 feet and shall be the same as the column pipe section length. Sections shall be manufactured from carbon steel and shall be joined by cast iron threaded sleeve couplings arranged so as to tighten under normal operation. The top section shall be of a nonstandard length and shall incorporate a lockable adjusting nut for adjusting tire impeller clearance, and a sleeve where it comes into contact with the stuffing box seal. The line shaft bearings shall comprise either offset spider bearings or centred spider bearings in conjunction with removable shaft sleeves. Bearing material shall be synthetic rubber in a steel shell. Bearings shall be located between each column pipe section. A pre-lubrication system shall be provided to allow water to be fed to the upper line shaft bearings before starting the pump. The discharge head shall be of cast iron or fabricated steel and shall have an integral delivery bend flanged to BS 4504 A. Line shaft sealing shall be by a gland and stuffing box with a lantern ring. The open area of the strainer shall be at least four times the area of the impeller eye. Each pump shall be tested at the manufacturer's factory in accordance with BS 5316: Part 2 and or other relevant standards. The pump shall operate at its design point within acceptance tolerances for flow rate and total head laid down in Clause 9.4.1 of BS 5316. Part 2. Copies of the test certificates in duplicate shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall provide the following documents: Operation and Maintenance Instructions (English) - 2 copies Operation and Maintenance Instructions (Urdu) - 2 copies Head/quantity curve - 2 copies Motor kw input/quantity curve - 2 copies Overall efficiency/quantity curve - 2 copies NPSH required/ quantity curve - 2 copies

EELLEECCTTRRIICCAALL WWOORRKKSS



TP - Electrical Works Page 1 of 22

1. SCOPE

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

The works related to the electrical system which are included in the scope of this Contract are shown on the Drawings, stated in the Specifications and Bill of Quantities and explained in these specifications. The Contractor shall also be responsible to supply any other equipment not specifically mentioned in these documents but which is necessary for proper operation of the works/system included in the scope of this Contract. The Contractor shall solely be responsible for ensuring proper functional requirements of various equipment and shall be responsible for furnishing any additional piece of equipment and for making modification in the equipment as desired and / or approved by the Engineer to achieve proper co-ordination with various equipments offered in the bid and also with those installed by others.

2. RULES & REGULATIONS

The entire electrical installation/work shall be carried out by licensed Contractor, authorized to undertake such work under the provisions of the Electricity Act 1910 and The Electricity Rules 1937 as adopted and modified up to date by the Government of Pakistan. All works shall be carried out in accordance with the latest edition of the Regulations of the Electrical Equipment of Buildings issued by the Institute of Electrical Engineers-London, the Contract Documents, The Electricity Rules 1937 and bye-laws that are in force from time to time. Any discrepancy between these Specifications and any other rules and regulations shall be brought to the notice of Engineer for his instructions and decision of the Engineer shall be final and conclusive. The Contractor shall be responsible for completing all formalities and submitting the test certificates as per prevailing rules and regulations, and shall have the installation passed by the Government Electric Inspector of that region. All requirements of the Electric Inspector and the electric supply company (FESCO) shall be complied with.

3. AMBIENT CONDITIONS

All materials and equipments supplied and installed shall be designed, manufactured and tested to meet the following ambient conditions unless specifically stated otherwise for any material/ equipment. Maximum indoor ambient temperature : 50 Degree Celsius Minimum indoor ambient temperature : Zero Degree Celsius Maximum outdoor ambient temperature : 50 Degree Celsius Minimum outdoor ambient temperature : Zero Degree Celsius Maximum Relative humidity : 90 Percent Maximum Altitude of project : 600 feet above the mean sea level.

4. STANDARDS The latest standards and codes of reputable organizations shall be applicable for the material and equipment specified herein and for installation work. Such organizations to be BSS, VDE, etc. In case the Specifications lay down herein differ from those given in the standards IEC, then the equivalent or better specifications shall govern. Wherever applicable the equipment shall also conform to the requirements of Pakistan Standard Institution (PSI). Contractor shall maintain at the site office one copy of the standards/codes applicable to the works.




5. SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR

The shop drawings and or technical data to be furnished by the Contractor for each electrical equipment shall include, but not limited to the following:

(a) Structural drawings showing foundations, RCC details, dimensional plans, elevation

and sections on a suitable scale.

(b) Electrical drawings showing:

- Line diagrams of switchboards control center with detailed wiring diagrams, elevations / internal component layout and other standard details.

- Complete tender drawings with necessary execution details such as no. of wires,

size of conduit, etc.

(c) Technical literature and manufacturer's characteristic data with the description of materials and weights of all equipment as instructed by the Engineer.

At least three (3) copies of the shop drawings and /or technical data of the equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for checking and approval.

6. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer in properly bound form six (6) copies of manufacturer's instruction manuals for installation, testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the specified equipment including manuals of spare parts and tools of the equipment. At least two copies of the documents shall be submitted in original. The installation instructions shall be submitted 2 weeks prior to commencement of installation of each equipment, and operation and maintenance instruction at the time of commissioning. If the Contractor fails to provide the documents the Engineer shall withhold issuance of requisite certificates and deduct suitable amount from the payments to the Contractor.

7. GUARANTEE

The Contractor shall furnish written guarantee of the manufacturer or supplier with respect to satisfactory performance of each equipment. Guarantee shall be given for replacement and repair of part or whole of the equipment, which may be found defective in material or workmanship. The guarantee shall cover the duration of Maintenance Period as defined in the Conditions of Contract. This guarantee shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations and he will be fully responsible for the repair or replacement of any defective material in time, so as not to cause any undue delay in carrying out the repairs and or replacements.

8. FACTORY TESTS

All type and routine tests on transformer, switch gear, pole, light, cable and all other equipments shall be performed at the manufacturer's works in the presence of the Engineer or his Representative. Type tests may be waived off in case test certificates are submitted as certified by the Engineer approved standard laboratory of international repute; but merely producing the test type certificates will not relieve the manufacturer to carry out the required standard/routine tests. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer about the date and time of test of each equipment at least two weeks in advance. The witnessing of test by the Engineer or his representative shall not absolve the Contractor from his responsibility for the proper functioning of the equipment, and for furnishing the guarantees referred to in clause 8.0.




All test results shall be supplied in quadruplicate. All expenses for carrying out the tests and witness by the Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor and deemed to have been included in the tender bid.

9. GENERAL

The work under this section consists of supply, storage, installation, testing & commissioning of Street lighting system read together with drawings & bill of quantity. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, services, and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation, and connection of all equipment. The extent of work specified herein and/or shown on the drawings represents the minimum requirements. Electrical Work Generally is to be in accordance with the requirements of the Specification Road lighting including luminaries, columns, related power distribution and control, protective earthing and related works including column foundations and cables etc.

9.1 Standards

Luminaries generally are to comply with IEC 60598 standards and recommendations. Manufacturer to verify compliance with these standards and the applicable local regulations and design standards.

9.2 Technical Requirements

Minor deviations from the Drawings may be considered for improvement in construction details, but no changes are to be made without the written approval of the Engineer.

9.3 Ambient Conditions

Unless otherwise specified, equipment is to be designed and derated for continuous and trouble-free service at 500 C ambient temperatures and 90% relative humidity, with temperature reaching 700

9.4 Equipment Data

C in direct sunlight and with high content of ultra-violet rays. Equipment is to withstand full load operation whilst exposed to sun.

Submit complete data for approval including, but not limited to, the following: • Detailed literature, in English, for each type of luminaries or fixture, lamp and control

gear including manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall dimensions, operating characteristics and principles, and any modification to a standard product if applicable.

• Detailed specification and drawings for each column type including shape, base /

mounting flanges, bolts, nuts etc, cross-sections, design criteria and calculations, brackets, finishes, provisions for cabling, cut-out or circuit-breaker etc.

• Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar curves, coefficients of

utilization efficiency and depreciation factors.

9.5 Shop and Construction Drawings Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the following:

• Layout of equipment in exact positions with mounting and construction details,

concrete foundation dimensions and reinforcement, routing, trenches, backfill and




packing material, earthing set etc.

• Cabling and wiring diagrams, single line drawings, loads, phase distribution, protection and control, earthing.

• Calculations of illumination levels and glare, based on CIE methods.

9.6 Samples

Submit fully equipped sample of luminaries or other materials or components to the Engineer.

9.7 Warranty

The supplier shall provide the full warranty on all equipment supplied during the period specified below. The warranty shall cover all parts and all costs, which are directly attributable to the supplier. Warranty coverage shall begin on the date that the equipment is received. The warranty period shall be minimum 2 years.

10. LED LUMINAIRE

ROAD LIGHTING

Luminaries with transparent acrylic cover, housing a high efficiency 70 watts, 90 & 150 watts LED lamp shall be fitted with gasket and accessories for weather and insect proof operation. The light fixture shall be posted on single or double arm pole or as shown in drawings. The light fixture should be fully complying with safety norms according to: IEC 62471 photo biological safety of lamps and lamp systems including luminaries. EN 61347-2-13:2006; Safety testing. EN 60598-1 and EN 60598-2; Luminaries safety testing.

10.1 Body Construction The Road light LED Luminaries shall be as per international standard and made of non-corrosive high pressure molded die cast aluminum housing and Tempered Flat glass with minimal glare. The surface must be finished with powder coating paint. The body should be aerodynamic profiled to give least air resistance. The Luminaries shall be consist of Heat Sink, One-piece cast, low-copper (<0.4% Cu) aluminum alloy. Which shall effectively spread heat to ensure long component life of light and electronic components and provides precise alignment lenses? The Lamp compartment must be IP 66 with lens replaceable possibility.

10.2 Source of light output The light source shall be of yellow / white LED type. Single lamp or multiple lamps can be used. View angles of a minimum of 100 or above. The luminous performance of individual used should not be less than 50 lumen / watt, when measured luminaries as a whole. The color temperature of white or yellow used in the system should be in the range of 5500oK - 6500o K. Use which emit ultraviolet light will not permitted.

The light output from the white LED light source should be constant throughout the duty cycle. The Supplier shall ensure that light working life shall be >50,000 Hrs. and Color Index (CRI) Ra >75. The make, model number, country of origin and technical characteristics of yellow used in the lighting system must be furnished by the supplier/manufacturer.




10.3 LVD Modules The modules utilize aluminum metal-clad board for maximum heat transfer, leading to longer life. The product shall be enabling Pending Aimed Optics, which allows the direction and intensity of the light to be tightly controlled. This control of the allow fixtures to maintain light levels equal to or greater than that of MH and HPS fixtures at a much lower energy consumption levels.

10.4 Lens

The LVD Lens shall be High impact molded, UV-stabilized, Profile Acrylic lens, for maximum efficiency of light transmission.

10.5 LED Driver

The LVD driver, with high output current accuracy of ±1.5%, with a high power factor correction to maximize power utilization shall be required. The driver should comply with UL 1310 / UL48 Class 2 with a built-in over-temperature protection.

10.6 Finish / Colour

Thermally set polyester powder-coated for durability with 3 mils nominal paint thickness and corrosion resistant rated 500 hours salt spray endurance.

10.7 Full Cut Off

The Luminaries should meet IEC standards for full cut off luminaries.

10.8 Light Characteristic

Luminaries design shall be such that the lighting area covered along the area is more compared to across i.e. at least 15 Lux at 30 meter distance from the pole along the road and at least 15 Lux at 30 meter distance from the pole across the area.

10.9 Light Bracket

The road light decorative bracket shall be made of M.S pipe bent to shape as shown on the drawing. The light fixture bracket shall be fixed on pole, by means of bolt. The dimensions of the bracket shall be as shown on the drawing.

10.10 Finish

Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed; inside and outside surfaces of column are to be cleaned by pickling or blasting and are to be free of grease. Steel components of columns are to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Minimum thickness of zinc coating is to be 500 g/m2

11. DESCRIPTION OF ARRANGEMENT

on both inside and outside surfaces of column. Galvanizing is to be to NFA 91121 and NFA 91 122 (June 1958) or BS 729. Any damage to galvanizing is to be rectified during erection by wire brushing affected area and treating with approved rust converter to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Flange plate and inside and outside of column base are to be coated with heavy bitumen paint prior to erection.

External lighting shall comprise of pole top or bracket light fittings mounted as indicated on drawings. The lights shall be suitable for 220 volt single phase AC supply. The details of mounting are shown on drawings. The fittings shall be water light will easy access for replacement




of components, and provided where necessary with rubber gaskets. The luminaries shall be complete with all accessories including box at the foot of each panel, approx. 2 feet above the ground level, suitable accommodation shall be provided for a combined junction and fuse box to connect incoming and outgoing cables. The junction and termination box shall be provided with and outlet for making a connection with the light fittings through 10 Amps circuit bracket. The tendered shall strictly follow details of the junction and fuse boxes as shown on drawings.

11.1 Lighting Fixtures Installation Instructions for Lighting Fixtures

Light fittings shall be installed as shown in the drawings or as per General Requirements or as instructed by the Consultants. All fixing accessories shall be provided and installed.

Outdoor lighting fittings shall be weather proof type. The connections to these fittings shall be taken form a weather proof cast metal type junction box complete with cover and gasket; size shall be determined by the number of wires entering the box. All accessories for mounting outdoor fitting shall be provided and installed.

11.2 Photoelectric Switch

The lighting shall be controlled by means of thermal relay type photoelectric switch, which shall be separately fused and mounted outside the distribution board in open air. The switch shall be special type for high load highway lighting and shall be unaffected by light from the controlled lamp due to downward mounting. There shall be no false switching due to momentary high brightness such as from automobile head lights. The switch shall be National Japan photoelectric switch type EE 8020-821 or equivalent approved by the Consultant's Representative.

11.3 Earthing System

All exposed conductive noncurrent carrying parts of the installation, comprising of conduit, switchgear, junction boxes, etc shall be efficiently earthed. Where the installation is supplied by a privately owned transformer or where the supply is obtained from a private generating plant in such a way that there is no metallic connection with the commercial public supply, the star point of the transformer or the generator shall be effectively earthed. Earthing of noncurrent carrying conductive parts shall be independent of the earthing of star point of transformer or generator.

The earthing shall be done to comply with the following regulation:

a) Electricity rules 1937 as adopted in Pakistan. b) Ear thing arrangements and protective contractors" of the IEEE LONDON WIRING

REGULATIONS 15th

Edition.

c) British Standard Code of Practice CP 1013 1969.

d) The specification given herein after.

The earthing arrangement shall be such that:




e) The value of resistance from consumer’s main earthing terminal to the earthed point of supply is in accordance with the protective and functional requirements of the installation and expected to be continuously effective.

f) Earth fault current and earth leakage currents likely to occur are carried without

danger, particularly from Thermal, Electro Mechanical and Thermo mechanical stresses.

g) They are adequately robust fro have additional mechanical protection appropriate to

the assessed conditions of external influences.

h) Necessary precautions are taken against the risk of damage to another metallic part through electrolysis.

12. FOUNDATION, PADS, BASES, SUPPORTS & FASTENERS

Channel sills for leveling and support of and floor mounted electrical equipment shall be provided as part of the electrical work. Where an item of floor mounted equipments to be installed, floor and deck loading shall be checked. If it is found that permitted loadings hake exceeded by minted loadings have exceeded by direct application of the equipment on the slab or deck, suitable tonnage as approved by the consultant shall be provided, to make the electrical work to distribute the weight in a safe manner. Contractor shall submit the loads of each equipment to the consultant as soon as possible.

a) All necessary concrete foundation pads and bases exterior to the building for lighting

installation or other electrical equipment installed as part of the electrical work including such base or foundation as detailed on architectural drawings, shall be provided as part of the electrical work.

b) Supporting methods for all electrical equipment and circuitry shall confirm to the best

practice, shall utilize only approved materials and shall be in accordance with the B.S.S. specification.

c) All fastenings to attach electrical work to the building structure shall be an approved

type, in general, the only acceptable fastening methods shall be as follows:

i) Woods screws on wood ii) Bolts and expansion shields on concrete or R.C.C. Masonry. iii) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry. iv) Machine screws approved clamps or welded threaded studs on steel.

13. SPARES

a) When a main equipment is part of owners supply, the 12 months maintenance spares supplied by the equipment manufacturer will be handed over to the contractor who will maintain record. For equipment which are part of contractor's supply the contractor will maintain a similar record of consumption of the maintenance spares supplied by the equipment supplier in accordance with the requirement of this contract and hand over the un-utilized spare parts to the owner representative at the end of the maintenance period.

b) Any spare parts required by the contractor for satisfactory completion of maintenance

work during the maintenance period but not supplied by the manufacturer as normal supply with equipment shall be procured by the contractor through his own resources at his own cost.




c) A list of spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer or as specified for the maintenance of installation for a period of two years (or specified otherwise) after the expiry of maintenance period shall be quoted. Individual prices shall be quoted for each recommended spare.

14. ERECTION / INSTALLATION CHECK LIST

The Contractor shall prepare Erection / Installation check list for each item, listing all components to be checked after the erection / installation of the item. The check list shall be approved by the Project Engineer and shall be presented to the inspecting Engineer. The check list shall include all the items to be checked for satisfactory erection / installation works prior to test, energize and commissioning the equipment.

15. ROAD LIGHTING POLES

Steel tubular octagonal/conical as approved type imported hot-dip galvanized 10m, 12m & 18m high lighting poles for Road lighting. The pole shall withstand basic wind speed of 40 m/s. The poles shall strictly conform to International Standards, pole design in accordance with BS 5649, CP3 and material with BS 4360. For welding and galvanizing, the poles shall conform to BS 5135 and ISO 1461 / BS729 respectively. The pole must go through standard testing procedures for dimensional verification, galvanizing and material thickness. Quality Control procedures require the manufacturer of the column to be ISO 9001:2000 accredited.

16. HIGH MAST FOR FLOOD LIGHT

Steel tubular hot-dip galvanized 18m high mid-hinged lighting mast consisting of 2 sections each of maximum length 11.55m. The mast shall withstand basic wind speed of 50 m/s. The mast shall carry 4 luminaries having max projected luminaries sail area of 0.64m2 and max luminaries’ mass of 105.5kg. The mast shall strictly conform to International Standards, pole design in accordance with BS 5649, CP3 and material with BS 4360. For welding and galvanizing, the poles shall conform to BS 5135 and ISO 1461 / BS729 respectively. Quality Control procedures shall require the manufacturer of the column to be ISO 9001:2000 accredited.

NOTE: 1. The supplier must provide IP test report from third party internationally recognized laboratory for the light fittings.

2. The supplier must provide the lighting design calculations and pole design calculations.

17. L.V. SWITCHGEAR MAIN, SUBMAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Specification and other information as mentioned in drawings are applicable. Main, Sub main Distribution Boards and MCB DBs shall be of the totally enclosed type, dust proof, damp proof and be suitable for floor/surface/flush mounting, and comply with IEC 157, IEC 158, IEC 439, BS 4752 but not limited to them.

They shall be suitable for 400/230 volts 3 phase, 4 wires, 50 Hz system and shall have all components rated for insulation class 600 volts minimum.

All main, sub main and MCB distribution boards shall be factory assembled. Main and Sub-main distribution boards shall be fabricated with 14SWG or as required and MCB DBs with 16 SWG sheet steel, de-rusted, degreased, rust proofed with two base coats of anti-corrosive paint and painted with two coats of heavy enamel paint in approved color or powder coated. Indoor distribution boards shall have enclosures of IP-40 grade.




All distribution boards shall be complete with adequately rated copper phase, neutral and earth bus bars and be complete with incoming and outgoing cable terminations arrangement, terminal block/line up terminals and shall be suitable for flush mounting of all instruments. The cabling inside the panels shall be suitably numbered and harnessed by means of straps or cords. All distribution boards shall have electrolytic tinned copper bus bars.

Cable entries shall be through removable gland plates.

All components shall be installed on mounting brackets inside the enclosure and protected from the front with screwed sheet steel safety plate. The enclosure shall be provided with rubber gas-kiting and a lockable hinged door with cam fastener. All distribution boards shall be front access type.

The front side of the distribution boards shall be provided with a name plate designating the board. The inside of the door shall have a chart clearly indicating the circuits with their designations. The door is to be grounded by flexible copper cable. This also applies to the common and front plate.

Suitably rated CTs shall be provided as required CTs shall be of class 0.5 for metering and 1.5 for protection.

18. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) / MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) Miniature circuit breakers (MCB’s) and molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) shall be of the molded pattern and their switching levers shall be such that they are accessible through the safety plate for operation. The short circuit rating of the circuit breakers shall be as indicated on the drawing. They shall comply to IEC Standards 947-2 and 898, at 230 / 400v - 50Hz.

18.1 Out Door feeder pillars Outdoor feeder pillar shall be housed in weather proof sheet steel cabinets to IP54 or IP65 as applicable, grade fabricated with 14 SWG sheet steel, de-rusted, degreased, rust-proofed with two coats of anticorrosive paint or powder coated. They shall be floor mounted on concrete bases of required dimensions.

All components of feeder pillars shall be on mounting brackets inside the enclosure. They shall be equipped with adequately rated electrolytic tinned copper phase, neutral and earth bus bars and be complete with cable terminations arrangement, terminal block/line up terminals. High quality housing of fiber glass feeder pillars are also acceptable. Mounting brackets shall be provided in the enclosure. All feeders pillars to have copper bus bars, isolators, breakers and other components as required.

All distribution boards and isolators shall be identified with circuit designations and source of incoming supply. Lightning switches shall also be identified. Labels for indoor or weather protected areas shall be white-black (or red) wire, laminated plastic with lettering engraved to show the middle layer. Identification and instructions shall be in black lettering. Warning or danger shall be in red.




18.2 Circuit Identification In addition to cable identification, cable cores shall be positively identified at every terminal point, in accordance with the drawings. The cores of non-flexible cable shall be identified in accordance with the “IEE Wiring Regulations” with the addition of polarity markings for DC circuits. Ferrules used for identification shall be of interlocking permanently engraved type, designed to encircle the core completely. Markers of the adhesive type will not be permitted. Ferrules shall be correctly sized. There shall be improvisation and engravings must not be altered. Core markings shall be strictly in accordance with the drawings.

18.3 Fuses All fuses shall be totally sealed, HRC, complying fully with relevant US NEC, IEC & BS codes. Where fuses are employed to provide backup protection to molded case circuit breaker, their rating and fusing factor shall correspond to fault level applicable at particular point. All fuses shall be fitted with a device to indicate operation of the fuse.

18.4 Current Transformers The current transformers shall be suitable for the ratings specified and comply with the requirement of relevant US NEC, BS and IEC codes. The current transformers including primary winding conductors shall have a short time current rating and duration not less than the short circuit level of the associated switchgear. The out-put of each current transformers shall not be less than the specified output and the tendered shall ensure that the capacity is adequate for the operation of the associated protective windings of each current transformer shall be earthed at one point on; Y. Magnetization and core loss curves shall be provided for each type and rating of current transformer shall be designed for 5 amperes. The current transformer shall comply with accuracy classes for power station measurements.

MATERIAL

19. SHEET METAL WORK

The Low Tension Distribution Board shall be fabricated from electro galvanized/zinc coated sheet steel. All the components shall be installed on a common component mounting plate inside the enclosure and protected from the front with screwed sheet steel dead front cover plate. The door and dead front cover shall be made of 14 SWG sheet steel. The door shall be fully gas kited with hinges on the left hand side and locking handle on the right hand side for fastening the door. The locking handle should be detectable. The dead front assembly shall be fastened to enclosure by means of self- locating fasteners for quick and easy fixing. The distribution board shall be supplied complete with all installation materials as recommended by the manufacturer. The incoming and outgoing cable connections shall be according to the wiring requirements. If required, an adapter box for accommodating the cables and conduits may be provided. The box shall be of the same material and finish as the DB.




The cabling inside the DB shall be suitably harnessed by means of straps or cords. An earth bar or terminal strips shall be provided for connection of incoming and outgoing earth conductors. The earth bar or terminals shall be permanently connected to the body of DB at two points. Flexible copper strip shall be provided for earthling of the door of DB.

a) Components

The Low Tension Distribution Boards shall be provided with components as specified, as shown and required for the satisfactory operation of the distribution board and of the electrical system.

b) Bus Bars

The Bus bars shall be made of 99.9% pure high conductivity annealed electrolytic copper and shall be completely isolated and mechanically braced for the specified fault level. The phase identification of bus bars shall be by colors applied on bus bars and these shall be red, yellow and blue for phases and white for neutral. The earth bus bar shall be green.

The bus bars shall be for three phase, neutral and earth and shall be of appropriate size to meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the system. The temperature rise shall not exceed 45o

C at rated current.

20. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING During execution and on completion of the works (as required by Employer/ Engineer the following tests shall be performed and a satisfactory performance certificate in respect of each test shall be submitted with the final bill. All equipment/instruments for the tests are to be provided by the Contractor at no extra cost. All test to be performed in the presence of Employer/ Engineer or its representative. a). Earth Resistance test and earth loop impedance test. b). Insulation resistance / Meggar test of the entire electrical installation between phases,

phase to earth and phase to neutral. c). Polarity tests on switches, MCB’s, fuses, etc. d). Operation tests and commissioning of the entire electrical installation including all

equipments. Certificates of Test shall be compiled, for each section of the installation. A master set of these documents shall be kept as the original of the Test Dossier. This dossier will bear the signature of Employer witnessing the tests.

21. POWER CABLES AND WIRES

GENERAL In general LV cables and wires shall be with stranded copper conductors PVC insulated, PVC sheathed/unsheathed, single/multi-core, armored/unarmored. For lightning and socket outlet circuits they shall be 450/750 volts grades to BS 6004.

All power cables for main, sub-main feeders and power equipment etc. shall be of 600/1000 volts grade to BS-6346 Phase, neutral and grounding conductors shall be color coded red/yellow/blue, black and green. Each circuit shall have its own neutral and grounding conductor. The looping-in system shall be used throughout the installation. Any joint in wires is not permitted.

Final connection to road lightning fixtures from terminal box shall be made with 3 core 2.5 sq.mm PVC/PVC cable in lighting pole. Copper lugs shall be used for termination of




cables. All multi-core cables shall be provided with glands of suitable size at entry to the panels.

Power cables shall be clipped to the surface by means of heavy duty spacer saddles and clamps. The saddles and clamps shall be made of cast-iron or steel. Alternatively power cables shall be installed on pole including all installation materials and fixing accessories as specified. Such as glands, lugs, saddles, clamps, brackets etc. shall be provided without any additional cost.

Cables installed in under floor trenches shall be laid in u- pace pipe Cable terminations and joints shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Conductor connections and terminations shall be made with compression ferrules and lugs. Cable entry into panels shall be made with brass cable glands. Cable terminal lugs/ wire pins shall be of the mechanical compression type, soldered type lugs shall not be used. The routing and general arrangement of all cables i.e. power, instrumentation, Underground cables shall be run in up pipe laid in trenches with yellow warning tape, back fill. Concrete cable route markers or flag shall be provided at every 30 meter interval and at change of direction.

All jointing and termination work shall be carried out by practicing, fully trained tradesmen, qualified in such a work for the operating voltage concerned. Brass glands shall be used which are of the thread fixing, hexagon bodied displacement seal type or equal. They shall be compatible with associated cable and maintain the degree of protection of the equipment enclosure. All glands shall be fitted with PVC or PVC shrouds.

21.1 Applicable BS Codes PVC insulated non sheathed wires and cables for domestic application BS 6004 - 1984 PVC insulated and PVC sheathed multi core and flat twin cables and cords wires and cables BS 6004 - 1984 PVC insulated and PVC sheathed and flexible cords BS 6500 – 1975 PVC insulated and PVC sheathed armored and unarmored low voltage cables BS 6346 – 1987. PVC insulated and PVC sheathed armored and unarmored auxiliary cables (control cables) stranded BS 6346 - 1987 and IEC 502 - 1983. PVC insulated and PV C sheathed single or multi core low voltage power cables BS5467 – 1997 and IEC 502 - 1983 Control cables (auxiliary cables up to 61 cores in solid conductors, armored or armored BS 6346 - 1987 Flame test to IEC 60332-3, EN 50266-2, BS 4066 PT3, BS 5839-1:2003 Smoke density to IEC 61034, EN 50268, and BS 7622 Halogen-free to IEC 60754, EN 50267, BS 6425

22. SPECIFICATION POWER CABLES Conductors are plain annealed copper or aluminum complying with BS 6360.




Insulation consists of cross-linked polyethylene which is applied by extrusion to form a compact homogeneous layer. Bedding consists of an extruded layer of black PVC compound complying with BS 7655. Armor for multi-core cables consists of a single layer of galvanized steel wires complying with BS 1442. Serving the outer sheath is an extruded layer of black. PVC complying with the requirements of type BS 9 to BS 7655. Core identification is provided by colors. End marking the ends of each length of cables are marked Red and Green. At the end marked Red, the sequence of cores is clockwise; at the end marked. Green, the sequence is anti-clockwise. Bending radii during installation, soiling cables should not be bent to a radius smaller than hat given in the appropriate table. Dimensions and weights given in the tables on pages 7-19 are approximate. Other constructions it is possible to supply cable with minor difference in construction if sufficient quantity is required. In this connection it should be noted that armored cable to this specification aligns with the British Standard 5467: for 600/1000 volt and 1900/3300 volt cross linked polyethylene insulated cable. Cable in accordance with I.E.C. 502 can be specially manufactured.

22.1 Copper Earth Continuity Conductors (E.C.C)

NOTE: All power cables should be fire proof & complying the international code & standards.

Area of largest Area of earth Circuit conduct continuity conductor 2.5 mm² ---------------------------------------- 1.5 mm² 6.0 mm² ---------------------------------------- 4.0 mm² 10.0 mm² ---------------------------------------- 6.0 mm² 16.0 mm² ---------------------------------------- 6.0 mm² 25.0 mm² ---------------------------------------- 16.0 mm² 35.0 mm² ---------------------------------------- 16.0 mm² 50.0 mm² ---------------------------------------- 16.0 mm² 70.0 mm² ---------------------------------------- 50.0 mm²

23. CABLES AND CABLE ACCESSORIES High Tension Cables The high tension cable shall be cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated of 11/15 KV grade. The conductor shall be of high purity aluminum stranded circular conductor. The conductors shall be provided with conductor screening with a layer of semi conducting cross linked co-polymer applied over the insulation. The cores shall have copper tape screened. The cable shall be PVC bedded, armored, and PVC overheat. The Armor will comprise galvanized steel wire. The cable in general will comply with IEC 502-1978.




23.1 H.T. Cable Accessories The jointing accessories shall be of manufacturer of repute. The cold pouring resin jointing system shall be applied. The resin shall be non toxic bonding the thermoplastic sheath cable material with excellent electrical and mechanical properties. The resin shall have two separate ingredients: a powder and a liquid mixed in powder bag. The mixed resin shall be given the time required for setting then back filling applied. For conductor and Armor connections compression of identical specification shall be used. Termination The XLPE cable termination shall be made as shown on drawing and shall be based on heal shrinkable material. It is necessary to make earth connection of the protective armoring. This is to be done either by mechanical glands or by an alternative Armor clamping arrangement.

23.2 Low Tension Cables All the low tension cables shall be of size specified on the drawing or stated in the schedule to quantities, single core, core, or 3 1/2 core as required, cross linked polyethylene or PVC insulated and PVC sheathed. The cables shall be used either in floor trenches or in conduit and therefore should be suitable for above conditions. The copper used in manufacture cables should conform to P.S.S. 1036 or equivalent standard, having a electrical conductivity of not less than 99.8. The cross linked polyethylene cable shall conform to BSS 5467. Insulation should conform to BSS 2004 and BSS 2746 and should have heat stability and volume resistively in accordance with the standards laid down by cable manufacturers association (U.K). All the cables should comply the test requirements of B.S.S. 2004:1961.

23.3 Cables Installed in Air

It is assumed that most of the cable installations “in air” will be inside the buildings or under covered areas, and the ratings are therefore given on the basis of an ambient air temperature of 30°C. This is in contrast to the value of 25°C used for cables in air. Conversion to this or any other ambient temperature is easily achieved by the use of the rating factors given with the current rating tables. All the current ratings for cables run in free air have been based on the assumption that they are shielded from direct sunlight without restriction of ventilation. The ratings for cables subjected to solar radiation should be further reduced to take account of this factor. The defined conditions of installation for cables installed in air according to IEE wiring regulation 15th edition are briefly described below:- Two or three single core cables are installed one above the other, fixed to the vertical surface of a wall or open cable trench such that the cables are installed at a distance between centers of twice the overall diameter of the cable, the distance being at-least 20mm in each instance. The ratings for two single core cables may be applied with safety in instances where such cables are installed in horizontal formation on brackets fixed to a wall, either spaced as indicated above, or touching throughout. Three single core cables are installed in trefoil formation, fixed to the vertical surface of a wall or open cable trench, the cables touching throughout and the distance between the wall and the surface of the nearest cable being at-least 20 mm.




The single core cables are assumed to be remote from iron, steel, or Ferro-concrete, other than the cable supports. The cables of all types other than single core cables are installed singly, fixed to the vertical surface of a wall or open cable trench, the distance between the surface of the cable and the wall being at-least 20 mm in very instance. If it is necessary for cables to be installed at distances less than those described above, then the values tabulated under the heading “Clipped direct to surface” in the IEE wiring regulations 15th edition should be employed.

23.4 Under Ground Trench

The underground trench for the carrying of underground cable and wires through pipes etc. shall be provided internally and externally as shown on the drawing. While the routes for external runs are to be followed taking into account clearance from underground sanitary & water supply pipelines etc. those required internally are dependent upon the type and size of equipment being installed in the substation and process room etc. and hence this shall have to be specifically modified on the basis of the requirement of the equipment manufacturers or suppliers. The trench will be provided by the electrical contractor. He shall have to get the layout and the design of the duct approved by the consultant before actually commencing the work on it. All other trades shall have to be coordinated while deciding the alignment of underground trenches. The construction of the trench shall be totally water proof such that no seepage or package of water takes place either from top, bottom or sides. The cables/pipes shall be supported on two horizontally placed metal supports of 1/2” x 1/16 1, iron and duly clamped at intervals not exceeding 2½ feet. A covering of 1/8" thick of soft and indestructible by heat material shall be applied to un-served cables. The supports shall be staggered as defined in drawing. An angle iron shall be buried in the trench masonry at the time of construction. The trench should be absolutely clean while the cables are laid. Suitable slope shall be provided in the floor of the trench and the lowest point/points shall be connected to the drainage system so as to ensure self draining of water, if any. The trench outside the building shall be water-tight, and shall be covered by R.C.C. precast slabs. This shall be further covered by 1½" mortar for water proofing. The manholes of the trench shall be left open till cable is pulled in and positioned. Thereafter the trench shall be covered with RCC slabs and mortar. The trench inside the building shall be covered with mild steel, ¼" thick checkered plates. The manholes covers outside the building shall be, of cast iron water proof type of the size of the openings indicated on the drawing. The covers for the inside trench however shall be of 1/4" thick checkered plates. The contractor shall arrange to provide for a water tight entry of the cables where these enter the building. This shall be done by the use of cement concrete pipes provided on for each cable in a reverse slope and with the bitumen




23.5 Laying Underground Cable The size of the trench to be excavated shall be 2-9" in depth and 1"6 width for each cable to be laid. Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench, width of the trench to be increased by 6" for each extra cable for size below 70sq. mm. and 12" for bigger sizes. The cushion of sand to be provided both above and below the cable must not be less than 4" in depth i.e. the total depth of sand shall be laid in trenches as under. After laying the cable in the trench 3" of sand shall be put over the cable. The cable than shall be lifted and placed over the sand bed and the balance 5" of sand put over it before filling. Where cable is laid in rocky situation extra thick cushioning as may be decided by the consultant shall have to be done without extra charge. Over the final layer of sand, R.C.C. slabs 4" thick and 12" x 8" in size of approved make shall be placed end to end along the whole length of the cable. As a protection from injury give indication that a power cable is laid there. The rest of the trench shall be filled up with earth which will to lame in layers of 6" each. In excavating a trench as direct a route as possible must be taken and will be decided by the Architect. Where it is necessary to divert the cable, the radius of the bend may not be less than twice the diameter of the cable drum or 20 times the diameter of the cable whichever is greater. Where trenches are left open overnight and where roads are being cut in the day or night the contractor shall exhibit suitable danger signals, such as banners, red flags & red lamps at his own cost. If any damage is done, to the existing cables etc, the cost of making good such damages or entire replacement shall be recovered from the contractor. Road crossing, if necessary, shall be filled in & repaired with cement concrete of proportions of one cement, three sand and six ballast. The size of ballast to be used shall be 1". The finishing surface shall, however, comply with the specification of the road. The roads cuts and filling shall be filled up and suitably watered and cement shall not be laid until all subsidence stops and no time shall not be laid until all subsidence stops and not time shall be lost in putting the cement concrete wet gunny bags shall be spared over it for a period of not less than three days in order to allow full setting of the cement concrete. All the trenches shall be watered and rammed properly before final dressing. The same apples to lawns public or private but here in place of cement filling some manure of good quality shall be utilized. The turf shall be carefully rammed and preserved in a convenient place preserved in a convenient place before excavation & shall be re-laid after filling up, watering and managing is completed. The road cuts shall be filled up first with mud concrete in the proportion of 1:2 i.e. one mud and 2 ballast unto 6 inches of concrete in cement shall be laid over it, but in the case of bitumen surface of the road the top dressing are to be adjusted.

24. SPECIFICATIONS FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

a). Three Phase Distribution transformer for outdoor use having transformation ratio 11000/415 volts at frequency of 50 Hz and KVA ratings as given in the bill of Quantities shall be supplied and installed by the contractor.




b). The transformer shall be manufactured, supplied and tested in accordance with FESCO requirements and in compliance with relevant BSS and IEC requirements.

c). The transformer shall be mineral oil immersed type with core and windings immersed in mineral oil. The core shall be of a laminated construction made of high grade electric steel sheet rigidly backed and free of vibrations due to frequency and stresses.

d). The windings shall be uniformly insulated, the thermal class of insulating material

shall be Class - A Test voltage shall be based on highest of the system voltage i.e. 12 KV. Power frequency voltage shall be 28 KV and impulse voltage to be 95 KV. The wave being 1/50 micro seconds.

e). The insulation to earth of the windings shall be uniform. f). The limits of temperature rise above ambient of the windings, cores and oil shall be as

under: Winding -50 ºC Core -50 ºC Oil -45 ºC

g). The transformer shall be capable of withstanding, without damage on any tapping,

under service condition, the electromagnetic forces arising under short circuit condition as determined from the symmetrical peak value of the current in the winding which shall be taken as not greater than 2.55 times the over current derived.

h). The thermal effect of a short circuit at the terminals of any winding for 2 second. i). The transformer shall be provided regulating taps. The adjusting tapping shall be +5%

+2½% normal; -2½%, -5% and -7½%. The tapping being located on the higher voltage winding.

j). Tap changing shall be affected by means of an externally operated off circuit switch

capable of being locked in position. It shall be accessible with safety. k). When tapings are used to compensate for variation of voltage, the transformer shall

be capable of operation at its rated KVA capacity on any tapping without injury. The tap changing gear shall be capable of carrying the same currents due to external short circuits.

l). The method of cooling shall be natural air the method of circulation of oil shall be by

natural thermal head. m). The primary windings shall be “Delta” connected and the secondary winding shall be

“Star” connected internally. The star point shall be brought out as neutral. The internal connections shall be clearly indicated on the nameplate together with tap changing connections. The vector group DY 11 of the transformer shall also be indicated on the nameplate.

n). The transformer tank shall be of welded construction made high grade steel plate. It

shall have either a finned external construction or tubular constructions to facilitate the natural air-cooling.

o). The tank shall be tested any leaks by any of the following methods: i). Compressed Air Test ii). Oil / Water Pressure test iii). Penetrating liquid without pressure




p). An oil conservator tank fitted with a dehydrating breather and oil level indicator shall be internally fitted to the transformer tank.

q). The complete assemble tank shall be tested to withstand without deformation or

leakage a pressure of 15 lbs/sq in (1.05 kg/sq.cm)

r). The tank finish shall be battleship color. The paint shall be highly resistance to the effects of high temperatures and shall have a long life under the normal working conditions. As a minimum it shall consists of a priming coat and two finish coats applied after compete de-rusting and degreasing of the tank. The thickness of the paint shall not be less than 0.12mm.

s). The oil level indicator shall be visual glass type with minimum oil level marking at 30

ºC and with two additional marks “Empty” and “Full” to be provided. These corresponding to the upper and lower temperatures for which the transformer is required to operate on site.

t). HV / LV bushing for HV/LV Cables, Terminations from Top bottom etc. as per site

conditions, shall be provided Arrangement for adequate solidly grounding the natural shall be made.

u). The following routine tests shall be carried out on the transformers in the presence of

the Engineer. i). Temperature rise Test ii). Impedance Test iii). Ratio and Phase angle test at one standard load. iv). Dielectric Test of law Frequency.

v). A certified copy of a complete type tests carried out on an identical transformer shall

accompany the transformer, failing which the Contractor shall make arrangements to carry out these tests in the presence of Engineer without any extra expenses to the Employer.

w). The following fittings shall be provided with each transformer:

i). Rating Plate ii). Terminal Marking Plate iii). Lifting Lugs iv). Earthling Terminals for Tank v). Oil filling hole and Plug vi). Oil level indicator vii). Drain valve with built-in sampling device viii). Conservator ix). Air Vent x). Dehydrating Breather xi). Dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator xii). Other mal function of transformer. xiii). Steel Rollers with rolling direction parallel to the longer side.

x). The rating plate shall carry the following information’s

i) Manufacture’s Name ii) Manufacture’s Serial Number iii) Year of Manufacture iv) Employer’s Identification Mark v) Rate KVA vi) No of Phases vii) Frequency




viii) Rated Voltage at no lead (Higher / Lower Voltage) ix) Percent Impedance Voltage x) Rated current (Higher / Lower Voltage) xi) Winding connections and phase displacement symbol of vector diagram xii) Type of cooling xiii) Total weight of the transformer xiv) Total quantities and weight of the oil xv) Weight of core and winding assembly

y). The terminal marking plate shall carry the following information:

i) Vector Group Symbol ii) Winding connection of high voltage and low voltage sides iii) Tapping with subscripts iv) Voltage ratios at various tapings the lower voltage being kept constant v) Rated current (Higher / Lower Voltage)

Letters “ABC” shall be used for the high voltage side and “abc” shall be used for low voltage site.

z). The transformers of the ratings as given in the Bill of Quantities shall be supplied,

tested, installed & commissioned under this contract and shall be completed in every respect with first fillings of dehydrated mineral oil complying FESCO requirements.

25. SCOPE

EARTHING

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and commissioning of all material and services of the complete Earthing system as specified herein, as shown on the Tender Drawings and given in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and co-ordinate at

Site with other services for exact route, location and position of the electrical lines and equipment.

The Earthing system shall also comply with the General Specification for Electrical Works

and with other relevant provisions of the Tender Documents.

a) General

The earthing system consists of earth electrodes, earthing leads, earth connecting points, earth continuity conductors and all accessories necessary for the satisfactory operation of the associated electrical system.

b) Applicable Standards/Codes

The latest editions of following standards / codes shall be applicable for the materials specified within the scope of this section:

BS 951 - Earthing clamps CP 1013 - Earthing BS 2874 - Nuts, bolts, washers, screws and rivets fixing for use on copper BS 1433 - Hard drawn bare copper conductor for earthing BS 6346 - PVC insulated cables.




c) Material

Earth Electrode and Plate Type The plate type earth electrode shall comprise a 600 x 600 x 3mm electrolytic copper

plate. The surface of the plate shall be tinned for protection. The plate shall have four terminals for connecting the earthing leads. Nuts bolts and washers shall be either of brass or tinned copper. A 50mm dia. G.I. pipe shall be provided from inspection chamber to earth plate for watering purpose. This pipe shall have 10mm dia. holes at 500mm centre to centre all along the length.

At the ground level an inspection chamber with cast iron cover shall be constructed

having dimensions as shown on the drawings. The inspection chamber shall have a cover supported on angle iron frame. The cover shall be hinged type, as approved by the Engineer and shall finish flush with the ground level.

Earthing Lead

The earthing lead shall connect the earth electrode to earth connecting point or equipment in the building. It shall be of round hard drawn bare electrolytic copper of size shown on the drawings. The cost of earthing leads deemed to have been included in the price of earth electrode and no separate payment shall be made for it.

Earth Continuity Conductor

Earth continuity conductor (ECC) shall be hard drawn bare copper wire or single core PVC insulated copper conductor cable of sizes indicated on the drawings. All thimbles, lugs, sockets, nuts, washers & other accessories necessary for the complete installation of ECC shall be provided by the Contractor without any extra cost.

The specifications for single core PVC insulated cables used as ECC shall be same

as those given in section "LT Cables" of the technical specifications. PVC insulated cables when used as ECC shall be green or green/ yellow.

Earth Connecting Point

Earth connecting points shall comprise tinned copper bar, rectangular in shape, having dimensions of 300 x 50 x 6 mm. At least six terminals for connection shall be arranged on the bar, which can be increased or decreased as required by the Engineer.

The terminals shall have brass or tinned copper bolts, nuts and washers for

protection against corrosion. Two holes shall be provided off centre of the copper bar for fixing to the wall by means of 10 mm dia. nut and bolt and shall be insulated by means of rubber gaskets/washers.

26. INSTALLATION General

Complete earthing systems as shown on the drawing shall be installed by the Contractor. The earthing system shall give earth resistance, including the resistance of soil, earth leads and ECC equal to or less than one ohm.

At all connections of earth continuity conductor to LT switchboard, LT distribution Board

or any other metallic body, proper size copper or brass sockets, thimbles or lugs shall be used to which the copper wire shall be connected by copper brazing. The soldering of




copper wire at joints or terminations shall not be allowed. All tee-off connections shall be by copper brazing using suitable socket and clamps. After brazing, the jointed surface shall be protected by oxide inhibiting compound of low electrical resistance. For connections to metallic body, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned before bolting the lug or socket.

The earth continuity conductor shall in general run in cable trench or in conduits/pipes as

shown on the drawings. For under floor runs, these shall be installed in pipe/conduit of appropriate sizes. Where laid along underground cables, these shall be laid directly underground in unpaved areas and in pipes under paved areas.

26.1 Earth Electrode and Plate Type

The electrode plate shall be installed at a minimum depth of 5 meters from finished ground level or 1 meter below permanent water level whichever is less. The minimum horizontal distance between earth electrodes shall be 3 meters. Proper mixture of lime and charcoal shall be made and buried along with the copper plate in the ground to increase the soil conductivity. The electrode shall be installed as per details shown on the drawings. The inspection chambers shall be constructed at locations approved by the Engineer.

In case the soil conditions at site permit, this type of earth electrode may be installed by hammering the electrode in soil, until the top of the pipe is about 300 mm below the proposed finished ground level. If hammering down of pipe is not possible due to site conditions, a pit shall be first excavated in bare ground up to the required depth and electrode shall be installed upright in the pit. The excavated pit shall be backfilled in layers of 500 mm, each layer tamped and compacted.

26.2 Earth Continuity Conductor

The earth continuity conductor of sizes shown on the drawing shall be installed all along the cable runs and connected to the earthing bar/terminals provided in equipment. The body of all switchboards shall also be connected to earth by specified size of ECC. All other metal work shall also be connected to earth by specified size of ECC.

At any joint or terminations, the ECC shall be connected using proper accessories. No connection shall be made by twisting of earth conductors.

26.3 Earth Connecting Point

The earth connecting point shall be installed at locations shown on the drawings. It shall be fixed on wall surface by means of brass screws with nuts, washers and other insulating material as instructed by the Engineer.

27. ELECTRICAL SERVICE CONNECTION It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to give all notices to the power supply authority

for provision of the Electrical load required as a result of this work and to seek quotation for the installation, furnishing & connection of the required electrical load complete in electric meter and all respect. The principal will make the payment of quotation.

When the installation is complete, the contractor shall intimate the power supply authority

and make such tests as required by them to demonstrate conformance with their regulation prior to their connection to the installation. The extent of work herein specified represents the minimum requirements and the extent of work shall be extended as required to include as no increase in cost compliance & fulfillment of the requirements of the local power supply authority for an installation of this type.




If inspection by the Government constituted body is to be carried out, the contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the same. If any fee is paid for such inspection the same shall be reimbursed to the contractor at actual upon presentation of payment receipts.

BBIIDDDDIINNGG DDRRAAWWIINNGGSS